JP7309224B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
a first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations;
a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific variation after the plurality of variations starts, and
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of pending prizes won before the predetermined image is displayed,
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold that has won during the plurality of variations, and may or may not win after the variation,
The multiple fluctuations are executed after the winning game,
The predetermined image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the winning game regardless of whether the lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation is a win or a loss, and the lottery for the specific fluctuation is displayed. does not indicate whether the result is a hit or a miss,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the details of the second big winning device. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 10 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table; FIG. 10 is a second diagram for explaining a hit type determination table; It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol hit determination table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big winning a prize opening pattern determination table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit determination process. It is the first flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the second flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. 10 is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of a time saving counter. 10 is a first flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2. FIG. 10 is a second flowchart of special electric accessary product processing 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member control processing; 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a flow chart of end processing of fluctuation production. It is a flow chart of ending effect pattern determination processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a time saving production|presentation scenario determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of a time saving production|presentation scenario. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of expected effects of V; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game production at the time of special figure 2 winning. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variation production at the time of special figure 2 lottery. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the countdown production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the one-time production|presentation of crying. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an advancing direction movement of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combined effect of the first movable accessory 14 and an image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a rotation operation of the first movable accessory 14; 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the rotation motion of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect of the first and second movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination performance of the first and second movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a fluctuating timing change effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of variation timing change effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of variation timing change effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pattern direction change production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pattern direction change production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pattern direction change production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character-object symbol cooperation production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character-object symbol cooperation production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character-object symbol cooperation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image symbol cooperation effect A; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific image design cooperation production|presentation B. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image symbol cooperation effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design mode change production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design mode change production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation area|region production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation area production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation area|region production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an operation prompting effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation prompting effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation prompting effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning/losing notification effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning/losing notification effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning/losing notification effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an operation section image display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an operation section image display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an operation section image display effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance production|presentation A of the production|presentation button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance production|presentation B of the production|presentation button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the appearance disappearance production|presentation C of the production|presentation button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the winning notification production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline inside/outside effect A of a stereoscopic image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline inside/outside effect B of a stereoscopic image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline inside/outside effect C of a stereoscopic image; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display block|prevention effect|action A of effect|presentation mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display prevention|blocking production|presentation B of production|presentation mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection display block|prevention effect|action C of effect|presentation mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a game ball image effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a game ball image effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a game ball image effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combination effect A of movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combination effect B of movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combination effect C of movable accessories; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a first aspect of a first movable accessory of another embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable role|part of other embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a third aspect of the first movable accessory of another embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable accessory of another embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds-linked image display effect A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a number-of-holds-linked image display effect B; It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds linked image display effect C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds linked image display effect D. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds change interlocking production A. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds change interlocking production B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds change interlocking production C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the number-of-holds change interlocking production D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suspended icon movement change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suspended icon movement change effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suspended icon movement change effect C; It is the figure which illustrated the pending|holding icon movement change production D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a medium-variation mode start display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a medium-variation mode start display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a medium-variation mode start display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a medium-variation mode start display effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a background image switching effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a background image switching effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image blur effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image blur effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image blur effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image blur effect D; It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification production|presentation A. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification production|presentation B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification production|presentation C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification production|presentation D. It is the figure which illustrated the decorative design display area production|presentation A. It is the figure which illustrated the decorative design display area production|presentation B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the decorative design display area production|presentation C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the decorative design display area production|presentation D. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image effect A for suspension; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image effect B for suspension; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image effect C corresponding to suspension; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an image effect D corresponding to suspension; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect D; It is the figure which illustrated the disappearance effect|action A of the said pending|holding icon. It is the figure which illustrated the disappearance production|presentation B of the said pending|holding icon. It is the figure which illustrated the disappearance effect|action C of the said pending|holding icon. It is the figure which illustrated the disappearance effect|action D of the said pending|holding icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon image display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon image display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon image display effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation state suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation state suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation state suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation state suggestion effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect D; It is the figure which illustrated the winning-losing notification possible production|presentation A. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the winning-losing notification possible production|presentation B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the winning-losing notification possibility production|presentation C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the winning-losing notification possible production|presentation D. FIG. 11 is a diagram exemplifying a specific target display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific target display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a specific target display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific target display effect D; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a multiple-personal-object combination production A; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a multiple role object combination effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a multi-personal object combination effect C; It is the figure which illustrated the multiple-parts combination production|presentation D. It is the figure which illustrated win-lose notification tilt effect A. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated win-lose notification tilt effect B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification tilt effect C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the win-lose notification tilt effect D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect D; It is the figure which illustrated the starting entrance light emission production|presentation A. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the starting entrance light emission production|presentation B. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the starting mouth light emission production|presentation C. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the starting mouth light emission production|presentation D.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the details of the second big winning device 36. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 , and the game board 2 is provided inside the game machine frame 50 .
is installed. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a select button 68 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53,
The game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The performance button 63 is a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61
, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is
An operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing down the entire sword member 64 and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, and a first
Board movable body 14, second board movable body 15, illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, fixed winning device (navel) 19, normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening).
27, an outlet 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area where the game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down.
A plurality of game nails are protruded for guiding game balls. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 1
5, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are configured to be capable of emitting light in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a pending digested image display area in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons. Reserved digest image 9C
is an image representing the suspension, and is also called the suspension icon or variable icon. The pending icon and the pending icon are collectively referred to simply as the pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. In the middle pattern display area, there are 8 middle production patterns
C is displayed. A right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. Production pattern 8L,
8C and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big win and small win lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the result of the jackpot and small win lottery by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. In addition, when a small win is won, the production pattern may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance number such as "135", or the production pattern may be stopped and displayed at a random number. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. After that, the production patterns 8L, 8C,
The production to display 8R is "variation production of production pattern", or simply "variation production""variationdisplay"
Also called It should be noted that, in this decorative design variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special design starts to change until it is fixed and stopped (also called the special design variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). . Therefore, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they are fixed and stopped, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big winning performance performed in parallel with the big winning game (second special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. Second to do
and a reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the suspended digested image 9C, the first special figure suspension or the second special figure suspension It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later).

On the left side and the right side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided.
(also referred to as the first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semi-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( advance) and stop at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7 .

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. When the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position, the image display device 7
cover part of

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . Warp part 1
2 is provided with an entrance portion through which game balls flow in and an exit portion through which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out to the stage portion 11 from the exit portion.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 , and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18 . That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 , and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18 . The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating light from the LEDs from the end surface. illumination panel 1
8 is configured to be able to display several types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the direction and color of light emitted from the LEDs.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3,
A first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first ball entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20 is provided. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for acquisition of a special symbol per random number or the like and determination of a big hit.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 that can move back and forth, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is the electric tuning solenoid 2
4. A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state (advanced state). It is sufficient for the electric tube 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than in the closed state (retracted state). It may be possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 .

A first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3 , and a second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the image display device 7 in the game area 3 .
are arranged on the left side of each, and each of them is configured so that a game ball can pass through. Gate (1st
Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 and the second gate 29) serves as a trigger for a normal symbol lottery that determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is to be opened. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 triggers acquisition of random numbers per normal symbol and determination of hit.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether it is a big hit or not by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit" or "small hit". The lottery result of this "big win" and "small win" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later. After a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance as a "hit". ” is the process of determining whether or not the win is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern display device 42, which will be described later, is a variable display of the normal pattern. is carried out, and when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lighted or extinguished) to inform the player of the lottery result.

A first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the game area 3 and has a first big winning port (first special winning port) 30. there is The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 . A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first big winning gate 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning gate (second special winning gate) 35 I have. The second big winning hole 35 has an opening/closing member (second special winning hole opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or permits reception of game balls by a shutter-type opening/closing operation. Opening/closing member 3
7 is driven by the second big winning opening solenoid 38 . A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The second big prize winning device 36 has inside a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a,
A non-V area (non-specific area) 70 , a non-V area sensor 70 a , a second prize winning opening sensor 35 a , a V opening/closing member 71 , and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 are provided. V area (specific area)
39 and a non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas inside the second big winning device 36 through which game balls that have passed through the second big winning hole 35 can pass. The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole 35 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . V opening/closing member solenoid 73
drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). The first state (rotational state) for allocating to the area 39
When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is positioned at the origin and placed in the non-V area 7.
It becomes the second state (stopped state) in which it is assigned to 0. In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state).

FIG. 2A shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) in which passage of the game ball to the V region 39 is permitted. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 passes through the second big winning hole sensor 35a and then passes through the V area 39 (see FIG. 2A). A route). The route of this game ball is called "first route". FIG. 2(B) shows
It shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents passage of the game ball to the V region 39 . When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second large winning opening 35 passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a, rolls on the upper surface of the V opening/closing member 71, and is not V-shaped. It passes through area 70 (route B in FIG. 2(B)). This game ball route is called a "second route". In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 serves as a trigger for execution of a jackpot game (second special game) described later. In other words, the winning lottery for the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V region 39 successfully. The jackpot won by lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is also called "1st kind jackpot", and the jackpot won by passing the game ball to the V area 39 is also called "2nd kind jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1 , two normal winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . It should be noted that the number of normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side.
There is. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, "
It's called right-handed. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim to pass the second gate 29 and win a prize to the first start port 20 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, by hitting to the right, pass through the first gate 28, the second starting port 21,
It is configured so that the player can aim to win the first big prize hole 30 and the second big prize hole 35. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a,
The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b and the normal figure reservation indicator 44 are included. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a.
The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. Normal pattern holding display 44 is normal pattern display 42 operation holding (normal pattern holding)
display the number of memories of The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , Jackpot small prize lottery) results are reported. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). A jackpot game (second special game) to open is performed. In addition, when the stop pattern is a special pattern (small winning pattern) of a predetermined small winning stop mode, an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped small winning pattern (type of winning small winning) is used. A small winning game (first special game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), "○○●●○○●●"
(○: lights up, ●: lights out). Also, if you win a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described later), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up like "●●●●○○●●". Display the small winning pattern. Also, if it is a loss, "●●●●●●●○"
In this way, only the rightmost LED lights up to display a lost pattern. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed,
The variable display (variable display) of the special design is performed over a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be employed as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted display in a specific mode). For example, the aspect of variable display is all LE
D may flash all at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), various random number values (numerical information ) is once stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four first special figure reservation storage areas 85a and a second special figure reservation storage area. 8
5b is one. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine the special symbol per random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game (jackpot game or small prize game), the right of the jackpot and small prize lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 . After the normal symbol display 42 variably displays (variable display) the normal symbols,
The result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 is informed by the stop display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning pattern), assistance to open the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. A game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if the lottery result is a win, the first and second Ls from the left are displayed as "○○●" (○: lit, ●: unlit).
The normal hit pattern with the ED lit is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, "●●○
”, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The aspect of the variable display is
As long as each LED does not display a stop display (lighting display in a specific mode), the lighting mode is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used. For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a general map reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible.
Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number per normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LED by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and an audio control board 106 ( 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to game profits such as a big win and small win lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80,
The game progress of the game machine 1 is controlled according to the program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later.
The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. Game control microcomputer 81
, transmits and receives data to and from other boards or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting sensor 20a, the second starting sensor 21a, and the first gate sensor 28a.
, 2nd gate sensor 29a, 1st big winning slot sensor 30a, 2nd big winning slot sensor 35a, V
Area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. As the solenoids connected via the relay board 88, the electric tuning solenoid 24
, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The first gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28 . The second gate sensor 29 a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a detects the non-V area 7 inside the second big winning hole 35 .
0 to detect a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning opening sensor 27a is
It is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning hole 27.例文帳に追加The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the second big prize opening 35 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general pattern reservation. Display 4
Display control for 4 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 .
The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Ball rental device 13
0 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Launcher 112 is
It includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 5 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 .
The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91
It includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. Production control microcomputer 91
transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Sub control board 9
0 is connected to the image control board 100 , the sound control board 106 , the lamp control board 107 and the relay board 108 via the input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items,
Image data such as graphics, characters, numbers and symbols (including effect patterns) and background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. CPU
102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . Production control microcomputer 9
1 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 1
06 may be implemented with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the image control board 10
The sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of 0.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107 to control them. The production control microcomputer 91
Based on the command received from the main control board 80, lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (including the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) are turned on via the lamp control board 107. Take control. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5
Light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamp is created, and the light emission of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the light emission pattern data. do. A sub-control board 90 is used to create light emission pattern data.
The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of is used. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls these movable accessories according to the motion pattern data. control behavior. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessory based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 has been pressed. When the production button 63 is pressed, the production button detection switch 6
3 a outputs a switch signal to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108 . The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute a light emitting effect via the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7B shows the sub-R
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the AM 94; FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) contains a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. , a normal symbol winning type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a big winning opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands to be output from the main control section to the sub-control section are set in the main control main processing (described later). Command, Round designation command, Ending command, Game state designation command, V pass command, Pre-judgment command, Waiting for customers command, Hold number of balls command, Normal pattern fluctuation start command, Normal pattern fluctuation stop command, Normal pattern opening command, Normal Design ending command etc. are set. Flag set area 8
4b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main processing (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, small hit flag, small hit end flag, V flag, time saving A flag, a V opening/closing member operation flag, etc. are set. Counter set field 84c is the field where the counter which is used in main control main processing (after-mentioned) is set, random number counter, round counter, 1st time saving counter, 2nd time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set in a special action process (FIG. 20) to be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, a fourth memory area for storing
A storage area is provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first second special figure reservation. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per normal pattern corresponding to the first general pattern reservation. Note that the main RAM 84 contains
In addition to the above areas, there are provided a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decoration movable body 15 are set, and the like.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) contains a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time-saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a prefetch effect pattern determination table T55. is stored. These determination tables are sub-control main processing executed by the production control microcomputer 91 (
later), it is referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. . The command storage area 94a is an area (
input buffer), and the variable start command, variable stop command, opening command,
Round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passing command, pre-determination command, customer waiting standby command, number of held balls command, normal design fluctuation start command, normal design fluctuation stop command, normal design opening command, normal design ending Commands are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 are set in the sub-control main process (described later). Yes, variable production start command, variable production end command, opening production start command, round production start command, ending production start command, normal design fluctuation production start command, normal design fluctuation production end command, normal design opening production start command, normal design An ending effect start command and the like are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is
It is an area where the counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, the normal figure pending effect counter, the first short time effect counter , a second time reduction effect counter, etc. are set. The mode status set area 94e is set with a mode status (described later) that indicates the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (whether it is a time saving state or a non-time saving state, which will be described later).

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Figure 8 (A
) indicates a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG.
) indicates a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control section side. The game control microcomputer 81 provides "random number per special symbol", "random number per special symbol type", "reach random number", "variation pattern random number", "random number per normal symbol" and "type per normal symbol". A random number” is obtained at timings described later. "Special symbol winning random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big winning small winning lottery) to determine whether it is a big win or a small win, and takes a value in the range of 0-65535. The "special symbol per type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (hit type determination) of the type of winning big win or small win, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit and small win determination is a loss, and is in the range of 0 to 127. takes the value of Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit. It should be noted that the production pattern that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state is displayed on the display screen 7
It may be displayed as if it is swaying within a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127.
"Normal symbol winning random number" is a random number used in a winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0-255. "
Normal symbol type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (hit type determination) of the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. ``Random number per special symbol'', ``Random number per special symbol type'', ``Reach random number'', and ``Variation pattern random number'' are acquired based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). be done. The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is Second special figure reservation storage area 85b
stored in "Random number per normal symbol" and "Random number per normal symbol type" are gates (first
obtained based on passage through gate 28 or second gate 29). The acquired normal per symbol random number value and normal per symbol type random number value are stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The production control microcomputer 91 has a "fluctuation production pattern random number" and a "time reduction production scenario random number".
, and the “read-ahead effect random number” are acquired at the timing described later. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is a random number used for determining the fluctuation effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Time saving effect scenario random number” is a random number used to determine the change scenario of the remaining number of times of time saving displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state (remaining number of times of displaying time saving), and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. "Look-ahead production random number" is
It is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "fluctuation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a fluctuation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "time saving effect scenario random number" is acquired based on the fact that the ending command is output from the main control section side to the sub control section side. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the ready-to-win determination table T2. FIG. 9(A) shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9(B) shows a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a special symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 65535) in the main control main process (described later). is a table referred to in order to determine which one of . In FIG. 9 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the random number per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined to be a "big hit", and the random number per special symbol is " 10000 to 10500", it is determined as a "small hit", and when the special symbol random number is a number other than the above from 0 to 65535, it is determined as a "losing". . Also, in the lottery of the second special design (special design 2), the random number per special design is "
0 to 210”, it is determined as a “jackpot”, and the random number per special symbol is “1000”.
0 to 16500”, it is determined as a “small hit”, and the random number per special symbol is 0 to 6.
It is indicated that, out of 5535, values other than the above are judged to be “losing”.

Reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), the reach random number (any of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "with reach" or "
It is a table referred to in order to determine whether it corresponds to "no reach". In FIG. 9 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is reach, and the reach random number is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Based on FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the special figure 2 lottery. The special symbol per type determination table T3 is a game control microcomputer 81
is in the main control main process (described later), the acquired special symbol type random number (0 to 127
It is a table referred to in order to determine "jackpot type" or "minor hit type" and "type of special symbol" according to any of). In FIG. 10, when "jackpot winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in "non-time saving state", the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 1
5", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A", and the special figure 1 stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is "time saving Design 1
” is determined. When the special symbol per type random number value is "16 to 63", the big hit type is determined as "15R time saving 99 times big hit B", and the special figure 1 stop design is determined as "time saving design 2". If the special symbol type random value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is "1
5R time-saving 5-times jackpot A" is determined, and the special figure 1 stop design is determined as "time-saving design 3".
On the other hand, if you win a "small hit" in the lottery of special figure 1 in "non-time saving state",
Regardless of the special symbol per type random number (any of 0 to 127), the small hit type is determined to be "16R normal small hit A (substantially 5R/V passage virtually impossible)", special figure 1 stop design is determined as "time saving no small winning pattern 1".

When "jackpot winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in "time saving state", if the type random number per special pattern is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is determined as "15R time saving 99 times jackpot C". , The special figure 1 stop pattern is determined to be "time saving pattern 4". When the special symbol type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "15R time saving 5 times big hit B", and the special figure 1 stop design is determined as "time saving pattern 5". On the other hand, if you win a "small hit" in the special drawing 1 lottery in "time saving state", regardless of the type random number per special symbol (any of 0 to 127), the small hit type is " 16R normal small hit B (actually 5
RV passage is virtually impossible)”, and the special figure 1 stop pattern is determined as “no time saving small winning pattern 2”.

In FIG. 11, when "jackpot winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "non-time saving state", if the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 5 times jackpot C", and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined as the "time saving symbol 6". The type random value per special symbol is "
64 to 95”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time-saving 15 times jackpot A”,
The special figure 2 stop pattern is determined as "time saving pattern 7". The type random number per special symbol is "96 to 1
27”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time saving 99 times jackpot D”, and special figure 2
The stop pattern is determined to be "time saving pattern 8". On the other hand, when "small win" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "non-time saving state", if the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small Hit A (substantially 15R/V can be passed)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined as "time saving small winning symbol 1" on the second special symbol display device 41b. If the type random number value per special symbol is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R short time 99 times small hit A (real 15R/V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop design is "short time It is determined that there is a small hit pattern 2”.

When "jackpot winning" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "time saving state", if the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D
”, and the special figure 2 stop pattern is determined to be “time saving pattern 9”. When the special symbol per type random number value is "80 to 95", the big hit type is determined as "15R time saving 15 times big hit B", and the special figure 2 stop design is determined as "time saving design 10". The type random value per special symbol is "
96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", and the special figure 2 stop pattern is determined as "time saving pattern 11". On the other hand, when "small winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "time saving state", the type random number per special symbol is "0 to 63"
In the case of , the small hit type is determined to be "16R short time 5 times small hit B (substantially 15R/V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop pattern is determined to be "short time with small hit pattern 3". If the type random number value per special symbol is "64 to 95", the small hit type is "16R time saving 10 times small hit (
Substantially 15R/V can be passed)”, and the special figure 2 stop design is determined as “time saving and small winning design 4”. If the type random number value per special pattern is "96 to 111", the small hit type is determined as "16R short time 15 times small hit (substantially 15R/V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop design is "short time available It is determined as a small hit pattern 5”. The type random number per special symbol is "112 to 12
In the case of 7", the small hit type is determined as "16R time saving 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R/V passable)", and the special figure 2 stop design is determined as "time saving small hit design 6". . In addition, by referring to the special symbol per type determination table T3, in addition to the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol and special figure 2 stop symbol), the special game "opening (OP) command”, “Round designation command”, and “Ending (ED) command” can also be specified. Specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired, table referred to in order to determine the variation pattern is. In FIG. 12, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the special symbol per determination table T1,
It shows that when the fluctuation pattern random number is "111 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P2". Also, for example, winning the first start port 20 in a non-time saving state,
It is determined as "losing" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and the reach determination table T
2 is determined to be "no reach", and if the number of held balls is "1 to 2", regardless of the variation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127), the variation pattern is determined to be "P6". It is shown that Also, for example, when the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number (any of 0 to 127 ), and the variation pattern is determined to be “P17”. As shown in FIG. 12, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). It is also determined whether or not there is a quasi-ream in the event of a super-reach.

FIG. 13(A) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13(B) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. 13(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "losing". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not it applies. In FIG. 13(A), in both the "non-working time saving state" and the "working time saving state", the normal pattern (normal pattern)
In the lottery, if the random number per normal symbol is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and if the random number per normal symbol is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", " It is shown that it is determined to be "losing".

Normal per symbol type determination table T6, game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), according to normal per symbol type random number value (any one of 0 to 65535), "hit type" and " It is a table referred to in order to determine the type of normal symbol. In FIG. 13 (B), when winning in the normal drawing lottery in "non-time saving state", if the type random number per normal pattern is "0 to 30", the hit type is determined as "long open 1" Then, the stop pattern of the normal pattern (the stop pattern of the normal pattern) that is stop-displayed on the normal pattern display 42 is determined as the "win pattern 1". When the normal per pattern type random number value is "100 to 170", the per type is determined as "short open 1", and the normal per pattern stop pattern is determined as "per pattern 2". If the type random number per normal pattern is a number other than the above from 0 to 65535, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal pattern stop pattern is determined to be "hit pattern 3". It is On the other hand, if you win in the normal lottery lottery in the "short time state", the hit type is determined as "long open 2" regardless of the type random number per normal pattern (any of 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal pattern stop pattern is determined to be "hit pattern 4". Incidentally, by referring to the normal symbol type determination table T6, it is possible to specify the "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in order to determine the variation time of the normal pattern according to the lottery result of the normal pattern and the winning type in the main control main process (described later). is. In FIG. 13 (C), for example, the lottery result of the normal pattern in the non-time saving state is "hit", and when the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined as "30 seconds" It is shown that Further, for example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern in the time saving state is "losing", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the normal pattern stop pattern (normal pattern stop pattern data) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 1", the release pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "open pattern 11", and for example, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 4", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 14". In FIG. 14B, each open pattern 1
The contents of 1-14 are shown. In the opening pattern 11, the electric tube 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second.
Open patterns 11 and 12 have an opening (OP) time of 0.01 second and an open time of 0.02.
second, the electric tube 22 is opened once with an ending (ED) time of 0.01 second. In the opening pattern 14, the opening (OP) time is 0.01 seconds, the opening time is 3 seconds, and the ending (
ED) The electric tube 22 is opened once for 0.01 seconds. However, this electric tube 22
is closed even if the opening time remains, when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (regular number of prizes won, max. 2).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening pattern determination table T9 correspond to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the prize winning opening 35 . Figure 15 (A
), the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "1
6H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", "32H", or "3
3H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or "17H", open. The pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and the special figure stop design data is "24H", "2
5H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 15B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 21-23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) with the number of opening times of 1 and the opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 15th Rs. In the opening pattern 22, after opening (OP) for 4 seconds, in the 1R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and opened for 1.6 seconds.
is opened, and in the 2nd to 6th R, the first big winning port 30 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening 1 time and the opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening), and the number of times of opening is 1 time in the 7th to 16th R. The opening (short opening) of the first big prize winning opening 30 is performed for 0.1 seconds. open pattern 23
Then, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 second, in the 1Rth, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once with an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and in the 2nd to 16th R, the opening number is 1.
The opening (long opening) of the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. however,
The opening of the first big prize-winning port 30 and the second big prize-winning port 35 is the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (
If there is a prescribed number of winnings (maximum 9), it will be closed even if the opening time remains.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, "jackpots" as a result of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery),
There are "small hits" and "losers". In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "small win symbol". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is made to open the first big prize hole 30 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed.
2nd special game)” is executed. When a small win is won, a "small win game (first special game)" is made to open the second big winning port 35 once in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped special symbol (kind of the small win). is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big winning hole 35 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small win. A "jackpot game (second special game)" to be opened is executed. Incidentally, the jackpot game that is executed based on the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot election is also referred to as "1 type jackpot game". In addition, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also referred to as "second type jackpot game". Moreover, a big hit game and a small hit game are also called a "special game." This special game may include a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

A jackpot game is a multiple round game (unit open game) that opens the first big winning hole 30
, an opening (OP) before the start of the first round game, and an ending (ED) after the end of the final round game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. Closing time of the first big winning port 30 between round games (interval time)
is included in the open round game before its closure. The small winning game includes a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and an ending (closing) after the small winning opening game ends. after interval)
and includes

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, as the jackpot types, “15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E”, “15R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B”, “15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to
D" is set. These jackpots are all 15R over the first big winning mouth 3
After executing a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) to open 0, it is a jackpot that controls the game state to "time saving state and high base state" described later. On the other hand, these hits are different in the number of times of time saving at which the “time saving state and high base state” after the jackpot game ends. Here, the "number of times of time saving" is the number of variable display (variable display) of special symbols that can be executed in the "time saving state and high base state" after the big win game, and is set in advance for each big win type. For example, in “15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E”, the number of time saving times is 99 times, and “1
In the 5R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B", the number of time saving times is 15 times. It should be noted that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the number of times of time saving is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, as the types of small hits, "16R normal small hits A, B", "16R short time 5 times small hits A, B", "16R short time 10 times small hits", "16
R time-saving 15 times small hit”, “16R time-saving 99 times small hit A, B” are set. In these small winnings, first, a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passage), a big winning game (2 kinds of big winning games) is executed. Therefore, in the small winning game, the opening of the second big winning hole 35 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1st round, and the big winning game of opening the first big winning hole 30 over 15Rs is executed after passing V. It corresponds to the 2nd R to the 16th R. When there is no V passage in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. Here, "16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, “16R time saving 5 times small hit”, “16R time saving 10 times small hit”, “16R time saving 15 times small hit”, “16R time saving 99 times small hit” are small hits that can pass through V. . Whether or not the V passage during the small winning game is possible can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the small wins described above, the second big winning hole 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small win game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small winning game differs according to the small winning type. Specifically, "16R normal small hit" (
Open pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "16R short time 5 times small hit",
"16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" (open pattern 23) has an opening time of 0.01 second. The reason why the opening time of the small winning game differs depending on the type of small winning is that the opening timing of the second big winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening/closing member 71 which moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening is changed. Because. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after opening for 0.01 seconds when the small winning game is started. In the opening pattern 22, the second large winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, so that the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small win", it is substantially impossible to pass the V during the small win game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning port 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both openings continue for 1.6 seconds, resulting in the second big winning. 2 from closure of mouth 35
. After 4 seconds, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, "16R short time 5 times small hit",
In the "16R time-saving 10 times small hit", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", V passage during the small winning game is possible.

"16R time saving 5 times small hit", "16R time saving 10 times small hit", "16R time saving 15 times small hit", "16R time saving 99 times small hit" are the big hits when the jackpot game is executed after the small winning game It is a hit to control the game state after the game to "time saving state and high base state" described later. “16R time saving 5 times small hit”, “16R time saving 10 times small hit”, “16R time saving 15 times small hit”, “16R time saving 99 times small hit” are “time saving state and high base state”
The number of time reductions in each is different. For example, in the "16R time saving 10 times small hit", the number of time saving times is 10 times, and in the "16R time saving 15 times small win", the time saving number of times is 15 times. On the other hand, "16R normal small hit" is a hit to control the game state to "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the big win game when the big win game is executed. However, "16
Since "R normal small win" is a small win in which V passage is substantially impossible, a big win game is almost never executed.

In addition, the small hits in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-working time state are all "16R normal small hits" that are virtually impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, the distribution rate of the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is 50% for “16R time saving 5 times small hit”, 25% for “16R time saving 10 times small hit”, and “16R time saving 15 times small hit”. ” is 12.5%, “16R short time 99 times small win” is 12.5%, and “16R normal small win” is not included. Since the probability of winning the jackpot does not change between the special 1 lottery and the special 2 lottery, the probability of winning either the "big hit" or the "small hit where the jackpot game (2 types of jackpot game) is executed" is The special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is higher than the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the game machine 1, the game ball is hit to the right in the time saving state and the game ball to the second start port 21 in the time saving state rather than the state in which the game ball is awarded to the first start port 20 by hitting to the left in the non-time saving state. is set to be advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "hit" and "loss" as a result of a normal symbol lottery (hit lottery). In the case of "winning", the "winning design" is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 42. - 特許庁
In the case of "losing", the normal symbol display 42 stops and displays "losing". When a win is won, a "win game (ordinary game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbols stopped and displayed (type of win). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times during one round. A winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (E
D). There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long open 1", "long open 2", "short open 1", and "short open 2" are set as hit types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of game state The game control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "fluctuation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". ”. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 selects a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (
Fig. 12) is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur.
Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time shortening control for normal symbols in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non time saving state. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 has a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) defined so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is often selected in the time of the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. is used to determine the variation pattern. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time reduction control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42, compared with the case where the variation time reduction control is not executed,
A short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time for variable display of normal symbols.

Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (Fig. 13). Even if it is in a non-time saving state, "Long open 1" in the normal pattern lottery
If you win, the opening pattern of the electric chew will be "open pattern 11", and it will be a long opening time of 5 seconds, but the probability that it will be distributed to "long open 1" as a hit type is 31/655.
36 is low, and in most cases, even if you win, the opening time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds when winning, so substantially, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become That is, in the time saving state, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and when these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball frequently enters the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state".
It says. In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the game balls on hand. Note that the high base state does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, the electric chew 22 is more than when the control is not executed. is easy to open. Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A
, B”, “15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to D”, “16R time saving 99 times small hit”, “16R
The game state after the jackpot game executed by winning the "15 times short time small win", "16R 10 times short time small win", or "16R 5 times short time small win" is "short time state and high base state". be. In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times), or the jackpot is won. The game ends when the jackpot game is executed. The game state after the big win game executed by winning the "16R normal small win" is "non-time saving state and low base state".
This game state is also called "normal game state". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal game state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as "time saving state", and the "non-working time saving state and low base state" is simply referred to as "non working time saving state".

In the high-base state (time-saving state), the game can be progressed advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by striking to the right. Compared to the low base state (non-time saving state), the electric chew 22 is easier to open, and it is easier to win the second start port 21 than the first start port 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the first gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, left playing area 3A (Fig. 1)
The game can be progressed more advantageously by entering the game ball into. Compared to the high base state, the electric tube 22 is less likely to be opened, and the first start port 2 is more likely than the second start port 21 to win.
This is because winning to 0 is easier. For this reason, in the low base state, while allowing the game ball to pass through the second gate 29, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is hit to the left to enter the first start port 20.例文帳に追加This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), when the "long open 1" is elected by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds, so the second 2 Right-hand shot is performed in order to make the game ball enter the starting port 21.例文帳に追加After the electric chew 22 is closed, the ball is hit to the left again.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 Game control microcomputer 8 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) based on FIGS. 16 to 34
1 will be described. A counter that appears in the operation explanation of the game control microcomputer 81,
Flags, statuses, buffers, etc. are provided in the main RAM 84 . As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the program stored in the main ROM 83 to function as win/fail determination means, symbol control means, winning game execution means, game state control means, and winning type selection means. function (e.g., FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31,
See Figure 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003).
In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81
Various random number counter values (random number per special design, random number per special design, random number per type, reach random number, random number per pattern, random number per normal design, random number per normal design)
is incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generating circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4
msec cycle). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81
Update the various random number counter values shown in (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing,
It is performed both during the other period (the period from the end of main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S10
2). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103
), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V opening/closing member control processing (step S106), and V area sensor detection processing (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pending ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 . Next, game control microcomputer 8
1 stores the pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84 of the main RAM 84
Set to a. The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After the pending ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S10
9). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 is the main RAM 8
4 is output to the sub-control board 90, which is set in the command set area 84a.
After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110
). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation indicator 4 based on the number of special figure 2 reservation balls described later
3b is controlled to a display mode showing the number, and the first special figure reservation display 4 based on the number of special figure 1 reservation balls
3a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)". It is determined whether or not (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of normal design reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process proceeds to step S205
Skip to When the normal symbol reserved ball number is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the normal symbol reserved ball number (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 is the normal per symbol random number counter value (FIG. 8: label-TRND-H value), and the normal per symbol type counter value (FIG. 8: label-TRND-HS value ), and store the obtained random value group in the main RAM
Stored in the first storage area of the normal map reservation storage area 86 of 84 .

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1 (
upper limit)” (step S206). What is the number of reserved balls in special figure 2?
It is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figures 2 pending balls is "1" (step S
206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (step S2
07), special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: label-TRND-A value), the value of the type random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: label-TRND-AS value), the value of the reach random number counter ( Figure 8:
Label-TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Figure 8: label-TRN
D-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 is a special figure 2 described later.
For the pre-determination process, the obtained random number group is also temporarily stored (held) in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209)
. In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large-hit pre-determination with reference to the big-hit determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number to be referred to. When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type prior determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for prior determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs advance determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs variation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, and a reach random number value do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 is
The created pre-determination command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and this process is finished.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (
Step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of special 1 pending balls is the first
It is the number of special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S21
1: YES), this processing ends. If the number of special figure 1 pending balls is "3" or less (step S21
1: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 pending balls (step S212), special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the type random number counter per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, the value of the variation pattern random number counter get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first to the first special figure reservation storage area 85a
Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area according to the current special figure 1 pending ball number. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first special figure reservation storage area 8 for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process.
It is also temporarily stored (held) in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from 5a. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (
step S214). The special figure 1 pre-determination process is the same as the special figure 2 pre-determination process described above.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO)
, The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the normal symbol is stopped (whether or not the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). In the case of normal symbol stop display (step S5
02: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the normal symbols are not being stopped and displayed (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are fluctuating (step S503). When the normal pattern is changing (step S503: Y
ES), and the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). If the number of held balls is "0" (step S504: YES
S), and terminate this process. If the number of held balls is not "0" (step S504: NO),
The number of normal design reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0",
In step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 18), once the number of reserved balls in the normal design becomes "1", after that, in this step S505, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls in the normal design becomes "0". "become. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the starting sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is temporarily set to "1", and then special symbol waiting processing (FIG. 21) to be described later.
) in step S1404 and step S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". In addition, the decrement of the number of normal pattern reserved balls (digestion of the normal pattern reservation) is the reservation information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal pattern reservation storage area 86
is executed along with the clear processing that clears the

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 generates a normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13(A)).
is referred to and hit determination is performed (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the random value per normal symbol as the determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first normal pattern suspension) of the normal pattern suspension storage area 86 read out. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol winning random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T5 are used. For example, in the non-time saving state, the random number per normal symbol is "0"
~ In the case of "254", it is determined as "hit", and the random number per normal symbol is otherwise "2
55”, it is determined as “losing” (FIG. 13(A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal symbol type determination table T6 (Fig. 13 (B
)) is referenced to determine the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) (step S507).
Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination of the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 Reads a type random value. Then, a winning type and a normal symbol (a normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using a normal symbol winning type random value, a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and a normal symbol winning type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the type random number value per normal symbol is "0" to "30", the hit type is determined as "long open 1", and the normal symbol is determined as "per design 1". . Type random number per normal symbol is "100" to "170"
In the case of , the hit type is determined as "short open 1", and the normal design is determined as "hit design 2". If the normal symbol type random number value is other than that, the winning type is determined to be "short open 2" and the normal symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3" (FIG. 13(B)). On the other hand, in the case of "losing" in the hit determination, "losing" is set as the normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13 (
C)) is referred to select a variation pattern (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the hit type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the time saving state, in the case of "losing" in the hit determination, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (Fig. 13 (C)).
. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation start and variation time (step S509). Normal pattern fluctuation start command,
Information on normal stop design data and information on normal design fluctuation patterns are included.
After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the normal symbols and ends this process (
step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13(C)). If the variable time has not ended (step S521
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the variation display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol specified in step S507 (the winning normal symbol stop symbol or the losing normal symbol). stop symbol) (step S522)
. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of normal symbol variation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol, and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the stop time for normal symbols is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO)
, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has passed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the above (step S506) hit determination is "losing" (
Step S532: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the opening of the game (normal game), normal symbol opening A command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S53
3). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81
The opening pattern of the electronic chew 22 is selected using the normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electronic chew opening pattern determination table T8.
Here, for example, when the normal pattern is "win pattern 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal pattern is "win pattern 4", "open pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). . After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, if the electric tube 22 is in operation (step S501:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 2 pieces), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the opening time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The open time of the electric chew 22 is the open time corresponding to the open pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to inform the start of the ending of the game (normal game), so that the normal symbol ending The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S54
1). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage corresponds to the "special action status"
1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit determination, special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (step S1301,
S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special design determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1
301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1,
A jackpot game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special action status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric auditors processing 2 (small winning game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessary product process 2, a small winning game (first type special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of pending balls (special figure 2 pending) of the second starting port 21 is "0" (step S1401). special figure 2
When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, the second special figure reserved storage area 85b does not store the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If so, the process moves to step S1407. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol hit determination process (
Step S1402) and special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403)
to run. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. be done.
Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406)
. In the special figure 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". In addition, the variation start command (
Special symbol 2 variation start command) includes information on special symbol stop symbol data set in special symbol hit determination process (step S1402) and special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S
1403) contains information about the variation pattern set.

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0" (step S1401:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved) of the first starting port 20 is "0
” is determined (step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. If the number of special figures 1 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1408)
, and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409) is executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, the first special figure reservation storage area 8
If there is hold information in the second to fourth storage areas of 5a, hold images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (of the four hold images 9A, the second, third, and fourth hold images from the right) The images 9A) are each shifted one to the right. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is sent to the main RA
The command set area 84a of M84 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the special action status is set to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination process (step S1408) and special design variation It contains information about the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81, for example, turns on/off a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting.
You may judge by F. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414),
Finish this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation.

[Special symbol hit determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of special symbol hit determination processing (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). Hit determination processing of special figure 2 (step S1402) and hit determination processing of special figure 1 (step S1408) because the flow of processing is the same, it explains collectively. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 hit determination process, the special symbol per random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 hit determination process, the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (
Read out the random number value per special symbol stored in (corresponding to the first one of the first special symbol reservation). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit using the special symbol hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the read special symbol hit random number value.
In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win/fail determination means".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505).
, The jackpot type is determined (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 hit determination process, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 hit determination process, the special symbol per type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as "hit type selection means". After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop pattern data (jackpot pattern) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1
509), the process ends.

On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO
), if it is a "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81
, the small hit flag is turned ON (step S1512), and the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value in the same manner as the determination of the jackpot type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After judging the small hit type, the special stop design data according to the specified small hit type (
A small hit symbol) is set in a hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process is terminated.

If the result of the special symbol hit judgment is "losing" instead of "big hit" or "small hit" (
Steps S1503, S1510: NO), special figure stop design data (0
1H) is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S15
18), the process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 21: step S1403
, S1409). Variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1
403) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 8
1 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), game control microcomputer 8
1 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state jackpot among the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state jackpot, the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. part, the part where the variation pattern is "P14" in the special figure 2) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number in Special Figure 2.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state small hit among the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to determine the variation pattern. Make a selection (step S1
605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value in the same manner as in step S1603. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern from the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, using the part corresponding to the non-time saving state small hit and the variation pattern random number value. Here, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is
In the special figure 1, the variation pattern is the part of "P3", and in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is the part of "P15", so these are selected regardless of the variation pattern random number.

In step S1604, if the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is the ready-to-win random number (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the second
The reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time saving state,
Of the reach determination table T2, the presence or absence of reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion where the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13").

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the non-time-saving state reach in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for existence loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for loss with reach in the non-time saving state, out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ", "P
5" part, the part where the variation pattern is "P14" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In special figure 1,
Either "P4" or "P5" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value. In the special figure 2, "P14" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the non-time-saving state reach in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for no loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for reach without reach in the non-time saving state, out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. , "P
7" part, the part where the variation pattern is "P15" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In special figure 1,
And read variation pattern random value, from the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4), either "P6", "P7" is selected as the variation pattern. In the special figure 2, "P15" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value. In the special figure 1, since the variation pattern selected by the number of held balls changes, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in special figure 1, when the number of held balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times are selected than when the number of held balls is "1" to "2". It is designed to be As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to is the steps S1603, S1605, and S16 described above.
07 and S1608. Specifically, steps S1603, S1605, and S1607
, in S1608, the table for the non-time-saving state of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas steps S1613, S1615, S1617, S161
At 8, a table for time saving states is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit of the time saving state (special figure 1
In the part where the variation pattern is "P9", the part where the variation pattern is "P17" in the special figure 2) is referred to. Also, for example, in the case of step S1617, of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the time saving state (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P10" part, in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command, and output processing (FIG. 17: step S109
) to the sub-control board 90 . As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO
), the process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is stored in the main RAM 84
is set in the command set area 84a (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing (stop display of special symbols) to stop the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 with symbols corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means". In addition, the stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2 or the like. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800
: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the stop time has passed (step S1800
: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S18
01). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. Here, no matter which jackpot type (special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H
to 33H), "open pattern 21" is set as the winning opening pattern. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the big win won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big prize winning opening. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "15" is set in the round counter for any jackpot type (
FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES),
Switch to OFF (step S1805). Thereby, it becomes a non-time-saving state during execution of the 1st kind jackpot game. After that, in order to start the 1st kind jackpot game, the opening command of the 1st kind jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, set the special action status to "4" (
Step S1808), this processing ends. By setting the special action status to "4", the process shifts to special electric accessary product process 1 (jackpot game).

In step S1802, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S180
2: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). If the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: Y
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the won small winning (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 8
1, similar to the above step S1803, refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9, determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small hit A" (special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), "open pattern 22" as the opening pattern of the winning opening
is set. Also, for example, when the small hit type is "16R time saving 5 times small hit A" (special figure stop pattern data is "24H"), "open pattern 23" as the opening pattern of the winning opening
is set. The value of the round counter together with the set of opening patterns of the big winning mouth,
Set the number of rounds according to the type of small hit won. Here, "16" is set to the round counter regardless of the small hit type (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening/closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period in which the V opening/closing member 71 is to be operated. In the V opening/closing member control processing (FIG. 33), when the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening/closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small winning game in any small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. After that, in order to start the small winning game, the opening command of the small winning is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small winning game is started (step S1814). After that, the special action status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this processing ends. By setting the special operation status to "5", the process shifts to the special electric accessary product process 2 (small winning game).

In step S1810, if the small hit flag is OFF (step S181
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1820), and terminates this process. As a result, neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game is started, and the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is performed again.
A special symbol hit determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, when it is in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: Y
ES), that is, in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2015). The "first time-saving counter C1" counts the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state. "Second time saving counter C2" counts the number of variations of special symbols executed during the time saving state (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol). Initial values respectively set to the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table of FIG. 30 in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later. On the other hand, when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

As a result of step S2015 or step S2020, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that at least one of the values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 is "
0” is determined (step S2030). If neither value of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO)
, the process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the 1st time saving counter C1 and the 2nd time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), a time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). Thereby, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 30, the game state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information (whether or not the time saving state, each value of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the jackpot game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S220
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first big winning opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning hole 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) to open the first big prize winning port 30 includes, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when it is temporarily closed after opening. It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first big prize winning port 30 is reopened has passed and the timing of opening again has arrived. When it is not the time (timing) to open the first big prize winning port 30 (step S220
3: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the first big prize winning port 30 (step S2203: Y
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening opening process (step S2207).
). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first big winning hole 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type or small winning type). 1
When the seed jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the 2-type big winning game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the type of the small winning. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command contains information about the number of rounds of the special game (small winning game and big winning game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90 . In addition, in this embodiment, the opening of the 1st big prize-winning mouth 30 is not carried out several times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first big winning hole 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the first big winning hole 3
It may be determined whether or not the opening of 0 is the first opening in one round, and the round specifying command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, if the first big winning port 30 is open (step S2
202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the first big winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the first big winning hole 30 in the round game has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, nine per round), or that the first big winning hole 30 is closed. It means that either of the conditions of closing time (that is, elapse of a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) after the opening of the first big prize winning port 30) is satisfied. Then, when the condition for closing the first big winning hole 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the first big winning port 30 is satisfied (step S
2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first big winning opening 30 (step S2211), and then finishes this process.

In step S2203 described above, the time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30
If not, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed since the first big prize winning opening 30 was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first big winning hole 30 between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the first big winning opening 30 was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S222
0: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter has become "0". is determined (step S2226).
If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is,
If the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process is terminated to start the next round game. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: Y
ES), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). The ending command contains information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2
200: YES) Since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230).
If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S
2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232),
The special action status is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state setting process (step S223), which will be described later.
4) is executed, and this processing ends. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) after the jackpot game, and in the case of the time saving state, according to the type, the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving This is the process of setting the initial value (number of times of time saving) to the counter C2.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "game state control means" by executing the game state management process (FIG. 27) and the game state setting process. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines that the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, “15R time saving 5 times jackpot”, “15R time saving 15 times jackpot”, “15R time saving 99 times jackpot”, “1
6R time-saving 5 times small hit”, “16R time-saving 10 times small win”, “16R time-saving 15 times small win”, “16R time-saving 99 times small win”). (step S2301). If the time saving hit is not the opportunity (step S2
301: NO), that is, when the current jackpot game is executed with the normal win (that is, "16R normal small win") as a trigger, the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the jackpot game of this time is executed triggered by the time saving (step S2301
: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 to a setting table (FIG. 30) to be described later.
are set (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game is set to the "time saving state and high base state". This "time-saving state and high-base state" is either that the variable display of the special pattern is performed a predetermined number of times, or that the next jackpot (1 type jackpot or 2 types jackpot) is won. ends with the establishment of In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (whether or not the time saving state, each value of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2, etc.) on the game state set just now.

Drawing 30 is a figure for explaining the setting table of the 1st time saving counter C1 and the 2nd time saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the game state setting process (FIG. 29). In FIG. 30, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with the trigger of "15R time saving 99 times jackpot" or "16R time saving 99 times small hit" (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12
H", "15H", "25H", or "37H"), first time-saving counter C1
and the second time-saving counter C2 are set to "99". Also, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with the trigger of "16R time saving 10 times small hit" (when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is set to the first time saving counter C1 is set, and "15" is set to the second time saving counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hitting game executing means" by executing the special electric auditors process 1 (jackpot game: FIG. 28) and the special electric auditors process 2 (small winning game). do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The “finishing flag for the small winning” is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small winning game being executed. When the small hit end flag is ON (step S2
400: YES), the process moves to step S2420. Small hit end flag is OFF
In the case of (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S24
02: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the second big winning hole 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the second big winning hole 35 (step S2404). . The time (timing) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is when the time for opening the small winning opening has passed and the timing for opening the opening has arrived. The opening time for the small hit is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 for the open pattern 23.
seconds. If it is not the time (timing) to open the second big winning port 35 (step S2
404: NO), this processing ends. If it is time (timing) to open the second big winning hole 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning hole opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second big winning hole 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the type of the small win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. FIG. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90 . After setting the round specification command,
Finish this process.

In the above step S2402, if the second big winning port 35 is open (step S2
402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the second big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes into the second big winning hole 35 has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 10), or that the time to close the second big winning hole 35 has come. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has passed since the opening of the second big prize opening 35) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the second big winning port 35 is not met (step S2410:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the second big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the big winning opening closing process to close (block) the second big winning opening 35. perform (step S241
2). Here, in addition, the ending command of the small winning game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small winning ending process for ending the small winning game. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small winning game corresponds to the 1R eye. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and finishes this process.

In the above step S2400, if the small hit end flag is ON (step S2
400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has passed (step S2420). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2420: YES
), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422), and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S
2430). "V flag" is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the V area 39 during execution of a small winning game, and is a flag that is turned ON in a V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34) to be described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432) and sets the special operation status to "1" because the second jackpot game is not executed. ” (step S2434), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process.

If the V flag is ON in step S2430 described above (step S2430: Y
ES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and switches the jackpot flag to ON in order to execute the two-type jackpot game (
Step S2437), set the special action status to "4" (step S2438)
). By setting the special action status to "4", the next special action process (Fig. 20)
, the process shifts to special electric accessary product process 1 (jackpot game). After setting the special action status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (
Step S2440), if it is ON (step S2440: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S2442). Thereby, it becomes a non-time-saving state during the execution of the two-type jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the second jackpot game (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the small winning game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short period of time is shifted to the second big winning game.

[V opening/closing member control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening/closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500
: NO), and the process ends. When the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500:
YES), "V opening/closing member operation processing" for operating the V opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and "V valid period setting processing” is performed (step S2504). When the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small winning game is started (Fig. 26
: Steps S1812, S1814), V opening/closing member operation processing and V effective period setting processing are performed in accordance with this small winning game.

In the V opening/closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operation time of the V opening/closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the timing for opening the V opening/closing member 71 comes. , the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned off when the timing for closing the V opening/closing member 71 comes. As a result, the V opening/closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small winning game. Specifically, the V opening and closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then controlled to a passage permitted state (open state) for 4 seconds. After that, the passage blocking state (closed state) is controlled for 6 seconds.

In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period is set for the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V effective period" is a period during which the V flag is turned ON when the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball, regarding the detection as valid. The V effective period is from the start of opening of the V area 39 (at the time when control of the V opening/closing member 71 to the passage permitting state is started) until a predetermined time elapses. The predetermined time is the opening time of the V region 39 (V opening/closing member 71
is set to the pass-permitting state) (here, the opening time of the V area 39 + 1 second). This is because the game ball passing through the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 reaches the V area 39 in consideration of the time lag. In the V valid period setting process, V
A timer for measuring the valid period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when the timing for validating the V area 39 comes, and when the timing for invalidating the V area 39 comes. , the V valid flag is turned off. In the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening/closing member operation processing and the V effective period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening/closing member operation processing (step S2502), the total operation time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 is calculated. ) has passed. If the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has not ended (step S2506: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this processing.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (opening/closing member 32) in the small winning game will be described. As described above, the V opening/closing member 71
is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then
Open for 4 seconds and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "16R normal small winning" (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then opened for 4 seconds.
. Closed for 41 seconds. Therefore, open pattern 2 of "16R normal small hit"
2, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passage of the game ball during the small winning game is substantially impossible. On the other hand, "16
R time-saving 5 times small hit”, “16R time-saving 10 times small hit”, “16R time-saving 15 times small hit”
, "16R short time 99 times small hit" (open pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then opened for 1.6 seconds, It is then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game.
are opened at the same time, both openings continue for 1.6 seconds, and 2.4
Seconds later, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the V region 39 even if the game ball enters the second big prize hole 35 at any winning timing. It should be noted that here, if the game ball is hit rightward and the game ball is continuously shot, the game ball is surely won in the second big winning hole 35 during the opening period of the second big winning hole 35. Each device such as the big winning device 36 is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds.
From this, "16R time saving 5 times small hit", "16R time saving 10 times small hit", "16R
In the time-saving 15 times small hit and the 16R time-saving 99 times small hit, if the game ball is continuously shot by hitting to the right during the small hit game, the game ball will always pass through the V. there is

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is determined by the V opening/closing member control process (see FIG. 3).
This is the period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) in 3). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or after it is closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2
602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2604), and finishes this process. The "V pass command" is the sub-control board 9
This is a command to notify 0 that V has passed.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 . As will be described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as effect executing means by reading programs stored in the sub ROM 93 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. Production control microcomputer 91
reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "
1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the various random number counter values shown in FIG.
Add and update. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (
step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S40
35) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is performed by the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle.
It is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4
310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the effect button detection switch 63
Based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from a, the display contents of the display screen 7a are set. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs sub R
Various commands set in the effect command set area 94 b (output buffer) of the AM 94 are transmitted to the image control board 100 , the sound control board 106 and the lamp control board 107 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If received (step S441
5: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. In the look-ahead effect determination process, a look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, and a look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead effect random number random number, and the acquired random value,
A look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 is referenced to determine whether or not to carry out a look-ahead effect, and to determine a look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if the pre-determination command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S441
5: NO), the above-mentioned look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S444
5: YES), pending display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If received (step S445
5: YES), change effect start processing (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If received (step S446
5: YES), the fluctuation production end processing (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect, and details thereof will be described later.
On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4465: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4
475: YES), opening effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480)
). "Opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sub-submits the information on the special stop pattern data included in the opening command and set at the time of the winning judgment for the big win or the small win. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step 4315 in FIG. 36), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (eg, FIG. 45). note that,
If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S
4475: NO), skip the above-described opening effect pattern determination processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4
485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490).
"Round production pattern determination processing" is an open game production pattern (
content). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and stores information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 9.
Set to 4. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. Command set area 9
Set to 4b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game.
The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. Production control microcomputer 91
, when the ending command of the small winning game is received from the main control board 80, a process different from the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is performed. Note that step S44
95, if the ending command for the jackpot game has not been received (step S
4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it is received (step S4505: YES), a normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510).
"Normal design fluctuation production start processing" is a process of selecting a normal design fluctuation production pattern (contents) to be executed during normal design fluctuation. In the normal pattern variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 9
1, first, information about the normal pattern stop design data included in the normal design variation start command and information about the normal design variation pattern (FIG. 13) are set in the sub-RAM94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the normal pattern, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Production control microcomputer 9
1 selects a normal design variation performance pattern preset corresponding to the normal design variation pattern, and sends a normal design variation performance start command for starting the selected normal design variation performance to the performance command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. Production command set area 9
When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in 4b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, in the non-time saving state, if the winning type is "long open 1" or "short open 1", the effect control microcomputer 91 executes "V expected effect" (Fig. 44) to be described later. . In addition, in step S4505, if the normal symbol variation start command is not received (step S4505: NO), the above normal symbol variation effect start processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it is received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end processing is performed (step S4520).
"Normal design fluctuation production end processing" is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation production. In the normal design variation performance end processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal design variation stop command and sets the normal design variation performance end command for ending the normal design variation performance in the performance command set area 94b. . It should be noted that, in step S4515, when the normal symbol variation stop command is not received (step S4515: NO), the above-described normal symbol variation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it is received (step S4525: YES), normal symbol opening effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4530). "Normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the time of a winning game (normal game) associated with normal symbol winning. The normal game effects selected here include an opening effect executed during the opening and an open game effect executed while the electric chew 22 is open. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data set at the time of the winning determination of the normal symbol included in the normal symbol opening command. The information is set in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop symbol data is selected, and the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is transmitted as the effect command of the sub RAM 94. set area 94
Set to b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image. is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4525, if the normal symbol opening command is not received (
Step S4525: NO), the above normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal symbol ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it is received (step S4535: YES), normal symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4540). "Normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) associated with normal symbol winning. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and stores information about the normal symbol stop symbol data contained in the normal symbol ending command in the sub RAM 9.
Set to 4. Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop pattern data is selected, and the normal pattern ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is transmitted as the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined ending effect image. is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In step S4535, when the normal symbol ending command is not received (step S4535: NO), the above-described normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545).
. In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a time saving state,
Each value of a 1st time saving counter and a 2nd time saving counter etc.) are made to hold|maintain at subRAM94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when the V passage command is received. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 can also use commands other than the above (
(customer waiting standby command, advance determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) is performed, and this processing is terminated. The production control microcomputer 91 performs a variable production end process (step S4470) and an opening production pattern determination process (step S4480).
It functions as a "production executing means" by executing

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5
000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes the game state information indicating the current game state, the pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S50
05). "Mode status M" indicates the effect mode to be executed. The production mode here is a mode of production in the image display device 7, and if the production mode is different, the image displayed on the image display device 7 (appearing characters, items, background images, etc.) will be different.
A variable production is also executed in a manner corresponding to the production mode. Here, "1" and "2" are set as the mode status M, "1" corresponds to the non-time saving state, and "2" corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is "1" or "2".

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, when the time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving effect scenario (step S50
25). The "time saving effect scenario" is the remaining number of time saving times displayed on the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time saving number of times"). change scenario. The short-time production scenario is
It is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) to be described later. here"
"Remaining number of times of time saving" is the remaining number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol that has already been executed in the time saving state is the hit type. It is the remaining number of times until reaching the number of times of time saving set accordingly. The remaining number of times of time saving corresponds to the value of the first time saving counter C1 on the side of the main control section. Time saving remaining number of times is "0"
When it becomes, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state (Fig. 27: step S2030
, S2035). The game machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect such that the remaining number of display time reductions displayed on the image display device 7 is different from or matched with the actual remaining number of time reductions based on the time reduction effect scenario. Specific aspects will be described later. Here, the production control microcomputer 91
specifies the remaining number of display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction production scenario. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 specifies the remaining number of display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of a first time reduction production counter JC1 described later and the time reduction production scenario. Note that when the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is,
In the non-time-saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 skips reference to the time-saving production scenario.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a variation production pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires a variable effect pattern random number value for effect determination. Then, from the variable performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command, the variable performance pattern random number, the specified display time reduction remaining number of times in the time reduction, the special performance flag Set a variable effect pattern corresponding to ON/OFF of. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "single crying effect" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub-RAM94. The production control microcomputer 91
When the special effect flag is ON, it is switched to OFF, and "crying once effect" is executed as a variable effect. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is OFF and the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, if it is a variation of the second special symbol in a non-time saving state, "V card A shuffle effect” (FIG. 44(G)) is performed.
When the mode status M is "2", the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown effect" (Fig. 47), which will be described later. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as a "number of times display effect executing means" because it performs this countdown effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the details of the advance notice effect such as the so-called step-up notice effect, the chance-up notice effect, etc., based on the variable effect pattern random number value, and further refers to the stop symbol pattern determination table T52, and stops. A combination of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R to be displayed is determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020 ), the process ends. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step 4315 in FIG. 36), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 generates a predetermined variable effect. Image to ROM103
, and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

[Variation production end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect end processing (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If the mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (
step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol from the information about the variation pattern set in the sub RAM 94 . When the variation is the variation of the second special symbol (step S511
5: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 by 1 (step S5120). "
The first time-saving effect counter JC1” is the second counter executed during the time-saving state on the sub-control unit side.
It counts the number of fluctuations in special symbols, and the "first time reduction counter C
1”. "Second time saving effect counter JC2" is the number of times of special symbol fluctuations executed during the time saving state on the sub-control unit side (the total number of times of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of times of fluctuations of the second special symbol) It counts and corresponds to the "second time saving counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values respectively set in the first time reduction production counter JC1 and the second time reduction production counter JC2 are determined in the ending production pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, if the variation is the variation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO
), only the value of the second time reduction effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S51
25).

As a result of step S5120 or step S5125, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time reduction production counter JC1 and the second time reduction production counter JC2 has become "0". (Step S5130). When neither value of 1st time reduction production|presentation counter JC1 and 2nd time reduction production|presentation counter JC2 is not "0" (step S5130: NO), a process skips to step S5140. When the value of at least one of the first time reduction production counter JC1 and the second time reduction production counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S51
35). When the effect control microcomputer 91 switches the mode status M to "1",
At the same time, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 reservation, and if there is a special figure 2 reservation, the special performance flag is switched to ON. As a result, when there is a special figure 2 hold when shifting from the time saving state to the non-working time saving state, the later-described "crying once production" (Fig. 48) is executed as the first variable production in the non-working time saving state . In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91, in step S5130,
From the information about the game state held in the sub-RAM94, it may be configured to determine whether the time-saving state or non-time-saving state, and switch the mode status M to "1" in S5135 in the case of the non-time-saving state. Information about the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when a game state designation command is received from the main control board 80 . Step S514
At 0, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect. As a result, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process is terminated.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94 . Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs mode status setting processing (step S5505). "
"Mode status setting process" is a process of determining the production mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using the mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to for determining the mode status M according to the winning type (special figure stop design data). Effect control microcomputer 91, the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command, the mode status setting table T5
Determine the mode status from 3. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the two-kind jackpot game after winning the "16R normal small hit A", the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". is selected. Also, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the type 1 jackpot game after winning "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", since the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command is 33H, the mode status M "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is "1" (step S5510: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step S55.
Skip to 25. On the other hand, if the set mode status M is "2" (step S
5510: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 sets a set value according to the type (special figure stop symbol data) to the first time reduction production counter JC1 and the second time reduction production counter JC2 (step S5515). The setting value set to the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set to the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Moreover, the setting value set to the 2nd time reduction production|presentation counter JC2 is the same as the value set to the 2nd time reduction counter C2 in the main-control part side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command and this setting table, thereby making the first time saving A set value to be set to the effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 can be specified. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set to each of the first time reduction production counter JC1 and the second time reduction production counter JC2. Also, for example, if the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" to the first time saving effect counter JC1
is set, and "15" is set to the second time reduction effect counter JC2. After setting the setting values to the time saving production counters JC1 and JC2, the production control microcomputer 91 performs time saving production scenario determination processing (step S5520). The "time saving scenario determination process" is the remaining number of time saving to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (Fig. 47) executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. ) is the process for determining the change scenario. In the time-saving production scenario determination process, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the time-saving production scenario using a time-saving production scenario determination table T54 described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time saving production scenario determination table T54 is a table referred to for determining the time saving production scenario according to the winning type (special figure stop symbol data) and the time saving production scenario random number value. The production control microcomputer 91 first acquires a time saving production scenario random number value. Then, the time-saving performance scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the acquired random number value, and the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54. For example, if it is the ending of the two-type jackpot game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small hit A" (special stop pattern data 25H), if the acquired time saving scenario random number is "0 to 63""ScenarioB" is selected as a time saving production scenario, and if the time saving production scenario random number is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as a time saving production scenario, and the time saving production scenario random number is "96 to 127".
', then 'scenario D' is selected as the time-saving production scenario. Also, for example, "15
If it is the ending of a type 1 jackpot game after winning R Time-saving 5 times jackpot D” (special stop pattern data 31H), “Scenario H” is used as a time-saving production scenario regardless of the time-saving production scenario random number value obtained. selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining specific contents of the time saving production scenario. In FIG. 43,
In each time-saving production scenario (scenarios A to H), the remaining number of time-savings displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display time-saving Remaining number of times) and the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 are shown. For example, in the "scenario A", the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the display screen 7a to display the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 as the remaining display time saving number of times. In the "scenario B", when the value of the first time saving production counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time saving production counters, and then the value of the first time saving production counter JC1 is "9".
6", the number of remaining display time reduction is decreased along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the remaining display time saving number of times changes from "5" to "2". And, the first time saving production counter JC1
When is "95", the remaining number of display time reduction is set to "1", and the remaining number of display time reduction is 94
A display suggesting an increase, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time reduction performance counter JC1 changes from "94" to "1", the same value as the first time reduction performance counter JC1 is displayed as the display time reduction remaining number of times. In the "scenario E", when the value of the first time reduction production counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time reduction production counters, and then the value of the first time reduction production counter JC1 is "12". ], the number of remaining display time reduction is decreased along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time saving production counter JC1 is from "15" to "12", the remaining number of display time saving is from "5" to "
2”. Then, when the first time saving performance counter JC1 is '11', the remaining number of times of shortening display is set to '1', and a display suggesting that the remaining number of times of shortening display is increased by 10, for example, '+10' is displayed. Then, the first time saving production counter JC1 changes from "10" to "1
, the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times of displaying time saving. In this way, by making the display time saving remaining number different from the actual time saving remaining number, that is, the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1, the player is given an expectation that the display time saving remaining number may increase on the way. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending effect pattern (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command. Production control microcomputer 91
sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that the ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5
535), the process ends.

8. Production example of the present embodiment [V expected production (when winning a normal pattern in a non-time-saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying V's expected effect. The expected effect of this V is that in a non-time-saving state, while the special figure 1 is fluctuating or stopped, the normal pattern is won, and the hit type is "long open 1".
or in the case of "short open 1" (see FIG. 13). V's expected performance is electric chew 22
It is an effect that suggests whether or not a long opening is made, and further suggests the result of the success/failure determination of special figure 2 when the game ball enters the electric chew 22.

The expected production of V is during the variable production of special figure 1 as shown in FIG. During the ready-to-reach state), the passing of the game ball to the second gate 29 wins the normal symbol, and the hit type is executed when "long open 1" or "short open 1" is selected. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and the normal symbol variation performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4510).
, from the information on the normal stop pattern data included in this command, the hit type is "
It is determined to be "long opening 1" or "short opening 1", and is executed by selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the expected performance of V. As V's expected effect, first, as shown in FIG. V's expected cut-in effect for displaying an image GA1 suggesting the start of V's expected effect is executed by using the area that has been performed. Note that the display area HR
1 is provided at one corner of the display screen 7a. The production of the display area HR1 is performed when the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: Y
ES), in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 37: step S4460), the fluctuation production start command (FIG. 38: step S5020) is set and executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(C), a V-level challenge effect is executed in which an image GA2 prompting the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 showing an indicator capable of representing an increase in points are displayed. . In this V level challenge effect, the player can press the effect button 63 to increase the points of the indicator of the image GA3, thereby increasing the V level. In this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

When the winning type of the normal symbol is "short open 1", the electric chew 22 is short opened for 0.02 seconds (FIG. 14), and then the indicator is opened as shown in FIG. 44(D). An image GA4 suggesting that the point is lowered and the V level is lowered and the V level has not reached a certain level, and an image GA5 is suggested that the V level is lowered and a big win cannot be expected this time.
A V level down effect for displaying is executed. In addition, in this V level down effect, FIG.
As shown in 4 (D), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

On the other hand, if the hit type of the normal symbol is "long open 1", then 5 of the electric chew 22
As shown in FIG. 44(E), the point of the indicator is raised along with the long opening for a second (FIG. 14), and the V level rises, suggesting that the V level has reached a certain level or more.
Then, the V level is raised and the stage is shifted to the next stage, and the V level raising effect of displaying an image GA7 suggesting that a big win can be expected is executed. In addition, in this V level-up effect, as shown in FIG. 44(E), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(F), in order to move to the next stage, an image GA8 is displayed to urge the player to hit the right ball in order to enter the game ball into the electric chew 22. Executes a suggestive action. In addition, in this right-handed suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the display area HR1
Continuing to the special figure 1 variable production is shown. This right-handed suggestion production is the display area HR
It is executed until the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 being displayed in 1 is completed. This right hitting suggestion effect is executed based on the normal symbol opening command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 (FIG. 37: step S4525).

If not a single ball hits the electric chew 22, after the effect of suggesting hitting to the right, the above-described FIG.
The V level down effect shown in 4(D) is executed. This V level down effect is executed based on the normal symbol ending command ( FIG. 37 : step S4535) that the effect control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80 . On the other hand, when one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the right-handed suggestion effect, as a variation effect of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. V to display image GA9 shuffling facing cards
A card shuffle effect is executed. In this case, in the display area HR2 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, the changing state of the decorative pattern is displayed. The V card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 when the second starting port 21 is won.

If the result of the success/failure determination of special figure 2 is a big hit, or if it is a small hit, after the V card shuffle production, then, as shown in FIG. One of the cards is selected and turned over, and a V card selection effect is executed to display an image GA10 indicating that the turned over card is a V card. Display area HR
In 2, after the ready-to-win state using decorative symbols is shown, the corolla pattern arrangement suggesting a small win or a big win is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(I), an image GA suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed
11 and a right-handed shot suggestive image GA12 prompting the right-handed player. This expected success performance of V suggests that the expected performance of V is successful and that the expectation of a big win (type 1 or type 2 jackpot) is high, in other words, the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. This expected success effect of V is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has passed since the pattern arrangement of the second number is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. That is, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display device 41 to when the expected success effect of V is started, and after the big winning symbol is confirmed and displayed, the expected successful effect of V is started. is configured to be equal to the timing (time) until Here, "equal" does not mean that they match completely, and there may be an error in the timing as long as the player feels that they are equal. As an error, for example ±2
Seconds can be exemplified. In the case of a small win, a small win game is executed after this V expected success presentation, and when the player hits right and passes the V, a type 2 big win is obtained, and the game shifts to a big win game. In this way, in the present embodiment, when a small win is made, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect (see FIG. 44 (I)) is started. Then, during the small winning game, the performance suggesting the small winning game and the performance suggesting V passage are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game and can be made to think that he or she has won a kind 1 big win. Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 44(I)) is started for both the case of the big win and the case of the small win. With this configuration, it is possible to further make it difficult to distinguish between the 1st kind jackpot and the 2nd kind jackpot. Incidentally, even if the double numbers displayed stop-and-display in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big win and the case of the small win, these are naturally included in the same presentation. In addition, the expected success effect of V in the case of the big win and the case of the small win may be started before the small win pattern or the big win pattern is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination of special figure 2 is a loss, after the V card shuffle effect, then, as shown in FIG. A card is selected and turned over, and an unsuccessful card selection performance for displaying an image GA13 indicating that the turned over card is an unsuccessful card is executed. In the display area HR2, a ready-to-win state using decorative symbols is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(K), V's expected failure effect is displayed by displaying an image GA14 suggesting that V's expected effect is unsuccessful and the big win game is not executed as a result of a loss without a big win or a small win. to run. In this case, in the display area HR2, a decorative pattern is used to display a pattern arrangement suggesting a failure. In addition, when there is a hold of the special figure 2, after this V expectation failure effect, the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44(G)) is again performed. When there is no reservation of the special figure 2, it shifts to the production corresponding to the normal special figure 1.

44(G), (H), and (I), the variation effect of the special figure 2 is the variation pattern "P1
3” (FIG. 12) is selected. Figure 44 (G), (J), (
K) is an example of the effect executed when the variation pattern "P14" (Fig. 12) is selected.

In addition, V level challenge production (Fig. 44 (C)), V level down production (Fig. 44 (D)
), the V level-up effect (FIG. 44(E)), and the right-handed hitting effect (FIG. 44(F)), the variable effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44(A) is shown in the display area HR1. However, when the variable performance corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 is reserved, the variable performance corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

Furthermore, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, display of the pending images 9A and 9B and the pending digested image 9C is omitted. 45 to 48 and 50, which will be described later, similarly, the display of the pending images 9A, 9B and the pending digested image 9C is omitted.

[Hit game production]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when winning the special figure 2 lottery. This winning game effect is executed when a big win or a small win is made in the lottery of the special figure 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command of the big hit game or the small hit game from the main control board 80 (Fig. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination process (Fig. 37: step S4480) , When it is determined that the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit from the information on the special figure stop pattern data included in this command, the corresponding opening performance start command is set and executed. This winning game effect: FIG. 45(A) is, for example, a effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed (V expected success effect: FIG. 44(I), V roulette success effect: FIG.
6(C), target hit success effect: executed after FIG. 48(C)).

First, at the start of the jackpot game associated with the type 1 jackpot or at the start of the small jackpot game associated with the jackpot, as shown in FIG. An image GB1 suggesting a shot to the right and an image GB2 suggesting hitting to the right are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45(B), an image GB3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed using a predetermined character or the like, and an image GB2 suggesting hitting to the right are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 45A and 45B are continued until a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as “first game period”) elapses from the start of the jackpot game in the type 1 jackpot game. Further, in the small winning game, it is continued from the start of the small winning game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the one-type big winning game and the small winning game, the same content (similar) effect is performed during the first game period. It should be noted that this first game period, at least, the opening time of the small winning game (open pattern 23) (here, 0.01 seconds)
, and the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (here, 1.6 seconds). Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small winning game to the end of the small winning game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (
1.6 seconds) + ending time (3 seconds)) is set to 4.61 seconds. When the first game period has passed since the start of the jackpot game associated with the type 1 jackpot, or when the first game period has passed since the start of the small win game and the type 2 jackpot due to V passage is confirmed, As shown in FIG. 45(C), an image GB4 clearly suggesting that a jackpot game is in progress
, and an image GB2 suggesting hitting to the right are displayed. That is, when the second jackpot is won after the small win game, the effects shown in FIGS. 45A, 45B, and 45C are executed in the same manner as when the first jackpot is won.

On the other hand, when the first game period has passed since the start of the small winning game accompanying the small winning and when the non-implementation of the big winning game is confirmed by non-passing of V, instead of the image GB4, FIG. 45 (D) As shown, an image GB5 is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed.

In the winning game production in this embodiment, the production during the 1st kind jackpot game and the production during the small winning game accompanying the small hit and the 2nd kind jackpot game are similar productions (Fig. 45 (A), (B)
, (C)). In other words, the performance from the start of the type 1 jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game and the performance from the start of the small prize game to the end of the type 2 jackpot game are configured to be the same. It should be noted that even if the second kind of jackpot is not executed after the small winning game accompanying the small winning, at least during the small winning game, the same production as in the case of the first kind of jackpot (Fig. 45 (A), (B) ) is performed, and after the lapse of the first game period, an effect (FIG. 45(D)) different from the case of the 1st kind jackpot is performed. The ``similar (same) performance'' here means that the content should be close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big win and the small win, and the performance does not have to be completely the same. . For example, if some characters are different, if some of the predetermined character's appearance (for example, clothing, color of clothes, equipment) are different, or if the appearance timing of the predetermined character is slightly different Naturally, it is included in the same production. In addition, in the winning game production in the present embodiment, when two types of jackpots occur after the small winning game, the big winning game production (Fig. 45 (A), (B)) is started based on the V passing by the small winning game. Instead, it is configured to start a big winning game effect at the start of the small winning game (that is, based on the confirmation display of the small winning symbol). In other words, in this embodiment, if a small hit,
At the time of playing a small winning game, an effect suggesting a small winning game (for example, an effect instructing the player to aim for V) is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game and can be made to think that he or she has won a kind 1 big win. In addition, in the present embodiment, after the small winning design is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display device 41, the small winning game production (
45 (A), (B), (C)) and the timing (time) until the start of the jackpot pattern and the jackpot game effect (FIG. 45 (A), (B), (C) after the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed). )) is configured to be equal to the timing (time) until the start of As is clear from the above, the series of effects (V's expected success effect: FIG. 44(I)→FIG. 45(A)→FIG. 45(B)) suggesting that a jackpot game is executed The same content (similar performance) is provided for a predetermined period from the start of a series of performances in the case of a win and in the case of a big win. The predetermined period is a period longer than the period from the start of V's expected success effect to the end of the small winning game when the small winning is won. For example, when the expected success performance time of V is 5 seconds and the small winning game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. Note that the series of effects suggesting that a jackpot game is executed are V roulette success effect: FIG. 46(C) instead of V expected success effect: FIG. (C)). Here, the V roulette success rendering time and the target hitting success rendering time are both 5 seconds.

[Variation effect at the time of special figure 2 lottery (in time saving state)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the variable effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery. The variation effect at the time of this special figure 2 lottery is, in the time saving state, when the special figure 2 is a small hit, when the special figure 2 is a big hit, or when the special figure 2 is hit.
Executed when the is lost. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (Fig. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation production start process (Fig. 37: step S4460, Fig. 38), to this command When it is determined that the variation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (FIG. 12) from the information on the included variation pattern, the corresponding variation production start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020).

In the variable effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46(A), a V roulette effect is executed to display an image GC1 showing how a roulette wheel with a losing zone and a V zone spins. In this case, in the display area HR3 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, the changing state of the decorative pattern is displayed.

If the result of the success/failure determination of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V roulette production, as shown in FIG. A V-zone selection presentation is executed to display an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V-zone. In the display area HR3, after the ready-to-win state using decorative symbols is displayed, the pattern arrangement of doublets suggesting a small win or a big win is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(C), an image GC suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed
3 and an image GC4 suggesting hitting to the right is executed. This V roulette success effect suggests that the V roulette effect is successful and that the expectation of a big win (type 1 or type 2 jackpot) is high. It is a suggestive performance. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44(I)), this V roulette success effect is executed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has passed since the pattern arrangement of the second order is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. be started. That is, the special symbol display device 4
The timing (time) from when the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed to the start of the V roulette success effect, and the timing (time) from when the big winning pattern is confirmed and displayed to when the V roulette success effect is started. , are configured to be equal. In the case of a small win, after this V roulette success effect, a small win game is executed, and the player hits right to V
When it passes, it becomes a 2-type jackpot, and shifts to a jackpot game. In this way, in the present embodiment, when a small win is made, the variable effect is stopped, and regardless of whether or not the V has passed, the effect (see FIG. 46 (C)) is started. Then, during the small winning game, the performance suggesting the small winning game and the performance suggesting V passage are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game and can be made to think that he or she has won a kind 1 big win. Also, in this embodiment,
Along with the suspension of the variable production, the same production is performed in the case of a big hit and in the case of a small hit (Fig. 46 (
C)) is started. With this configuration, it is possible to further make it difficult to distinguish between the 1st kind jackpot and the 2nd kind jackpot. Incidentally, even if the double numbers displayed stop-and-display in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big win and the case of the small win, these are naturally included in the same presentation. In addition, the expected success effect of V in the case of the big win and the case of the small win may be started before the small win pattern or the big win pattern is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination of the special figure 2 is a loss, after the V roulette effect, FIG. 46 (D
), the roulette spinning in the V roulette effect is stopped, and a losing zone selection effect is executed to display an image GC5 indicating that the stop zone is a losing zone. In the display area HR3, a ready-to-win state using decorative symbols is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(E), a V roulette failure effect is executed to display an image GC6 suggesting that the V roulette effect is unsuccessful and that the big winning game will not be executed as a result of a loss. In the display area HR3, a pattern arrangement that suggests a loss is displayed using decorative patterns. In addition, when there is a hold of the special figure 2, after this V roulette failure presentation, the V roulette presentation (see FIG. 46(A)) is shifted again.

In addition, in the time saving state, if the success or failure is determined in the special figure 1, and a big hit (Figure 12: When selecting the variation pattern "P8"), or a small hit (Figure 12: Variation pattern "P9
”Selection), in the same way as when you hit the jackpot or small hit in special figure 2, Figure 46 (A) ~ (
Execute the effect of C). In addition, the success or failure determination is performed in special figure 1, and in the case of loss (Fig. 12: when selecting the variation pattern "P10"), in the same way as in the case of loss in special figure 2, Figures 46 (A), (D
), and the effect of (E) is executed. Also, in the time-saving state, if there is a loss in the success/failure determination of the special figure 2 (Figure 12: when the variation pattern "P19" is selected), or if there is a loss in the success/failure determination of the special figure 1 (Figure 12: variation pattern When "P11" is selected), a variable performance is executed to quickly notify a failure using decorative symbols.

[Countdown production (during variable production of time saving state)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a countdown effect. This countdown performance
It is an effect of displaying a time saving remaining number of times image on the display screen 7a during each variable effect in the time saving state. The countdown performance is started from the first variation of the special symbols in a time-saving state after the jackpot game. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation production start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M is "2", it is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: step S5020).
The ``remaining number of display time reductions'' indicated by the image of the remaining number of times of reduction in countdown performance is determined by referring to the reduction in time performance scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the reduction in time performance scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "remaining number of display time reductions" indicated by the image of the number of remaining time reductions is the same number as the actual remaining number of time reductions (actual remaining fluctuation number) until the end of the time reduction state, or the number of times less than the actual remaining number of time reductions is shown as the number of pseudo time-saving remaining times. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of effect corresponding to "scenario C".

In the countdown effect based on "scenario C", first, as shown in FIG. 47(A),
A countdown effect A is displayed. In this countdown effect A, in the first change after entering the time saving state, the remaining time saving number image GDA with the "display time saving remaining number of times" set to 5 times is displayed, and from the second to the fifth change, the previous change A remaining time saving number image GDA representing the number of times obtained by subtracting one from the displayed remaining number of times of saving time is displayed. For example, in countdown production A,
In the second variation, the remaining number of times of reduced working hours image GDA is displayed with the "remaining number of reduced hours of display" set to 4 times.
In the variable eye, the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours image GDA is displayed with the "remaining number of times of shortening of displaying" set to one.

When the display of the remaining time reduction image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47(B), the charge effect A is executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation. In this charge effect A, a charge image CHA is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of display time reduction" by about 10 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), a countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, which is the next variation of the charge effect A, the charge amount (10 The number of times (10 times) increased by the number of times (10 times) is displayed as the "remaining number of times of reduced time displayed", and the remaining number of times of reduced time image GDB is displayed. A time saving remaining frequency image GDB representing the remaining frequency after subtraction is displayed. For example, in countdown production B, 6
In the first variation, the remaining number of times of saving time image GDB with the "remaining number of times of reduced display time" set to 10 is displayed, and in the seventh variation, the remaining number of times of reduced time period image GDB with the "remaining number of times of reduced display time" set to 9 times is displayed, At the fifteenth variation, a remaining number of times of shortening of working hours image GDB is displayed with "remaining number of times of shortening of displaying" set to one.

When the display of the remaining time reduction image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown performance B is finished, next, as shown in FIG. 47(D), the charge performance B is executed during the variation performance of the 15th variation. In this charge effect B, a charge image CHB is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of times of reduced display time" by about 84 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), a countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, the previous change (15
The number of times (84 times) obtained by subtracting 1 from the remaining number of times (1 time) in the variation eye) and increasing it by the charge amount (84 times) is set as the "remaining number of times of display time reduction", and the remaining number of times of reducing time image GDC
is displayed, and from the 17th variation to the 99th variation, a time saving remaining number of times image GDC representing the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number of times shown in the previous variation is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, at the 16th variation, the remaining time reduction image GDC with the “remaining number of times of display time reduction” set to 84 is displayed, and at the 17th variation, the time reduction image GDC with the “remaining number of times of display time reduction” set to 83 times is displayed. Display the remaining count image GDC.

In addition, the countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variable effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variable performance, or may be executed at the end timing of each variable performance. In addition, during each variable production, the image of the remaining number of times of shortening may be continuously displayed.

[Crying once production (production of the first change (special figure 2) after the end of the time saving state)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a one-time crying effect. This one-time production of crying is a variation production that is executed in the next variation of the variation in the case where the suspension of the special figure 2 is held in the last variation of the time saving state, that is, the first after the time saving state It is a variation of special figure 2 in a non-time saving state. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (Fig. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation production start process (Fig. 37: Step S4460, Fig. 38), a special production flag is ON, the corresponding variation production start command is set and executed (Fig. 38: step S5020
).

In the crying effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48(A), an image GE1 showing a rotating "target" consisting of a winning zone and a losing zone, and a state advantageous to the player are shown at the end. A target hitting start rendering is executed to display an image GE2 indicating that In this case, in the display area HR4 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, the changing state of the decorative pattern is displayed.

If the result of the success/failure determination of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the target hitting start production, next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the arrow hit the target hit zone A hitting effect is executed to display an image GE3 indicating that. In the display area HR4, after the ready-to-win state using the decorative symbols is displayed, the coordinated symbol arrangement suggesting a small win or a big win is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), an image GE suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed
4 and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GE5 that encourages right-handed hitting is displayed, and the target hit is successful, and a big hit (
A target hit success performance is executed, suggesting that the degree of expectation for a 1st kind jackpot or a 2nd kind jackpot is high, in other words, that the degree of expectation for the execution of a jackpot game is high. Similar to V's expected success effect (FIG. 44(I)), this target hit success effect is displayed in the display area HR2 by:
After a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has passed since the double-order pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed, the game is started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed on the special pattern display 41 to when the target hitting success effect is started, and from when the big winning pattern is confirmed and displayed to when the target hitting success effect is started. is configured to be equal to the timing (time) of
In the case of a small win, a small win game is executed after this target hitting success performance, and when the player hits to the right and passes V, a second kind of big win occurs, and the process shifts to a big win game. In this way, in the present embodiment, when a small win is made, the variable effect is stopped, and regardless of whether or not the V has passed, the effect (see FIG. 48 (C
)). Then, during the small winning game, the performance suggesting the small winning game and the performance suggesting V passage are not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game and can be made to think that he/she has won a kind 1 big win. In addition, in the present embodiment, along with the suspension of the variable production, the same production (
FIG. 48(C)) is started. With this configuration, it is possible to further make it difficult to distinguish between the 1st kind jackpot and the 2nd kind jackpot. In addition, the display area H
Even if the number of doubles stopped and displayed on R2 is different, these are naturally included in the same presentation. In addition, the expected success effect of V in the case of the big win and the case of the small win may be started before the small win pattern or the big win pattern is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the right or wrong determination of special figure 2 is a loss, after the target hitting start production, next, FIG.
As shown in (D), a target-missing effect is executed to display an image GE6 indicating that the arrow has hit the target-missing zone. In the display area HR4, a ready-to-win state using decorative symbols is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), a target-hit-failure presentation is executed to display an image GE7 suggesting that the target hit is unsuccessful and the jackpot game is not executed as a result of a loss without a big win or a small win. . In the display area HR4, a pattern arrangement that suggests a loss is displayed using decorative patterns.

48 (A) to (C) in the one-time production of crying is the first fluctuation in which the time-saving state is shifted to the non-time-saving state, when the fluctuation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected. 48 (A), (D), and (E) are examples of effects that are executed in the above-mentioned FIGS. 48A, 48D, and 48E.
See) is an example of the effect that is executed when is selected.

9. Operation of Movable Board The operation of the movable board (the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.
and the second movable accessory 15 to emit light in a specific manner.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. FIG. 49 shows the first
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (moving in the advancing direction); Figure 50 shows
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a combined effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52A and 52B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying the rotation operation of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 53 and 54 are explanatory diagrams exemplifying the light emission modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14L.
contains R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a half arc shape of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is in a retracted position where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.
home position) (first mode). At this time, the left movable accessory 14
L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a state in which a part thereof can be visually recognized. As for the first movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the center of the display screen 7a (to approach each other) as shown in FIG. By moving, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50 to form one decorative member (united accessory) (second mode). Here, the united character forms the outline of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory obtained by combining the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion is
On the front surface of the image display device 7, it covers part of the display screen 7a in the vicinity of its center and stands still in a state in which the display screen 7a can be viewed through an opening formed in the center. In other words, the united role is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed and the central part of the face is absent, and instead the display screen 7a can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, a human face is completed as a whole by displaying a face image on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united role. That is, by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) of the united role as an image on the display screen 7a, the combined performance of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a person's face) is performed. can be executed. The object completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm and both legs may be completed by the united role, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 through the state shown in FIG. 49 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and stops there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, this united accessory can be vertically rotated in front of the display screen 7a. In other words, the united accessory can rotate about a horizontal axis parallel to the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the united accessory becomes an elliptical shape gradually narrowing in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a,
The image of the person's face to be displayed is deformed according to the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. As a result, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can produce an effect as if a person's face is bowing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to emit light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united accessory (decorative member), and each of them is configured to be switchable between on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14
R can emit light in conjunction with (corresponding to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66 . Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the right movable accessory 14R and the left movable accessory 14L can be interlocked with each other to emit light.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55 shows the second
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 15; 56A and 56B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying the rotation operation of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotatable. The second movable accessory 15 is
As shown in FIG. 1, it can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 55 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the area slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56, the decorative portion can be rotated to the right and to the left (rotated to the right in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the first combination performance by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the second combination performance by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are both in the second mode, so that the first combination effect can be executed. In other words, both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advanced position, so that the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the upper portion of the first movable accessory 14 . In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still in a state in which they are partially overlapped and combined.
58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are separated from the second movable accessory 15 as shown in FIG.
covers the upper part of the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15
can perform a second combination effect in which each tilts at a predetermined angle. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, the two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and by moving to the advanced position and overlapping each other in a tilted state. In some cases, the second combination effect is performed directly without going through the first combination effect.

10. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of this Embodiment Below, each effect example (example of display effect, example of movable character object effect) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. This variable timing change effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90,
When an instruction to execute the variable timing change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the variable timing change performance is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 is driven.

[Variation timing change effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variation timing change effect A. FIG. In the variable timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG.
A set of decorative patterns is variably displayed. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop patterns. The second decorative design includes a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R, and is a set of designs capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. The holding display position (
Above the rectangular image), a white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed. Three pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position. A black spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first suspension display position. 2 from right
A star-shaped pending icon 9A is displayed at the th second pending display position. A white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the third suspension display position that is the third from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, the same color and shape of the pending icon are displayed at the third pending display position and the relevant pending display position. The difference in the shape and color of the pending icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A, a star-shaped pending icon, a black spherical pending icon, and a white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has two. The expectation of winning is the second highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in a variation in which the white sphere suspension icon is at the suspension display position,
At the same time that the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, 2
Two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. That is, when the pending icon reaches the pending display position, the variable effect corresponding to the reached pending icon (the pending icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears).
That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to fluctuate at the same time and are stopped at the same time. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the suspension icon 9 of the black ball that was in the first suspension display position
A moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, the two decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design) are maintained to be stopped. As shown in FIG. 59(D), at the same time when the black ball suspension icon 9A reaches the suspension display position, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the pending icon reaches the pending display position, the variable effect corresponding to the reached pending icon (the pending icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R continue to be variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the suspension icon 9C is a black ball suspension icon, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not simultaneous,
It is configured such that the timing of the stop display is shifted. In this embodiment, the first decorative pattern 2
1, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
It can be the opposite. Also, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time the change occurs (or may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical reservation icon 9C with a relatively medium expectation of winning, two decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second
While the decorative patterns) start to fluctuate at the same time, the stop display is not at the same time and the timing is shifted.
As shown in FIG. 59(F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was in the first hold display position
moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the two decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design), the second decorative design starts the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be variably displayed before the pending icon 9A at the first pending display position starts to move and reaches the pending display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(H), at the same time when the star-shaped pending icon 9A reaches the pending display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be variably displayed. In this embodiment, the second decorative pattern 8L,
Although 8C and 8R are supposed to start changing before the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c and 8r, the opposite is also possible. Also, which one starts to change first may change (or may be random) each time it changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R continue to be variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c and 8r are stop-displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Also, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time the change occurs (or may be random). Thus, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped reserved icon 9C with a relatively high probability of winning, the variation start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display Each time is different. Figure 59 (J
), the white spherical pending icon 9A that was at the first pending display position moves toward the pending display position. Figure 59 (A) in the variation where the suspension icon of the white ball is the suspension display position
2, at the same time when the white sphere suspension icon reaches the suspension display position from the first suspension display position, two decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design) start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Variation timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. FIG. In the variable timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays three
A set of decorative patterns is variably displayed. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are variably displayed. The first decorative design includes a left decorative design 8l, a middle decorative design 8c, and a right decorative design 8r, and is a set of designs that can notify whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. The second decorative design includes a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R, and is a set of designs that can notify whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. The third decorative design includes a left decorative design 8ml, a middle decorative design 8mc, and a right decorative design 8mr, and is a set of designs capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.
A black spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first suspension display position. A star-shaped pending icon 9A is displayed at the second pending display position second from the right. 3 from the right
A white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the third suspension display position of the th (the leftmost here). Here, the same color and shape of the pending icon are displayed at the third pending display position and the relevant pending display position. The difference in the shape and color of the pending icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A, a star-shaped pending icon, a black spherical pending icon, and a white spherical pending icon,
The star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in a variation in which the suspension icon of a white ball is at the suspension display position,
At the same time that the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, 3
Three decorative designs (the first decorative design, the second decorative design and the third decorative design) start the variable display. In other words, when the pending icon reaches the relevant pending display position, the reached pending icon (
The variable effect corresponding to the pending icon) is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c and 8r, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc and 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. be. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively low expectation of winning, three decorative symbols (first
(decorative design, second decorative design and third decorative design) simultaneously start to fluctuate and are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the suspension icon 9 of the black ball that was in the first suspension display position
A moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, the three decorative designs (the first decorative design, the second decorative design and the third decorative design) are maintained to be stopped. As shown in FIG. 60(D), at the same time that the black sphere holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the three decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design and third decorative design) are displayed in a variable display. to start. That is, when the pending icon reaches the pending display position, the variable effect corresponding to the reached pending icon (the pending icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative pattern 8m
While 1, 8mc, and 8mr continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the third
Decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. That is, when the suspension icon 9C is a black ball suspension icon, the stop display of the three decorative patterns is not simultaneous, and the timing of the stop of the first decorative pattern is the timing of the stop of the second and third decorative patterns. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stop-displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but the opposite is also possible. Also, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time the change occurs (or may be random). Furthermore, the timing at which the three decorative symbols stop may be different. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical holding icon 9C with a relatively medium expectation of winning,
While the three decorative symbols (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to fluctuate at the same time, the stop display is not all at the same time and the timing is shifted at least partly.
As shown in FIG. 60(F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears) effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was in the first hold display position
moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern,
Two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) out of the second decorative design and third decorative design start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be variably displayed before the reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), at the same time when the star-shaped pending icon 9A reaches the pending display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be variably displayed. In this embodiment, the two decorative designs (the second decorative design and the third decorative design) are supposed to start changing before the first decorative design, but the opposite is also possible. Also, which one starts to change first may change (or may be random) each time it changes. Furthermore, the timings at which the three decorative symbols start to change may be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stop-displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be variably displayed. be. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(J), two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) are stop-displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stop-displayed before the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbols and the third decorative symbols), but the opposite is also possible. Also, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time the change occurs (or may be random). Furthermore, the timing at which the three decorative symbols stop may be different. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped reserved icon 9C with a relatively high probability of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) , the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different.
After FIG. 60(J), at the same time that the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, three decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design and third decorative design) are displayed. Start variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8
r, second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Variation timing change effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIG. FIG. 61(A) and FIG. 61(B) of the variable timing change effect C are shown in FIG. 60(F) of the variable timing change effect B.
and FIG. 60(G). That is, FIG. 61 (A) of the fluctuation timing change effect C
60(A) to 60(E) are executed before . In FIG. 61(A), after the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c and 8r are stopped and displayed, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc and 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. . The first decorative design is the left decorative design 8l,
It is a set of symbols including a middle decorative symbol 8c and a right decorative symbol 8r, and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop symbols. The second decorative designs are the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C,
It is a set of symbols including a right decorative symbol 8R, and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative design is left decorative design 8ml, middle decorative design 8mc, right decorative design 8
It is a set of symbols including mr and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the black spherical suspension icon 9C displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). Two pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position. A star-shaped pending icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first pending display position. A white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the second suspension display position second from the right (the leftmost here). The difference in the shape and color of the pending icon represents the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A, a star-shaped pending icon, a black spherical pending icon, and a white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has two. The expectation of winning is the second highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was in the first hold display position
moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern,
Two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) out of the second decorative design and third decorative design start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be variably displayed before the reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward and stops in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative pattern disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to change. This suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect will start. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(D), three decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design and third decorative design) are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the first decorative design starts to fluctuate again, and the three decorative designs (the first decorative design, the second decorative design and the third decorative design) are all variably displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. Two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG.
All of the three decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design and third decorative design) are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit "555". Two decorative designs (second decorative design and third decorative design) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(J), two decorative symbols (second decorative symbol and third decorative symbol) are stop-displayed with the same winning combination as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 59(D) to (H), FIGS.
, as shown in FIGS. 61(D) to (H), after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and after the first effect, the first decorative pattern and a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display in a state where the second decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(G), in the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position due to the shift movement, the hold icon is displayed in the second decorative pattern. A corresponding change is initiated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(D) to (H) and FIGS. 61(D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, 3 The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second effect, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern does not start the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained,
Interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 59(H) to (J), (A), and FIGS.
, As shown in (A), after the first effect, without performing the second effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display to execute the third effect. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 59(D) to (H), FIGS.
As shown in (D) to (H), when the pending icon is star-shaped, the second effect is performed after the first effect, and when the pending icon is white spherical, after the first effect, A third performance is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the variation timing change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
59 (A) and (B), the second fluctuations in FIGS. 59 (C) to (F), and FIG. 59 (G
) to (J) may be performed in any order. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Also, the same type of variation may be performed repeatedly. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61 as well. The types of pending icons are not limited to the above examples.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. If the first decorative pattern 2l, the second decorative pattern 8L, and the third decorative pattern 8ml are patterns displayed on the image display device 7, the types, shapes, and display methods of the patterns are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative design 2l, the second decorative design 8L, and the third decorative design 8ml are not limited to the above-described modes of display that indicate that they are fluctuating. For example, the variable display may not be displayed on the image display device 7 . Also, the numbers may move at high speed and be displayed in an unrecognizable manner, or may be moved at a recognizable speed. Also, the fluctuation speed may change in the middle.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative pattern starts to change when the pending icon reaches the pending display position. However, it may be immediately before or after that. Here, "immediately before" or "immediately after" is, for example, a range of 2 to 3 seconds before and after.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
a first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stop-displayed after the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second decorative pattern starts the next variable display in a state where the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
In the second effect, before the pending icon arrives at the pending display position by shift movement, the second decorative pattern starts to change corresponding to the pending icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
In the first effect, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second effect, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first effect, without performing the second effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display A third effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 subordinate to aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in the first mode, the second effect is performed after the first effect,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, the third effect is performed after the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pattern direction changing effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. This symbol direction change effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pattern direction change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG. Also, the lamp control board 107
analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 when the instruction to execute the pattern direction changing presentation is included.

[Design direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. FIG. In the pattern direction change effect A,
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the decorative pattern 8L,
Of the 8C and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L
Each number that constitutes moves with its orientation (orientation) tilted to the right. i.e.
Each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number ("2" here) temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom left of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, Middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative design 8R are also called a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (orientation) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change their display positions and orientations while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented in the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
is positioned vertically above the position of . Then, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction, and move downward to the third position. Stop is displayed. . The third position is positioned below the second position in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), while the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the process of changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is
It enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variably displayed in a direction different from the variative direction of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves in a state where the direction (orientation) of the number is tilted leftward. That is, each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually decelerates until a specific number ("2
”) is positioned near the lower right of the display screen 7a, it stops temporarily. Next, FIG. 62(F)
, a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but it may be an image with different content. Specific image C
HA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making it difficult to see part of the specific number. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), an effect is performed in which the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change their display positions and orientations while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, and are oriented in the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and are stopped at that position. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(I), while the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative design 8C is variably displayed. In other words, the variation of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed in a different direction of variability. At this time, each number constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in a state (straight state) in which the direction (orientation) of the number is along the vertical direction. In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of variation, and the bottom of each number is the direction of travel (
downward). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually slows down until a certain number (here, "
2”) is positioned near the lower center of the display screen 7a, it stops temporarily. Next, FIG. 62 (
As shown in J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C), but is still displayed. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Design direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. FIG. In the pattern direction change effect B,
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the decorative pattern 8L,
Of the 8C and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves in a state where the orientation (orientation) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, Middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative design 8R are also called a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making the specific number partly invisible. This specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (orientation) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change their display position and orientation while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented in the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
is located vertically above the position of . Then, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction, and reach the third position. is displayed. The third position is positioned below the second position in the vertical direction.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8
C is not indicated. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the process of changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is framed in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a,
Move diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variably displayed in the same variative direction as the variative direction of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R is the direction (posture) of the number
moves while tilting to the left. That is, it moves in a state of being inclined to the same extent as the inclination of the number when the left decorative pattern 8L is changed. Each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decelerates and stops temporarily when a specific number ("2" in this case) is positioned near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA partially covers the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making the specific number partly invisible. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change their display positions and orientations while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and their orientations are aligned in the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and are stopped at that position. be done. While the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative design 8C is variably displayed. In other words, the variation of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed in the same variative direction. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C
Each number that constitutes moves with the orientation (orientation) of the number tilted to the left. i.e.
It moves in a state of being inclined at the same degree as the inclination of the numbers when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed. Each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually slows down until a specific number ("2" in this case)
) is positioned near the center of the display screen 7a, it stops temporarily.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, but it may be an image with different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C), making the specific number partly invisible. This specific image CHA also
The orientation (posture) is tilted in the same manner as the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C). a specific image CHA;
The specific numbers (middle decorative pattern 8C) are oriented.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(I), an effect is performed in which the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and their orientations are aligned in the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and are stopped at that position. be done. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L
, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Design direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. FIG. In the pattern direction change effect C,
First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the decorative pattern 8L,
Of the 8C and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves in a state where the orientation (orientation) of the number is tilted to the left. That is, each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number ("2" here) temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Left decorative pattern 8L, Middle decorative pattern 8
C and the right decorative design 8R are also called a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers part of the lower part of the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), making it difficult to see part of the specific number. This specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (orientation) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are oriented in the same direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change their display positions and orientations while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to the second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented in the vertical direction (straight). The second position is the first
is located vertically above the position of . Then, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction, and move downward to the third position. Stop is displayed. The third position is positioned below the second position in the vertical direction.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8
C is not indicated. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the process of changing, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R is framed in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a,
Move diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is variably displayed in the same variative direction as the variative direction of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R is the direction (posture) of the number
moves while leaning to the left. That is, it moves in a state of being inclined to the same extent as the inclination of the number when the left decorative pattern 8L is changed. Each number is slanted along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decelerates and stops temporarily when a specific number ("2" in this case) is positioned near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers part of the lower part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making the specific number partly invisible. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change their display positions and orientations while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. in particular,
The specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and their orientations are aligned in the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(H), it is stopped and displayed at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(I), the middle decorative design 8C is variably displayed while the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed in a different direction of variability. At this time, each number constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in a state (straight state) in which the direction (orientation) of the number is along the vertical direction. In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the advancing direction (downward). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually slows down until a certain number (
Here, "2") is temporarily stopped when positioned near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 64(J), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C).
is displayed and stopped. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the design direction change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the left decorative pattern is oriented along the first direction (for example, diagonally right). direction), and after the first effect, as shown in FIGS. (for example, the vertical direction) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62(A), in the second effect, the left decorative pattern reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, oblique right direction). After that, FIG. 62 (C
), while moving toward a second position positioned above the first position in the vertical direction, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction), and the second position moves toward the second position. After reaching the position, as shown in FIG. 62(D), it moves toward a third position located below the second position in the vertical direction while maintaining the orientation along the second direction. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C), in the second effect,
When the left decorative pattern reaches the first position and moves toward the second position, the specific image CH
A part becomes invisible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64 as well.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63(D), after the second effect, the right decorative pattern is moved from the non-displayed state to the first direction (for example, oblique right direction). 63(G), after the third effect, the right decorative pattern is displayed in the second direction. A fourth effect that is stopped and displayed in the forward direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64(I), after the fourth effect, the middle decorative pattern is oriented along the third direction (for example, the vertical direction) different from the first direction. , it is possible to execute a fifth effect that is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is the image display device 7.
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pattern direction change effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L bounces after being displayed in a variable manner and is in a direction along the vertical direction. good. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L may be tilted to the left and stopped after the bounce,
The stop display may be tilted sideways. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed by changing its direction without bouncing after being variably displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern direction change effects A, B, and C, the right decorative pattern may be visually recognizable (variable display is displayed) before the left decorative pattern stops, or after the left decorative pattern stops, Variation may be visible (variation indication displayed). The same applies to the middle decorative pattern.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the pattern direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the pattern direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be changed to the pattern direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the pattern direction change effects A and B, the pattern direction change effect C may be used as the variation direction and stop mode of the middle decorative pattern.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
a first effect in which the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the second effect, after the first decorative pattern reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative pattern positioned on one side in the vertical direction from the first position The direction becomes the direction along the second direction while moving toward the position, and after reaching the second position, the second position
A third position positioned on the other side in the vertical direction from the second position while maintaining the orientation along the direction of
move towards the position of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image;
In the second effect, when the first decorative pattern reaches the first position and then moves toward the second position, a portion of the first decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design that constitutes a set of decorative designs capable of informing whether or not the player wins together with the first decorative design,
After the second effect, the second decorative pattern is newly variably displayed in the direction along the first direction from a state in which it is not displayed. and
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative pattern is stop-displayed along the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design that constitutes a set of decorative designs capable of informing whether or not a win is made, together with the first decorative design;
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along a third direction different from the first direction and in a direction along the third direction. executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display means,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

65 to 67 will be used to explain the character symbol cooperation performances A to C. FIG. This character symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the character symbol cooperation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Also, the lamp control board 107
analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 when an instruction to execute the role product pattern cooperation performance is included.

[Character design collaboration production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the role item symbol cooperation effect A. FIG. The character symbol cooperation effect A is one of variation pattern effects including a pseudo-continuous effect, and FIGS. 65A to 65J are executed in one variation. In the character symbol cooperation production A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a variable manner. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop symbols. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including a temporary stop display), a pseudo-continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuation start suggestion effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a, and part of the display screen 7a. rest in the forward extended position covering the As the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually collapsed as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are distorted by being crushed by the second movable accessory 15, the player does not confirm the stopped and displayed symbols, and the variation is executed again. , i.e., a pseudo-continuation is executed. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or a shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are not displayed.
Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby notifying the player that this is a special effect. It is possible to make an impression and improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (including temporary stop display),
A pseudo continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in 5(G) is executed. The pseudo-continuation continuation suggestion effect is the same effect as the above-described pseudo-continuation start suggestion effect. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. Along with the movement to this advance position, the decorative patterns 8L and 8 displayed on the display screen 7a
The shape of C and 8R changes (deforms). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are interlocked with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15 and gradually collapse in shape. That is, decorative patterns 8L, 8C,
8R is crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted. It should be noted that the mode of deformation may be different from the simulated continuous start suggestion presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or a shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), the variable display is started again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

[Character design collaboration production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the role item symbol cooperation effect B. FIG. The role pattern cooperation production B is one of the variation pattern productions including the pseudo-continuous production. It is the next one variation including pseudo-continuous performance. First, FIG.
), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, two sets of decorative patterns are variably displayed. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop patterns. The second decorative design includes a left decorative design 8l, a middle decorative design 8c, and a right decorative design 8r, and is a set of designs that can notify whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed (including fixed stop display) at the same time. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, Figure 66
As shown in (C), the pending icon 9A at the first pending display position moves toward the pending display position. At this time, the second decorative designs 2l, 8c, and 8r of the two decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design) start the variable display. First decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R remain stopped. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be variably displayed before the pending icon 9A at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the pending display position.

Next, the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggesting effect, first, in a state in which the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decoration continues to stop at the previous determined stop display result "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo consecutive start suggestive display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed. It stands still at the forward advanced position covering part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo-continuation start suggestion display, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed again on the display screen 7a change in shape (deformation) as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8
C and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are distorted by being crushed by the second movable role 15, the player does not know that the stopped and displayed symbols are fixed, and the variation is executed again. , i.e., a pseudo-ream is executed. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. The image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or a shape. At this time, while the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r continue to be variably displayed. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same contents as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. can impress that
Interest can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c and 8r continue to be variably displayed, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are started to be variably displayed. As a result, both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and then, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8
C and 8R start variable display again. That is, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. After that, Figure 6
As shown in 6(J), first decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R and second decorative designs 2l, 8c, 8r
Both are displayed as definite stop. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

[Character design collaboration production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the role item symbol cooperation effect C. FIG. The character pattern cooperation production C is one of the variation pattern productions including the pseudo-continuous production. It is the next one variation including pseudo-continuous performance. First, FIG.
), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, two sets of decorative patterns are variably displayed. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop patterns. The second decorative design includes a left decorative design 8l, a middle decorative design 8c, and a right decorative design 8r, and is a set of designs that can notify whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop designs. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed (including fixed stop display) at the same time. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, Figure 67
As shown in (C), the pending icon 9A at the first pending display position moves toward the pending display position. At this time, the second decorative designs 2l, 8c, and 8r of the two decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design) start the variable display. First decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R remain stopped. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be variably displayed before the pending icon 9A at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the pending display position.

Next, the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggesting effect, first, in a state in which the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decoration continues to stop at the previous determined stop display result of "123". The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo consecutive start suggestive display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed. A portion of the screen 7a is covered and a rotation operation is performed at that position. As a result, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again after the display of the pseudo-continuation start suggestion are displayed as the second movable accessory 15.
The shape changes (deforms) with the downward movement and rotation of the . Here, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are cracked in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15,
The shape gradually collapses. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, distorted, and deformed so as to crack. The player can see the first
Since the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and distorted and cracked, the displayed stopped pattern is not fixed, and the variation is executed again.
That is, one can notice that a pseudo-ream is executed. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, the same character (that is, "OARO") as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in a large size near the center of the display screen 7a. . The image displayed on the display screen 7a is
Any image may be used as long as it is related to a specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and does not need to be completely the same color or shape. At this time, the first decorative pattern 8L
, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed. here,
Both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. , it is possible to impress the player that it is a special presentation, and to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the first decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative design 2
Both 1, 8c, 8r and , are started to be displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and after that, FIG. 67 (
As shown in I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again start to variably display. That is, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8
Both C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixed and stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the character pattern cooperation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG.
A first effect in which C and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the first effect as shown in FIG. 65(G),
A second effect in which the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position covering part of the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), in the second effect,
Along with the movement of the second movable accessory 15, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are distorted. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), the second movable accessory 15
has a decorative part labeled "OARO", and as shown in FIG. 65(H), after the second effect, a third effect in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. can be executed.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67 as well.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 66(C) to (J), FIGS.
As shown in , the first effect and the second effect are executed during one variation, and the first effect stops after the variation one before the variation in which the first effect is executed. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the displayed mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 66(G) to (J), FIGS.
, after the third effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) and 67(C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is a decorative design, and in the first production, the second decorative design is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the character symbol cooperation production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the character symbol cooperation production A, FIGS. 65A to 65J are assumed to be executed in one variation. However, FIGS. 65(A)-(B) and FIGS. 65(C)-(J) may be different variations.
In addition, in the character pattern cooperation effects B and C, Figs. 66(A) to (B) and Figs. (C) to (J) were assumed to be the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66(A) to (J) and FIGS. 67(A) to (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative symbols exemplified in the role item symbol cooperation productions A to C are examples thereof, and the present invention is not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to the distorted mode. For example, the decorative pattern may crumble and fall apart,
It may be the same shape but smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the role pattern cooperation production A, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. A set of decorative patterns 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
Although only L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear during the fluctuation display, or may not be continuously displayed in the fluctuation display. Here, the variable display refers to a state in which a variable state is displayed so as to be visually recognizable.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the role item pattern cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66(E) of the role object symbol cooperation effect B, the effect of FIG. 67(E) of the role object symbol cooperation effect C may be performed. Further, for example, in the pseudo-continuous production of the role product pattern cooperative production B shown in FIGS.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A game machine comprising a movable accessory movable in front of the display means,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the shape of the decorative pattern changes as the movable accessory moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable accessory moves.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
The movable accessory has a decorative portion representing a specific object,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific object is displayed on the display means can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3,
After the third production, a pseudo-continuous production is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one variation,
In the first effect, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in a mode in which it is stop-displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design different from the decorative design;
In the first effect, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image/symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. FIG. This specific image symbol cooperation effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperation effect is included, the first movable role 14 or the second movable role thing 1
5 is driven.

[Specific image pattern cooperation effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. FIG. In the specific image/symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including symbol images of left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by combining these stop symbols. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of line "123".
is displayed (including temporary stop display). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "horizontally aligned" includes not only strictly horizontal alignment but also approximately horizontal alignment. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

After that, the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68(C) is executed. In the pseudo-continuation start suggesting effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA is displayed as the stationary decorative pattern 8L.
, 8C, and 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here "
"Reciprocating along the horizontal direction" includes not only strictly horizontal movement but also approximately horizontal movement. That is, all objects that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R which are still displayed are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is
It is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the phrase “an image is displayed on the front side” with respect to other images means that the two images are displayed so as to be positioned on the front side (front side) when the two images are superimposed and displayed. Specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without missing in the overlapping portion of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and in the overlapping portion of the two images, the image is displayed without being displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to the other images.

As shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof.
As shown in 8(E), it overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, and an effect is performed in which the mode displayed on the front side of these patterns is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R,
Horizontal reciprocation is performed on the back side of these. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R
and a mode in which it is displayed on the back side thereof, and a mode in which it is displayed on the back side of both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 68(G). is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a fade-out effect is performed. in particular,
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the decorative patterns 8L, 8C.
, and 8R, the image gradually fades and becomes difficult to see (fades out). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. , i.e., a pseudo-ream is executed. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R start to be displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

[Specific image pattern cooperation effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. FIG. In the specific image symbol cooperation performance B, first, as shown in FIG. Stop display (including temporary stop display)
be done. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including symbol images of left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R, and a combination of these stop symbols can inform whether or not the player wins. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "horizontally aligned" includes not only strictly horizontal alignment but also approximately horizontal alignment. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

After that, the pseudo-continuous suggestive effects shown in FIGS. 69(B) and (C) are executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 68C of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. do. A specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the specific image CHA is displayed as the stationary decorative pattern 8L.
, 8C, and 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here "
"Reciprocating along the horizontal direction" includes not only strictly horizontal movement but also approximately horizontal movement. That is, all objects that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R which are still displayed are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is
It is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the phrase “an image is displayed on the front side” with respect to other images means that the two images are displayed so as to be positioned on the front side (front side) when the two images are superimposed and displayed. Specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without missing in the overlapping portion of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and in the overlapping portion of the two images, the image is displayed without being displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to the other images.

As shown in FIG. 69B, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R by reciprocating in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 68(E) of the symbol cooperation effect A, the effect is performed in which both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are superimposed, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the specific image CHA includes the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C,
It is displayed on the back side of 8R and reciprocates horizontally on these back sides. Decorative pattern 8
By reciprocating movement on the back side of L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. 69(C), both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are superimposed, and the mode displayed on the back side and the specific image As shown in FIG. 68(F) of the symbol cooperation effect A, the effect is performed in which both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are superimposed, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the specific image C
With the HA positioned on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the image is made to gradually fade out, making it difficult to see (fading out). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. , i.e., a pseudo-ream is executed. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed again. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot decision suggestion image CHB
is displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been decided, and here, the characters "You did it!" are displayed. Here, two jackpot determination suggestion images CHB are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggesting image CHB are newly displayed from above the display screen 7a by frame-in, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggesting image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed at the jackpot. Specific image CH
A and the jackpot determination suggestive image CHB are both displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot determination suggestive image CHB is displayed in front of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the specific image CH
In front of A, a jackpot decision suggestion image CHB is displayed. By overlapping a plurality of images in this manner, a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction can be produced, and interest can be improved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the jackpot confirmation suggestive image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is displayed along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed. to move back and forth. Left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C during stop display
, and right decorative symbols 8R are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA continues to display the decorative pattern 8L,
It is displayed on the front side of 8C and 8R. The specific image CHA is reciprocally moved in the horizontal direction,
As shown in FIG. 69(G), it overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed on the front side of these, and as shown in FIG. 69(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C Right decorative pattern 8
It is superimposed on both of R, and an effect is performed in which the aspect displayed on the front side of these is repeated.
After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), the specific image CHA includes the statically displayed decorative pattern 8L,
It is displayed on the back side of 8C and 8R, and reciprocates in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As shown in FIG. 69(H), by reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R,
A mode in which both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof;
As shown in FIG. 69(C), it overlaps with both the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L, and an effect is performed in which the mode displayed on the back side of these is repeated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are the specific image C
With the HA positioned on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the image is made to gradually fade out, making it difficult to see (fading out). As a result, the player can notice the start of the big winning game since the stop-displayed big winning decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R gradually become difficult to see. Thereby, improvement of interest can be aimed at. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(J), a right-handed shot image MGU is displayed, and then a jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image pattern cooperation effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. FIG. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including symbol images of left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R, and a combination of these stop symbols can inform whether or not the player wins. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position. The specific image CHA is displayed superimposed on the variably displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specific image CH
In A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed from above the display screen 7a by frame-in,
The display screen 7a moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specific image CH
A is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Specific image CHA
represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents Smiley's face. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the specific image CHA is changed to the decorative pattern 8L displayed in a variable manner.
, 8C, and 8R, and reciprocates along the horizontal direction. Here, "horizontally reciprocating movement" includes movement in a strictly horizontal direction as well as movement in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, all objects that can be recognized by a person skilled in the art as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CH
A is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the phrase “an image is displayed on the front side” with respect to other images means that the two images are displayed so as to be positioned on the front side (front side) when the two images are superimposed and displayed. Specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without missing in the overlapping portion of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and in the overlapping portion of the two images, the image is displayed without being displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to the other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R
slows down, and the number starts to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while being visible. Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, it overlaps a plurality of moving numeral images forming the left decorative design 8L. At this time as well, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeric image forming the left decorative design 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R
slows down, and the number starts to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while being visible. on the other hand,
The variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further decelerated, and a specific number (here, "1") is stopped and displayed. Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the right decorative pattern 8R
overlaid with moving digit images that make up the . Moreover, it overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L during the stop display. At this time as well, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeric image forming the right decorative design 8R. In addition, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L that is being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R
slows down, and the number starts to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while being visible. on the other hand,
The right decorative pattern 8R further slows down and is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the middle decorative pattern 8C
overlaid with moving digit images that make up the . It also overlaps the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R during stop display. At this time as well, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeric image forming the middle decorative pattern 8C. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 during stop display
displayed on the front side of each of the R's.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), after the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the missing eye "167", a change effect is executed in which the shape of the specific image CHA is changed. Here, as one of the change effects, an effect in which the specific image CHA becomes larger is performed, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, the specific image CHA may change to a different image content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. With this change effect, the decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed at the outset
, 8C, and 8R can be expected to change again, and the interest can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a multiple effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images CHA are displayed. Here, as one of the pluralization effects, an effect in which one specific image CHA is additionally displayed is performed, but the pluralization mode is not limited to this. For example, the specific image CHA
may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added continues to reciprocate on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA reciprocates on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed. With this multiplication effect, it is possible to further increase the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed due to the misalignment will change again.
Interest can be improved.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA are framed out. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward and the other moves downward, and simultaneously out of the frame. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), a pseudo-ream suggesting image NKM is displayed to suggest that the decorative symbols start changing again (start of a pseudo-ream).
Here, the pseudo-repeat suggestive image NKM shows the characters "second time!!" indicating the number of pseudo-repeats. At this time, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(J), when the pseudo-continuation suggestive image NKM disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again variably displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the specific image pattern cooperation production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(F)~
As shown in (G), after the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(D) to (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect and the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG.
R includes pattern images of a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R that can notify whether or not a win is achieved. After the image CHA is displayed overlapping one or more of the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping one or more other pattern images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68B to 68G, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are horizontally aligned and displayed stationary. , and the specific image CHA move reciprocally along the horizontal direction.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), in the first effect,
After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed while the specific image CHA is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. , 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(H), after the second effect,
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are faded out to make them difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the specific image symbol cooperation production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image/pattern cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA overlaps with two pattern images at the same time. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap only one pattern image, or may overlap three pattern images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may draw an arc or meander. In addition, it may move left and right while swinging in the vertical direction. Furthermore, you may stop on the way.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image pattern cooperation effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified as specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear during the fluctuation display, or may not be continuously displayed in the fluctuation display. Here, the variable display refers to a state in which a variable state is displayed so as to be visually recognizable.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image pattern cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, FIG.
) to (I), FIGS. 70(A) to (J) may be executed. Also, for example, FIG.
) to (J), FIG. 69(D) to (J) may be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image;
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the first production and the second production, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
The decorative pattern includes a plurality of pattern images capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
In the first effect, after the specific image is displayed overlapping one or more of the plurality of pattern images, it is displayed overlapping another one or more of the plurality of pattern images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
In the first effect, the pattern images are displayed side by side in a first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first effect, after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed while the specific image is not displayed, the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern by frame-in. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see by fading out.
A gaming machine characterized by:

71 to 73, the decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be described below. This decorative pattern mode change effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern mode change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main command is read. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Decorative pattern mode change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol mode change effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7
A decorative design variation performance (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may or may not disappear after being variably displayed at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowed down. The display fluctuates while At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the far side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the moving speed of the left decorative design 8L is further slowed down, and one of the left decorative designs 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") moves to the left decorative design. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stop-displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the left decorative pattern 8L rotates horizontally at the stop display position, and then the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is
From the aspect of the image of the number "9", the image of the number "9" is slightly smaller and the number "
9" image changes to a mode in which the character image is attached to the lower right of the image. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowing down. The display fluctuates while That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is gradually displayed larger toward the near side of the display screen 7a as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the moving speed of the right decorative design 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative designs 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) moves to the right decorative design. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. At this time, the direction of rotation of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position, the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is
From the aspect of the image of the number "5", the image of the number "5" is slightly smaller and the number "
5" image changes to a mode in which the character image is attached to the lower right of the image. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further slows down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) moves to the middle decorative pattern It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position, the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is
From the aspect of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller and the number "
3” image is attached to the lower right of the image of the character. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the middle decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8
The L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern mode change effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol mode change effect B. FIG. In the decorative pattern mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
A decorative design variation performance (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may disappear once or may not disappear after being variably displayed at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed while moving along a linear track from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a in an oblique upper left direction while the moving speed is slowed down. . At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the far side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further reduced, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") moves to the left decorative pattern. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stop-displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the left decorative pattern 8L rotates horizontally at the stop display position, and then the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is
From the aspect of the image of the number "9", the image of the number "9" is slightly smaller and the number "
9" image changes to a mode in which the character image is attached to the lower right of the image. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side in the diagonally downward left direction while the moving speed is slowed down. . That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is gradually displayed larger toward the near side of the display screen 7a as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the moving speed of the right decorative design 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative designs 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") moves to the right decorative design. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. The direction of rotation of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally at the stop display position, the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is
From the aspect of the image of the number "5", the image of the number "5" is slightly smaller and the number "
5" image changes to a mode in which the character image is attached to the lower right of the image. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further slows down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) moves to the middle decorative pattern It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stop-displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction. Also, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position, the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is
From the aspect of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller and the number "
3” image is attached to the lower right of the image of the character. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the middle decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8
L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol mode change effect C. FIG. In the decorative pattern mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
A decorative design variation performance (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may or may not disappear after being variably displayed at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowed down. The display fluctuates while At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the far side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the moving speed of the left decorative design 8L is further reduced, and one of the left decorative designs 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") moves to the left decorative design. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stop-displayed. Specifically, the number "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L
” image changes from blue to red. The left decorative pattern 8L may be of any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the left decorative pattern 8L has a different aspect of the image of the red numeral "9". Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is changed from the mode of the red number "9" image to the red number "9" image that is slightly smaller and the red number "9" image to the lower right of the red number "9" image. The image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to bend leftward from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowing down. The display fluctuates while That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is gradually displayed larger toward the near side of the display screen 7a as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the moving speed of the right decorative design 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative designs 8R (the image of the number "5" in this embodiment) moves to the right decorative design. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R
” image changes from blue to red. The right decorative pattern 8R may be of any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), the right decorative pattern 8R has a different aspect of the previous image of the red number "5". Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the aspect of the image of the red number "5" to the image of the red number "5" that is slightly smaller and the image of the red number "5" to the lower right of the image of the red number "5". The image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stop display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed is slowed down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further slowed down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the number "3" in this embodiment) moves to the middle decorative pattern The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C
” image changes from blue to red. In addition, the color of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C changes the aspect of the image of the red numeral "3". Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the mode of the red number "3" image to the red number "3" image slightly smaller and the red number "3" image to the lower right of the red number "3" image. The image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in a state where the mode is changed at the stop-display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the middle decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed as the mode of losing (losing design). The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS.
R is variably displayed in a first mode (for example, numbers, etc.), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed while changing from the first mode to a second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.), and decoration Design 8L
, 8C and 8R are stopped in the second manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS.
R changes from the first form to the second form at the rest display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8
The R changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating laterally at the stop display position.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
is variably displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving along a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, and the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L
is displayed gradually smaller as it moves, and the right decorative pattern 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all variably displayed while moving in different directions, but two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be variably displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative design 8C may be variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. .
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R other than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R at the stop display position disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position are not erased and displayed. good too.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the first mode (for example, numbers, etc.)
, the display is changed from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.), and the display is stopped in the second mode. Various aspects such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the pattern are included. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Also, the number of times of change may be one or more.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are variably displayed in this order, changed from the first mode to the second mode, and displayed stopped. The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first mode;
a second effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed while changing from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode;
a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative design has a first decorative design and a second decorative design,
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is variably displayed while moving along the first direction,
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, it is variably displayed while moving along a second direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the first production of the first decorative pattern, the display is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc,
In the first rendering of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5,
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed gradually smaller as it moves,
In the first effect of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed gradually larger as it moves,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol variation area effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. This decorative design variable area effect can be executed during the decorative design variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern variation area effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Decorative pattern variation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation area effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74A, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). The positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
, is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), in the first display region R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display region R1, and the left decorative pattern All the variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (the number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. and the first
A part of the display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)).
Then, while moving slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not to form a ready-to-win state together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern). Perform a reach-inciting performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) does not stop at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, it does not form a ready-to-win state together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern). Right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed such that its part overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display region R1.
Then, part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. The right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern), a reach state is formed. If you do, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), 2 display area R2
is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the first display area R
1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and extends vertically in the second display region R2. It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display region R1. and,
A part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R moves from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually becoming smaller (while shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R further moves from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually becoming smaller (while shrinking). And left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R is displayed (returned) within the first display region R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a failed mode (
Lost pattern) is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern variation area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation area effect B. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75A, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). The positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
, is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), in the first display region R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display region R1, and the left decorative pattern All the variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (the number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. and the first
A part of the display area R1 is visible through the transparent left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), an effect is performed in which the once disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)).
Then, while moving slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not to form a ready-to-win state together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern). Perform a reach-inciting performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (the number "3" pattern) does not stop at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, it does not form a ready-to-win state together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern). Right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed such that its part overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display region R1.
Then, part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. The right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern), a reach state is formed. If you do, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), 2 display area R2
is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the first display area R
1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. A part of the first display region R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the transparent right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and extends vertically in the second display region R2. It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display region R1. and,
A part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the middle decorative pattern 8C having transparency.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), in the second display region R2, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been stop-displayed disappear from the second display region R2 and the left decorative pattern is displayed. All of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R that have disappeared appear again. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the first display area R1 in a reduced state. Thus, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed.
is stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Decorative pattern variation area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation area effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76A, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). The positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
, is displayed in the first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), in the first display region R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display region R1, and the left decorative pattern All the variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. and the first
A part of the display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)).
Then, while moving slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not to form a ready-to-win state together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern). Perform a reach-inciting performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) and the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, after forming the ready-to-win state, another ready-to-win effect may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), an effect is executed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C that has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and extends vertically in the second display region R2. It is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the central upper portion of the first display region R1. Then, part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R moves from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually becoming smaller (while shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R further moves from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually becoming smaller (while shrinking). And left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8
R is displayed (returned) within the first display region R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the mode of losing (
Lost pattern) is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative design variation area effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the display screen 7 of the display device 7
Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the first display region R1 (first region) of a (display means)
is variably displayed, and after the first effect, the decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R are enlarged and variably displayed as compared with the first effect.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second effect, at least some of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are enlarged and variably displayed are displayed in the first display area R1. is displayed overlaid on the According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the first display region R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, an effect is given as to whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form the ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute a third effect to perform. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which no state is formed and the symbols are stopped and displayed as a failing pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the second display region R2 to the first display region R1 while shrinking. A fifth effect that is displayed to do can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative design variation area effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
74 to 76, the display screen 7 of the display device 7 is
Although the first display region R1 in a has a rectangular shape, it is not limited to this, and may have a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a square shape, or the like. Also, various shapes can be adopted for the shape of the second display region R2. Also, the second display region R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative design variation area productions A to C, the enlarged left decorative design 8L is displayed.
, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping the first display region R1, but may be displayed so as not to overlap the first display region R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display region R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative pattern variable area productions A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and variably displayed in the ready-to-win stage production to determine whether or not to form the ready-to-win state. In various effects, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and variably displayed.
[Modification 4]
74 to 76, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. good too.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first area of the display means;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the decorative pattern is enlarged and variably displayed in a second area including the first area of the display means, compared to the first effect; is executable to
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the second effect, at least part of the decorative pattern that is enlarged and variably displayed is displayed overlapping the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2,
In the first effect, after the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first region of the display means, the decorative pattern disappears from the first region.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the decorative pattern forms a reach state in the second area of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, in the second area of the display means, the decorative pattern does not form a ready-to-win state, and a fourth effect is further executed in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a lost pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-6,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further execute a fifth effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while shrinking.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation prompting effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. This operation promoting effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation promotion effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation Promoting Effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation prompting effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character C
A battle between RA and enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. At this time, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a size change effect is executed. The resizing effect is
This is an effect that the size of the button image BG is enlarged and displayed. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is
displaying a button image BG, which is an image simulating the production button 63 seen from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface;
This is an effect of rotating as indicated by an arrow YG about a direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. therefore,
A portion that is not displayed is formed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. In the press-promoting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button-enlarging effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing forward gradually turns upward. A button image BG is arranged at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "press"
is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop production (jackpot), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8
C, the right effect pattern 8R stops at the same number to form a so-called parallel pattern. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG of "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won over the enemy character CRB.

[Operation Promoting Effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation prompting effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character C
A battle between RA and enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. At this time, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is
This is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves across the display screen 7a from one peripheral edge to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is
displaying a button image BG, which is an image simulating the production button 63 seen from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface;
This is an effect of rotating as indicated by an arrow YG about a direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. therefore,
A portion that is not displayed is formed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. In the press-promoting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button-enlarging effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing forward gradually turns upward. A button image BG is arranged at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "press"
is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop production (jackpot), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8
C, the right effect pattern 8R stops at the same number to form a so-called parallel pattern. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG of "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won over the enemy character CRB.

[Operation Promoting Effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation prompting effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game. Also, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7". Note that the display screen 7
A button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character C
A battle between RA and enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. A button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is
This is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, if the top surface of white is blue, green,
It is a condition that it is changed to red. This suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is
displaying a button image BG, which is an image simulating the production button 63 seen from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface;
It is rotated as indicated by an arrow YG about a direction perpendicular to its upper surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. therefore,
A portion that is not displayed is formed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

When the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 79(G), the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the press-promoting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button-enlarging effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing forward gradually turns upward. A button image BG is arranged at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. At this time,"
A message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped at "8". A message image MG of "defeated" is also displayed to indicate that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. note that,
There is also a case where the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) shifts to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79(H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation prompting effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, the button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and the direction perpendicular to the top surface is rotated as indicated by the arrow YG (FIG. 77 ( E), FIG. 78 (
E), FIG. 79(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a, and there is a part not displayed at the end (FIGS. 77(F), 78(F), and 79(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is a effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves across the display screen 7a from one peripheral edge to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a (FIG. 78(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pressing promotion effect is executed. In the press-promoting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button-enlarging effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the upper surface facing forward gradually turns upward. A button image BG is arranged at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77(G), 78(G), and 79(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of displaying the button image BG is performed first (FIGS. 77(C) and (D), FIG. 78(C), and FIGS. 79(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be directed to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to improving the interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) is changed to FIG.
There may be a transition to the fixed stop effect (loss) shown in . That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to widen the range of effects and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Modifications of the operation prompting presentation are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect were performed as a series of effects.
Either button rotation effect or button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
Although the above is an example of the effect in the variation during the time-saving game, it may be applied to the variation in the normal game that is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, the size change effect (FIG. 77(D)) and the color change effect (FIG. 79(D)) are performed. Such a size change effect or a color change effect may be triggered by, for example, entering a game ball. For example, it can be considered to be the timing when the second special figure reservation has increased. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set it as the timing of over-winning.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
In the operation prompting effect for promoting the operation of the operation unit, an operation unit image simulating the operation unit is displayed on the display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and rotated about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect that makes
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promotion effect includes an enlargement effect in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and the end portion thereof is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral edge to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation promotion effect includes a promotion effect that displays the operation unit image and prompts the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After passing through a display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in the display screen, the operation promoting effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even if the display effect is executed, there is a case where the transition to the operation promotion effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or aspect B1-6,
In the display effect, when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display effect is executed from the start of variation of the effect pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Win/lose notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. This winning/losing notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Result announcement A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect A. FIG.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(A). The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a performance that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, allied character CR
A production is performed in which A's attack hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. Note that the stock number of button images BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press-promoting effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above it. Further, the stock button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the press-promoting effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above it. Further, the stock button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top. The press-promoting effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is a rainbow background R in which the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow.
It is a production that will be B. The rainbow background RB is a background for determining the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Result announcement B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification effect B. FIG.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(A). The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a performance that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, allied character CR
A production is performed in which A's attack hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. Note that the stock number of button images BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a pressing promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press-promoting effect (initial), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above it. Further, the stock button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the pressing promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the press-promoting effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above it. Further, the stock button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top. The press-promoting effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running out. Here, a state in which the stocked button images BG are used up is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped at "8".

[Result announcement C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect C. FIG.
First, after the variation start effect is executed to start the variation of the effect symbols, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(A). The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the attack of the ally character CRA is the enemy character CR
Perform a performance that hits B.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, allied character CR
A production is performed in which A's attack hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, allied character CR
A production is performed in which A's attack hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(F). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a.
Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of eight button images BG are stocked. Note that the stock number of button images BG suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is a rainbow background R in which the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow.
It is a production that will be B. The rainbow background RB is a background for determining the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning/losing notification effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a button get effect is performed in which the button image BG is stocked (Figs. 80(B)(D), 81(B)(D), )), after that, when the player presses the effect button 63, a pressing promotion effect for digesting the stock button image BG is performed (FIGS. 80(E) and (F), FIGS. 81(E) and (F)). , During the depression promotion effect, a big win confirmation effect is performed (FIG. 80(G)). According to this configuration, pressing the effect button 63 announces the winning or losing of the big win, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed a plurality of times. Also, in one button get effect, one or more button images BG are stocked (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), FIGS. 81 (B) (D), FIGS. 82 (B) (D) (F) ). According to this configuration, the stock of button images BG that enable operation of the effect button 63 increases step by step, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of button images BG stocked by the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. According to this configuration, the stock number of button images BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a big win confirmation effect for reporting the confirmation of a big win (FIGS. 80(G) and 82(G)). According to this configuration, the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority when the big win confirmation effect is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the button get effect is executed, the big win confirmation effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82(B), (D), (F) (
G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the winning/losing notification effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, as the effect of confirming the big win, the effect is performed in which the ally character CRA appears and the background is the rainbow background RB. On the other hand, any kind of effect may be used to notify the confirmation of the big win. For example, a full rotation effect may be performed in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are rotated in a so-called parallel state. Further, for example, a premium effect may be provided in which a premium image that confirms a big win is displayed. For example, the effect may be such that the effect button 63 is vibrated, air is sent toward the player, or a specific lamp is lit.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the pressing promotion effect, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top (FIG. 81(F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed and the stocked button images BG are used up, the game is lost (FIG. 81(G)). On the other hand, it is also possible to perform an effect that clearly indicates that the player has lost the selection during the pressing promotion effect.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example of notifying the winning or losing of the jackpot lottery, but it is also possible to notify the winning or losing of the lottery of the number of rounds when the jackpot is won, or the hearth winning or losing of the lottery for transition to the high-certainty state after the jackpot game. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
a first effect in which an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on a display screen; a second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit; It is possible to execute a win-lose notification effect including a third effect that can notify win-loss in a specific lottery in the middle of 2 effects,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first effect is a effect in which one or more operation unit images are stocked multiple times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
Suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery by the stock number of the operation unit images in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The specific lottery in the third production is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third production is a confirmation production that notifies the confirmation of the jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
Without executing the second effect, the third effect can be executed after the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The fixed effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates with the production patterns aligned,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation section image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and executes the main command. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Operation part image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image display effect A. FIG. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), during the round game after the big win is confirmed, an effect (
MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed. Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a big win, this is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to upgrade the number of rounds from 4R to the maximum number of rounds of 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 reading "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds (for example, 16R) in this jackpot. Also, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. With this, MA with one operation
It suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not X can be acquired. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64 . The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 . A button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63 . The sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG so as to be superimposed thereon, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG is superimposed is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the sword image K
A button image BG is displayed in front of G so as to be superimposed thereon. Button image B in sword image KG
The portion where G overlaps is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.
Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when displayed in FIGS. 83(C) and (D). The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 83(E) and (F). The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 83(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image S
A G is displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period during which the sword member 64 can be operated. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation facilitating image SG instructs the player to
4, and a character image MG4 of "Squeeze in!!!" is displayed here. The operation prompting image SG is superimposed on the sword image KG and displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and confirms acquisition of MAX, a character image MG5 reading "Acquire MAX!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation part image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an operation section image display effect B. FIG. In the operation section image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG.
MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed. Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a big win, this is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to upgrade the number of rounds from 4R to the maximum number of rounds of 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 reading "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds (for example, 16R) in this jackpot. Also, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. With this, MA with one operation
It suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not X can be acquired. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64 . The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 . The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG only with a different size. A button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63 . The sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG,
A portion of the button image BG over which the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the sword image K
A button image BG is displayed in front of G so as to be superimposed thereon. Button image B in sword image KG
The portion where G overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, button image BG and sword image K
G is displayed smaller than when it was displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG.
It is displayed larger than when it was displayed in C) and (D). Note that the display screen 7
The character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG.
It is displayed larger than when it was displayed in E) and (F). Note that the display screen 7
The character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the button image BG and the sword image KG in FIG. 84(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(I), the sword image KG, the timer bar TB, and the operation promotion image S
A G is displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period during which the sword member 64 can be operated. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation facilitating image SG instructs the player to
4, and a character image MG4 of "Squeeze in!!!" is displayed here. The operation prompting image SG is superimposed on the sword image KG and displayed in front of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player pushes the sword member 64 and confirms acquisition of MAX, a character image MG5 reading "Acquire MAX!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation part image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image display effect C. FIG. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), during the round game after the big win is confirmed, an effect (
MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed. Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a big win, this is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to upgrade the number of rounds from 4R to the maximum number of rounds of 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 reading "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds (for example, 16R) in this jackpot. Also, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. With this, MA with one operation
It suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not X can be acquired. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64 . The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 . A button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63 . The sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG so as to be superimposed thereon, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG is superimposed is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, button image B
G is an image with transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are shown in FIG.
appears smaller than it did in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B). Note that the character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a
3 is displayed as is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. Sword image KG
Among them, the portion where the button image BG is superimposed is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). The character images CG and MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. Sword image KG
Among them, the portion where the button image BG is superimposed is in a state where the button image BG is transparent and can be visually recognized. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. A portion of the sword image KG over which the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). The character images CG and MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button images BG shown in FIGS. 85(B) to (H). A timer bar TB indicates an effective period for receiving an operation of the production button 63 .
The timer bar TB overlaps the bottom of the button image BG and is displayed in front of the button image BG. The operation prompting image SG is an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and a character image MG6 of "Press!!!" is displayed here. The operation prompting image SG is superimposed on the button image BG and displayed in front of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), when the player presses the effect button 63 and the MAX cannot be obtained, a character image MG7 reading "MAX acquisition failed!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. be.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation section image display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the button image BG (first operating section image) and the sword image KG (second operating section image) are displayed so as to overlap each other. and
A second effect in which either one of the button image BG and the sword image KG is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed in front of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visible through the button image BG. displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, the third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation section image display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation section image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but are not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a jackpot game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation section image display effects A to C are performed in the effect (MAX acquisition challenge effect) for determining whether or not the maximum number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the big win. It is not limited to this. For example, an effect for determining whether or not a specific effect will succeed, an effect for determining whether a big win or not, an effect for determining whether a normal big win or a variable probability big win, etc. may be performed.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation section image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. , or may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
83 to 85, in the operation section image display effects A to C, the button image BG is the same as the image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Although the image is used, the operation part image includes the effect button 63 and the sword member 64.
, the sword button 65, and other images representing the appearance of various operation units can be used.
[Modification 5]
83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and sword image KG, and the button image BG and sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image.
Also, the portion of the background image where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
a first operation unit and a second operation unit that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first operating section image representing the first operating section;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second operating section image representing the second operating section;
a first effect in which the first operation section image and the second operation section image are displayed so as to overlap;
a second effect in which one of the first operation section image and the second operation section image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first effect, the first operation section image is displayed in front of the second operation section image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation portion image located behind the first operation portion image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation portion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation part image is displayed so as to overlap in front of the first operation part image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third effect, a portion of the first operation portion image located behind the second operation portion image is difficult to be visually recognized by the second operation portion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5,
The size of the first operation section image displayed in the first effect and the size of the first operation section image displayed in the third effect are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Appearance/disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawings, and the image is displayed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawing. be.

This effect of appearance and disappearance of the effect button is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation), during the jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which profits are given to the player, and the like. Operation of the production button 63 by the player (pressing operation)
This intention can be reflected in the progress of the production. That is, the various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, the command to start the variation effect, the pre-determination command, the opening command of various jackpot games, the round designation command of the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game) If the instruction to execute the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is analyzed, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁

Here, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A will be described first, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C will be described in order.

[Appearance and disappearance of production button A]
First, the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button is
When the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable performance of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win state is selected from a plurality of types of ready-to-win state. In the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design (number).
is temporarily stopped (in this case, temporary stop is displayed at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach.

When reach is formed, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. , and displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 is inscribed with the English word "PUSH".
In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation (variation effect start command) to be a big hit, for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing)
→ The expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (big hit)).

When reach is formed, it becomes the start of the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button that can perform the appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button, the timing starts, and the effect button continues until the end of the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button. Appearance and disappearance effects can be performed. In other words, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button determines the effective period during which the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed. It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the production button. In the present embodiment, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 displays as shown in FIG. 86(B). An image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which all the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is the same) or a similar image (a part or all of the characteristic information) is displayed on the upper left side of the screen 7a. Similar images (light emission modes may be the same or different.
)), the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as the second effect button image BTN2, and the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 86(C),
The second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the device 7 .

Further, when the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, as shown in FIG. In order to be displayed and prompt the player to operate (press operation) the production button 63,
A first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

Further, when the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, the second production button image BT displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86(E).
N2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the image display device 7.
The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

After that, at the end of the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button, that is, when the effective period during which the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. "7", the number "9" for the middle decorative design 8C, and the number "7" for the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the number "7" for the left decorative design 8L, the number "9" for the middle decorative design 8C, and the number "9" for the right decorative design 8R. "7" was stopped, and the error was confirmed and displayed. 7”) are stop-displayed together, a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player.

In the state where the reach shown in FIG. 86A is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (depresses) the effect button 63. operation), it is performed within the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button
6(B) to FIG. 86(E) are not performed, and when the execution period of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is terminated, the left decorative pattern 8L, shown in FIG. 86(F), The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed.

Thus, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at random positions (arbitrary positions) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap the first effect button image BTN. there is

[Appearance and disappearance of production button B]
Next, the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button is
When the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable performance of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win state is selected from a plurality of types of ready-to-win state. In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design (number).
(Here, the temporary stop is displayed at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach.

When reach is formed, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. , and displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 is inscribed with the English word "PUSH".
In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing)
→ The expectation of a big hit is set high in the order of 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (rich jackpot)).

When reach is formed, it becomes the start of the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button that can perform the appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button, the timing starts, and the effect button continues until the end of the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button. Appearance and disappearance effects can be performed. In other words, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button determines the effective period during which the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed. It is a period that can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the production button. In the present embodiment, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). good.

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the image display device 7 displays as shown in FIG. 87(B). Hole images MH imitating a hole in a mole are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen 7a near the upper side, and a hole image M imitating a hole in a mole is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
H is formed, and hole images MH simulating mole holes are displayed on the left and right sides near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a mole hole is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Five simulated hole images MH are displayed. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

An image simulating a mole with a smiling face (hereinafter referred to as "smiling mole image") "MCH1" is displayed from the hole image MH on the left side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the face appears. , above the smiley mole image MCH1, an image identical to the first effect button image BTN (an image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button is all the same) or a similar image (an image identical to the characteristic information) is displayed. A second effect button image B as a partial or all similar image (light emission mode may be the same or different))
It is displayed in a manner in which TN2 appears arranged. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87(C),
The second effect button image B displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
TN2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an image simulating a mole with a dizzy face (hereinafter referred to as an image) is displayed from the smiling mole image MCH1. , ``Blind mole image''.) is displayed in a changed manner to MCH2. Note that the second effect button image B
While TN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued. be.

Further, when the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87(D), colored glasses (for example, black glasses) are displayed from the hole image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. An image simulating a mole with a masked face (hereinafter referred to as a "spectacled mole image") is displayed in a manner in which MCH3 shows its face. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the production button 63, a first production button image B imitating the production button 63 is displayed.
TN is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. In addition, the spectacled mole image MCH is displayed together with the spectacled mole image MCH3.
In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the head of BTN3.

When the player again operates (depresses) the production button 63 a plurality of times (three times in this case),
As shown in FIG. 87(E), the spectacled mole image MCH3 is converted to the spotted mole image MCH2.
is displayed in a changed form. Spectacled mole image MCH3 is smiling mole image MCH1
, and when the spectacled mole image MCH3 appears, the production button 6
Unless 3 is operated (depressed operation) a plurality of times (three times in this case), the spectacled mole image MCH3, which is hard to hit, does not change to the lightheaded mole image MCH2. In addition, the first
The effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued. In addition, together with the spectacled mole image MCH3, the spectacled mole image MCH3
When the second production button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the head of the player, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63 a plurality of times (three times in this case),
The second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
At the same time, the spectacled mole image MCH3 is displayed in a manner changed to the dark spotted mole image MCH2.

When the player further operates (depresses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87(F), the smiley mole image MCH1 moves from the hole image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The smiley mole image MCH1
A second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the head of the player. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87(G),
The second effect button image B displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
TN2 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a manner changed from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the blinking mole image MCH2. Note that the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the first effect button image BTN continues to emit light from the image display device 7 in a predetermined state. 7 display screen 7
a.

Further, when the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87(I),
The smiling mole image MCH1 is displayed in a manner changed to the twinkling mole image MCH2. It should be noted that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state in which the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

After that, at the end of the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button, that is, when the effective period during which the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. "7", the number "9" for the middle decorative design 8C, and the number "7" for the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the number "7" for the left decorative design 8L, the number "9" for the middle decorative design 8C, and the number "9" for the right decorative design 8R. "7" was stopped, and the error was confirmed and displayed. 7”) are stop-displayed together, a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player.

87(A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (depresses) the effect button 63. operation), it is performed within the appearance and disappearance effect execution period of the effect button
7(B) to FIG. 87(I) are not performed, and when the execution period of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is terminated, the left decorative pattern 8L, shown in FIG. 87(J), The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacled mole image MCH3 appear.

[Appearance and Disappearance of Production Button C]
Next, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect button is
It is carried out during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, and is carried out when a predetermined condition is established (for example, before the jackpot performance ends,
It is not done if there is a so-called "holding group", which is a big hit in the holding ball). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command. In addition, when the effect of the holding series is not performed, in other words, there is no reserved ball that will become a big hit before the big win effect ends.

In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG.
On the display screen 7a, the player can select an effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) in a specific period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game). A mode selection screen appears. In the specific period, a first period (production mode selection period) for selecting the production mode, and a mode transition to the production mode selected after the first period (production mode selection period) has passed. The second period (production mode decision notification period). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game)), In order to carry out a slogan effect that displays the slogan of the game machine maker and an addiction prevention effect that displays a warning against addiction to the game, the start of the predetermined period and the end of the specific period are the same. ing.

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the player is instructed to operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation).
A first effect button image B imitating the effect button 63 in order to prompt the selection of the effect mode by
TN is arranged at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The English word "
PUSH" is engraved on it. Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking in white.

Effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed operation), the reels are rotated and a specific area is displayed. A selection part SEL is displayed on the side of a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the effect mode that has reached the point is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. In addition, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in a specific area as a default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default (
That is, A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in the specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection part SEL is a demonstration area DS that explains the content of the currently selected effect mode using various images and characters. Is displayed. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and on the upper left side thereof, characters "DEMO" indicating a demonstration screen of the effect mode are displayed.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is animatedly displayed on the left side of the demonstration area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. (Image in which characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or similar image (Image partially or entirely similar to characteristic information (light emission mode may be the same or different) )), the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in the demo area DS.
is placed and displayed on the lower right side of the In addition, the explanation M about the progress of the production by A mode
ME is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(B), it is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the A mode goes downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the first
is continuously displayed.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed. A theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(C), it is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL. By moving the B mode downward, the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate upward from below, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the first
is continuously displayed.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed. A theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(D), it is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL. By moving the C mode downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the first
is continuously displayed.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed. A theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(E), it is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the D mode moves downward, the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate upward from below, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates toward the area, and the A mode is again displayed in the specific area. Note that the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 even if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 .

After that, in the state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the first period for selecting the production mode (production mode selection period) passes, and the selected production mode is selected. At the beginning of the second period for notifying mode transition (effect mode confirmation period), as shown in FIG. , and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a theme simulating the "sun" that progresses with the theme of "sun" in A mode is displayed. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 displays a message MG to the right of the theme image PM to inform that the selected effect mode is the A mode.
The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG.

After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) has passed, and in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game), when the start of this predetermined period comes (that is, At the start of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the catch phrase effect of the game machine maker is displayed, calling attention to dependence (addiction) to the game. is displayed, and at the end of the predetermined period, that is, at the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), as shown in FIG. A theme image PM simulating the advancing "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second ball entrance, variable starting opening) 21), the front of the theme image PM, Left decorative pattern 8L,
The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: numbers “1” to “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. be.
When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the theme image PM, which is the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, each time the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, the reel rotates in the effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches the specific area by rotating the reel is displayed in a larger size than the other effect modes. At this time, in the demonstration area DS, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demonstration area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, when the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demonstration area DS) of the image display device 7. or disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86(E), a production button 63 (operating means) operable by the player and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images are provided. means)
is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressing operation) , a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means); , second
a second effect in which the button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)); At least one of them can be executed. According to this configuration, when the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (depressed operation), the second button simulating the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed.
The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), disappears (disappears from the image display device 7 (display means), or disappears). )), the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced. 87(A) to 87(I) Appearance and disappearance effect of button effect B, Fig. 88
The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effects C of the effect buttons shown in (A) to (E) of FIG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86(E), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is
In the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) ) is displayed in a different position. For example, the first production button image BTN
While the (first operation means image) is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. 7 on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display image) is arranged such that the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are different in arrangement. means), the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While being displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) and the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). because it is displayed
It is the same.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While being displayed, a second effect button is displayed in the demonstration area DS (lower right side of the demonstration area DS) arranged in the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). Image BTN2 (second
) is displayed, the same is true.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86(E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed as an image when reach is formed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (during the predetermined effect). The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the device 7 (display means), and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is the image display device 7 (display means). ) can be displayed after the According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (during the predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means ), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed. When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BT
The display mode in which N2 (the second operation means image) appears is displayed, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effects B of the effect buttons in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) during a specific period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game). When an effect mode selection screen is displayed (during a predetermined effect) that allows the player to select a subsequent effect mode, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. 7 (display means), when the A mode is selected, the second
Since the effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first After the operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode is actually selected and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (
When displayed on a display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode, thereby visually entertaining the player and improving interest. can be done.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86(E), the image display device 7 (display means) can display a ready-to-win effect in the variable effect display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. A predetermined effect in which the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being performed. , In addition to the image by the ready-to-win effect, after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) further appears. Therefore, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced. The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effects B of the effect buttons in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 88(E), the image display device 7 (display means) can display a jackpot effect (a winning game effect), and the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is The predetermined effect displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot effect (performance of a winning game).
is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the period during which the jackpot effect (performance of the winning game) is performed. Among them, it can be a specific period, and in addition to the image by the jackpot effect (performance of the winning game), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained, and interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 86(E), the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. It has become.
According to this configuration, the first effect button image BT displayed on the image display device 7 (display means)
Color of N (first operating means image) and second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image)
, the colors can be visually pleasing to the player, and the interest can be improved. 87(A) ~ FIG. 87(I) Appearance and disappearance effects B of the effect buttons, FIG. 88(A) ~ FIG.
The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button in E).

[Modification]
A modified example of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button in FIG. 86, appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIG. 87, and FIG.
In the production button appearance/disappearance production C, the first production button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). , and a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image ) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means);
a second effect in which the button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)); I was able to do one of them. However, instead of the production button 63 (operation means),
A sword member 64 or a sword button 65 may be used. In this case, the image display device 7 (display means) has
First production button image BTN (first operation means image) and second production button image BTN2 (
The second operating means image) is an image imitating the sword member 64 and the sword button 65 .

[Modification 2]
In the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button shown in FIG. 86, when the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).
When the effect button 63 is operated (depressed) again, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means).
It had been. However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, . . , a predetermined fixed number of times out of 9 or 10, or a random number of times set in real time by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) out of 2 to 10 times. You may make it operate (press operation). In this way, every time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the image display device 7 (display means) displays the second
The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed (appears)
It can contribute to eliminating the monotony of being In addition, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) on the image display device 7 (display means). , display (appear)
Since the player can discover the corresponding relationship between
By making it difficult to feel the monotony of the action of the operation (pressing operation), it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in motivation to play.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A shown in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIG. (disappears), and each time it is displayed (appears), the second effect button image BTN2 (second
) may be increased stepwise toward the maximum size. In this case, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is always increased stepwise toward the maximum size. Alternatively, it may stop at a certain size before reaching the maximum size (the size several steps before the maximum size (halfway)). In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big win game (jackpot effect) that gives a profit to the player will occur by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63, and the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 This can contribute to making the player less passive.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A shown in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIG. (disappears), and each time it is displayed (appears), the second effect button image BTN2 (second
The color of the operation means image) may be changed step by step to a color that enhances the expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) that gives a profit to the player will occur. For example, white → blue → green →
Gradually changes from red → golden → seven colors (rainbow color). In this way, the production button 63
It is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the player to become passive with respect to the operation of (pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode
was displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such moving images may be moving images explaining the flow of production in each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be three-dimensional CG moving images, animated moving images, or movies. It may be one scene. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 6]
Appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button in FIG. 86, appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIG. 87, and FIG.
In the production button appearance/disappearance production C, the first production button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). A second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device based on the fact that the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (depressed operation). A first effect displayed (appears) on 7 (display means) and a second effect button image BT
A second effect in which N2 (second operation means image) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. did it. However, in a state where the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed. is operated (pressing operation), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means).
For example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (depressed) only 10 times, a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is generated. is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears from the image display device 7 (display means) (
Disappear))) It may be possible to execute the second effect. Also, production button 6
3 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (depressed). operation), a second effect button image BTN2 (
The second operation means image) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (the image display device 7 (
disappear (disappear) from the display means).
A first effect in which N2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means) may be executed.

[Modification 7]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C of FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the big win effect (performance of the winning game). After that, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as a winning game effect, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small winning game in addition to the big win effect, to the second production button image B
TN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the first production button image BTN ( After the first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). You may do so.

[Modification 8]
Appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button in FIG. 86, appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIG. 87, and FIG.
The appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button may not include a part of the described effect, or may be added with another effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying various images,
Based on the fact that the operation means is operated while the first operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means,
a first effect in which a second operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
capable of performing at least one of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
the second operation means image is displayed at a position different from the first operation means image in the first effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
The first operation means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect,
The second operation means image can be displayed after the first operation means image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means can display a ready-to-win effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern,
The predetermined effect is the reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means can display an effect of a winning game,
The predetermined effect is the effect of the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
the color of the first operation means image and the color of the second operation means image are the same color;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. FIG. This winning notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the winning notification effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

In the winning notification performances A to C, the performance button 63 is activated during the battle performance, and when the number of operations of the performance button 63 reaches any one of 1, 5, 8, 12 and 14 times, the jackpot determination performance is performed. It is a production that executes If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching 14 times, the loss is confirmed.

[Winning notification production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and finally, the ally character C
If RA wins against the enemy character CRB, it will be a big win. In the battle production (start), the input of the production button 63 is valid. In other words, the display screen 7a does not display a prompt to press the effect button 63, but the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. operation is detected. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (middle term), an production is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (middle term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is a rainbow background R in which the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow.
It is a production that will be B. The rainbow background RB is a background for determining the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big win" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. That is, when the operation of the production button 63 reaches 12 times in the battle production (middle term), the big win confirmation production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is a effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG reading "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining winning notification effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and finally, the ally character C
If RA wins against the enemy character CRB, it will be a big win. In the battle production (start), the input of the production button 63 is valid. That is, the display screen 7a does not display a prompt to press the effect button 63, but the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. operation is detected. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a big win confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is a rainbow background R in which the ally character CRA appears and the background is displayed in 7 colors of the rainbow.
It is a performance that will be B. The rainbow background RB is a background for determining the jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "It's a big win" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the operation of the production button 63 reaches five times in the battle production (middle term), the big win confirmation production is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (middle term), an production is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is a effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG reading "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Winning notification production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9
C corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle production (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and finally, the ally character C
If RA wins against the enemy character CRB, it will be a big win. In the battle production (start), the input of the production button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed together with the characters "press". The effect control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. FIG.
The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed together with the characters "press". Display screen 7
On the right side of a, the actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (middle term), an production is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle production (middle term), the input of the production button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed together with the characters "press". Display screen 7
On the right side of a, the actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is a effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, enemy character C
RB is displayed in the center and a message image MG reading "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is repeatedly operated (depressed) during the battle effect.
By doing so, when a predetermined number of operations is reached, it is possible to execute a big hit confirmation effect (FIGS. 89(E), (F), FIGS. 90(C), (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of numbers of operations of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 are set as predetermined number of operations. According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of timings at which the big win confirmation effect may be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, if the big win confirmation effect is not executed after 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91(E)), the loss in the big win lottery is determined. According to this configuration, it is possible to eliminate useless expectations and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period when the effect button 63 is activated, the effect button 63
(Fig. 89(C)-(E), Fig. 90(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by creating a secret command-like effect for only known players.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period when the effect button 63 is activated, the effect button 63
There are cases where an effect prompting the operation of is performed (FIGS. 91(C)-(E)) and there is a case where it is not performed (FIGS. 89(C)-(E), FIG. 90(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to widen the range of effects and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the winning notification effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the production button 63 has been exemplified above, it can be similarly applied to the operation of accessories such as levers and swords.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of notifying the winning of the jackpot lottery, but it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the big win, and the winning of the lottery to transition to the high-probability state after the big win. be.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player and capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning of a specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of numbers of operations are set as the predetermined number of operations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
If the number of times of operation of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of times of operation and there is no notice of winning, defeat in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined production, no promotion production prompting the operation of the operation unit is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined effect, there are cases where a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is performed and there is a case where it is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by:

92 to 94, the contour inside/outside effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described below. Figure 9
2 to 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, and the display of the image display device 7 is omitted. Screen 7a
The decorative designs and various reserved images displayed in the figure are also omitted for the sake of clarity.

This effect inside and outside the outline of the stereoscopic image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation), during the jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which profits are awarded to the player, and the like. It is something that can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation production start command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and button If the instruction to execute the effect is included, the ROM 10
3 to display the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Here, first, the outline inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image will be explained, and then the outline inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image will be explained.
, and the contour inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Three-dimensional image outline inside/outside presentation A]
First, the contour inside/outside rendering A of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining contour inside/outside effect A of a stereoscopic image. In the contour inside/outside presentation A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. Appearing as FRM, approaching,
It is displayed in such a manner that it recedes, stops, or oscillates (including rotation; hereinafter the same). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4").
), the inner region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), the outer region FRMb of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), area. Here, the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FR of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
It is partitioned into areas Ma and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed large. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a far away manner, the inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. is displayed in a smaller size and occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. increase in the proportion of

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches. 7a, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the image display device 7 in a distant manner.
is displayed on the display screen 7a, the outline (
As the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour) occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer region of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") increases or decreases accordingly. The proportion of the FRMb occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

A pattern (not shown) is applied to the inner area FRMa of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, a first geometric pattern is displayed in which squares are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned vertically and horizontally in a matrix. The first geometric pattern is a static image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a frame of a colored and opaque stereoscopic image from a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") as a predetermined image. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are increased, or one or both are decreased. displayed in a manner that At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FR with the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary.
It is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of M and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the frame-like stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed with the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , an inner region FRMa of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and an outer region FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as a background image.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The first geometric pattern ( A pattern in which squares are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the up, down, left, and right directions and arranged in a matrix form, a second pattern is formed in an outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
It is displayed by switching to a brick piled up as a geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, the inner area F
In RMa, the character CRA appears and moves within the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRA is reproduced.

The outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are increased.
When the inner area FRMa of is displayed large, the proportion of the area occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller and the image display device 7 occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. When the inner area FRMa of the (contour) is displayed small, the proportion of the area occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced, so that the outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is increased.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM become larger. , or a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM
is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. As the proportion of FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer area FRM of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM
The proportion of b occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image is displayed again as a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The second geometric pattern (pattern of piling up bricks) displayed in . does not switch to geometric patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again from a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. , and when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in a manner such that one or both of them are enlarged and one or both are reduced. be.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The second geometric pattern ( As a third geometric pattern, octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned vertically and horizontally to form a matrix in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is displayed by switching to the one placed in . The third geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, the inner area F
In RMa, the character CRB newly appears and moves within the inner area FRMa,
A moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is changed again to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image. , and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (contour ) is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of ), and is not switched to another geometric pattern which is a still image.

92(F), the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") to the colored and opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image F are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a predetermined image.
When the mode is switched to RM and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed to be large, or one or both of them are displayed to be small. be done.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The third geometric pattern ( A pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions), a fourth pattern is formed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
is switched to a geometric pattern in which V-shaped letters are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and approach each other in the inner region FRMa, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB move. is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are displayed, and an action effect is developed by the two character styles CRA and CRB. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, two character bodies CRA and C
The background image of RB is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

When a series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) are performed in the ready-to-win effect (as part of the ready-to-win effect) after the ready-to-win effect is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decoration pattern are stopped and displayed together on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a big win game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a player wins a big win and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the misalignment will be confirmed and displayed.

Also, when a series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect develops, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the character RCA wins the game, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB ( Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM increase, the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may increase. As one or both of the vertical length and horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM become smaller, the inner area FRMa of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is accompanied by this increase.
The size of the character displayed on Ma is not displayed large (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background surrounding the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized. The area around the character expands. In addition, as the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is accordingly increased. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character is reduced, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. , the size of the character is displayed large, but the character moves away (
character moves away from the player), the character is displayed in a smaller size.

[Three-dimensional image outline inside/outside presentation B]
Next, the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining contour inside/outside effect B of a stereoscopic image. In the contour inside/outside rendering B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. Appearing as FRM, approaching,
It is displayed in such a manner that it moves away, stops, or oscillates. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the stereoscopic image F with the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary.
The inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of RM (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
) and an outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline) of ). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FR of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
It is partitioned into areas Ma and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed large. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a far away manner, the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. is displayed in a smaller size and occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. increase in the proportion of

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches. 7a, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the image display device 7 in a distant manner.
is displayed on the display screen 7a, the outline (
When the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour) occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accordingly increased or decreased. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced or increased.

A pattern (not shown) is applied to the inner area FRMa of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, a first geometric pattern is displayed in which squares are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned vertically and horizontally in a matrix. The first geometric pattern is a static image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque plate of the stereoscopic image from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") as a predetermined image. When the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM appears, it approaches,
It is displayed in such a manner that it moves away, stops, or rotates in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays an inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM
and an outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of . Here, the outer region FRMb of the contour (contour) of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed with the contour of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , the inner area FRMa of the contour of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image F
and an outer region FRMb of the outer contour of the RM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM becomes the background image.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The first geometric pattern ( A pattern in which squares are spaced apart from each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix), bricks are formed as a second geometric pattern in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It switches to the stacked one and is displayed. The second geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, the inner region FRMa
, the character CRA appears and moves in the inner area FRMa, and the animation of the character CRA is reproduced. Note that the inner region FR
Ma is a plane, and the shape of the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is also deformed according to the angle in the three-dimensional space.

When the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner of approaching,
Since the area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed large and occupies a high proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the area outside the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. FRMb becomes smaller, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. On the other hand, the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM recedes.
a, the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a smaller size and occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) becomes larger, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
increase in the proportion of

After this, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an approaching manner, When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. As the proportion of the area 7a increases or decreases, the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 occupied by the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM decreases accordingly. become higher.

After that, as a predetermined image, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored and opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, and again the colored and opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "
4”), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The second geometric pattern (pattern of piling up bricks) displayed in the outline (
outline) is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer area FRMb, and is not switched to another geometric pattern which is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored and opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") as a predetermined image. , and when the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and rotates.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The second geometric pattern ( A pattern of piling up bricks) is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions to form a matrix of octagons as a third geometric pattern in the outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM, while being spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval. It is displayed by switching to the one placed in . The third geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, the inner region FRMa
, the character CRB newly appears and moves within the inner region FRMa, and the animation of the character CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner area FRMa of the contour of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner area FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored and opaque plate-like stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, and again the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "
4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is the outline (contour ) of the outer region FR
The image is taken over and displayed by Mb as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

After that, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as a predetermined image, a colored and opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is changed to a colored and opaque plate-like three-dimensional image FR.
When it switches to M and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and rotating.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
The third geometric pattern ( A pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix form) is used as a fourth geometric pattern in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The display is switched to one in which V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the inner area FR
A moving image of two character bodies CRA and CRB is reproduced. Note that the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane as described above, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is positioned in the inner area FRM according to the angle in the three-dimensional space.
The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in a are also deformed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outline of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are enlarged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are displayed, and an action effect is developed by the two character styles CRA and CRB. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, two character bodies CRA and CRB
is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

When a series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed in the ready-to-win effect (as part of the ready-to-win effect) after the ready-to-win effect is formed, the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When symbols with the same decoration pattern are stopped and displayed together on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a big win game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a player wins a big win and a profit is given to the player. When the same decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the misalignment is confirmed and displayed.

Also, when a series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect develops, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the game is won, while the left-handed game is started when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB ( Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

As the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR
As M moves away (move away from the player), the contour of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM (
The inner region FRMa of the contour) is becoming smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is also increased. Instead of being displayed large (magnified display), the area around the character is expanded in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized in addition to the character. In addition, the inner region FRMa
becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is also reduced (reduced display) instead of being displayed smaller.
The area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region FR of the contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM.
When Ma approaches (moves toward the player), the size of the character is displayed large, whereas when it moves away (moves away from the player), the size of the character is displayed small. be.

[Three-dimensional image outline inside/outside presentation C]
Next, the contour inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining contour inside/outside rendering C of a stereoscopic image. In the contour inside/outside rendering C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. Appearing as FRM, approaching,
It is displayed in such a manner that it recedes, stops, or oscillates. At this time, the image display device 7
The display screen 7a of , with the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, displays the inner area FRMa of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "
4”) and the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FR of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
It is partitioned into areas Ma and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed large. By increasing the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM
The outer area FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a far away manner, the inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. is displayed in a smaller size and occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. increase in the proportion of

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches. 7a, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the image display device 7 in a distant manner.
is displayed on the display screen 7a, the outline (
As the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour) occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer region of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") increases or decreases accordingly. The proportion of the FRMb occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

A pattern (not shown) is applied to the inner area FRMa of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Outer region FRM of the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
In b, a first geometric pattern is displayed in which squares are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned vertically and horizontally in a matrix. The first geometric pattern is a static image.

After that, as a predetermined image, a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a predetermined image. ”) viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”
). ), and when a stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front appears, it is displayed in a mode of approaching, moving away, stopping, and moving up, down, left, and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline (outline) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and the outline (outline) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). ) and an outer area FRMb of the outline of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Here, a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (
The outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes to the front-view stereoscopic image FR
A stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front with the outline (contour) of M (number "4") as a boundary
) and an outer region FRMb of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In addition, the front view stereoscopic image FR
The outer area FRMb of the contour of M (number "4") becomes the background image.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
At the timing of switching from the number "4") to the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. The outside of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front from the geometric pattern of 1 (a pattern in which squares are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) In the area FRMb, the second geometric pattern is switched to the one in which bricks are piled up and displayed. The second geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, the character CRB appears in the inner area FRMa of the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and moves in the inner area FRMa, and the animation of the character CRB is reproduced. .

The display screen 7 of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches
a, the inner region FRMa of the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed large and occupies a higher proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, thereby increasing the size of the front view. The outside region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller, and the proportion of the area occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a far away manner, the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front ( contour) inner region FRMa
is displayed in a smaller size and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. It occupies a higher proportion of the display screen 7a.

After this, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. The stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 or viewed from the front.
) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7
occupies more or less of the display screen 7a.
The proportion of the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM again from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a predetermined image. (number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner as to approach, move away, stop, or oscillate. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") 4”
) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is taken over as it is to the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). and does not switch to other geometric patterns that are still images.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") as a predetermined image, and then the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front again. (number "4"), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a mode such as approaching, moving away, stopping, or moving up, down, left, or right.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
At the timing of switching from the number "4") to the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. Stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front from the geometric pattern (pattern of piling up bricks) of 2
In the outer area FRMb of the outline of (number "4"), octagons are arranged in a vertical and horizontal direction at predetermined intervals as a third geometric pattern and arranged in a matrix. be done. The third geometric pattern is a static image.

Further, here, when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of it protrudes (pops out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") Two independent inner areas FRMa and FRMa are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as discontinuous areas of the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the two independent inner areas FRMa and FRMa. In this mode, a character CRA holding a sword newly appears and moves in two independent inner areas FRMa, FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is reproduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed as a predetermined image from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. (number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
4”) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) is three-dimensional. The outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern which is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays, as a predetermined image, a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the front view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or moves up, down, left, or right.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
At the timing of switching from the number "4") to the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. 3 geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions), the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. In the outer region FRMb, the fourth geometric pattern is switched to a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a static image.
In addition, the character CRB reappears in the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") viewed from the front and moves within the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is displayed again as a predetermined image from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. (number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner as to approach, move away, stop, or oscillate. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") 4”
) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). outline) is inherited and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and is not switched to another geometric pattern which is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, from the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front ( When the front view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, moves up, down, left and right, and stops.

A colored and opaque stereoscopic image FRM (
At the timing of switching from the number "4") to the colored and opaque front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed. 4 (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions), a fifth geometric pattern is formed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The pattern is switched to a pattern in which tiles are arranged vertically and horizontally. The fifth geometric pattern is a static image. In addition, a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”
), the character CRA reappears in the inner area F
A moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced while moving within RMa.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are displayed on the image display device 7. is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, and an action effect is developed by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

When a series of productions from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) are performed in the ready-to-win production (as part of the ready-to-win production) after the ready-to-win production is formed, the action production is developed and the image is displayed. When the symbols with the same decoration pattern are stopped and displayed together on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a big win game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a player wins a big win and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are stopped and displayed, the misalignment will be confirmed and displayed.

Also, when a series of productions from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot production), an action production is developed, for example, the character body RCA becomes the character body RCB. The right-handed game is started (or continued) when the character RCA wins the game, whereas the left-handed game is started when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB ( Or it will be returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

Note that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player).
Therefore, the inner region FRMa
becomes larger, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front moves away (moves away from the player side), so that the inside of the outer contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front (number "4") As the region FRMa becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front increases, the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front increases. The size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa is not displayed large (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background surrounding the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can be used increases. In addition, since the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is reduced, the outer contour (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is accordingly reduced. inner region FR of
The size of the character displayed in Ma is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area around the character is reduced, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4").
) in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour), the size of the character is displayed large when it approaches (moves toward the player), whereas when it moves away (moves away from the player). The character size is displayed small in .

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the inside/outside appearance of the contour of a stereoscopic image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92B, 92D, and 92F of the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image, an image display capable of displaying various images is provided. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), it is formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to be displayed, and the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM; A frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. and character body CRB (the first
) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since the background image (second effect image) having a pattern can be executed, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image, the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) outline of
Character body CRA and character body CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of
(first effect image) and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed outside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns can be executed,
It is the same.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), the outline inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image is formed inside the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front. A character body CRA and a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outline (contour) of a stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, and a stereoscopic image viewed from the front. Image FR
A background image (second effect image) and effects can be executed, so it is the same.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the contour), and the outer area FRMb (second area), which is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns. According to this configuration, the inner region F
The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in RMa (first area), whereas the outer area FRMb (second area) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the area), the first effect image and the second effect image are displayed with the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. Unlike the above, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image, a character is displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Body CRA
and a character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, whereas a plate-like stereoscopic image FR
Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (outline) of M, the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed. As a boundary, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and similar.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H). inner region FRMa (
While the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the first region), the outer region FR of the outline (outline) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed.
Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in Mb (second area), the contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is used as a boundary, The first effect image and the second effect image are different and similar.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed largely on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a small size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) so that the character can be displayed with the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. As the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM displaying the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) becomes larger, the background image having various geometric patterns. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which the (second effect image) is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained. It is possible to improve interest.
93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image, a plate-like stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed while moving on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed is defined with the border (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. As the inner area FRMa (first area) increases, the outer area FRMb (second
area) becomes smaller.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( By being moved and displayed on the display means), the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a boundary. Inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")
becomes larger, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outline (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) in which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed.
is smaller, so it is the same.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, by using the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a stereoscopic image as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM
(first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (outline) become easily visible as a partitioned area, and the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the (contour), and the outer area FRM of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM
a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in b (second area);
Since it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the player, it can visually entertain the player,
It is possible to improve interest.
93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image, the contour of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a boundary to create a plate. 3D image FR
The inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour (contour) of M and the contour of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM (
The outer area FRMb (second area) of the contour) is easily visible as a partitioned area,
A character body CRA and a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the contour) can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image).
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), in the contour inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), which is a stereoscopic image, By using the contour (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FR of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front
Ma (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front become easily visible as a partitioned area. A character body CRA and a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and a stereoscopic image viewed from the front. To improve the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (outline) of the image FRM (number "4"). It is similar because it can contribute.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour) is the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image.
is an inner region of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM with the border, and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image It is an area outside the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which borders on the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. According to this configuration, a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM that is a stereoscopic image
Since the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be defined as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The area FRMb (second area) is more easily recognized as a partitioned area. This will
A character body CRA and a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FR.
Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outline (contour) of M can contribute to the improvement of visibility, The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), since the outline (outline) of the plate-like stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as a boundary. , the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FR
The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outline of M and the region FRMb (second region) are separated from each other, making it easier to visually recognize them. As a result, the inner region FRMa (
character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the first area)
and a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (second effect image). It is similar because it can contribute.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), in the contour inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image, the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), which is a stereoscopic image, Since the contour (contour) can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the contour (contour) of the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) and the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outline (contour), and the outer region FRMb (second region) become more easily visible as a partitioned region. As a result, the inner area FR
Character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in Ma (first area) and the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front.
This is the same because it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the (second area).

[Modification]
A modified example of the inside/outside rendering of the contour of the stereoscopic image will be described below.
[Modification 1]
In the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM that is a stereoscopic image, and in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. FRM, and in the contour inside/outside presentation C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the title of any one of a plurality of pieces of music used as the predetermined image to indicate the world view of the presentation by the gaming machine 1 (or characteristic words included in the title) Alternatively, it may be a structure (which may be two-dimensional or three-dimensional) with which the title of the music can be associated (imaged).

[Modification 2]
In the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM that is a stereoscopic image, and in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. FRM, and in the contour inside/outside presentation C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be one written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM that is a stereoscopic image, and in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. FRM, and in the contour inside/outside presentation C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the reserved images 9A, 9B
or the pending digested image 9C may be used as the predetermined image. In this case, with the outline (outline) of the retained images 9A and 9B and the retained digested image 9C as a boundary, the area (first area) inside the outline (outline) of the retained images 9A and 9B and the retained digested image 9C and the retained image Outline of 9A, 9B and retained digested image 9C (
It can be partitioned into an outer region (second region) of the outline) and a region of . Reserved images 9A, 9
A still image, a moving image (
3D CG moving images, animated moving images, one scene of a movie) are displayed, and a background image (still Images and moving images (three-dimensional CG moving images, animated moving images, one scene of a movie) are displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM that is a stereoscopic image, and in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. FRM, in the contour inside/outside effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may be the predetermined images. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L,
With the outline (outline) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative design 8R as a boundary, the inner area (first area) of the outer outline (outline) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R and the left decoration Design 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the outer region (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the right decorative pattern 8R. Still images, moving images (3D CG moving images, animated moving images, one scene from a movie) are contained in the inner area (first area) of the outer contours of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. ) is displayed, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C,
A background image (still image, moving image (three-dimensional CG moving image, animated moving image, one scene of a movie)) is displayed in the outer area (second area) of the outline (outline) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 5]
In the contour inside/outside rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In B, the predetermined image is the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (outline) of a stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front was a background image having various geometric patterns, which is a still image.
However, instead of the still image, the background image may be a moving image, or a mixture of the still image and the moving image. As animations, for example, in addition to animations in which various geometric patterns move, three-dimensional C
A moving image in G, a moving image in animation, or a scene from a movie may be used.

[Modification 6]
In the contour inside/outside effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, a frame-like stereoscopic image FRM that is one stereoscopic image is used as a predetermined image, and in the contour inside/outside effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In the three-dimensional image outline inside/outside rendering C of FIG. was one stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be a plurality of stereoscopic images. In this case, the outer region (second region) of the outline (contour) of each stereoscopic image
may be the same image (background image) or different images. It may be displayed so that the image can be grasped, the same image may be displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outline (outline) of each stereoscopic image, or a different image may be displayed. may By doing so, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Modification 7]
In the contour inside/outside presentation A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is made larger in one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length, and one or both of them is made smaller. It was displayed in a similar manner. However, the vertical length and horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. body CRA and character body CRB (
(first effect image), and various types of data displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Since the background image (second effect image) having a geometric pattern can be executed, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 8]
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( However, the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is not limited to the one viewed from the front. good. in this case,
When a stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a manner of approaching and a part of it protrudes (protrudes) from the image display device 7 (display means), a discontinuous stereoscopic image FRM ( are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a plurality of stereoscopic images that have become predetermined images), and the inner area FRMa of the outer contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image).
A plurality of independent inner regions are formed in the image display device 7 (display means) as regions in which FRMa is discontinuous. In this manner, the character body CRA and the character body CRB appear in a form straddling the plurality of independent inner areas FRMa, . . . FRMa, and move within the plurality of independent inner areas FRMa, . A moving image of the character CRA or the character CRB is reproduced.

[Modification 9]
The stereoscopic image outline inside/outside effect A in FIG. 92, the stereoscopic image outline inside/outside effect B in FIG. 93, and the stereoscopic image outline inside/outside effect C in FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying various images,
When the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the first image is formed inside the predetermined image.
and a second effect image displayed in a second area formed outside the predetermined image.
the predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
the first effect image and the second effect image are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is displayed in a large size on the display means, the second area is displayed in a small size on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
wherein the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
The first region is an inner region of the contour of the stereoscopic image bounded by the contour of the stereoscopic image,
The second region is an outer region of the contour of the stereoscopic image bounded by the contour of the stereoscopic image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The selective display blocking effects A to C of the effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. FIG. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, and the image is displayed. Device 7
Some of the decorative designs and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawing.

The selection display inhibiting effect of this effect mode can be executed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation, a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which profits are awarded to the player, and the like. , the intention of the player's operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 Analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation performance start command, pre-determination command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and button effects. When an instruction to execute is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Here, the selective display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be explained first, the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode, and the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be explained in order.

[Selective display inhibition effect A in effect mode]
First, the selection display blocking effect A of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selective display inhibition effect A of the effect mode. The selective display blocking effect A of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the end of variation. In the selective display inhibition effect A of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A decorative pattern (symbol: number "1
” to number “9”) is started. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed.

Along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the message MG "change the mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and to the left of the pending digested image 9C, here, for example, three first special figure pending three The reserved images 9A are aligned and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 under the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same size.

A selection section SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right of the pending digestion image 9C. In the selection part SEL, the effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the reels are rotated. By doing so, the production mode that reaches the specific area is displayed larger than the other production modes. The effect mode located in this specific area becomes the selected effect mode, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. be.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect based on the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the A mode. The D mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode placed above the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is displayed downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode is displayed. The C mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward the specific area.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from the bottom, and the C mode is displayed. The D mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward the specific area.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode is displayed. The A mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above toward the specific area, and the A mode is again positioned in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) starts to fluctuate, there are cases where reach is not formed and there are cases where reach is formed. When a reach is formed, a reach effect based on the degree of expectation for a big hit is performed. There are multiple reach effects. If a reach is formed, FIG.
5(A), as shown in FIG. 95(B), left decorative design 8L after start of variation of decorative design
is temporarily stopped by a symbol (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8
C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are formed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward the specific area. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a large theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Further, after the start of the variation of the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped as symbols (numbers) (here, the number "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative design 8C is changed. Medium. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the number of first special figure reservations does not increase because the four first special figure reservations that are the upper limit have already been reached, and the five reservation images 9A are displayed. They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode located below the C mode moves upward. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward the specific area. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a large theme image PM simulating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, after the start of variation of the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L,
Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) (here, the number "5" is temporarily stopped), then the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern is displayed. The number "5" is displayed for 8C, and the number "3" is displayed for the right decorative pattern 8R.

The left decorative design 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative design 8R is the number "
3" and is stopped and displayed, the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as
It's called "interval". ), even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production mode cannot be selected. ing. As a result, the effect mode that has already been selected is continued in the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the effect mode that has already been selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, the image display device 7
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9
When moving to the right as C, the remaining three pending images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed accordingly. Along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, "Mode change with production button" to convey that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63.
message MG is displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and it is possible to select the production mode.

In the series of effects from when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in FIG. 95(A) to FIG. 95(D), the reach is not formed. Following FIG. 95(A), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design (number)
is temporarily stopped (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and when the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed and reach is formed, as shown in FIG. SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection portion SEL can be moved downward. You can select the production mode. In addition, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the first
By entering the game ball into the starting port 20, four holding images 9 as four first special figure holding
A is the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
They are aligned and displayed below a.

When the ready-to-win effect is formed and the ready-to-win effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 95(H), vehicle images GYK imitating a car form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is given priority, and the selection unit SEL is displayed from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if it disappears (disappears) and the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, the selection part S
EL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the group announcement is made, the four pending images 9A and pending digest images 9C do not disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (disappear).

After that, the reach effect progresses, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "
0", the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "1", and the failure is confirmed and displayed. Even in this state, the selection part SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (
), and even if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, the selection part SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode cannot be selected. It has become.

The player operates (presses) the production button 63 during the period from when the group notice is performed until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed and the missing is confirmed and displayed. Also, it is not possible to select the production mode, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8
The player also operates the production button 63 during the period from when the L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed until the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate (hereinafter referred to as "interval"). (pressing operation), the production mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the effect mode that has already been selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In other words, when the advance notice of the group is performed, the effect mode already selected is continued and the theme image PM simulating “clouds” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 unless the next decorative pattern starts to change. 7a is displayed in a large size. Even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the image display device 7
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9
When moving to the right as C, the remaining three pending images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed accordingly. Along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the effect button 63 is operated (depressed operation) to convey that the effect mode can be changed "Mode change with effect button".
message MG is displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and it is possible to select the production mode.

[Selective display inhibition effect B in effect mode]
Next, the selection display blocking effect B of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode. The selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the end of variation. In the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A decorative pattern (symbol: number "1
” to number “9”) is started. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed.

Along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the message MG "change the mode with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R
The pending digested image 9C corresponding to is arranged and displayed in the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and to the left of the pending digested image 9C, here, for example, three first special figure pending The reserved images 9A are aligned and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 under the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Further, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digested image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digested image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same size.

A selection part SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right of the pending digestion image 9C. In the selection section SEL, the effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the reels are rotated. By doing so, the production mode that reaches the specific area is displayed larger than the other production modes. The effect mode positioned in the specific area becomes the selected effect mode, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. be.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect based on the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the A mode. The D mode placed below is displayed with reels rotating from bottom to top, while the B mode placed above A mode is displayed with reels rotating from above toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, and the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate upward from the bottom, and the B mode is displayed. The C mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward the specific area.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the C mode positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode is displayed. The D mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward the specific area.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates upward from the bottom, and the D mode is displayed. The A mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above toward the specific area, and the A mode is again positioned in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) starts to fluctuate, the effect (so-called "predictive effect") that suggests the possibility that the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image 9A contains a big hit is not performed. There is a case where a look-ahead effect is performed for the reserved image 9A. When the look-ahead effect is not performed, following FIG. 96(A), as shown in FIG. 96(B), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a design (number) after the decorative design starts to fluctuate. (here, temporary stop at number "1"), and the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are changing. In this state,
By entering the game ball into the first start port 20, four holding images 9A are linearly formed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure holding. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward the specific area. In the C mode, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a large theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Further, after the start of the variation of the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped as symbols (numbers) (here, the number "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative design 8C is changed. Medium. In this state, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the number of first special figure reservations does not increase because the four first special figure reservations that are the upper limit have already been reached, and the five reservation images 9A are displayed. They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode located below the C mode moves upward. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward the specific area. In the D mode, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a large theme image PM simulating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, after the start of variation of the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L,
Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) (here, the number "5" is temporarily stopped), then the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern is displayed. The number "5" is displayed for 8C, and the number "3" is displayed for the right decorative pattern 8R.

The left decorative design 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative design 8R is the number "
3" and is stopped and displayed, the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as
It's called "interval". ), even if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production mode cannot be selected. ing. As a result, the effect mode that has already been selected is continued in the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the effect mode that has already been selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is finished, the already selected production mode is displayed. is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, the image display device 7
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9
When moving to the right as C, the remaining three pending images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed accordingly. Along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, "Mode change with production button" to convey that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63.
message MG is displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of a, and it is possible to select the production mode.

In the series of effects from when the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) starts to fluctuate until FIG. 96(D), the effect (so-called, "Prefetching effect") was not performed, but in contrast, if the prefetching effect for the pending image 9A is performed, as shown in FIG. 96(G) following FIG. 2, after the start of the variation of the decorative design, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a design (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are being changed. It has become. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are formed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Assuming that the reserved image 9A arranged closest to the reserved digested image 9C is the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the first reserved image 9A. The third pending image 9A is arranged to the left of the pending image 9A, and the first starting port 2 is placed to the left of the third pending image 9A.
A reserved image 9A added by a game ball entering 0 is arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

When an effect (read-ahead effect) that suggests the possibility that a big win is included in the pending information corresponding to the fourth pending image 9A is performed, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A as a special image is changed to another. is displayed in a manner different from the display mode of the reserved images 9A (the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect, which is a special image,
Based on the degree of expectation for a big hit, the display mode of the pending image 9A is, for example, blue→green→
Expectations for a big hit are set high in the order of red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit)). Here, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is a mode of emitting red light, and the other pending images 9A (the first pending image 9A, the second pending image 9A, the third pending image 9A ) is a mode of emitting white light (when no look-ahead effect is performed, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest).

In addition, in the look-ahead effect which is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape is based on the degree of expectation for the big win, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot) ), the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be high, but there are cases where a character body is used instead of the circular pending image 9A. In this case, when the display mode of the pending image 9A is the character body, the expected degree of the big win is at least the expected level of the big win set to the mode of emitting red light as the display mode of the pending image 9A. is set to

When the look-ahead effect of the special image is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, the selection part SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 6.
3 is operated (depressed), the selection part SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the look-ahead effect is performed, the four pending images 9A and pending digestion image 9C disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (disappear).
never

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(H), after the start of variation of the decorative symbols, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols (numbers "3" in this case). temporary stop)
, the middle decorative pattern 8C is being changed. In this state, even if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, the selection part SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
It is not possible to select the production mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(I), after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols (numbers) (here, Temporary stop at number "5"), then left decorative pattern 8L is number "1", middle decorative pattern 8C is number "5"
, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3", and the failure is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the image display device 7
Of the four reserved images 9A arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A arranged on the rightmost side is the reserved digested image 9
When moving to the right as C, the remaining three pending images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed accordingly. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the look-ahead effect has already been performed, even in this state, the selection part SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, the selection part SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, when the look-ahead performance is performed during the variation in a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation, the selection of the performance mode is performed during the variation before the look-ahead performance is performed. On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the variation. Furthermore, when the look-ahead effect is performed,
The suspended image 9A in which this look-ahead effect is performed moves to the right side as a suspended digested image 9C, and the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed,
During the period until the deviation is confirmed and displayed, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation) even in a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation in which the production mode can be selected. However, the production mode cannot be selected. Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8 in the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect is performed
Even if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 during the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval") from when R is stopped and until the next decorative symbol starts to change, the production mode is changed. cannot be selected. Thus, in a series of such periods,
The effect mode that has already been selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the pending image 9A in which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C. The already selected presentation mode is continued, and the theme image PM modeled after "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

In addition, when the pending image 9A in which the look-ahead effect is performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C and the jackpot is won, the effect button 63 is operated ( A message MG "mode change with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) to inform that the effect mode can be changed by pressing the button. is displayed, and the production mode can be selected.

Further, even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is finished, the already selected production mode is displayed. is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

[Selective display inhibition effect C in effect mode]
Next, the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selective display blocking effect C in the effect mode. The selection display inhibiting performance C of the performance mode is a performance performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is awarded to the player, and is a performance not performed when a predetermined condition is established. (
For example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "holding group", that is, there is a holding ball that will become a big hit before the end of the jackpot production). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

Here, a case will be described where a player plays a right-handed game, wins a big win, a big-win game (jackpot performance) occurs, and continues the right-handed game after the big win game (jackpot performance) ends. In addition, when the effect of the holding series is not performed, in other words, there is no reserved ball that will become a big hit before the big win effect ends.

In the period from the start to the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game), the game production period from the start of the jackpot production (jackpot game) to the end of all the production of each round game, and the game production period Subsequently, a notification period for transmitting a game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed hitting, a state of continuing right-handed hitting) after the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game), and following this notification period, a jackpot production (jackpot game) A specific period in which a selection screen for the production mode is displayed so that the player can select the production mode after the completion of the above, and following this specific period, a catch copy production or game in which the catch copy of the game machine maker is displayed. and a predetermined period of time during which an addiction prevention effect is displayed in which a warning against dependence (addiction) is displayed.

In the specific period, the first period for selecting the production mode (production mode selection period) and the mode transition to the production mode selected after the first period (production mode selection period) has passed. The second period (production mode decision notification period).

the end of a predetermined period of performing a catchphrase effect in which a catchphrase of a game machine maker is displayed and an addiction prevention effect in which a warning against dependence (addiction) to a game is displayed;
The end of the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is the same.

In the selection display blocking effect C of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the effect of each round game in the jackpot effect (jackpot game), and then all is finished. As a result, the game presentation period ends, and accordingly, when the notification period starts, a message MG "Continue right hitting" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue the right hitting. . In addition, the hold image 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols. , the second based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
Instead of the holding image 9B corresponding to the special figure reservation, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Figure H
It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as MG. here,
For example, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is zero, the number "0" is on the left side, and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state in which the number "4" is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

The message MG "Continue hitting to the right" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the notification period (for example, 3 seconds) ends. At the start of the game, there are cases where a production mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the production mode after the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game), and where the production mode selection screen is not displayed. .

When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the effect button 6 is pressed to prompt the player to select the effect mode by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.
A first effect button image BTN simulating 3 is placed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 is inscribed with the English word "PUSH". Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking in white. In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are displayed on the image display device 7 as numerals HMG. is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Effect modes composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (depressed operation), the reels are rotated and a specific area is displayed. A selection part SEL is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the effect mode reached is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. In addition, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in a specific area as a default, but when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in the specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

On the right side of the selection part SEL, a demonstration area DS is displayed in a rectangular area extending from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to explain the content of the currently selected effect mode using various images and various characters. be done. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and on the upper left side thereof, characters "DEMO" indicating a demonstration screen of the effect mode are displayed.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is animatedly displayed on the left side of the demonstration area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. (an image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button are all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or entirely similar to the characteristic information) is displayed in the demonstration area DS. It is arranged and displayed on the lower right side. Note that an explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demonstration area DS.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 97(C), it is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the A mode goes downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the first
is continuously displayed. In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are displayed on the image display device 7 as numerals HMG. is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed. A theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

In a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the B mode. The A mode arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed. Note that the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 even if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 . In addition, the first special figure reservation and the second
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is displayed on the image display device 7 as a number HMG.
is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed. A theme image PM simulating "rain" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

In a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the C mode. The B mode placed below is displayed with reels rotating from bottom to top, and the D mode placed above C mode is displayed with reels rotating from above toward a specific area Is displayed. Note that the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 even if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 . In addition, the first special figure reservation and the second
The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is displayed on the image display device 7 as a number HMG.
is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed. A theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in the center of the demonstration area DS as a moving image, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

In a state where the player operates (presses) the production button 63 and the B mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, a first period (production mode selection period) for selecting the production mode has passed, At the beginning of the second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition to the selected effect mode, as shown in FIG. The display screen 7a of the display device 7 is displayed in a mode of expanding (enlarged mode) toward the four corners, and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a B-mode theme of "clouds" is displayed. A theme image PM simulating “clouds” is displayed in a large size, and a message MG informing that the selected effect mode is the B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed large toward the center. Note that the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are represented by the numbers HMG on the image display device 7. is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, a second period (determination mode notification period) passes, and a catch copy effect in which the game machine maker's catch copy is displayed, and an addiction prevention effect in which a warning against dependence (addiction) to the game is displayed is performed. At the beginning of the period, when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) is reached, a theme image simulating "clouds" that proceeds with the effect under the theme of "clouds" in B mode. PM displays the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
The production displayed in a large size will proceed.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting right" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed. In the production of (1), a production mode selection screen is displayed, and the production after the jackpot production (jackpot game) is completed in the selected production mode. On the other hand, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first
Since the special figure reservation is zero and the number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 is four and the number is "4", the second start opening 21 When the holding information corresponding to the four second special holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the ball contains a big win, the display of the special image is preferentially produced in order to produce the holding group which is the special image. Do not display the mode selection screen.
Therefore, when the production mode selection screen is not displayed, following FIG. 97(A), FIG.
As shown in 7 (G), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, the first start port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to and the second based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21
Special figure reservation is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number HMG.

After that, a retained ream image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape suggesting the existence of a retained ream is shown in FIG.
As shown in 7 (H), it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the V-shaped holding string image HRC. A second character HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged on the upper side of the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC. The retained ream image HRC rotates about a vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the retained ream image HRC as a rotation axis, and the first surface of the retained ream image HRC and the second surface of the retained ream image HRC appear repeatedly. display mode.

When an effect (prefetching effect) that suggests the possibility that a jackpot is included in the pending information corresponding to the pending image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J)) is performed, for example, a special The display mode of the fourth pending image 9A as an image is the other pending image 9A (the first pending image 9A,
The second reserved image 9A, the third reserved image 9A) are displayed in a manner different from the display mode, and the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the three While the display form of the reserved image 9A of the eye has a circular shape, the display form of the reserved image 9A for the fourth eye has a circular shape, instead of the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 may be. That is, the first character body HRC1 arranged together with the holding ream image HRC
and the second character body HRC2 are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the pending image 9A when the look-ahead effect is performed.

The character displayed as the display mode of the pending image 9A is smaller than the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the pending image HRC. Also, the characters displayed as the display mode of the pending image 9A are the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC1 arranged together with the pending continuous image HRC.
Although the character is the same as RC2, the orientation and posture of the character may be different.

The first face of the holding consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is the front (player side)
If it is displayed stopped facing towards, although it is not possible to tell the type of winning,
While it is possible to convey that the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 includes a big hit, the second character body HRC2 When the second surface of the holding consecutive image HRC having the In the pending information corresponding to
The jackpot of 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)) is a predetermined number or more (for example,
2) You can tell that it is included.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(I), the first surface of the holding consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player). It is informed that the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball includes a big hit. Note that the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are represented by the numbers HMG on the image display device 7. display screen 7
It is continuously displayed on the upper left side of a.

After that, the catch copy effect in which the game machine maker's catch phrase is displayed, and the addiction prevention effect in which a warning against dependence (addiction) to the game is displayed begins, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. By doing so, the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game) is reached. At the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game), a production mode before the occurrence of the jackpot production (jackpot game), for example, a theme image PM imitating the "sun" in the A mode, which progresses with the theme of "sun", is displayed. An effect that is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is progressed.

In addition, when the production of the holding series is performed, and then the jackpot production (jackpot game) is completed and the right-handed game is started, the production mode selection screen is displayed in the previous jackpot production (jackpot game). The selected effect mode is maintained, and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) occurs again and as shown in FIG. 97(B), when the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the maintained effect mode is Although it will be arranged in the specific area, the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 .

In this embodiment, the selective display inhibition effect C of the effect mode is performed during the specific period, but the effect of the holding group is also performed during the same period as the specific period. That is, in the first period (effect mode selection period), in the effect mode selection display inhibition effect C, effect is performed in which the player can select the effect mode, whereas in the effect of the holding series, a flash image is displayed. F.
H, and an effect by the holding consecutive image HRC is performed. Then, in the second period (the effect mode determination notification period), in the effect mode selection display inhibition effect C, an effect is performed to convey the transition to the selected effect mode, while in the suspension group effect, the presence of a jackpot, etc. Perform a production that conveys The specific period during which the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode is performed and the specific period during which the effect of the holding group is performed are the same period. As a result, following FIG. 97(A), FIG. 97(B) to FIG.
7 (D) and the time required for a series of effects, and FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. 97 (
Since the time required for the series of effects to I) matches, a catch phrase effect is displayed in which the game machine manufacturer's catch phrase is displayed, and an addiction prevention effect is performed in which a warning against dependence (addiction) to the game is displayed. The starting time of the predetermined period is also the same, and there is no difference in the final period of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) after the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selective display blocking effect in the effect mode will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the selection display blocking effect A in the effect mode shown in FIG. 95 (H
), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided, and one effect mode can be selected from among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes). A first effect of displaying a selection portion SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). 2, and when the ready-to-win effect is formed and the ready-to-win effect progresses, a car image GYK (special image) simulating a car is displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection unit SEL (
The display of the selected image) is blocked and a car image GY imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 by the second effect.
Display of K (special image) can be performed. According to this configuration, the selection part SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode from among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is provided on the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, an effect (group announcement) is developed in which the vehicle images GYK (special images) simulating a car run all at once in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this effect (group announcement) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (fulfillment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection part SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented. Since the selection part SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), the player can be visually entertained, and interest can be improved.
96(H) to 96(J) in the selective display inhibition effect B of the effect mode, one effect mode can be selected from among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes). Even if the part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), this look-ahead effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (fulfillment of a predetermined condition) in which the look-ahead effect of the special image is performed. Then, the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means).
The same is true because it will be
97(G) to 97(I) In the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode of FIG. 97(I), one effect mode can be selected from among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural effect modes). Even if the part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the holding series, which is the special image, will be displayed based on the arrival of the next period (predetermined conditions are met). When the effect is performed, the display of the selection part SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selection image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). disappear).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A
) to FIG. 95(J), a selection part SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode out of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed on the image display device. 7 (display means) can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation. The second effect displayed on (display means) can be executed in a specific period from the start of variation of the decorative symbols to the end of variation. According to this configuration, in a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the end of variation, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (
A first effect for displaying a selection part SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes on the image display device 7 (display means); )
is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). can.
96(A) to 96(J) in the selective display inhibiting effect B of the effect mode, in a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the end of variation, A mode, B mode, C mode and D
A first effect in which a selection part SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one effect mode out of modes (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed on an image display device 7 (display means), and a look-ahead effect, which is a special image, is displayed as an image. Since the second effect displayed on the display device 7 (display means) can be executed, the same is true.
97(A) to 97(I), in the selective display blocking effect C of the effect modes, A mode, B mode, and C mode are selected during a specific period during the jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which profits are awarded to the player. and D mode (plurality of presentation modes), a selection part SEL (selected image) that can select one presentation mode is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means); Since the second effect of displaying the effect of (1) on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, the effect is the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A
)-as shown in FIG. 95(J), a player can operate a production button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, and a select button 68 (a plurality of operating means).
, sword button 65, select button 68 (plural operating means) only when the effect button 63 (specific operating means) is operated One production mode can be selected. According to this configuration, among the production button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (plural operation means),
Among the performance buttons 63 and select buttons 68 arranged in the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and arranged around the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, the performance button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side. Since it is formed larger than the select button 68, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural production modes) are limited within a specific period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the end of variation. It is most preferable as an operating means for selecting one of the production modes. 96(A) to 96(J) Effect mode selection display blocking effect B, Fig. 97
The same applies to the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode shown in (A) to FIG. 97(I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A
) to FIG. 95(J), when the ready-to-win effect is formed and the ready-to-win effect progresses, a car image GYK (special image) simulating a car appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the right side toward the left side. A car image GYK (special image) simulating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), A mode, B mode, and C mode are executed before the second effect of displaying a vehicle image GYK (special image) simulating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). and D mode (
A selection part SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of a plurality of production modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The production mode already selected in the first production (here, B mode ) is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the vehicle image GYK (special image) simulating a vehicle on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and completed, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode are executed. A performance mode (here, B mode) already selected among modes (a plurality of performance modes) is maintained before the second performance is executed, so that the player is visually entertained. It is possible to improve interest.
In the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J), when the second effect of displaying the look-ahead effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended. , A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of presentation modes), since the presentation mode already selected before the second presentation is executed is maintained. .
In the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I), the second effect of displaying the effect of the holding group, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When finished, the effect mode already selected from among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is maintained before the second effect is executed, so the same is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 95 (A
) to FIG. 95(E), a selection part SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode out of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed on the image display device. 7 (display means), the names of each of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of production modes) are arranged in a reel shape and displayed in rotation, and a selected one is displayed. The display mode is such that the effect mode of is arranged on the frontmost side. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape, the types of selection modes to be rotated and displayed, and one effect mode. Since it is easy to grasp the performance mode to be arranged subsequently, and furthermore, the selected one performance mode is arranged in the frontmost side, so that it is easy to select the performance mode and the player can visually see it. It is possible to entertain and improve interest. Figures 96(A) to 96(E)
97(B) to 97(C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 97 (G
) ~ As shown in FIG. 97(I), the performance of the holding group, which is a special image, is performed (predetermined condition).
contains a condition indicating the degree of expectation of occurrence of a game state that gives a profit to the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a game state in which there is a game state in which there is a big hit in the reserved balls and a profit is given to the player before the big win effect is completed by performing the holding series. can.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the selective display blocking effect in the effect mode will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the selective display inhibition effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. 95(H), the car image GYK (special image) simulating a car is displayed all at once so as to form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Based on the arrival of the next period (fulfillment of a predetermined condition), when the effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 of the selection unit SEL (selection image) ( The selection portion SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by blocking the display on the display means). However, even if the next period in which the effect (group notice) is developed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the image display of the selection part SEL (selection image) is not performed without the effect (group notice) being developed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group notice). group notice) is not deployed. The image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group announcement).
In the selective display blocking effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J), the pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next term (predetermined condition is met) in which the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed. Then, the selection part SEL (selected image) is prevented from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). was However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed arrives (even if the predetermined conditions are met)
, the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) may be continued without performing the look-ahead effect. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and if the lottery wins, the look-ahead effect is performed, but if the lottery is lost, the look-ahead effect is not performed. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect.
97(G) to 97(I), in the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode, based on the arrival of the next term (predetermined condition is satisfied) in which the special image of the holding sequence is produced, this holding sequence is displayed. is performed, display of the selection part SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented, and the selection part SEL (selection image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the performance of the holding series is performed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the performance of the holding series is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection part SEL (selection image) is displayed. may continue to be displayed. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform the performance of the holding series, and if the winning is successful, the performance of the holding series is carried out, whereas if the winning is not successful, the production of the holding series is not carried out. . It should be noted that the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to perform the performance of the holding series.
may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead.

[Modification 2]
In the selective display inhibition effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. 95(H), the vehicle image GYK imitating a car as a special image forms a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is given priority and the selection part SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as the special image, a full-body image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character and items, a group image of a plurality of characters, etc. It may be an image inserted as a production). Further, when the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the ready-to-win effect, the eye-catching image is set as a special image so that the eye-catching image, which is the special image, is given priority. Then, the selection part SEL is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the Furthermore, when the character of the maker that produces the game machine 1 appears on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of this maker is used as a special image, and the display of the character of the maker is given priority, and the selection part SEL is displayed on the image display device. 7 may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
96(G) to 96(J) in the selective display inhibiting effect B of the effect mode, when the look-ahead effect is performed during the variation in a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation, the look-ahead effect is performed. If it is before it is performed, it is possible to select the production mode during the fluctuation, but if the pre-reading production is performed, the production mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Also during the period (interval) from when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the reserved image 9A where the effect is performed is stopped and displayed until the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the player Even if the operator operates (depresses) the production button 63, the production mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right as the reserved digested image 9C, and the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is It may be possible to make it impossible to select the production mode only during the period until it is confirmed and displayed, and even if the look-ahead production is performed during the fluctuation in a specific period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation. Alternatively, the performance mode may be selected during a period from when the suspended image 9A subjected to the read performance moves to the right as the suspended digested image 9C to when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

[Modification 4]
Selective display blocking effect A of production mode in FIG. 95, selective display blocking effect B of production mode in FIG.
In the interval, since the already selected production mode is continued, the production mode cannot be selected unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. However, the selection of the performance mode may be limited to the interval at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in a predetermined performance among a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances. Predetermined effects include those with a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot game (jackpot effect) that is advantageous to the player. In the so-called normal reach, after the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. In the intervals where
It is not possible to select the production mode.

[Modification 5]
In the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), the first face of the holding consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 faces forward (toward the player) and stops. When displayed, although it is not possible to tell the type of hit, the big hit is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. I was able to tell you that I was there, but I could not tell you the number of jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special hold. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations. For example, when the number of jackpots is 3 in the hold information corresponding to the 4 second special hold, the first character body HRC1 of the hold consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (toward the player) is displayed. "+3" may be displayed on the right side of the screen, or 3 holding continuation images HRC having the first character body HRC1 may be arranged horizontally, 3 vertically or 3 diagonally. good too.

[Modification 6]
In the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is animatedly displayed on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such moving images include moving images that explain the flow of the production in each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, and the like.
A moving image in G, a moving image in animation, or a scene from a movie may be used. A still image may be used instead of the moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the selective display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode in FIG. 97, a selection part SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one effect mode out of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed as an image. The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) was executed during the jackpot effect (performance of the winning game). However, in addition to the jackpot production, during the production in the small winning game (or during the production in the small winning game instead of the big winning production)
, the selection portion SEL (selected image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). In this case, a second image display device 7 (display means) displays an effect of the holding group, which is a special image.
, may be executed during the production of the small winning game in addition to the big winning production (or during the production of the small winning game instead of the big winning production).

[Modification 8]
Selective display blocking effect A of production mode in FIG. 95, selective display blocking effect B of production mode in FIG.
In the selective display inhibition effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97, some of the effects described above may not be provided, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying various images,
a first effect for displaying on the display means a selection image from which one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected;
at least one of a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means, and
capable of preventing display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect and displaying the special image on the display means by the second effect, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The first effect and the second effect can be executed in a specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
Equipped with a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player,
Only when a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means is operated, one production mode can be selected from the plurality of production modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of each of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated, and the selected effect mode is arranged on the front side.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined conditions include conditions suggesting the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a game state that gives a profit to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. This game ball image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the game ball image effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is a production that displays an image on the .

[Game ball image effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9C
corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increased. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is
This is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface becomes green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Here, the prize is over. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the button image BG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is
This is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the green upper surface becomes red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), a pressing promotion effect is executed. In the press-promoting effect, the button image BG whose upper surface color is changed is displayed in the color change effect. Also, a message image MG saying "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Game ball image effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. Reserved digest image 9C
corresponds to the performance symbols (performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it shall be a variation during the time saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increased. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is
This is an effect of changing the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the LED is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is
It is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Here, the prize is over. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (left movable accessory 14L) is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is
This is an effect of changing the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the LED is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C,
All of the right performance symbols 8R are stopped at "7".

[Game ball image effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a pending stock effect is executed. The pending stock effect is a effect that makes the memory number of the second special figure pending the maximum "4" in the variation. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Stick to the right and accumulate hold" is displayed in the center portion of the display screen 7a. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure pending, and three pending images 9B are displayed here. The suspended digest image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently changing on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increased. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. The panel image PG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect for changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters of "CHANCE" are "BIG
CHANCE”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Here, it is over-winning. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with the collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect for changing the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the characters of "BIG CHANCE" are changed to "Gekiatsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is a effect for notifying that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background thereof is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven rainbow colors. The rainbow background RB is a background for determining the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped with the same number to form a so-called double pattern. Here, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C
, and the right effect pattern 8R are both stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game ball image presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect using the game ball image UG is executed (FIG. 98(C) (
E), Figures 99 (C) (E), Figures 100 (B) (D)), Suggesting expectations for transition to jackpot games (Figures 98 (D) (F), Figures 99 (D) (F) , FIGS. 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the attraction of the game can be enhanced by the effect using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is made to collide with the collision object (FIG. 98(C) (
E), Figures 99 (C) (E), Figures 100 (B) (D)), suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a big win game by changing the color of the collision object (Figures 98 (D) (F) , FIGS. 99(D)(F), 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect of the color change caused by the collision of the game ball images UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 (FIG. 98) and a panel image PG on which characters are displayed are adopted as collision objects of the game ball image UG (FIG. 1).
00). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a uniform effect on the display screen 7a, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (
The left movable accessory 14L) is adopted (Fig. 99). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a dynamic performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 (FIGS. 98(C) and 98(E)). , FIG. 99 (C
) (E), FIG. 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if a game ball collision effect has been executed by a game ball that has entered the ball, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the game ball image effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, one game ball is represented in the game ball image UG, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision object.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 . On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. - 特許庁

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 . On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over winning after the second special figure reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
Although the above is an example of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a big hit, it may be applied as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a high-probability or low-probability time-saving game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
A game ball effect using a game ball image, which is an image imitating a game ball, is executed, and it is possible to suggest the player's expectation of transition to an advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the game ball presentation, by causing the game ball image to collide with a collision object and changing the display color or coloring mode of the collision object, the degree of expectation for transition to the advantageous game is suggested.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
The collision target is an image displayed on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is an accessory placed in the game area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball effect is executed when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time-saving game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined ball entrance is a starting opening, and is executed when a ball enters the starting opening after the retention memory due to the game ball entering the starting opening reaches the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized by:

101 to 103, specific end surface effects A to C of a stereoscopic image will be described below.
In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing of the drawings, and decorative designs displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also shown in the drawings. Some items are omitted for simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There are things that are

This specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when the instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image is included, the ROM 10
3 to display the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image is included, the position, tilt, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 are detected. change the mode.

Here, first, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be explained, and then the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described.
, and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific End Face Rendering A of Stereoscopic Image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 101 shows
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image; The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects when the ready-to-win effect is formed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the ready-to-win effect. be. That is, the plurality of types of ready-to-reach effects include the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG.
On the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "9" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is variably displayed to form reach.

When the reach is formed, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image temporarily stops at the number "8", and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image rotates (for example, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image When the display mode is set such that it gradually becomes smaller while moving away from the upper side toward the lower side while rotating, this time, another rotation (for example, from the right side toward the left side of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image) is performed. 101(C), the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 101(C). , and the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, and becomes a display mode in which the rotation is stopped. As will be described later, this is done in order to greatly display the mode of double doors by the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR obtained by dividing the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right.

After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right sides by a vertical line (center line) passing through the midpoint of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the three-dimensional image middle decorative pattern 8C. 8
It is divided into CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR of the three-dimensional image, and as shown in FIG. Here, the right end face of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL becomes the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, which is a three-dimensional image in which the left end face is the open side end face, and the left end face of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR is the three-dimensional image in which the left end face is the open side end face. is the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

The middle decorative pattern 8C is formed as colored and opaque, but when the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the left middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed.
The specific end surface 8CLa of L and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8
The specific end face 8CRa of CR becomes a transparent region.

When the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the specific end surface 8 of the left central decorative pattern 8CL.
It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of CLa and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two character bodies CRA and CRB, which is a still image in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other holding swords, and which shows the world view of the presentation by the game machine 1. Even if the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-door manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them do not change. It's becoming A character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, and a character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR have just opened in a double-door manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8C.
The transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of R is small, and the specific end surface 8CL of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL
Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent region a and the transparent region of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR are transparent, the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door manner. As the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR increase, the character body CRB increases from the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL. can be visually recognized, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left central decorative design 8CL and the right central decorative design 8CR are opened wide in a double-door manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative design 8CL is transformed into the character body CRB, as shown in FIG. 101(E). The transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR enlarges until the existence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 101(E), as shown in FIG. 101(F), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7
A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG.
The character CRB seen through the transparent area La and the character CRA seen through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and 2 An action presentation is developed by two character bodies CRA and CRB. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left central decorative design 8CL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right central decorative design 8CR. , two character forms CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

An action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all together on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player.
9", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9". The Rukoto.

[Specific End Face Rendering B of Stereoscopic Image]
Next, specific end surface rendering B of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 102 shows
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect B of a stereoscopic image; The specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win effects when the ready-to-win effect is formed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the ready-to-win effect. be. That is, the plurality of types of ready-to-reach effects include the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG.
The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "9" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is variably displayed to form reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface moves to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. , advances (moves) downward to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (performance position)). When the second movable accessory 15 advances (moves) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (performance position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. (for example, 30 degrees) and then stops and becomes an inclined state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102(D), "OAR
A character string "O" appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a character string image LG of a colored and opaque stereoscopic image "OARO". The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the color may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (performance position) to the retreat position (home position).

The stereoscopic character string image LG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the stereoscopic character string image LG) while moving backward. When the display mode is set such that the character string image LG becomes farther away and gradually becomes smaller, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is switched to another rotation (for example, a rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and while rotating, the character string image LG gradually approaches the front while rotating. , and as shown in FIG. 102(E), the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 became large, and the rotation was stopped. display mode. As will be described later, this is done in order to enlarge the double-sided display by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right.

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and "OA" is the left character string image L
GL and "RO" are divided into two stereoscopic character string images having a right character string image LGR, and as shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode that opens in a double door mode. Here, the right end face of the letter "A", which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, is the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, which is the open side end face, and the left side of the right character string image LGR. The left end face of the character "R", which is the end face, is the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, which is the stereoscopic image that is the open end face.

The character string image LG is formed as a colored and opaque character string image.
The specific end surface LGLa of L and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are expressed in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image L
Each of the specific end faces LGRa of GR becomes a transparent region.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-sided manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed as a specific end surface L of the left character string image LGL.
It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of GLa and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two character bodies CRA and CRB, which is a still image in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with swords, and which shows the world view of the presentation by the game machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double-door manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them do not change. It's becoming A character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR have just been opened in a double-door manner, the transparent region of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LG
The transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of R is small, and the specific end surface LGL of the left character string image LGL
Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of a and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-door manner. As the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR become larger, the character body CRB increases from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. can be visually recognized, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened wide in a double-door manner, as shown in FIG. The transparent region of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR increases to the extent that the existence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102(G), as shown in FIG. 102(H), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 is displayed.
A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG.
The character CRB viewed through the transparent area of La and the character CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and 2 An action presentation is developed by two character bodies CRA and CRB. At this time, in addition to the character CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, , two character forms CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

An action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all together on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player.
9", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9". The Rukoto.

[Specific End Face Rendering C of Stereoscopic Image]
Next, specific end surface rendering C of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 103 shows
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific end face effect C of a stereoscopic image; The specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win effect when the ready-to-win effect is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the ready-to-win effect. be. That is, the plurality of types of ready-to-reach effects include the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image.

103(A), the image display device 7
The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "9" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is variably displayed to form reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface moves to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. , advances (moves) downward to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (performance position)). When the second movable accessory 15 advances (moves) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (performance position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. (for example, 30 degrees) and then stops and becomes an inclined state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103(D), "OAR
A character string "O" appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a character string image LG of a colored and opaque stereoscopic image "OARO". The appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15, or the appearance may be the same but the color may be different.

After that, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (performance position) to the retreat position (home position).

The stereoscopic character string image LG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the stereoscopic character string image LG) while moving backward. When the display mode is set such that the characters become distant and gradually become smaller, this time, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is switched to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and while rotating, the character string image LG gradually approaches the front while rotating. , and as shown in FIG. 103(E), it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation was stopped. display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the character string image LG of the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right parts, and the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other in a closed display mode in order to enlarge the display mode. is performed on

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and "OA" is the left character string image L
GL and "RO" are divided into two stereoscopic character string images having a right character string image LGR, and as shown in FIG. The display mode rotates forward about the vertical direction, and the right side of the right character string image LGR rotates forward about the left side of the right character string image LGR about the vertical direction. Here, the left side character string image LGL immediately before being split into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. The front of the image LGL", just before it is split into two character string images (
In the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E), the surface indicated as "RO" of the right character string image LGR is referred to as "the front surface of the right character string image LGR" after division.

As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image L
The left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated such that the front surface of the GL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR"). The display mode in which the front face of the right character string image LGR faces and is closed so as to overlap").

As a result, the right end face of the character "A", which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, is the closed end face, and the left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is the open end face. Further, the left end face of the character "R", which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR, is the closed end face, and the right end face of the character "O", which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR, is the open end face.

The left end face of the character "O", which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is an open end face,
Here, the right end face of the character "O", which is the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, and the right end face of the right character string image LGR, is an open end face, and is a stereoscopic image here. It becomes the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

The character string image LG is formed as a colored and opaque character string image.
The specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL
and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions.

In a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and are closed so as to overlap each other, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed as a transparent end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL. area and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two character bodies CRA and CRB, which is a still image in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other holding swords, and which shows the world view of the presentation by the game machine 1. Gradually, the left character string image LGL is displayed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other.
and the right character string image LGR are closed, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size between them do not change. A character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Shortly after the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, The transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are small. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the left character string image LGLa is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes transparent. When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR become large, a part of the character CRB can be seen from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the right character string image LGR can be seen. A part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa of .

When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, the display mode is closed, as shown in FIG. 103(G). , the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to allow the existence of the character CRB to be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR is increases until the presence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103(G), as shown in FIG. 103(H), the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 is displayed.
A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, as shown in FIG.
The character CRB viewed through the transparent area of La and the character CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and 2 An action presentation is developed by two character bodies CRA and CRB. At this time, in addition to the character CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR, , two character forms CRA,
The background image of the CRB is also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size.

An action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all together on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player.
9", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9". The Rukoto.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific end surface rendering of the stereoscopic image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 101(E), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided. Design 8
C. When the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL into which the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided and the right middle decorative design into which the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided are displayed. The specific end face 8CRa of the decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8C of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.
Through Ra, two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) become visible.
can be executed. According to this configuration, the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are transmitted through the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR, which are expressed in a transparent manner. Since it is possible to provide an unprecedented and innovative performance that can be visually recognized, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. 102(A) to 102(G), and in the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. Two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 101(E), in the first effect, the specific end face 8CLa of the left side middle decorative pattern 8CL represented in a transparent manner and the right side middle decorative pattern expressed in a transparent manner The left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR, which are obtained by dividing the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, open (rotate) in a double-door manner so that the area with the specific end face 8CRa of the 8CR becomes large. ing. According to this configuration, the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-door fashion, and the specific end surface 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL is represented in a transparent manner. and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR represented in a transparent manner, the area of the two character bodies CR
Since the area in which A and CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be enlarged, the player can be visually entertained, and interest can be improved.
102(A) to 102(G), the left character string image L
By opening (rotating) the GL and the right character string image LGR in a double-sided manner, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL is expressed in a transparent manner. The area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR that is attached to the
The area in which two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be enlarged, and so on.
103(A) to 103(G), the left character string image L
GL and the right character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner by rotating to a closed display mode such that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other. The areas of the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR expressed in a transparent manner are enlarged, and two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are formed. can be seen in a larger area, and so on.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, before the first effect, the number "8", which is the decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying the image in a larger size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, before the first effect, the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, is displayed in a larger size on the image display device 7 (display means), thereby displaying the decorative pattern 8CL. Before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR are represented in a transparent manner, the player Since it is possible to contribute to directing the player's line of sight, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), before the first effect, the image display device 7 ( display means), the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner before and after the specific end face LGRa of the left character string image LGL. Similarly, it can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to LGLa and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 103(E), before the first effect, the front face of the left character string image LGL and the front face of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other. By being able to display on the image display device 7 (display means), the left character string before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. Similarly, it can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to the specific end surface LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. By moving away in the depth direction, the size of the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, is displayed in a smaller size. The size of "8" is displayed large. According to this configuration, the double-sided configuration of the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right side middle decorative pattern 8CR can be displayed in a large size, so that the player can be visually entertained and interest is improved. can be achieved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), the double-sided configuration by the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR can be displayed in a large size, and the same is true.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103(E), the display mode in which the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other can be displayed in a large size. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 101(E), in the first effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of left middle decorative patterns 8CL and right middle decorative patterns 8CR, and the divided left middle decorative patterns are divided. To execute an effect in which two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end face 8CLa of 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR (the specific end faces in each of the divided three-dimensional images). can be done. According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image into a plurality of pieces, the number of three-dimensional images increases. Since it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces in the image, the player can be visually entertained and enjoyment. can be improved.
102(E) to 102(G) of the stereoscopic image specific end face effect B, FIGS. 103(E) to 103(E) to FIG.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image of 03(G), the result of dividing the character string image LG into two character string images with "OA" as the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR. ,
As the number of stereoscopic images increases, the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases.
, CRB (predetermined image) can be given to the player many opportunities to view.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 102(D), a second movable accessory 15 (movable member) capable of moving to an advanced position (predetermined position) in front (front face) of the image display device 7 (display means) is provided. Movable accessory 1
5 (movable member) is operated (at a predetermined timing) when a ready-to-win effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects when reach is formed during a variable effect of decorative patterns. and move to the advanced position (predetermined position). A colored and opaque stereoscopic character string image LG with a column of "OARO" is displayed. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advanced position (predetermined position), this triggers the second movable accessory 15 (movable member). is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a colored opaque stereoscopic character string image LG of "OARO", the second movable accessory 15 (movable The character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the member) is as if the character string "OARO" was shaken off from the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform such a novel production, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 103(C) to 103(D).

[Modification]
A modified example of the specific end face rendering of the stereoscopic image will be described below.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL
and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are transparent regions, and in the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102 and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions. However, the specific end surfaces 8CLa and 8CRa in the specific end surface rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG.
, specific end faces LGLa and LGRa in specific end face rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and FIG.
The specific end faces LGLa and LGRa in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in (1) may have translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end face is represented in a translucent manner like frosted glass, and the specific end face gradually becomes a transparent area from a blurred form in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end face. It is also possible to make it easier to visually recognize the predetermined image through the specific end surface as the degree of transparency increases. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, FIG.
In the stereoscopic image specific end surface rendering C of 3, 2 as a predetermined image is displayed through the specific end surface of the stereoscopic image.
Two character bodies CRA and CRB can be visually recognized, and two character bodies CRA and C
It was a still image of RB facing each other with swords. However, moving images may be used instead of still images. The animation may be, for example, an explanation of the flow until two characters CRA and CRB hold swords and face each other, a three-dimensional CG animation, an animation animation, or a movie animation. It may be one scene.

[Modification 3]
Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, FIG.
3, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into three or more stereoscopic images. In this way, the number of stereoscopic images increases due to the division, and the number of specific end faces in each stereoscopic image also increases. It can be given to a player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8C
102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double-door manner, and the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103 is specified. In the end surface effect C, the left character string image LG is gradually displayed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and close so as to overlap each other.
L and the right character string image LGR were closed. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or may be rotated in mutually different directions. For example, in the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. Alternatively, the left central decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated forward, while the right central decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated backward. Alternatively, the left central decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated backward, while the right central decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated clockwise. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right rotation, left rotation, Alternatively, the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward while the right character string image LGR may be rotated backward. Alternatively, the left character string image LGL is rotated backward while the right character string image LGR is rotated to the right. Also, FIG.
3, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right rotating mode, left-rotating mode, forward-rolling mode, backward-rolling mode, etc.), or rotating in mutually different directions, for example, the left character string image LGL is rotated forward. , the right character string image LGR is reversed, or the left character string image LGL
is rotated backward, whereas the right character string image LGR is rotated to the right.

[Modification 5]
Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific edge effect B of stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, FIG.
3, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image shows the world view of the effect by the game machine 1 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image. However, it may also suggest a future destination of the ready-to-win production. Since there are a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects development destinations, the development destinations that can be visually recognized through a specific end face can suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win game, and a predetermined image and development destinations can suggest the degree of expectation to the player. It is also possible to contribute to the player's own discovery of the relevance to the degree of expectation that the game will occur.

[Modification 6]
Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific edge effect B of stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, FIG.
3, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image shows the world view of the effect by the gaming machine 1 as a predetermined image. For example, two character types CRA,
In addition to CRB holding a sword, items such as swords and shields, vehicles, etc., are also possible, and the characters "Clash" and "Ranbu" indicate actions by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. It may also be something that can be represented by two kanji characters such as a character or the character "Musou".

[Modification 7]
Specific end face effect A of stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific end face effect B of stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, FIG.
Part of the described effects may not be included in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in 3, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying various images,
When a stereoscopic image is displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a specific end surface of the stereoscopic image is represented in a transparent manner and a predetermined image is visible through the specific end surface. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first rendering, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the region of the specific end surface is enlarged.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
A second display for displaying a larger size of the stereoscopic image on the display means before the first effect
Able to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, the stereoscopic image is displayed in a smaller size by moving away in the depth direction, and then displayed in a larger size by approaching in the front direction. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end surface of each of the divided stereoscopic images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
A movable member that can move to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means,
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position,
In the second rendering, the stereoscopic image in which the movable member is stereoscopically represented is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

104 to 106, description will be given of the combination effects A to C of the movable accessories. Figure 1
04 to 106, the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawings, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the 2 movable accessories 15 are also omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

This combination effect of the movable role can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 1
01 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute a combination effect of movable parts is included. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a combination effect of the movable accessory,
The positions of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2,
The inclination and the light emission mode can be changed, the position, the inclination and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 can be changed. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the frame 53 (hereinafter referred to as "the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66") is changed.

The left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 may be provided with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and the left side movable accessory 14L may emit light in a multicolor mode. The right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light.
are mounted (a plurality of them are provided) so that the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R can be a mode of multicolor light emitting. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of LEDs are provided), so that the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be a multicolor light emission mode,
A frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and a frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The luminescence mode of the frame lamp 66 (provided) can be a mode of multicolor luminescence.

Here, the movable accessory combination effect A will be described first, and then the movable accessory combination effect B and the movable accessory combination effect C will be described in order.

[Movable role combination production A]
First, the combination effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect A of the movable accessory. 104
As shown in (A), the left side movable accessory 14L moves from the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory luminous mode.
advance (move) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the right movable accessory 14
R is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is shifted from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) toward the front (forward) center advance position. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the left movable accessory 14L is the same as that of the left movable accessory 14L. different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
advances (moves) toward the advanced position of the front (front) center of the image display device 7 (in a direction to approach each other), and as shown in FIG. In the (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. and the right decorative part, which is half of the decorative part of , are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) in which the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with their eyes wide open is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of a smiling person with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united role with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united role can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104(C) and 104(D), the united role tilts from the top side to the bottom side toward the front side (player side) and then returns to the original position. face is bowed)” movement. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, there is also an image expressing emotions in response to the action of the united role tilting to the front side (player's side) and returning to the original position. By changing, the expression of the united character also changes three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Extends (moves) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (extended position (performance position)), and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and stop. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 advances forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged. It will cover the upper part. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either one of a portion of the left movable accessory 14L and a portion of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory to the light emission mode to extinguish, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66 are controlled. The light emission mode is controlled from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory) to the light emission mode to turn off. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emission mode for the second movable accessory when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The second movable accessory light emission mode is a different light emission mode from the left side movable role item light emission mode and the right side movable role item light emission mode (a different light emission mode from the left side movable accessory light emission mode).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled again from the light emission mode to the light emission mode for the left movable accessory, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp are controlled. The light emission mode of 66 is controlled from the light emission mode to turn off again to the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). That is, the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left movable role, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right movable role. By changing the light emission mode of the object 15 to the light emission mode for the second movable accessory, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R). same light emission mode)
and the light emission modes of the second movable accessory 15 are different from each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emission mode and stops. and
When the retraction (movement) is completed from the advanced position (performance position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emission mode for the second movable accessory,
It is controlled to another light emission mode (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emission mode to turn off.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are moved away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L is in the left movable accessory light emission mode in the front (forward) direction of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the right movable accessory light emitting mode (left movable role). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for objects)
from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (moves). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position of the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory luminous mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a,
The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode that turns off, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). In the light emitting mode), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves backward (
When movement) is completed, the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emission mode to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode turns off from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). controlled to

In this way, the frame lamp 66 emits light when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). , along with this, it is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right movable accessory 14R is operated (
During the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), the light emission mode is the same as that of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. is controlled to the light emission mode of

The light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, the light emission mode for the right movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode for the frame lamp 66 progresses. progresses according to the emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The frame lamp 66 emits light when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (the right movable accessory 14R
advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position). 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right side movable role 14R are provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right side movable role are controlled according to the respective light emission pattern data. Alternatively, instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission of the right movable accessory 14R are changed according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. Aspects may proceed.

[Movable role combination production B]
Next, the combination effect A of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining Movable Accessory Combining Effect B. FIG. The combination production B of the movable accessories is first shown in FIG.
As shown in (A), the left side movable accessory 14L moves from the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emission mode.
advance (move) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the right movable accessory 14
Moves forward (moves) from a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a luminous mode in which R is extinguished. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, which is the extinguished light emission mode. different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
advances (moves) toward the advanced position of the front (front) center of the image display device 7 (in a direction to approach each other), and as shown in FIG. In the (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape. It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the left movable accessory 14L emits light in a manner suitable for the left movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled to turn off the light emitting mode, and the area formed in the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with their eyes wide open is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of a smiling person with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united character with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united character can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Extends (moves) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (extended position (performance position)), and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and stop. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 advances forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R It will cover the upper part. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained in the extinguished light emission mode, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are both extinguished. is maintained. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 is the second movable accessory 1
When 5 advances, it is controlled to the light emission mode for the second movable accessory. The light emission mode for the second movable role is different from the light emission mode for the left side movable role, and the light emission mode for the right side movable role (which is different from the light emission mode for the left side movable role and the light emission mode for the second movable role), which will be described later. mode).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 105(D) and 105(E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the extinguished light emitting mode to the left side movable accessory light emitting mode again.
The light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emitting mode to turn off the light emitting mode to the right movable role light emitting mode (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes exactly the same light emission mode as the light emission mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R. The light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left movable role, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right movable role. By changing the light emission mode of the object 15 to the light emission mode for the second movable accessory, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R (the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R). The same light emission mode as the light emission mode) and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 are different light emission modes.

Then, the united accessory makes a "nod" motion (as if a person's face is bowing) by tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (player's side) and then returning to its original position. At this time,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the united role tilts to the front side (toward the player) and returns to the original position, and the image expressing the emotion is also changed and united. The expression of the character also becomes a display mode that changes three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emission mode and stops. becomes a state,
When the retraction (movement) is completed from the advanced position (performance position) to the retracted position (home position), the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emission mode for the second movable accessory,
It is controlled to another light emission mode (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory), or is controlled to the light emission mode to turn off.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are moved away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L is in the left movable accessory light emission mode in the front (forward) direction of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the right movable accessory light emitting mode (left movable role). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for objects)
from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (moves). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a,
The light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory to the light emission mode to turn off, and the right movable accessory 14R is controlled to the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode for the left movable accessory and the light emission mode for the left movable accessory and the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). 2 The front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the movable accessory) (
Forward) When the retreat (movement) is completed from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory. (Different light emission mode from left side movable accessory light emission mode and second movable accessory light emission mode)
is controlled to a light emission mode in which the light is extinguished. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. different light emission mode) to a light emission mode that is extinguished.

In this way, the frame lamp 66 emits light when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). , along with this, it is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the lighting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right movable accessory 14R is operated (
During the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), the light emission mode is the same as that of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. is controlled to the light emission mode of

The light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L, the light emission mode for the right movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode for the frame lamp 66 progresses. progresses according to the emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The frame lamp 66 emits light when the right movable accessory 14R is activated (the right movable accessory 14R
advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position). 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right side movable role 14R are provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right side movable role are controlled according to the respective light emission pattern data. Alternatively, instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission of the right movable accessory 14R are changed according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. Aspects may proceed.

[Movable role combination production C]
Next, the combination effect C of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect C of the movable accessory. The combination effect C of the movable accessories is first shown in FIG.
As shown in (A), the left side movable accessory 14L moves from the left retracted position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emission mode.
advance (move) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the right movable accessory 14
R is the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is shifted from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) toward the front (forward) center advance position. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right movable accessory, which is exactly the same as the light emission mode for the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. different.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively.
advances (moves) toward the advanced position of the front (front) center of the image display device 7 (in a direction to approach each other), and as shown in FIG. In the (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring shape attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. and the right decorative part, which is half of the decorative part of , are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) in which the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. It is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with their eyes wide open is displayed, and then the image is switched to an image of a smiling person with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united character with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united character can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 106(C) and 106(D), the united role tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to the original position. face is bowed)” movement. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, there is also an image expressing emotions in response to the action of the united role tilting to the front side (player's side) and returning to the original position. By changing, the expression of the united character also changes three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L is displayed in the image display device in the left movable accessory luminous mode. The display screen 7 of the image display device 7 is moved from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of 7.
While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of a, the right movable accessory 14R is displayed on the image display device in the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). 7 moves backward (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position of the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory luminous mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a,
The light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode that turns off, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). In the light emitting mode), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves backward (
When movement) is completed, the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emission mode to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode turns off from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). controlled to

In this way, the frame lamp 66 emits light when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). , along with this, it is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right movable accessory 14R is operated (
During the period during which the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), the light emission mode is the same as that of the right movable accessory 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R. is controlled to the light emission mode of

The light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L progresses in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R progresses in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the left movable accessory 14L defined in time series. It progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is changed when the right movable accessory 14R is operated (the right movable accessory 14R
advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position). 14R is operated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern data for the right side movable role 14R are provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the right side movable role are controlled according to the respective light emission pattern data. Alternatively, instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission of the right movable accessory 14R are changed according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R. Aspects may proceed.

104, and the movable role combination effect B of FIG. It advances (moves) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (performance position)) from a stationary state at an upper retracted position (home position). It will be in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the direction and stopped, and then
The second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emission mode, stops, returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats from the advanced position (performance position). 106, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by the second movable accessory 15 is shown in FIG. There is no effect of appearing in front of (forward). This is a jackpot game (jackpot performance) when executed during the variation production of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation).
104 is the highest, followed by FIG.
106 is set to be the lowest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of combining the movable accessories will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 104(A) to FIG.
As shown in 04(H), a front frame 53 provided with a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) and an opening formed in the front frame 53 An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and an advancing position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). A left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and a right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 that can be moved to (predetermined positions) and combined are on the game board 2. The left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right side movable role 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting means). When the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the first movable accessory 14 left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is provided with The light emission modes of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) and the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53
light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and can be combined. As a result, the player can be visually entertained, and the plurality of LEs provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14
D (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). By using the same light emission mode, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 10 of the combination performance B of the movable parts of FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G)
6(A) to FIG. 106(F), the same applies to the combination effect C of the movable accessories.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 104(A) to FIG.
As shown in 04(H), the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the first movable role 1
4 are combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (plural movable members) , a plurality of LEDs (second Light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamps 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). are designed to have different light emission modes. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14
and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 moves to the advanced position and merges, so that the player can be visually entertained, and the first
A plurality of LEDs (second
light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 L.
By changing the light emission mode from the light emission mode of ED), the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved. 105(A) to 105(G), and the movable accessory combination effect C of FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 104 (E) to FIG.
As shown in 04(F), the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the first movable role 1
A part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the left movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of 4. 14L (other movable member) and a second movable accessory 15 (
non-coalescing movable members). According to this configuration, the left side movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right side movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined, and the second movable role is newly formed separately. Since the object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, the game The user can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combination effect B of the movable accessories in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 104 (E) to FIG.
As shown in 04(F), a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member), and the second movable accessory is provided. 15 (non-united movable member) provided with a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light
), when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are united, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right. Role 14
A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) respectively provided on R (a specific movable member) and the left movable member 14L (another movable member) of the first movable member 14
and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided on the front frame 53 have different light emission modes. . According to this configuration, the left side movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right side movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined, and the second movable role is newly formed separately. An object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) emit light. A plurality of LEDs (second 2 light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and the frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). Since the light emission modes are different from each other, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combination effect B of the movable accessories in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 104(A) to FIG.
As shown in 04(H), the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the first
A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the left movable role 14L of the movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the second movable role 15 LE
D (third light emitting means) is an LED (light emitting means) capable of emitting multicolor light. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Multiple LEs provided
Since D (second light emitting means) and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 can emit multicolor light, the player can be visually entertained. , It is possible to improve interest. 105(A) to 105(G), and the movable accessory combination effect C of FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 104(A) to FIG.
As shown in 04 (H), before the occurrence of a jackpot game state (jackpot effect) that gives a profit to the player is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variable effect of decorative symbols (for example, During the period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the end of variation), the first movable accessory 14
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (a plurality of movable members)
can be combined. According to this configuration, before the occurrence of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the decorative pattern fluctuation effect (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation)) , the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are moved to the advanced position and united, thereby impacting the player. As well as being able to provide a certain performance, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. 105(A) to 105(G) Movable Accessory Combining Effect B, FIGS. 106(A) to 10
The same applies to the combination effect C of the movable accessory in 6(F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, FIG. 104(A) to FIG.
As shown in 04(H), the first movable accessory 1 is activated during the period from the occurrence until the end of the jackpot game state (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player (that is, during the jackpot performance).
4, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 are displayed during the period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state (jackpot presentation) to the end thereof (during the jackpot presentation). The right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) moves to the advanced position and becomes a united mode, so that it is possible to provide the player with an impactful performance and visually entertain the player. It is possible to improve interest. 105(A) to 105(G), and the movable accessory combination effect C of FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Modification]
A modified example of the effect of combining the movable accessories will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. Role 14
The right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) moves to the advanced position and is united. However, one or all of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position. It may return to the retracted position (home position) and move to the advanced position again in the middle of the movement, or may go back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, resulting in a combination effect of the movable parts that do not combine. . In this case also, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14
Light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on (specific movable member) and frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (multicolor light emission) A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) and multiple LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. It becomes a light emission mode different from the mode. Also, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first
The right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 is at the retracted position (home position).
and the advanced position, and as a result, even when the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) newly appears during the performance of combining movable accessories that do not combine, the second movable accessory 15 role 15 (
The light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the non-combined movable member) is the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (specific movable member ) and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) respectively provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the front frame A frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (L
ED)) has a different emission mode from that of ED)).

[Modification 2]
104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. Role 14
The right side movable accessory 14R is moved to the advanced position and united. However, three or more movable accessories may move to their advanced positions and be united. In this case, the first movable accessory 1 is the specific movable accessory that has the same light emission mode as the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)).
4 may be used as the right movable accessory 14R, or the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 may be replaced with another movable accessory different from the right movable accessory 14R. It may be a movable accessory.

[Modification 3]
104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. When the right movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is positioned (waiting) at the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member that hides the existence of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.
and a right decorative member that hides the presence of L is provided on the game board 2, the left decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light, and the right decorative member is a full-color L capable of emitting multi-color light.
A plurality of EDs may be mounted. In this case, when the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are respectively positioned (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the first movable role A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even if the left decorative member and the right decorative member are mounted on the left decorative member and the right decorative member, the left decorative member and the right decorative member can perform light emission effects by emitting light from a plurality of full-color LEDs respectively mounted on the left decorative member and the right decorative member. For example, either one of the light emission mode of the left decorative member and the right decorative member or the light emission mode of both decorative members and the frame lamp 66
and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be the same light emission mode.

[Modification 4]
104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) provided in the member) and the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (capable of emitting multicolor light). LEDs))
The light emission mode was the same as the light emission mode by. However, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the front frame 53 While the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening has the same light emission mode, the plurality of lamps provided on the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emission mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are made to be different. Alternatively, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14
The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on (a specific movable member) and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 has a different light emission mode, whereas a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) LED) and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 may be the same light emission mode.

[Modification 5]
104, the movable accessory combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable accessory combination effect C of FIG. The left decorative part that is half of the part and the right decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (unified accessory) having a ring shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R is formed,
The united role performs a motion of "nodding (as if a person's face is bowing)" by tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player's side) and then returning to its original position. However, the combined accessory rotates the left side and the right side toward the player side (player side) and returns to the original position.
A person's face may be turned left and right)”. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image with crossed eyes (for example, see FIG. 54) is displayed as an image that expresses emotion. An image that expresses emotion may also be used.

[Modification 6]
As the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot game (jackpot effect) during execution of the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation), the combination effect A of the movable role shown in FIG. is the highest, followed by movable accessory combination effect B in FIG. 105, and movable accessory combination effect C in FIG. 106, which is the lowest. 104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. You may make it perform as production|presentation. It may be executed based on the player's operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, or may be executed based on the player's operation (downward pressing operation) of the sword member 64, Operation of the sword button 65 provided at the upper end of the sword member 64 by the player (
It may be executed based on the pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable role of the left movable role 14L and the light emitting mode for the right movable role of the right movable role 14R are completely different. The light emitting mode for the right movable accessory is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the object 14R, and is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory respectively. 14R to have the same light emission mode, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the left movable accessory 14
A light emission mode different from that of L is used. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are interlocked to emit light in the same manner, for example, red, blinking, or gradation lighting, while the frame lamp 66 is turned off. Alternatively, a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of the left movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation, is employed.

[Modification 8]
104, the movable role combination effect B of FIG. 105, and the movable role combination effect C of FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
a front frame provided with the first light emitting means;
a display means visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A game machine comprising a plurality of movable members that can move to a predetermined position in front of the display means and can be combined,
each of the plurality of movable members is provided with a second light emitting means;
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame. is the same light emission mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable member among the plurality of movable members excluding the specific movable member and the light emission mode of the second light emitting means provided on the front frame are combined. The light emission mode is different from the light emission mode of the light emitting means of 1,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
A non-united movable member that is movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being united with the plurality of movable members,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
a third light emitting means is provided on the non-coalescing movable member;
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-united movable member is the second light emitted by the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. The light emitting mode of the means and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of emitting multicolor light,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be united before the occurrence of the winning game effect is displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined during the period from the occurrence of the winning game effect to the end of the effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

11. Operation of the First Movable Accessory 14 in Other Embodiments When executing the effects shown in FIGS.
It differs from FIGS. 49-58. First movable accessory 1 when executing the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182
4 will be described. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 175-182 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107-110.

FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the third aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.

The first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment includes a left fixed accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R, as shown in FIGS. 107-110. The left fixed accessory 14L is not configured to be movable, and is stationary in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover part of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R is configured to be movable in the horizontal direction. Left fixed accessory 1
4L and the right movable accessory 14R each have half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) attached to the tip side thereof. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a half arc shape of the ring shape. The right movable accessory 14R can rest at a retracted position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first mode). When the right movable accessory 14R is in the retracted position, all of them are located on the back side of other members, and all of them are in a state of being difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 107, the left fixed accessory 14L has a pair of movable members 14LP housed at the tip of the arc-shaped left decorative portion. FIG. 107 shows a state (retracted state) in which the pair of movable members 14LP are housed in the left decorative portion. In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 107 is also called the first mode of the movable accessory 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable member 14LP is located on the back side of the left decorative portion when retracted and is difficult to see, and projects rightward as shown in FIG. 108 when advanced. In FIG. 108, the pair of movable members 14LP are in an extended position (deployed position) in which they protrude to the right in parallel with each other.
It is shown. In another embodiment, the state of FIG. 108 is also called the second mode of the movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 109, with the pair of movable members 14LP protruding from the tip of the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R advances leftward to move the pair of movable members 14L.
P comes into contact with the right movable accessory 14R, and a single decorative member (unified accessory) is formed as a whole (
third aspect). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, the image of the face is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united role, thereby completing the human face as a whole. In addition, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the upper portion of the first movable accessory 14 . In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still in a state in which they are partially overlapped and combined. The state of FIG. 110 is also called the fourth mode of the movable accessory 14 .

12. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of this Embodiment Below, each effect example (example of display effect, example of movable character object effect) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

111 to 114, the number-of-holds-linked image display effects A to D will be described below.
This number-of-holds-linked image display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. i.e.
The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when it includes an instruction to execute the holding number linked image display effect and the holding number reaches a predetermined number, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out and displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7
Display an image on a.

[Holding number linked image display effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-linked image display effect A. FIG. The pending number-linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. In the pending number-linked image display effect A, first, FIG.
As shown in 1(A) and FIG. 111(B), the hold is digested when the decorative symbols are fixed, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 111(A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the loose "567".
In conjunction with this fixed stop, the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (holding digestion). Also, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 111B, by shift movement of the two pending icons 9A, the previously displayed older (right) pending icon 9A moves to the pending icon display area and becomes the pending icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be identified by the rectangular image below. At the same time when one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) becomes the relevant pending, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative design shown in FIG. 111(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. Here, it is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101 whether or not the variation corresponds to the "specific variation".
In addition, the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, changes from time saving state to normal state) may be performed at times. An arbitrary condition can be set as to whether or not a specific effect is applied. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(C), by winning the first special symbol, the reserved icon 9
A state is shown in which one A is added to make a total of two. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(D), further, a state is shown in which the number of reserved icons 9A has become three in total due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggesting image HSG stating "Now pending 3 pieces!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggesting image HSG is an image that notifies when the pending number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. Next, Fig. 111
As shown in (E), the pending number suggesting image HSG disappears during a specific change after a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed. Further, FIG. 111(F) shows a state in which one reserved icon 9A is added by winning the first special symbol, resulting in a total of four. At this time, the number-of-holds suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, the pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed for a certain period of time only when the pending number is 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is other than that. As shown in FIG. 111(G), after that, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. That is, the specific variation ends. After this,
FIG. 112(H) to FIG. 112(J) to be described later are executed.

FIG. 111(H) shows a state in which there is no winning of the first special symbol after the start of the specific variation shown in FIG. 111(B). That is, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time has passed after a specific change. In this way, even with a specific variation, the number of holds is a predetermined value (here, 3)
Otherwise, the decoration pattern is determined and stopped without displaying the pending number suggesting image HSG.

FIG. 111(I) shows a state in which, as shown in FIG. 111(C), one reserved icon 9A is added after a specific change, resulting in a total of 2, and then there is no winning of the first special symbol. there is That is, after a predetermined period of time (fluctuation time) has elapsed after a specific fluctuation, the decorative design is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific change, when the number of reservations does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped without displaying the number-of-retention suggestion image HSG.

FIG. 111(J) shows a state in which there is no winning of the first special symbol after the reserved number suggesting image HSG is displayed as shown in FIG. 111(E). That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG
After is displayed, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, in a specific variation, after the pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed once, the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped without being displayed again.

[Holding number linked image display effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-linked image display effect B. FIG. The pending number-linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. Figure 112 (A) ~
FIG. 112(D) is the same as FIG. 111(A) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112(A) and 112(B), the hold is digested at the same time as the determination of decorative symbols is stopped, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112(A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is a loose eye "56".
7” is fixed and stopped. In conjunction with this fixed stop, the relevant pending icon (fluctuation icon)
9C disappears (suspended digestion). Also, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 112B, by shift movement of the two pending icons 9A, the previously displayed older (right) pending icon 9A moves to the pending icon display area and becomes the pending icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be identified by the rectangular image below. At the same time when one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) becomes the relevant pending, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative design shown in FIG. 112(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. Here, it is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101 whether or not the variation corresponds to the "specific variation".
In addition, the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, changes from time saving state to normal state) may be performed at times. An arbitrary condition can be set as to whether or not a specific effect is applied. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(C), by winning the first special symbol, the reserved icon 9
A state is shown in which one A is added to make a total of two. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(D), further, a state is shown in which the number of reserved icons 9A has become three in total due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggesting image HSG stating "Now pending 3 pieces!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggesting image HSG is an image that notifies when the pending number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. Hold number suggesting image H
SG disappears after a predetermined period of time.

After that, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in a specific variation, and the next variation is started. Figure 112
(E) illustrates the state during the next variation of a particular variation. Here, the hold icon 9A
is consumed and two (2 pending) are displayed. FIG. 112(F) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this variation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the number-of-holds suggesting image HSG is not displayed even though the number of reservations has become three. That is, in the variation following the specific variation, even if the predetermined condition (the number of reservations becomes 3) is satisfied for the number of reservations, the number-of-reservations suggestive image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the pending number suggestive image HSG is displayed only at specific fluctuations. As a result, the player can feel a thrill as to whether or not the pending number suggesting image HSG will be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in the next variation of the specific variation. After that, the next variation is started. FIG. 112(H) exemplifies the state during the next next variation of the specific variation. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (hold number: 2) are displayed. FIG. 112(I) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this variation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, the number-of-holds suggesting image HSG is not displayed even though the number of reservations has become three. That is, in the change following the specific change, even if the predetermined condition (the number of reservations becomes 3) is satisfied for the number of reservations, the number-of-holds suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the pending number suggestion image HSG
is displayed only for certain fluctuations. As a result, the player can feel a thrill as to whether or not the pending number suggesting image HSG will be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in the next next variation of the specific variation.

[Holding number linked image display effect C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-linked image display effect C. FIG. The pending number-linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. FIG. 113A of the number-of-holds-linked image display effect C is the same as FIG. 111A of the number-of-holds-linked image display effect A. FIG. That is, FIG. 112(A)
As shown in , the suspension is digested when the decoration pattern is fixed, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112(A), the game state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the loose "567". In conjunction with this fixed stop, the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (holding digestion). Also, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 113B, by shift movement of the two pending icons 9A, the previously displayed older (right) pending icon 9A moves to the pending icon display area and becomes the pending icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be identified by the rectangular image below. At the same time when one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) becomes the relevant pending, the decorative symbol variation effect is started. The variation of the decorative design shown in FIG. 113(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. Here, it is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101 whether or not the variation corresponds to the "specific variation".
In addition, the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, changes from time saving state to normal state) may be performed at times. An arbitrary condition can be set as to whether or not a specific effect is applied. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. A timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and countdown starts after display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(C), by winning the first special symbol, the reserved icon 9
A state is shown in which one A is added to make a total of two. The timer image TM1 continues to count down, here showing "8 seconds left". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113(D), further, a state is shown in which a total of three reserved icons 9A have been reached by winning the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggesting image HSG stating "Now pending 3 pieces!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggesting image HSG is an image that notifies when the pending number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. While the pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113(E) and 113(F), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At this time, the display of the pending number suggesting image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(G), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a specific variation, and the next variation is started. Since FIG. 113G is the same as FIG. 112G to FIG.

113(H) to 113(J), as shown in FIG. 113(C), one reserved icon 9A is added after a specific change to make the total 2, and then the first special symbol wins. It shows a non-existent state. That is, the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0" after a predetermined period of time (fluctuation time) has passed after the specific fluctuation. After that, the timer image TM1 disappears and the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, even for a particular fluctuation, the number of holds is a given value (
Here, if 3) is not satisfied, the decoration pattern is determined and stopped without displaying the pending number suggesting image HSG.

[Holding number linked image display effect D]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-linked image display effect D. FIG. The pending number-linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. FIG. 114 (A) of the image display effect linked to the number of holds D indicates that the time-saving game will start after the jackpot game. Specifically, "time saving mode start!!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times of time saving is one time, and after one lottery of the second special symbol, the state returns to the normal state. Further, in the pending number-linked image display effect D, since the pending icon is not displayed, the current pending number is shown at the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114(A), the holding of the second special symbol changes from 0 to 1 by hitting to the right, and FIG.
It becomes 0 at the start of the lottery for the second special symbol of 4 (B).

In FIG. 114(B), one reserve of the second special design is consumed, the rest becomes 0, and the variation effect of the decorative design is executed. The variation of the decorative design shown in FIG. 114(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. Here, the "specific variation" refers to the first variation of the second special symbol to be executed in the time-saving state after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving is one time of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is not included in the number of times of time saving. In addition, the number of times of time saving can be set to an arbitrary number of times. In addition, not only the second special symbol lottery, but also the first special symbol lottery may be counted for the number of times of time saving. An image indicating whether or not the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. A timer image TM1 is displayed during this particular variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds left", and countdown is started after display. In FIG. 114(B), the holding of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 2 due to the continuation of hitting to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(C), the holding of the second special symbols has changed from 2 to 3 due to the continuation of hitting to the right. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggesting image HSG stating "Now pending 3 pieces!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggesting image HSG is an image that notifies when the pending number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. While the pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down.
Here, "Five seconds left" is indicated. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 114(D) and 114(E), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At this time, the display of the pending number suggesting image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(F), the decorative design is fixed and stopped at "789" in a specific variation, and the reserved number of the second special design is changed from 3 to 2. Then, the game state is switched from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. At this time, before the variable display, as shown in FIG. 114(G), "Normal mode start!!" is displayed. After that, a variable display is made.

In FIG. 114(H), the timer image TM is
2 is displayed. This timer image TM2 only shows the content of the timer "10 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time elapses with "10 seconds left" without counting down. In this case, such an image is also called a timer image. After the fixed stop, the number of pending is 2
becomes 1 and the next variation is started. At this time, a timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image only shows the content of the timer "5 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined period of time without counting down. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(J), the fixed stop is performed. The number of reserved second special symbols is changed from 1 to 0. , FIGS. 114(H) to 114
In (J), similarly to FIG. 112 (G) to FIG. 112 (J) of the image display effect linked to the number of holds B, even if the number of holds exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 3) in each fluctuation, Hold number suggesting image H
SG is not displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the number-of-holds-linked image display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific variation, the number of reservations suggesting image HSG is displayed. and after the first effect, during the same variation in which the first effect is executed, the pending number suggestion image H
A second effect in which the SG disappears can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, in the first effect, the holding number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the holding number reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more (for example, 3),
It is not displayed before the pending number reaches a predetermined number (eg, 3). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 113, the pending number suggesting image HSG is not displayed when the pending number does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, since the pending number suggesting image HSG may not be displayed, it is possible to increase the impression when it is displayed. In this way, the game player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the timer image is displayed at the start of the specific variation and the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific variation, the pending number suggestion The image HSG disappears with the timer image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, the holding number suggestion image HS
G is an image representing content suggesting that the number of reservations has reached a predetermined number (eg, 3). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved by the unprecedented novel production that the predetermined image, which itself indicates the number of reservations, is suddenly displayed. .
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the pending number suggesting image HSG is not displayed during the variation executed next to the specific variation. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel effect in which a predetermined image does not appear even if the number of holdings reaches a predetermined value in the next variation, unexpectedly for the player. , It is possible to improve interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, a specific variation is performed during the time saving state, and a variation performed next to the specific variation is performed during the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the number-of-holds-linked image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
The number of holds for which the number-of-holds suggestion image HSG is displayed is not limited to 3, and may be any number. In addition, it is preferable that there are a plurality of pending numbers for which the pending number suggesting image HSG is displayed. Further, the number of holds for which the number-of-holds suggesting image HSG is displayed may be a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of holds is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content represented by the number-of-holds suggestive image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, "It's an even number now."
Or "I don't have it yet" or "It's full".

[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned timer image should just represent the contents of the timer such as "10 seconds left" or "3:00". It is not always necessary to count down. For example, a mode in which "100 seconds left" is displayed in the first variation and then disappears, and "10 seconds left" is displayed in the next variation and then disappeared is called a timer image.

[Modification 4]
The configurations of the number-of-holds-linked image display effects A to D can be combined as appropriate. Moreover, the specific fluctuations may not be limited fluctuations in particular, but all fluctuations may correspond to the "specific fluctuations".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
A first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the number of pending prizes reaches a predetermined number due to winning during a specific change;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same variation in which the first effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the predetermined image is displayed when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the number of reservations reaches the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
If the pending number does not reach the predetermined number during the specified variation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
The timer image is displayed at the start of the specific fluctuation, and disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value,
when the predetermined image is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image disappears along with the timer image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The predetermined image is an image showing content suggesting that the pending number has reached a predetermined number,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
the predetermined image is not displayed during the variation executed next to the specific variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The specific variation is executed during the time saving state, and the variation executed next to the specific variation is
executed under normal conditions,
A gaming machine characterized by:

115 to 118, the holding number change interlocking effects A to D will be described below. This pending number change interlocking effect can be executed after a big hit game or during a variation effect of decorative symbols.
That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the variable effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the holding number change interlocking effect, and the holding number is a predetermined When changed, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

[Holding number change interlocking production A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-change-linked effect A. FIG. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the specific effect ends. It is a production that Here, the "specific effect" is a variable display effect of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" of the pending number means that the pending number increases by 3 or more during the specific effect, and the "predetermined "Image" will be explained assuming that it is the expectation level suggesting image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image"
may be the timer image TM1.

In the pending number change interlocking production A, first, as shown in FIG. This variable production of decorative patterns corresponds to the "specific production" in the scope of claims. Here, it is determined by the image control microcomputer 101 whether or not this variation corresponds to the "specific effect".
randomly determined by In addition, the specific effect may be a variable effect that is executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state to normal It may be a variable effect that is executed when the state changes). An image indicating whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the game state is the normal state, and the suspension is the suspension of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable production (specific production), as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the number of reservations changes (increases) from 1 to 4 by winning three times, when the "specific production" is being executed Then, the number of reservations has undergone a "predetermined change". Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 115(C), the
As shown in (D), the expectation suggestive image KSG is always displayed in the next change. Here, the expectation suggesting image KSG is described as "chance", suggesting the degree of expectation for winning in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 115(D) is the "first
change”. 115(A) to 115(B), if the number of reservations does not change by a predetermined amount in the previous fluctuation, in the next fluctuation, the expectation suggestive image KS
G is not displayed.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 115(D), the expectation suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 shows "five seconds left", and after the display, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 115(E), the expectation level suggesting image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after display (for example, 2 seconds after display). When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", after that, as shown in FIG. 115(F), both the reduced expectations suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(G), in the same fluctuation, the timer image TM2
is always displayed. The timer image TM2 shows "three seconds left", and after being displayed, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 115(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 115(I), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (the variation after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 115(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 115 (J) is the "second
change”. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or simply shows the content of the timer "three seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time elapses with "three seconds left" without counting down. good too. Both are referred to herein as timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds-change-linked effect B. FIG. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the specific effect ends. It is a production that Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the number of pending "
"Predetermined change" means that the number of pending second special symbols is 0 due to the winning of the second special symbol during a specific production.
is increased to 1, and the “predetermined image” is assumed to be the expectation level suggesting image KSG. Note that the "predetermined image" in the present embodiment may be the timer image TM1.

In the pending number change interlocking production B, first, as shown in FIGS. 116(A) and 116(B), after the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped, the pending digestion is performed, and the next first special symbol is a pending icon corresponding to is shifted to become the relevant pending icon 9C, and the next change is started. This variable production of decorative patterns corresponds to the "specific production" in the scope of claims. Here, the image control microcomputer 101 randomly determines whether or not this variation corresponds to the "specific effect". It should be noted that, in the specific effect, the number of times of fluctuation is a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game)
It may be a variable production that is executed when reaching, or a variable production that is executed when the game state changes (for example, changes from the time saving state to the normal state). An arbitrary condition can be set as to whether or not a specific effect is applied. An image indicating whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the game state is the normal state, and the suspension is the suspension of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable production (specific production), as shown in FIG. 116 (B), when the number of reservations changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, "specific production" is executed. The number of holds has made a "predetermined change" when the Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 116(C),
As shown in FIG. 116(D), in the next variation in which the second special symbol lottery is performed, the expectation suggesting image KSG is always displayed. Here, the expectation suggesting image KSG is described as "chance", suggesting the degree of expectation for winning in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 116(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. Note that FIG. 116(B) to FIG.
If there is no winning of the second special symbol in the previous variation shown in 16(C), the expectation suggesting image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 116(D), the expectation suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 shows "five seconds left", and after the display, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 116(E), the expectation level suggesting image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", after that, as shown in FIG. 116(F), both the reduced expectations suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(G), in the same fluctuation, the timer image TM2
is always displayed. The timer image TM2 shows "three seconds left", and after being displayed, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 116(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 116(I), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (the variation after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 116(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 116(J) is the "second
change”. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or simply shows the content of the timer "three seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time elapses with "three seconds left" without counting down. good too. Both are referred to herein as timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds change-linked effect C. FIG. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the specific effect ends. It is a production that Here, the "specific effect" is the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the time saving state, and the number of pending "
"Predetermined change" means that the number of pending second special symbols is 0 due to the winning of the second special symbol during a specific production.
is increased to 1, and the “predetermined image” is assumed to be the expectation level suggesting image KSG. Note that the "predetermined image" in the present embodiment may be the timer image TM1.

In the holding number change interlocking production C, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), after the jackpot game,
It has been announced that the time-saving game will start. Specifically, "Time saving mode start !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times of time saving is one time, and after one lottery of the second special symbol, the normal state is restored. In FIGS. 117(A) and 117(B), a variable effect corresponding to holding of the first special symbol obtained by winning before the jackpot game is performed. This variable production of decorative patterns corresponds to the "specific production" in the scope of claims. That is, here, the variation of the first special symbol during the time saving state corresponds to the "specific effect". During this specific effect, when the second special symbol is won by hitting to the right, a pending icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(B). During this variable production (specific production), as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of reservations changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, "specific production" is executed. The number of holds has made a "predetermined change" when the After that, Figure 11
After the fixed stop as shown in 7 (C), the second special symbol variation effect in the time saving state is performed.

In the next fluctuation of the specific production, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the game state is the time-saving state, and the fluctuation production by holding digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, FIG. 117(D)
, the expectation level suggesting image KSG is always displayed in the next change. Here, the expectation suggesting image KSG is described as "chance", suggesting the degree of expectation for winning in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 117(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. In addition, in the previous fluctuation shown in FIGS. 117(B) to 117(C),
When there is no winning of the second special symbol, the expectation suggesting image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 117(D), the expectation suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 shows "five seconds left", and after being displayed, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 117(E), the expectation level suggesting image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", after that, as shown in FIG. 117(F), both the reduced expectations suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear. In FIG. 117(F), there is a winning of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, and the pending icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(G), in the same fluctuation, the timer image TM2
is always displayed. The timer image TM2 shows "three seconds left", and after being displayed, the countdown starts. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", FIG.
As shown in 7(H), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. After that, the game state is switched from the time-saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 117(I), "Normal mode start!!" is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variable effect of the decorative symbols in the next change (the change after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 117(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 117(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the scope of claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may count down,
The content of the timer "3 seconds left" may simply be displayed, and the "3 seconds left" may disappear after a predetermined period of time without counting down. Both are referred to herein as timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Holding number change interlocking production D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-holds change-linked effect D. FIG. In the hold number change interlocking effect, if the hold number makes a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed, the "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the specific effect ends. It is a production that Here, the "specific effect" is the effect when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of reservations is the second special symbol during the specific effect. It is assumed that the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 0 to 1 due to winning, and the "predetermined image" is the expectation suggesting image KSG. Note that the "predetermined image" in this embodiment means the timer image T
It may be M1.

In the pending number change interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIGS. 118(A) to 118(C), it is notified that the time saving game will start after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Time saving mode start !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times of time saving is one time, and after one lottery of the second special symbol, the normal state is restored. In FIG. 118(A), after the jackpot game, the first
A state in which there is no reservation of both the special symbol and the second special symbol is shown. Here, the effect when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game corresponds to the "specific effect" in the scope of claims. That is, here, the state in which no change is performed during the time saving state or the display of "time saving mode start!!" corresponds to the "specific effect". During this specific effect, if there is a winning of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, FIG. 118 (B)
, the pending icon 9B is displayed. While this "time saving mode start !!" is displayed (specific effect), as shown in FIG. , when the "specific effect" is being executed, the number of reservations undergoes a "predetermined change". After the fixed stop, the variation production of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed.

In the next fluctuation of the specific production, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the game state is the time-saving state, and the fluctuation production by holding digestion of the second special symbol lottery is executed. At this time, FIG. 118(D)
, the expectation suggestive image KSG is always displayed in the next variation of the specific effect. Here, the expectation suggesting image KSG is described as "chance", suggesting the degree of expectation for winning in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 118(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the scope of claims. In addition, in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 118(B) to 118(C), if there is no winning of the second special symbol, in the next variation, the expectation suggestive image K
SG is not displayed.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 118(D), the expectation suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 shows "five seconds left", and after the display, the countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 118(E), the expectation level suggesting image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed.
When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", then, as shown in FIG. 118(F), both the reduced expectation suggesting image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear. In FIG. 118(F), there is a winning of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, and the pending icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(G), in the same variation, the timer image TM2
is always displayed. The timer image TM2 shows "three seconds left", and after being displayed, the countdown starts. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", FIG.
As shown in 8(H), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. After that, the game state is switched from the time-saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 118(I), "Normal mode start!!" is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. After that, the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbols in the next variation (the variation after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 118(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 118(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the scope of claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may count down,
The content of the timer "3 seconds left" may simply be displayed, and "3 seconds left" may disappear after a predetermined period of time without counting down. Both are referred to herein as timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the number-of-holds change interlocking production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, when the number of reservations changes by a predetermined amount while a specific effect is being executed, the first process started after the end of the specific effect A first effect in which a predetermined image (anticipation level suggesting image KSG or timer image TM1) is displayed in the variation can be executed. According to this configuration, with a novel production that has never existed before,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel effect in which the timer image is always displayed when the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value while the specific effect is being executed. It is possible to improve interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the timer image TM1
is displayed at the start of the first variation, and in the first variation, after the first timer image TM1 disappears, a second timer image TM2 is displayed during the same variation. be able to. According to this configuration, it is predetermined that the timer image is always displayed twice with the same variation, which is a novel performance that has never existed before, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. can be planned.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the second variation executed after the first variation, the third effect in which the third timer image TM3 is displayed is executed. can do. According to this configuration, it is determined in advance that the timer image will always be displayed even in the next variation, and the novel presentation that has not existed in the past can visually entertain the player and improve the amusement. be able to.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image (expectation level suggesting image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first variation, and changes in size during the same variation. According to this configuration, the expectation suggesting image KSG that is always displayed with the first variation always changes in size, which is a novel performance that has never existed before, thereby visually pleasing the player. Interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific effect is one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first variation is the first special symbol. or second
It is the other variation of the special symbols, and the predetermined image is a predetermined change (here, 0→1
), it will be displayed in the other symbol variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the specific effect and the first variation are executed during the time saving state, and the second variation is executed during the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the number-of-holds change interlocking production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation level suggesting image KSG is displayed as the predetermined image.
The predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1, or may be a character image or an image showing where the game ball is aimed.

[Modification 2]
The specific effect of FIG. 117 is the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is the second special symbol during the variation of the first special symbol. When the number of pending changes a predetermined change (here 0 → 1), it shall be displayed in the variation of the second special symbol.
However, the specific effect of FIG. 117 may be the opposite of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the specific effect is the variation effect of the second special symbol, the first variation is the variation of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is the variation of the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol. When the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value (here, 0→1), it may be displayed in the variation of the first special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image in the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to a digital display, and may represent the remaining time until the end by a needle or an area. Also, the timer image does not necessarily have to move as long as it is an image representing a timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed multiple times,
The timer image also includes a timer image in which the remaining period until the end point is reduced each time it is displayed.
Also, an image that clearly represents a timer is included in the timer image even if it is not moving.

[Modification 4]
The expectation level suggesting image KSG is reduced at a predetermined timing after being displayed, and is moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a. However, the expectation level suggesting image KSG may be enlarged or may not be moved.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the holding number change interlocking effects A to D may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
When the number of reservations changes by a predetermined amount while a specific effect is being executed, a first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in a first variation that is started after the end of the specific effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined image is a first timer image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
the first timer image is displayed at the start of the first variation;
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second effect in which a second timer image is displayed during the same variation can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
In the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which a third timer image is displayed can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
the predetermined image is displayed at the beginning of the first variation and changes in size during the same variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The specific effect is a variable effect of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The first variation is the other variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The predetermined image is displayed in the variation of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the reserved number of the other of the first special symbol and the second special symbol undergoes a predetermined change during the variation of the other symbol. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The specific production and the first variation are executed during the time saving state,
The second variation is performed during a normal state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

119 to 122, pending icon movement change effects A to D will be described below. This pending icon movement change effect can be executed during a decorative symbol change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

[Holding icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement change effect A. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of suspended icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the suspended icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the pending icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119A, four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed while the decorative symbols are changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed horizontally in a row, each corresponding to each variation after the next variation, and can suggest the degree of expectation for winning in each variation after the next variation. Here, the hold icon 9A can suggest the degree of expectation by color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the suspension icon 9C disappears along with the stop of fixing the decorative symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the next variation is started. This figure 1
The variations shown in 19(C) correspond to "specific variations" in the scope of claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the variation (specific variation) corresponding to the rightmost suspension icon (mesh pattern) of the four suspension icons 9A, the suspension icon corresponding to the variation (specific variation) does not move. In other words, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as the last change. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG.
A shifts to the right. At this time, the hold icon (mesh pattern) on the far right is
It moves to the area where the relevant pending icon is displayed, becomes the relevant pending icon 9C, and the number of pending icons 9A becomes three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the suspension icon 9C disappears as the decorative symbols are stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the next variation is started. When the next variation is started, the three pending icons 9A do not move. That is, of the three pending icons 9A, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost pending icon (white), the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, FIG.
As shown in 19(G), the three pending icons 9A are shifted rightward. At this time, the rightmost hold icon (white) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed,
The pending icon 9C becomes the pending icon 9A, and the number of pending icons 9A becomes two.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(H), as the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, the suspension icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), the next variation is started. When the next variation starts, the two pending icons 9A do not move. That is, of the two pending icons 9A, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost pending icon (black), the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, FIG.
As indicated by 19(J), the two pending icons 9A are shifted rightward. At this time, the rightmost hold icon (black) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed,
The pending icon 9C becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A becomes one.

[Holding icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement change effect B. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of suspended icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the suspended icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the suspended icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), four suspended icons 9A are displayed while the decorative symbols are changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation for winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can suggest the degree of expectation by color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 120(C) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 120(D), four pending icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, during the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserve icon (mesh pattern) among the four reserve icons 9A, the reserve icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four pending icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost pending icon (mesh pattern) moves rightward, and the display screen Frame out from 7a. 3 other pending icons 9A
does not move. As a result, there are three pending icons 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Then the next variation is started. 3 pending icons 9 when the next change starts
A is not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, FIG. 120 (G
), three pending icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, of the three pending icons 9A, when the rightmost pending icon (white) changes this time, the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move. After that, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Then the next variation is started. The pending icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation is started. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, two pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(I). At this time, the two pending icons 9A are in a state one less than when they were displayed during the previous change. On the other hand, of the two pending icons 9A, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost pending icon (black), the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move. After that, the two pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The two pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation corresponding to the leftmost pending icon 9A (white) is started.

[Holding icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement change effect C. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of suspended icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the suspended icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the suspended icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), four suspended icons 9A are displayed while the decorative symbols are changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation for winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can suggest the degree of expectation by color.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the character image CHA is displayed, and one of the hold icons 9A (here, the third from the right) changes to hold. Specifically, the color of the pending icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the variation corresponding to this changed hold has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(C), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 121(D) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 121(E), four pending icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, during the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserve icon (mesh pattern) among the four reserve icons 9A, the reserve icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four pending icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost pending icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved leftward as shown in FIG. 121(F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 121(G), the enlarged pending icon stops at a position overlapping another pending icon 9C. These pending icons 9A then disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(H), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Then the next variation is started. The pending icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation is started. After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 121(I), three pending icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, of the three pending icons 9A, the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move during the current change corresponding to the rightmost pending icon (white). After that, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(J), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. FIG. 121(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the suspended icon movement change effect B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the suspended icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Holding icon movement change effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement change effect D. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of suspended icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the suspended icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the suspended icon movement change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), four suspended icons 9A are displayed while the decorative symbols are changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side in a row, and each
It corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the degree of expectation for winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the hold icon 9A can suggest the degree of expectation by color. In FIG. 122(A), the pending icon 9A is still in a state of not suggesting the degree of expectation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the character image CHA is displayed, and two of the hold icons 9A (here, the rightmost and the third from the right) change to hold.
Specifically, one of the colors of the pending icon 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the variation corresponding to this changed hold has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 122(D) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, four pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122(E). At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, during the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserve icon (mesh pattern) among the four reserve icons 9A, the reserve icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four pending icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost pending icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved leftward as shown in FIG. 122(F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the enlarged pending icon stops at a position overlapping another pending icon 9C. These pending icons 9A then disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(H), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. Then the next variation is started. The pending icon 9A is not displayed when the next variation is started. After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 122(I), three pending icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as displayed during the previous change. That is, of the three pending icons 9A, the pending icon corresponding to the change does not move during the current change corresponding to the rightmost pending icon (white). After that, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. FIG. 122(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the suspended icon movement change effect B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the suspended icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119(C) to 119(E), a first effect is executed in which a plurality of predetermined images (four pending icons 9C) are displayed during specific fluctuations. It is possible, and the plurality of predetermined images each correspond to each variation after the specific variation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for each variation, and among the plurality of predetermined images, the specific A predetermined image corresponding to a change can perform a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the start of the specific change. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by the novel performance of shifting and moving after the start of the fluctuation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(C), in the first effect, a plurality of predetermined images (four reserved icons 9C) are displayed in a row. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has not been seen in the past, that is, the holding icon that shifts and moves after the start of the fluctuation, and the amusement can be improved. Figure 120 to Figure 1
22 is the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the predetermined image (suspension icon 9C) suggests the degree of expectation by color. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has not been seen in the past, that is, the holding icon that shifts and moves after the start of the fluctuation, and the amusement can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a plurality of predetermined images (four pending icons 9C) are displayed during the fluctuation before the specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121(F) to (G) and FIGS. to a position overlapping the predetermined image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119(F), 120(G), 121(I), and 122(I), a plurality of predetermined It is possible to execute a third effect in which predetermined images other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation are displayed among the images. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, four holding icons 9A as predetermined images are displayed side by side at the time of the specific change. However, if a plurality (two or more) of holding icons 9A as predetermined images can be displayed at the time of a specific change, four holding icons 9A may not necessarily be configured to be displayable.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, each corresponds to each variation after the next variation, and as a predetermined image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in each variation after the next variation, the reserved icon 9 corresponding to the first special symbol
Although A is exemplified, the predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol, or may be another image. That is, any image that corresponds to each variation after the next variation and suggests the degree of expectation of winning in each variation after the next variation can be used as the predetermined image.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the pending icon movement change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, the specific fluctuations may not be limited fluctuations in particular, but all fluctuations may correspond to the "specific fluctuations".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
capable of executing a first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed during a specific change;
Each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and is capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for each variation,
Among the plurality of predetermined images, a predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is capable of executing a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed in a line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The predetermined image suggests the degree of expectation by color,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
the plurality of predetermined images are displayed during a transition prior to the specific transition;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
In the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation moves to a position overlapping another predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
a third effect in which, among the plurality of predetermined images, a predetermined image excluding a predetermined image corresponding to the specific change is displayed during a change subsequent to the specific change;
A gaming machine characterized by:

123 to 126, the medium-variation mode start display effects A to D will be described below. This mid-variation mode start display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the intermediate mode start display effect during variation is included, the ROM 10
3 to display the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

[Change middle mode start display effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the mid-variation mode start display effect A. FIG. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation (the fluctuation) is lost, even before the end of the fluctuation (fixed stop) It is an effect that informs the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the change is lost. here"
"Specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or lose) of the variation. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative designs, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, and predetermined effects are executed.

In the variable next mode start display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Figure 12
The variation shown in 3(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The game state when the variation in FIG. 123 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, when the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then the game enters a "success mode" of a time-saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game state enters into a "failure mode" while maintaining the normal state. In both success mode and failure mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has passed after the variable display of FIG. mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, different performances are executed depending on whether the variation is a win or a loss.

If the change is a failure, a failure mode entering image LMG with characters "entering failure mode" is displayed as shown in FIG. As a result, it is notified that the failure mode has been entered. i.e. the end of this particular variation (
Even before the fixed stop), the start of the advanced mode is notified when the lottery result corresponding to this specific change is lost. Along with the display of the failure mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a hatched background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochrome image and a pattern.

After that, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123(D), the variable display, the four suspension icons 9A, and the suspension icon 9C are displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the pending icon 9C disappears along with the fixed stop (end of specific variation). Here, the fixed stop is made at "567". At this time, since the failure mode has already been entered, the background image and the like are already in the failure mode, and this continues. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts and moves, the next variation (the variation next to the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123(F). The next change is also the normal state of the game (non-time saving state)
, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in failure mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the suspension icon 9C disappears along with the confirmation stop. Here, the fixed stop is made at "721". Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts and moves, the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123(H). The game state of the next variation is also the normal state (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in failure mode.

Returning to FIG. 123(B), when the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. The symbols are determined and stopped in a jackpot manner. Here, the fixed stop is made at "333". After that, a jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game ends, the game state is switched to the time-saving state, and as shown in FIG. 123(J), a success mode entry image WMG written in characters as "success mode entry" is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the success mode has been entered. Along with the display of the success mode entry image WMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image.
Here, the background image switches to a background image showing many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Change intermediate mode start display effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the mid-variation mode start display effect B. FIG. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation (the fluctuation) is lost, even before the end of the fluctuation (fixed stop) It is an effect that informs the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the change is lost. here"
"Specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or lose) of the variation. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative designs, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, and predetermined effects are executed.

In the variable next mode start display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Figure 12
The variation shown in 4(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The game state when the variation in FIG. 124 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, when the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then the game enters a "time saving mode" of a time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game state enters the "battle mode" with the normal state. In both time-saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After the variable display of FIG. 124(A), after a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) has passed, the variable display disappears as shown in FIG. mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, different performances are executed depending on whether the variation is a win or a loss.

If the change is a failure, a battle mode mode entry image LMG with characters "battle mode entry" is displayed as shown in FIG. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has entered. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (fixed stop), when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss, the start of the advanced mode is notified. Along with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a hatched background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochrome image and a pattern.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and a movie image is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle as shown in FIG. 124(D).
In addition, a total of four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 124(E), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the game is fixed and stopped due to a failure, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. Decorative patterns are not shown, but may be provided. At this time, since the battle mode has already entered, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and it continues. Then, after the holding icon 9A shifts and moves,
As shown in FIG. 124(F), the next variation (the variation next to the specific variation) is started. The game state of the next variation is also the normal state (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be that of Battle Mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124(G), the teammate character CRA is defeated, the game is fixed and stopped, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts and moves, the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124(H).
The game state of the next variation is also the normal state (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed.
The background image continues to be that of Battle Mode.

Returning to FIG. 124(B), when the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. The symbol is determined and stopped in a jackpot mode. Here, the fixed stop is made at "333". After that, a jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is over, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124(J), a time saving mode entering image WMG written in characters as "entering the time saving mode" is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the time saving mode has been entered. Along with the display of the time-saving mode entry image WMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image.
Here, the background image switches to a background image showing many fine cross patterns. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Change intermediate mode start display effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the mid-variation mode start display effect C. FIG. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation (the fluctuation) is lost, even before the end of the fluctuation (fixed stop) It is an effect that informs the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the change is lost. here"
"Specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or lose) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative designs, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, and predetermined effects are executed.

In the variable next mode start display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), four pending icons 9B and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Figure 12
The variation shown in 5(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The game state when the variation in FIG. 125(A) is being executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, when the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then the game enters a "time saving mode" of a time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, it will enter the normal "battle mode". In both time-saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has passed after the variable display of FIG. mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the production button 63, different productions are executed depending on whether this variation (specific variation) is a win or a loss.

If the change is a failure, a battle mode mode entry image LMG with characters "battle mode entry" is displayed as shown in FIG. 125(C) according to the operation of the effect button 63. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has entered. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (fixed stop), when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss, the start of the advanced mode is notified. Along with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a hatched background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochrome image and a pattern.

After that, the battle mode entering image LMG disappears, and an expectation degree image KG indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot after the next variation is displayed as shown in FIG. 125(D). 4
One expectation is shown. The one corresponding to the first hold to be executed next is "first round...
10%”, implying a 10% jackpot probability in the next lottery. The one that corresponds to the second hold to be executed next is "Round 2...15%", suggesting that the jackpot probability in the next draw is 15%. The number corresponding to the third reserve is “the third round … 18%”, and the number corresponding to the fourth reserve is “the fourth round … 21%”.
”. While the degree-of-expectation image KG is being displayed, the specific variation ends and the pattern is fixed and stopped. After the fixed stop, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. has already become the battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(E), with the start of the next variation (the variation after the specific variation), the characters "Start of the first round!"
A movie image of B having a battle is displayed. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost, and the determination stops. Decorative patterns are not shown, but may be provided.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125(G), as the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) starts, the characters "Start of the second round!" A movie image of CRB's battle is displayed. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125(H), the teammate character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost, and the determination stops. Decorative patterns are not shown, but may be provided.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125(I), as the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) starts, the characters "Third round start!" A movie image in which the enemy character CRB battles is displayed. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the ally character CRA wins, and the symbol is a big hit, and the game is fixed and stopped. Decorative patterns are not shown, but may be provided.
The background image continues to be that of Battle Mode.

In addition, returning to FIG. 125(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 125(A) is a jackpot, FIG. An effect similar to that of 124(J) is executed.

[Change middle mode start display effect D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the mid-variation mode start display effect D. FIG. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this specific fluctuation (the fluctuation) is lost, even before the end of the fluctuation (fixed stop) It is an effect that informs the start of the mode to proceed when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the change is lost. here"
"Specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progress mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or lose) of the variation. The "mode" here means a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative designs, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, and predetermined effects are executed.

In the variable next mode start display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), four pending icons 9B and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Figure 12
The variation shown in 6(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. The game state when the variation in FIG. 126 (A) is being executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, when the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then the game enters a "time saving mode" of a time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, it will enter the normal "battle mode". In both time-saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has passed after the variable display in FIG. mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the production button 63, different productions are executed depending on whether this variation (specific variation) is a win or a loss.

If the change is a failure, a battle mode mode entry image LMG with characters "battle mode entry" is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is notified that the battle mode has entered. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (fixed stop), when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss, the start of the advanced mode is notified. Along with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a hatched background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a monochrome image and a pattern.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126(D), an expectation degree image KG indicating the degree of expectation for the big win after the next variation and a timer image TM1 are displayed.
Here, since there are four suspensions (suspension icons 9B) of the second special symbol lottery at the time of the variation (specific variation), four expectations are shown in the expectation image KG. The next one that corresponds to the first hold is "first round...10%", implying a 10% jackpot probability in the next lottery. The one that corresponds to the second hold to be executed next is "Round 2...15%", suggesting that the jackpot probability in the next draw is 15%. The item corresponding to the third reserve is "the third round...18%", and the item corresponding to the fourth reserve is the "fourth round...21%". When the countdown of the timer image TM1 causes the timer value to become "0", the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1
disappears from the screen, after which the symbol is fixed and stopped (the specific variation ends). After the fixed stop, the game state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state. Since it has already entered the battle mode, the background image etc. has already become the battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(E), with the start of the next variation (the variation after the specific variation), the characters "First round start!"
A movie image of B having a battle is displayed. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the expectation level image KG is displayed again. Here, four expectations are shown as in the previous variation (specific variation). After that, Figure 1
As shown in 26(G), the portion of "first round...10%" corresponding to the current change moves rightward and out of frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the teammate character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost, and the determination stops. Decorative patterns are not shown, but may be provided.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126(I), as the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) starts, the words "Start of the second round!" A movie image of CRB's battle is displayed. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again.
Here, unlike the previous variation, three expectations are shown without the “first round . . . 10%”. After that, the portion of "second round... 15%" corresponding to the current variation may move rightward and out of the frame, or may not move.

In addition, returning to FIG. 126(B), when the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 126(A) is a jackpot, FIG. An effect similar to 124(J) is executed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the medium-variation mode start display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), during a specific variation, if the lottery result corresponding to the variation is a loss, even before the end of the variation, When the corresponding lottery result is a loss, a first effect (display of failure mode entering image LMG) for notifying the start of the mode to proceed (failure mode) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity in the performance that spans multiple variations. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126. FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(B), an operation means image (button image BTN) is displayed before notification in a specific variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126. FIG.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(B), an image representing a mode (success mode) to proceed when a lottery result corresponding to a particular variation wins before notification in a specific variation. (mode image MDG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Figure 12
4 to 126 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a specific image (expectation degree image KG) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 126 is also the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the game state (time saving state) at the time of specific fluctuation and the game state (normal state) in the mode to proceed when losing are different from each other, The game state at the time of specific fluctuation is more advantageous for the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before.
Interest can be improved. FIG. 126 is also the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the game state (time saving state) at the time of the specific fluctuation and the game state (time saving state) in the mode to proceed when winning are the same game state. , Both are more advantageous to the player than the game state (normal state) in the mode in which the player advances when he or she loses. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Figure 126
The same is true for

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the medium-variation mode start display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as effects for notifying the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the change is a loss, "Enter failure mode" (change mode start display effect A) and "Enter battle mode" (change It is assumed that the image LMG represented by intermediate mode start display effects B to D) is displayed. However, the content of the image LMG is not limited to these and may be arbitrary content. Also, the characters "inrush" and "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of the mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the portion where the decorative pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, or may be displayed in a different size (for example, smaller). If the decoration pattern is small or not displayed, it becomes difficult to understand whether or not the fluctuation continues at the start of the mode, and the sense of unity of the performance across a plurality of fluctuations can be further enhanced.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the variable middle mode start display effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. In addition, the specific fluctuations are not limited fluctuations, and all fluctuations may correspond to "specific fluctuations".

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first method for notifying the start of a mode to advance when a lottery result corresponding to a specific variation is a loss, even before the end of the variation, when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is a loss during the specific variation. capable of performing
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 further comprises
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means;
In the specific variation, the operation means image is displayed before the notification,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the specific variation, before the notification, an image representing the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is won is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the specific variation, after the notification, a specific image is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for each variation to be executed after the specific variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The game state at the time of the specific change and the game state in the mode to advance when the game is lost are different from each other, and the game state at the time of the specific change is more advantageous for the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The game state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the game state in the mode to advance when winning are the same game state, and both are more advantageous for the player than the game state in the mode to advance when the loss. is in the state of
A gaming machine characterized by:

127 to 130, the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D will be described below. This predetermined image continuation display effect can be executed after a jackpot game or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. to read the image display device 7
to display an image on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect A. FIG. The predetermined image continuation display effect is a effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the suspension icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The game state when the variation in FIG. 127 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 127(B), there is a winning of the first special symbol during this variation, and the pending icon 9A
is newly displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(C), there is a winning of the first special symbol during this variation, and one pending icon 9A is newly displayed, resulting in a total of two. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(D), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at "567", and the suspension icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the pending icons 9A are shifted one by one to the right, and the oldest pending icon 9A located on the far right is It moves to the pending display area and becomes the pending icon 9C. Also, as shown in FIG. 127(E),
A predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed at the start of this variation. This predetermined image CHA
is an image representing a specific object, and is configured here as a character image representing a smiley face as an example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown.
That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101 . In addition, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game),
It may be displayed when the game state changes (for example, changing from the time saving state to the normal state).
Any condition can be used as the condition for whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA.

This change, of course, corresponds to the suspension due to the prize winning (suspension icon 9A) before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the variation is finished, the decorative pattern is fixed at "789", and the reserved icon 9
C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and continues to be displayed even when the finalization is stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 127(G), the pending icon 9A moves to the pending display area on the right side and becomes the pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to the suspension (suspension icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127(H), during this variation, the pending icon 9A is newly displayed by winning the first special symbol.
After that, as shown in FIG. 127(I), the variation ends, the decoration pattern is fixed at "123", and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and continues to be displayed even at the time of the final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the next variation is started. This variation corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. When the next change (specific change) is started, the pending icon 9A moves to the relevant pending display area on the right and becomes the relevant pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as this change starts. This variation (specific variation) is the predetermined image CHA
This is because it corresponds to suspension (suspension icon 9A) due to winning after is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect B. FIG. The predetermined image continuation display effect is a effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the suspension icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The game state when the variation in FIG. 128(A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 128(B), there is a winning of the first special symbol during this variation, and the pending icon 9A
is newly displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(C), there is a winning of the first special symbol during this variation, and one pending icon 9A is newly displayed, resulting in a total of two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at "567", and the suspension icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the pending icons 9A are shifted one by one to the right, and the oldest pending icon 9A located on the far right is It moves to the pending display area and becomes the pending icon 9C. Also, as shown in FIG. 128(E),
A predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed at the start of this variation. This predetermined image CHA
is an image representing a specific object, and is configured here as a character image representing a smiley face as an example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown.
That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101 . In addition, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game),
It may be displayed when the game state changes (for example, changing from the time saving state to the normal state).
Any condition can be used as the condition for whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA.

This change, of course, corresponds to the suspension due to the prize winning (suspension icon 9A) before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(F), the fluctuation is finished, the decorative pattern is fixed at "789", and the reserved icon 9
C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and continues to be displayed even when the finalization is stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 128(G), the pending icon 9A moves to the pending display area on the right side and becomes the pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to the suspension due to the prize winning (suspension icon 9A) before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128(H), during this variation, a pending icon 9B is newly displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol.
After that, as shown in FIG. 128(I), the variation ends, the decorative symbol is fixed at "123", and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and continues to be displayed even at the time of the final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 128(J), the next variation is started. This variation corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is initiated, the pending icon 9B moves to the pending display area on the left and becomes the pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as this change starts. This variation (specific variation) is the predetermined image CHA
This is because it corresponds to the suspension (suspension icon 9B) due to winning after is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect C. FIG. The predetermined image continuation display effect is a effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific fluctuation starts after the plurality of fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), two suspended icons 9A and the suspended icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Figure 129 (A
) is a normal state (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 129(B), the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the jackpot appearance (mode) of "333", and the suspension icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), the opening effect of a big win is started. Here, a character image of "start of jackpot game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When a predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 129(D). Here, a character image of "jackpot game end" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. When the jackpot game ends, here, the game state is switched to the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, 1
One pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the variation of FIG. 129(E) is being executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation won before the jackpot of FIG. 129(B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. Predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during fluctuations corresponding to pending winnings before the big win in FIG. 129(B).

After that, as shown in FIG. 129(F), the variation ends, the decorative symbol is fixed at "789", and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of this variation, and continues to be displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 129(G), the pending icon 9A moves to the pending display area on the right side and becomes the pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the pending prize won before the jackpot shown in FIG. 129(B).
As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the jackpot shown in FIG. 129(B). As shown in FIG. 129(H), during this variation, the pending icon 9B is newly displayed by winning the second special symbol. After that, FIG. 129 (I)
, the variation ends, the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at "123", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the variation of the variation, and is continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129(J), the next variation is started. This variation corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. As for the game state, the time saving state continues. When the next change (specific change) is started, the pending icon 9B moves to the pending display area on the left and becomes the pending icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as this change starts. This variation (specific variation) is a suspension (suspension icon 9
This is because it corresponds to B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect D. FIG. The predetermined image continuation display effect is a effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and the predetermined image disappears when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes. Here, it is assumed that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuation display effect D, the variable display of the decorative design accompanying the first special design lottery is executed in the normal state (non-time-saving state), and then, as shown in FIG.
33” is determined and stopped, and the pending icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), the opening effect of a big win is started. Here, a character image of "start of jackpot game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When a predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 130(C). Here, a character image of "jackpot game end" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example thereof, is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract hazes such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representations are unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after the predetermined image CHA is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to partially cover the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB is the predetermined image CHA
is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is configured as a character image representing a smiling face wearing sunglasses. After that, the jackpot game ends, and here, the game state is switched to the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At this time, 1
One pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the variation in FIG. 130(E) is being executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation won before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the variation corresponding to the pending prize won before the jackpot of FIG. 130(A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 130(F), the variation ends, the decoration pattern is fixed at "789", and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of this variation, and are continuously displayed even when the determination is stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 130(G), the pending icon 9A moves to the pending display area on the right side and becomes the pending icon 9C. Predetermined image CHA and specific image C
HB is continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the pending prize won before the jackpot shown in FIG. 130(A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed before the big win in FIG. Figure 130 (H)
As shown in , during this variation, the pending icon 9B is newly displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol. After that, as shown in FIG.
, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of this variation, and continue to be displayed even when the determination is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130(J), the next variation is started. This variation corresponds to the "specific variation" in the scope of claims. As for the game state, the time saving state continues. When the next variation (specific variation) is initiated, the pending icon 9B moves to the pending display area on the left and becomes the pending icon 9C. Predetermined image CHA and specific image CHB disappear at the same time as this change starts. This variation (specific variation) corresponds to the suspension (suspension icon 9B) due to winning before the big win in FIG. 130(A).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127(E) to (I), the first effect in which the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the 2, a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific change after multiple changes starts can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Figures 128 to 13
0 is also the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG.
It is a variation corresponding to a plurality of reservations won before the HA is displayed, and the specific variation is a variation corresponding to a reservation won during the plurality of variations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, a plurality of variations are executed after the winning game, the predetermined image predetermined image CHA is displayed during the winning game, and after the winning game , is displayed continuously in multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 130 is also the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, during the winning game, the predetermined image CH
After A is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed superimposed on the predetermined image CHA, and is continuously displayed in a plurality of variations after the winning game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, multiple fluctuations are fluctuations in one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the specific fluctuation is the first special symbol or It is the other variation of the second special symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 130 is also the same.

[Modification]
A modification of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, it is assumed that a character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. but,
The predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a character image representing a specific content, an image for calling attention to ball removal, or a game ball entering a specific position. It may be an image that prompts Alternatively, it may be a right shot image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. It was assumed that it was a change in the pattern lottery. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reversed. 129 (E) to (I) is the variation of the second special symbol lottery, and the specific variation shown in FIG. 129 (J) is the variation of the first special symbol lottery good.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
a first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations;
a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific variation after the plurality of variations starts;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of pending prizes won before the predetermined image is displayed,
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to the winning hold during the multiple variations,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The multiple fluctuations are executed after the winning game,
The predetermined image is displayed during the winning game, and is continuously displayed during the plurality of variations after the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image;
During the winning game, after the predetermined image is displayed, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the winning game, the display is continued in the plurality of variations.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The multiple fluctuations are fluctuations of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The specific variation is the other variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The predetermined image is an image that prompts the ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Background image switching effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. This background image switching effect can be executed after a jackpot game or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the background image switching effect is included, the corresponding image data is transferred from the ROM 103. Read out image display device 7
to display an image on the display screen 7a.

[Background image switching effect A]
131 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect A. FIG. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) when the pattern is stopped to be fixed, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect A, first, in FIG. 131 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). Four pending icons 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. A game state is a normal state (non-time-saving state).

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side such as a decorative design, and includes a monochrome image and a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or may be moved to change its displayed position. Also, it may disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented in a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM is displayed as shown in FIG.
1 is displayed. Here, "three seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 131(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG.
8C, 8R) decelerates and temporarily stops at "789". Temporary stop here refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side in a slightly up and down state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are determined and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. Second background image H
G2 may contain an image representing a particular object. After that, the fixed and stopped decorative pattern disappears, and as shown in FIG. 131(F), the telop image TRP appears from the right side of the display screen 7a (frame-in). The telop image TRP is composed of characters "soon". As shown in FIGS. 131(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (out of frame) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbol is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 131(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the pattern confirmation is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the next change starts. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is constructed as a graphic image representing a star. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented in a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. At the start of the next variation, decorative symbols (8L, 8
C, 8R) are variably displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(J), a character image MLG of "It's spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "soon" and the character image ML
G is "It's spring, isn't it?", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "It's almost spring." decorative pattern (
8L, 8C, and 8R) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect B]
132 is a diagram for explaining background image switching effect B. FIG. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) when the pattern is stopped to be fixed, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect B, first, in FIG. 132 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). Here, patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. Further, four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The game state is the time saving state.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side such as a decorative design, and includes a monochrome image and a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or may be moved to change its displayed position. Also, it may disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented in a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the timer image TM is displayed as shown in FIG.
1 is displayed. Here, "three seconds left" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 132(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG.
8C, 8R) decelerates and temporarily stops at "789". The term "temporary stop" as used herein refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side in a slightly up and down state. Design (8l, 8c, 8r
) continue to display fluctuations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(E), decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and patterns (8
1, 8c, 8r) are confirmed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, the fixed and stopped decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) disappear, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 132(F). The telop image TRP is composed of characters "soon". At this time, the patterns (8l, 8c,
8r) maintains the display in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 132(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from right to left and disappears from the left side of the display screen 7a (
frame out). Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 132(E) to (H), the second background image HG is displayed while the design is stopped.
2 display is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the next change starts. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented in a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. At the start of the next variation, decorative symbols (8L, 8
C, 8R) and symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are variably displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(J), a character image MLG of "It's spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "soon" and the character image ML
G is "It's spring, isn't it?", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "It's almost spring." decorative pattern (
8L, 8C, 8R) and symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect C. FIG. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) when the pattern is stopped to be fixed, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect C, first, in FIG. 133 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, the game state is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R), the pending icon 9B, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side such as a decorative design, and includes a monochrome image and a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or may be moved to change its displayed position. Also, it may disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented in a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM is displayed as shown in FIG.
1 is displayed. Here, "three seconds left" is described. At this time, the first background image HG
1 is displayed continuously. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 133(C), after that, as shown in FIG. 133(D), the first background image HG1
, the predetermined image CHA disappears. Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue the variable display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. Second background image HG2
may contain an image representing a particular object. After that, as shown in FIG. 133(F),
A telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of characters "soon". At this time, the pattern (8l, 8c, 8r
) is maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 133(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (out of frame) from the left side of the display screen 7a. Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in fixed stop. The design is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 133(E) to 133(H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the pattern confirmation is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the next change starts. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is constructed as a graphic image representing a star. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented in a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. At the start of the next variation, symbols (8l, 8c,
8r) is variably displayed. From this change, the game state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(J), a character image MLG of "It's spring" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "soon" and the character image ML
G is "It's spring, isn't it?", and when combined, it becomes one sentence of "It's almost spring." Design (8l
, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching effect D. FIG. The background image switching effect is an effect of switching the background image (background display) when the pattern is stopped to be fixed, and maintaining the display of the switched background image during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect D, first, in FIG. 134 (
As shown in A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, at the lower left of the display screen 7a, there are displayed a reservation promotion image of "Save the reservation!" The game state is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. Decorative pattern (8L,
8C, 8R), the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face as an example.
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern or the like, and includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color image and a pattern. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or may be moved to change its displayed position. Also, it may disappear or appear.
Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented in a single color.
It may have diagonal lines or patterns.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the timer image TM is displayed as shown in FIG.
1 is displayed. Here, "three seconds left" is described. Due to the winning of the second special symbol, the pending number image is "holding number 2". As shown in FIG. 134(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0", the end image "So far!!"
・An expectation suggestion image of "10%" and "Second hold...20%" is displayed. The expectations suggesting image shows the expectations of the jackpot for each of the two holds. Specifically, it indicates that the degree of expectation for the next change is 10% and the degree of expectation for the next change is 20%.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, a character image of "It's finally starting" is displayed. This suggests that fluctuations corresponding to the two holds will soon begin. Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue the variable display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are determined and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. Second background image HG2
may contain an image representing a particular object. After that, as shown in FIG. 134(F),
A telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of characters "soon". At this time, the pattern (8l, 8c, 8r
) is maintained in the fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 134(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (out of frame) from the left side of the display screen 7a. Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are in fixed stop. The symbol is in the process of being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 134(E) to 134(H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the pattern is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the next change starts. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented in a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns. At the start of the next variation, symbols (8l, 8c,
8r) is variably displayed. From this change, the game state is switched to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(J), a character image MLG of "I might win" is displayed during the variation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "Soon" and the character image MLG is "May hit", which together form one sentence "May hit soon". Symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Effect example]
An example of the background image switching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(A) to (D), the first background image H
A first effect in which the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are changed while G1 is displayed, and after the first effect, as shown in FIG. from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, and after the second effect,
As shown in FIGS. 131(E) to 131(H), a third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image HG2 can be executed while the decorative symbols are stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(I), after the third effect, the background image is changed from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 with the start of the next variation of the decorative symbols. A fourth effect to switch can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131B, in the first effect, the timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is being displayed, and the timer value of the timer image TM1 is set to a predetermined value. When it becomes (here, 0), the second effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(F) to 131(H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP enters the frame while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. A fifth effect to frame out can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP flows while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(J), in the fourth effect, the character image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is being displayed, and in the third effect, the telop image TRP is displayed. , and the characters represented by the character image MLG in the fourth effect are continuous in content so as to form one sentence when combined. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 132 to 134 are the same.

[Modification]
A modification of the background image switching effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, when the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the switching may be instantaneous, or the switching may be partial and gradual. Also, both background images may be superimposed and displayed for a predetermined period.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of the background image switching effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
some of the multiple types of images are multiple types of background images;
a first effect of varying the decorative pattern while the first background image is displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern and switching a background image from the first background image to a second background image;
After the second effect, a third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image while the decorative pattern is stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
After the third effect, a fourth effect of switching the background image from the second background image to the third background image with the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while the first background image is being displayed,
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
In the third effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is framed in and framed out while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
the predetermined image is a telop image,
In the third effect, the telop image flows while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E6-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 5, which is dependent on claim 2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a character image;
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is being displayed,
The characters represented by the telop image in the third effect and the characters represented by the character image in the fourth effect are continuous so that when combined, they form one sentence. ing,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The image blur effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. FIG. Figure 135
138, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing of the drawing, and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing of the drawing. , and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing. there is something

This image blur effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if an instruction to execute an image blurring effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 to display an image on the display screen 7a. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. For example, the position of 14R and the emission mode are changed.

Here, the image blurring effect A will be described first, and the image blurring effect B, the image blurring effect C, and the image blurring effect D will be described in order.

[Image blur effect A]
First, the image blur effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the image blur effect A. FIG. The image blurring effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blur effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135A, a pending icon 9A displayed at a first pending display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C. As a result, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the pending icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8
R and R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol and reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small size and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
In the state where L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot is achieved with all the same patterns, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.
Each pattern of the corresponding small-sized decorative pattern is aligned with the same pattern as each pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, pending icons can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

The pending icon displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is the pending display position 9C.
d to become the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is
The size of the pending icon 9C is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests the player's expectations for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. , except when the pending icon displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the pending icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same size as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the game state of the game machine 1 . Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left, the second start port 2
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to 1 is displayed as being arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 135(A).

The variable display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 135(A) is started, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed). The left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop is in focus and clear, and is displayed on the display screen 7a immediately before the temporary stop display (or when decelerating for the temporary stop display). is displayed large in the left half area of . At this time, the relevant pending icon 9C, 4
The holding display position 9Ad and the holding display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0"
) is still displayed in FIG. 135(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(C), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) (here, the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop is in focus and clear, and immediately before the temporary stop display (or when decelerating for the temporary stop display). It is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a in the same size (or substantially the same size) as the size of the left decorative pattern 8L which has already been temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed is in focus, the left decorative pattern 8L already temporarily stopped and displayed is defocused and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). ), which is ambiguous.

The clearly focused right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed is at least part of the out-of-focus unclear left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed (the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number " 3”) is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side of the approximately right portion).

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
5(B). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 135(B).

Blurry and unclear images are done by blur image processing (e.g. Gaussian blur,
The image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). is created by doing In the following description, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed returns to the size at the time of the change and becomes smaller, and the focus becomes clear. The left decorative pattern 8L starts to move into its own variable display area and is temporarily stopped and displayed again. In addition, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed returns to the size at the time of change and becomes smaller, and the focus becomes clear (the right decorative pattern 8
The size of the R and the size of the left decorative pattern 8L are the same size, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are both focused and clear), and the right decorative pattern 8R is its own. It will start moving into the variable display area and will be in a state of temporary stop display again. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is still displayed in FIG. 135(C). Also, the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display position 9Cd appear again on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned and arranged near the upper side of the display screen 7a in parallel with the upper side, and are temporarily stopped and displayed to the upper left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as "upper left decorative pattern 8La"; here, the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the side, and the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative design 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as "upper right decorative design 8Ra"; here, number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the right decorative design 8R on the side. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned and arranged near the lower side of the display screen 7a in parallel with the lower side, and are temporarily stopped and displayed within the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter referred to simply as the "lower left decorative pattern 8Lb") is temporarily stopped and the same pattern as the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra (here, the number "2") is displayed, and the display screen 7a is displayed. The right decorative design 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as "lower right decorative design 8R
b”. ) is the same symbol as the upper left decorative symbol 8La (here, number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed.

As a result, the pattern alignment line L1 rising to the right connecting the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb and the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra becomes the same pattern (here, the number "2") to form the first reach, and the upper left A pattern alignment line L2 downward to the right connecting the decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb forms the same pattern (here, number "3") to form the second reach. In other words, a so-called "double reach" is formed by the pattern alignment line rising to the right by the first reach and the pattern alignment line falling to the right by the second reach. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C is still moving at high speed in a translucent state within its own variable display area. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is still displayed in FIG. 135(D). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 135(D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from a translucent state to an opaque state again by decelerating the fluctuation speed in its own fluctuation display area, and the fluctuation display continues. A middle decorative pattern 8C (here, number "1") is variably displayed at a low speed in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the middle decorative pattern 8C, the number "9" preceding the number "1" is displayed while the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. While it disappears toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the number "2" following this number "1" is displayed at a low speed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The lower part of the variably displayed number "2" appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed on the far side of the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd,
Even if the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd are covered with the middle decorative pattern 8C so that visibility is not hindered. .

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
5(E). FIG. 135(E) shows a state in which the relevant pending icon 9C, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a.
is still maintained.

As shown in FIG. 135(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is such that the number "2" following the number "1" is rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a within its own variable display area. The display is changed at a low speed in the displayed mode, temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the upper right decorative pattern are displayed on the upper right rising pattern alignment line by the first reach. The same 8Ra symbols (here, the number "2") are lined up. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is still displayed in FIG. 135(F). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 135(F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 135(H), the upper left decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb on the pattern alignment line falling to the right by the second reach are out of focus and blurred (so-called , "out of focus"). Also, the first start port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to and the second based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21
Numbers HMG (here, "0 0") respectively indicating special figure pending are displayed continuously in FIG. 135(G). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 135(G).

Lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, middle decorative pattern 8 on the pattern alignment line rising to the right by the first reach
c. When the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra is lined with the same pattern (here, the number "2"), it becomes a big win, and as shown in FIG. 8R are increased in size, and within their own variable display areas, they are arranged in a straight line (horizontal center line) connecting the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a, and are stopped and displayed. , the variable display ends, and then the big win game (big win effect) is started.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
5(H). Further, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 135(H). Further, the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

The size of the middle decorative design 8C in FIGS. 135(F) and (G) is the same as the size at the time of variation (for example, the size of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in FIG. 135(D)). Because of the size, the upper left decorative pattern 8La, the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra
, is larger than the size of the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb. Also, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG.
135(D)), but the size of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIGS. It is small compared to the size of the decorative pattern.

In this way, in the image blur effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (unfocused unclear image) With the left decorative pattern 8L, the arrangement of the decorative patterns can be realized with a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually entertained and the amusement can be improved.

Also, in the progress of the production, the image that the player wants to focus on (in other words, the order of the images that the player wants to focus on in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and then the right decorative pattern 8R (the order of the images that the player wants to focus on) It can contribute to conveying the thoughts of the creator)) to the player.

Further, in the image blur effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (an unclear image that is out of focus). 135(A) to 135(I), the left decorative pattern 8L realizes an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the decorative patterns. Regardless of the state, it is always in focus and clear. Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21. can be made easier.

[Image Blur Effect B]
Next, the image blur effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining image blur effect B. FIG. The image blurring effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In the image blur effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136A, a pending icon 9A displayed at a first pending display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C. As a result, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the pending icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8
R and R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol and reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small size and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
In the state where L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot is achieved with all the same patterns, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.
Each pattern of the corresponding small-sized decorative pattern is aligned with the same pattern as each pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the holding display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as the first special figure holding. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

The pending icon displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is the pending display position 9C.
d to become the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is
The size of the pending icon 9C is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests the player's expectations for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. , except when the pending icon displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the pending icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same size as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the game state of the game machine 1 . Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left, the second start port 2
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to 1 is displayed as being arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 136(A).

136(A), the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and as shown in FIG. 136(B), a production button imitating the production button 63 is pressed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63 (pressing operation). The image BTN is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁This effect button image BTN is focused and clear, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is still displayed in FIG. 136(A).

In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", the degree of expectation to be a big hit (variation production start command)
Based on, for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (rich jackpot)) in the order of high expectations of winning.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a sword image KG simulating the sword member 64 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a to prompt the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation). is displayed in a light emission mode (here, white blinking). At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left, and the sword image KG is brought into focus.
, and is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN that is already displayed is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and becomes unclear. there is

A clear sword image KG that is in focus is an obscure production button image B that is out of focus.
It is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side of at least part of TN (the right part of the effect button image BTN).

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
6(B). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(B).

Note that the out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and in a predetermined light emission mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, it is either lit or extinguished in the still image). state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, the size of the effect button image BTN does not change.

Blurry and unclear images are done by blur image processing (e.g. Gaussian blur,
The image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). is created by doing In the following description, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or while changing) into a focused and clear image.
While being moved from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again, it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. At this time, the sword image KG that has already been displayed is moved to the right side from the center of the display screen 7a and displayed, and the effect button image BTN is focused and clear, and is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. area. Production button image BT
Since N is in focus (
The image is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"), resulting in an unclear image.

A clear focused effect button image BTN is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus unclear sword image KG (the left part of the guard of the sword image KG).

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
6(C). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 136(C).

It should be noted that the out-of-focus unclear sword image KG is a still image, and in a predetermined light emission mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, the still image is either lit or unlit). ). Further, when the sword image KG is moved from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from blinking white to blinking blue).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the sword image K displayed in an out-of-focus state
G changes (or while changing) to a clear one in focus, and the display screen 7
It is moved again to the center from the right side of a, is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. At this time, the effect button image BTN that has already been displayed is moved to the right side from the center of the display screen 7a and displayed, and the sword image KG is focused and clear, and is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. area. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN already displayed is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and becomes unclear. there is

A clear sword image KG that is in focus is an obscure production button image B that is out of focus.
It is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side of at least a part of TN (the left part of the effect button image BTN).

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
6(D). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 136(D).

Note that the out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and in a predetermined light emission mode (because it is blinking in the moving image, in the still image it is either lit or extinguished). state). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(E) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from blinking blue to blinking green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the effect button image BTN displayed in the out-of-focus state changes (or while changing) into a focused and clear image.
It is moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. In addition, the sword image K displayed in a clear and focused state
G is moved from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. At this time, the number HM indicating the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 respectively.
G ("0 0" here) continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(E). Further, the relevant pending icon 9C, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a.
136(E).

Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(F) is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in E), or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of a big win (for example, changing from flashing green to flashing red). Further, the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. It may be changed (for example, changed from flashing green to flashing red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(G), the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear focused state moves from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing its size. and is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and overlaps the lower front part of the image. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Above the effect button image BTN, a message MG saying “Press!!” is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . At this time, the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is shown in FIG.
6(F). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 136(F).

Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) is
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in F), or it may be changed to one with a high degree of expectation for a big win (for example, changing from red blinking to gold blinking (yellow blinking)). good.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in a line connecting the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a (horizontal center line) in their respective variable display areas, The variable display ends. Here, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3", thereby losing.

Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation and the second
Figure 136(G) continues to display the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") respectively indicating the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start hole 21. When the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the pending display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable display ends.

On the other hand, following FIG. 136(F), as shown in FIG. 136(I), the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state shifts from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center again. It is moved without changing its size and is displayed in a predetermined luminous mode. In the sword image KG, a downward arrow image is displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that urges the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) in a manner that moves vertically in small steps. Sword member 6
4, a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the effective period of operation acceptance (for example, 3 seconds). again,
The sword image KG is superimposed on the front upper portion thereof with a message MG saying "Push!!" prompting an operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 . At this time, the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear and focused state disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0"
) is still displayed in FIG. 136(F). FIG. 13 shows a state in which the pending icon 9C, the four pending display positions 9Ad, and the pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a.
6(F).

The predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F). It may be changed (for example, from red flashing to gold flashing (yellow flashing) or seven-color flashing (change from rainbow flashing (rich big win)).

When the player operates (presses down) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as shown in FIG. 136(J).
, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a line (horizontal center line) connecting the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a within their respective variable display areas, and are stopped and displayed. and the variable display ends. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "1". It is stopped and displayed to become a jackpot, and then a jackpot game (jackpot performance)
will be started.

Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation and the second
Figure 136 (I) continues to display the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") respectively indicating the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start hole 21. Further, even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be shown in FIG. 136(I). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

It should be noted that the effect button image BTN shown in FIG. 136(G) is selected and displayed from the state in which the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are displayed in FIG.
) is selected and displayed, and the sword image KG of FIG. The probability of occurrence of a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is higher when the symbols are displayed as being displayed.

In this way, in the image blur effect B, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear images that are out of focus (
The effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are out of focus and unclear images), can realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG. It is visually pleasing and can improve interest.

In addition, the images to be focused on by the player during the progress of the production (in other words, the focus (
It is possible to contribute to conveying to the player the order of the images to be focused and the player to focus on (the thoughts of the creator of the production).

In the image blur effect B, for example, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are clear images that are in focus, and unclear images that are out of focus (out-of-focus unclear images). 136(A) to FIG. 136(A) to FIG. 136(A) to FIG. At 136 (J), the number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 . Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21. can be made easier.

[Image Blur Effect C]
Next, the image blur effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the image blur effect C. FIG. The image blurring performance C is selected from a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances when the ready-to-win is formed during the variable performance of decorative patterns.

In the image blur effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), a pending icon 9A displayed at a first pending display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C. As a result, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the pending icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8
R and R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol and reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small size and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
In the state where L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot is achieved with all the same patterns, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.
Each pattern of the corresponding small-sized decorative pattern is aligned with the same pattern as each pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, pending icons can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four pending icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

The pending icon displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is the pending display position 9C.
d to become the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is
The size of the pending icon 9C is about 1.5 times larger than that of the pending icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggest the player's expectations for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. , except when the pending icon displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the pending icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same size as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the game state of the game machine 1 . Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left, the second start port 2
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to 1 is displayed as being arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 137(A).

When reach is formed in FIG. 137A, as shown in FIG. is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the effect button image corresponding to the depression operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁This effect button image BTN is focused and clear, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and overlaps the lower front part of the image. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the first start port 2
The number HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into 0 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively It is still displayed in FIG. 137(A).

In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", the degree of expectation to be a big hit (variation production start command)
Based on, for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (rich jackpot)) in the order of high expectations of winning.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7 appears as shown in FIG. 137(C).
The upper half of the character CRA holding a sword is arranged and displayed in almost the entire area on the right side of a.
This character CRA is in focus and clear, and is largely displayed on almost the entire right side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB that have been displayed in a clear and focused state disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0
0”) is still displayed in FIG. 137(B). In addition, the hold icon 9C, 4
FIG. 137(B) continues to maintain the state in which the one holding display position 9Ad and the holding display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(D), in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged again in the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁At this time, the effect button image BTN is placed in front of the already displayed character CRA and is the focal point (
It is in focus and clear, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (Fig. 137).
shown in the same position as shown in (B)). Since the effect button image BTN is in focus, the character CRA already displayed is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. .

The focused and clear effect button image BTN is displayed in a state of being superimposed in front of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (character CRA's right shoulder, right arm and sword). there is

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
7(C). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 137(C).

Blurry and unclear images are done by blur image processing (e.g. Gaussian blur,
The image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). is created by doing In the following description, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and overlaps the lower front part of the image. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Note that the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA
is a still image. Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. It may also be changed to something (for example, changing from white flashing to blue flashing or gold flashing (yellow flashing)).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7 appears as shown in FIG. 137(E).
The upper half of the character CRB holding a sword is arranged and displayed facing the character CRA at approximately the center of a. This character CRB is in focus and clear, and is largely displayed on almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB displayed in a clear and focused state
disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, since the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is still out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and becomes unclear. there is

A clear character CRB that is in focus is displayed in a state of being superimposed in front of at least a portion of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword portion of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
7(D). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 137(D). Note that the character CRB may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the character CRA, which was displayed in an obscure out-of-focus state, is changed to a clear one in focus, and substantially the entire right side area of the display screen 7a is displayed. A clear focused character CRA is displayed, and a clear focused character CRB is displayed almost entirely on the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is the character CRA). display screen 7a in order to keep a distance between
is moved from the center of the image to the left). At this time, the numbers HMG (here "0 0" in the above) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137(E). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(G), a vertically written image message MG of "Battle Start" is displayed in the area extending from the center to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The vertically written image message MG is in focus and clear, and the two characters CRA and CRB already displayed are out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). ”) is ambiguous.

The message MG, which is a vertically written image that clearly says "Start of battle" with focus,
At least a portion of the out-of-focus unclear character CRA (the sword portion of the character CRA) is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side, and at least a portion of the out-of-focus unclear character CRB (the right shoulder of the character CRB) is displayed. and the sword part) are displayed in an overlapping state on the front side.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
7(F). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed out of focus are changed to be in focus and displayed on the display screen 7a. An action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) by the characters CRA and CRB. At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "
0 0") is still displayed in FIG. 137(G). Also, the hold icon 9C,
The state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(G).

In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After that, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(I), enlarged motion blur is displayed in which the alphabetic character V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front side. The expanded motion blur for the remaining alphabetic character V is also created as an indistinct image that is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). This out-of-focus blurry image is created by expanding motion blur image processing.
Alternatively, the target layer among a plurality of layers is blurred from the center in the direction of diffusion, and the blur increases from the center toward the outer periphery as the distance dimension increases from the center. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). is created by doing

When the player sees the image of the English letter V that has undergone the enlargement motion blur image processing, it is possible to give the player the impression that the player is moving toward the image of the English letter V, and to move toward the center of the image of the English letter V. A sense of speed can be obtained, and the ally character CRA becomes the enemy character C
A suggestion can be made that RB will soon win. At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "0 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 137(H). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 137(H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(J), an action presentation (battle presentation) develops (starts).
At the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to announce the victory of the allied character CRA. are placed and displayed. In addition, when an effect is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and a message MG saying "defeat" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. placed and displayed.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
7(I). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 137(I).

After that, although not shown, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all together on the display screen 7a (here, the number "1"). A jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player. Even if the variable display is terminated, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are respectively performed. number H
MG ("0 0" here) continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(J). Further, even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 137(J). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

On the other hand, on the display screen 7a, the number "1" is displayed for the left decorative design 8L, and the number "1" is displayed for the middle decorative design 8C.
2", the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1", and the same pattern (here, the number "1") is stopped and displayed without being aligned. When the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a.
However, the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

In this way, in the image blur effect C, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear images that are out of focus (out-of-focus, unclear images). The character CRB, which is an image), can realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN. It is possible to entertain and improve interest.

In addition, images to be watched by the player during the progress of the production (in other words, the player should focus on the production button image BTN, the character CRA, the production button image BTN, and the character CRB in this order). This can contribute to conveying the order of images (the thoughts of the creator of the production) to the player.

In the image blur effect C, for example, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear images that are out of focus (out-of-focus unclear images). 137(A) to 137(A) to FIG. 137(A) to FIG. In FIG. 137(J), the number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the game state of the game machine 1 . Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21. can be made easier.

[Image blur effect D]
Next, the image blur effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the image blur effect D. FIG. The image blurring performance D is selected from a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances when the ready-to-win is formed during the variable performance of decorative patterns.

In the image blur effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), a pending icon 9A displayed at a first pending display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C. As a result, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad
This is an effect performed when the pending icon 9A no longer exists.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach. ing.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always in focus and clear. It has become. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8
R and R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol and reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the corresponding small size and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
In the state where L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot is achieved with all the same patterns, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.
Each pattern of the corresponding small-sized decorative pattern is arranged in the same pattern as each pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the holding display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as the first special figure holding. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

The pending icon displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is the pending display position 9C.
d to become the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is
The size of the pending icon 9C is about 1.5 times larger than that of the pending icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggest the player's expectations for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. , except when the pending icon displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the pending icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same size as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . The number HMG is always in focus and clear regardless of the game state of the game machine 1 . Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero, the blue number "0" is on the left, the second start port 2
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to 1 is displayed as being arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 138(A).

When the reach is formed in FIG. 138(A), as shown in FIG. 138(B), the upper body of the character CRA holding the sword is arranged and displayed almost entirely on the right side of the display screen 7a. This character CRA is in focus and clear, and is displayed on the display screen 7a.
It is displayed large almost in the entire right side area of . At this time, the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") is shown in Fig. 1
38(A). Note that the character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(C), the upper half of the character CRB holding the sword is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a so as to approach and face the character CRA. This character CRB is in focus and clear, and is largely displayed on almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, since the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and becomes unclear. there is

A clear character CRB that is in focus is displayed in a state of being superimposed in front of at least a portion of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword portion of the character CRA). ing.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
8(B). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 138(B).

A clear character CRB that is in focus may be a still image or a moving image. Also, the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image.

Blurry and unclear images are done by blur image processing (e.g. Gaussian blur,
The image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). is created by doing In the following description, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(D), the character CRB is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left in order to keep a distance with the character CRA, and is displayed in a blurred state. The character CRA changes into a clear one in focus, almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action production (battle production) by the two characters CRA and CRB develops ( is started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "0 0") is shown in Fig. 13
7(C). In addition, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 137(C).

In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(E), a message MG saying "Your ally character wins big!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "0 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 138(D). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be shown in FIG. 138(D).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the initial action production (battle production) is performed. At the beginning of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB is dominant, and the allied character CRA is cornered to the right. At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "0 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 138(E). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to FIG. 138(E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(G), in the mid-term of the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. At this time, the first special figure reservation and the second start port 21 based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20
A number HMG (here, "0 0
”) continues to be displayed in FIG. 138(F). FIG. 1 shows a state in which the pending icon 9C, the four pending display positions 9Ad, and the pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a.
38(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R each move toward the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). direction) and advances (moves) to the front (front) center position (advance position (
In the unfolded position)), the left side decoration part that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The halves of the right ornamental part and the right ornamental part are combined to form one ornamental member (unified accessory) having an annular shape of the left ornamental part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right ornamental part of the right movable accessory 14R.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white light emission mode),
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R become white light emitting mode, and the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, and the ally character CRA wins. A suggestive performance is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are illuminated in a predetermined light mode (for example, As a result, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit red light, but the letter "V" does not appear. , an effect suggesting victory of the ally character CRA is not performed.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown). When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multicolor light) that are arranged to surround emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate becomes the alphabetic character "
The letter "V" appears as a result of irregular reflection at "V". In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a plurality of second decoration LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single color or multicolor) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the image of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
8(G). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 138(G).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(I), at the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center to indicate "Victory". A message MG is arranged and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. In addition, at the end of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CR
In the case where an effect for announcing the victory of B is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and "
A message MG "defeated" is arranged and displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB.

A number HMG (here, "0 0”) is shown in FIG.
8(H). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as shown in FIG. 138(H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
C, a jackpot game in which the right decorative patterns 8R are stop-displayed together with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player (jackpot performance). is done. Even if the variable display is terminated, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated number HMG ("0 0" here) continues to be displayed in FIG. 138(I). Moreover, even if the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd remain on the display screen 7.
The state disappeared from a continues to FIG. 138(I). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable display ends.

On the other hand, when an effect is performed to inform the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the number "1" is displayed for the left decorative pattern 8L and the number "1" is displayed for the middle decorative pattern 8C on the display screen 7a. "2", the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1" and the same pattern (here,
When the number "1") is not aligned, the stop display is performed, and when the variable display ends, the deviation is displayed as a definite result. When the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the pending display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a.
C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the image blur effect D, the character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (unfocused, unclear image). A character CRA (a friend character CRA), which is an image), can realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB, so that the player can be visually entertained. Interest can be improved.

In addition, an image (in other words, a character CR
A (friend character CRA), then character CRB (enemy character CRB), and the order of the images to be focused on by the player (thoughts of the creator of the production)
) to the player.

In the image blur effect D, for example, a character CRB (enemy character CRB) that is a clear image that is in focus and an unclear image that is out of focus (unfocused unclear image) image) character CRA (ally character CRA)
, to realize an expression with a sense of depth in the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB. Regardless of the setting, it is always in focus and clear. This will
To make it easy for a player to grasp the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21.例文帳に追加be able to.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blur effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the image blur effect A shown in FIGS. 135(B) to 135
As shown in (C), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided,
A first effect of displaying the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(B), which is a clear first image;
The left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(B), which is the first image clearly displayed by the effect of
135(C), and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C), which is the first image displayed unclearly by the second effect. and a third effect of clearly displaying the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135(C), which is the second image, at a different position. 135(C), which is a clear second image, and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C), which is an ambiguous first image.
Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the image of and the second image,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
136(B) to 136(C), the sword image KG in FIG. 136(C), which is the clear second image, and the unclear first image, FIG. ), the arrangement of the first image and the second image can be expressed with a sense of depth by means of the effect button image BTN of ). can be improved.
137(C) to 137(E), for example, the character CRB in FIG. 137(E) which is the clear second image and the unclear first image in FIG. E)
With the character CRA, the arrangement of the first image and the second image can be expressed with a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest improved. be able to.
In the image blur effect D in FIGS. 138(B) to 138(C), the character CRB in FIG. 138(C) which is the clear second image and the unclear first image in FIG. 138(C) With the character CRA, the arrangement of the first image and the second image can be expressed with a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest improved. be able to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. The right decorative design 8R overlaps at least part of the left decorative design 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is the first image that is unclearly displayed by the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135(C), the clearly focused right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed is at least the out-of-focus left uncleared decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed. A portion (about the right side of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, number "3")) is displayed in an overlapping state on the front side. According to this configuration,
The image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect B of FIG. 136(C), the clear sword image KG that is in focus, which is the second image, is at least one of the out-of-focus and unclear effect button images BTN that is the first image. (the right part of the effect button image BTN) is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the front side. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137(E), the in-focus clear character CRB that is the second image is at least a part of the out-of-focus unclear character CRA that is the first image. CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword part) are shown overlapping in front. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138C, the clear character CRB that is in focus, which is the second image, is at least part of the unclear character CRA that is out of focus (character CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword part) are shown overlapping in front. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 135(A) to FIG.
As shown in (C), the image display device 7 (display means) is capable of displaying the pending icon 9C, and when the third effect is executed, the pending icon 9C is non-displayed in FIG. 135(C). Is displayed. According to this configuration, the unclear first image shown in FIG.
The left decorative design 8L of 5(C) and the right decorative design 8R of FIG. 135(C) which is a clear second image
135(C), which is the unclear second image, and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C), which is the unclear first image , and the right decorative pattern 8R can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). 135(C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135(C), which is a clear second image. can be provided to the player.
136(A) to 136(C), the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(C), which is an unclear first image, and a clear second Since the visibility of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(C), which is an image, is not hindered by the pending icon 9C, the obscure first image, the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(C), and the clear The sword image KG in FIG. 136(C), which is the second image, can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the powerful and ambiguous first image of FIG.
Effect button image BTN in (C) and sword image KG in FIG. 136(C), which is a clear second image
, the player can be provided with an effect.
137(A) to 137(E), the character CRA in FIG. Figure 1
137(E), the character CRB in FIG. 137(E) and the character CRA in FIG. The character CRB in FIG. 137(E) can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). This results in a powerful, obscure first image of FIG.
37(E) character CRA and the character CRB of FIG. 137(E), which is a clear second image, can be provided to the player.
138(A) to 138(C), the character CRA in FIG. Figure 1
138(C), the character CRB in FIG. 138(C) and the character CRA in FIG. The character CRB in FIG. 138(C) can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). This results in a powerful, obscure first image of FIG.
It is possible to provide the player with an effect by the character CRA of 38(C) and the character CRB of FIG. 138(E) which is a clear second image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 135(A) to FIG.
As shown in (I), the image display device 7 (display means) always displays the number HMG (here, "0 0"), which is a numerical image indicating the number of pending icons, and executes the second effect. The number HMG (here, "0 0"), which is a numerical image, is clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C) is displayed from clear to unclear due to the second effect, whereas the numeral HMG (here, "0 0”) is always clearly displayed, so the player can easily grasp the number of pending icons.
Image blur effect B in FIGS. 136(A) to 136(J), FIGS. 137(A) to 137(J)
) and the image blurring effect D of FIGS. 138(A) to 138(J).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 135(A) to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 135(D), after the third effect, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. The decorative pattern 8L is made clear again, and the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(D), which is the first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(D), which is the second image, are not overlapped. It is possible to execute a fourth effect to be displayed in . According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(D), which is the first image,
and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(D), which is the second image, do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images. It is possible to suggest to the player that the effects relating to the left decorative pattern 8L of (D) and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG.
In the image blur effect B of FIGS. 136(A) to 136(F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(F) which is the first image and the effect button image BTN of FIG. Sword image K
136(F), which is the first image, and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(F), which is the second image. 136 (
It is possible to suggest to the player that the effect related to the sword image KG of F) will be developed from here on.
In the image blur effect C of FIGS. 137(A) to 137(F), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 137(F), which is the first image, and the character C of FIG. 137(F), which is the second image.
When RB and are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as a clear image,
Character CRA in FIG. 137(F) which is the first image and FIG. 137(F) which is the second image
) character CRB, and the fact that an effect related to the character CRB will be developed from now on can be suggested to the player.
138(A) to 138(D), for example, the character CRA in FIG. 138(D), which is the first image, and the character C in FIG. 138(D), which is the second image.
When RB and are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as a clear image,
Character CRA in FIG. 138(D) which is the first image and FIG. 138(D) which is the second image
) character CRB, and the fact that an effect related to the character CRB will be developed from now on can be suggested to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the image blur effect A shown in FIGS. 135(B) to 135
As shown in (D), the left decorative pattern 8L in FIGS. 135(B) and (D), which is the clearly displayed first image, and the second image in FIGS. 135(C) and (D) The right decorative pattern 8R is the focal point (
The left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is the first image that is displayed unclearly, is an out-of-focus image. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect B of FIGS. 136B to 136F, for example, the effect button image BTN shown in FIGS. The sword image KG in FIGS. 136C and 136F is an in-focus image, and the effect button image BTN in FIG. , is an out-of-focus image. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect C of FIGS. 137(A) to 137(F), for example, the character CRA in FIGS. Character CRB in FIGS. 137E and 137F is an in-focus image, and character CRA in FIG. There is no image. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect D of FIGS. 138(A) to 138(D), the character CRA of FIGS. (
The characters CRB in C) and (D) are images in focus, and the character CRA in FIG. be. With this configuration, the image can be expressed as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135(A) of the image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are symbol variations based on the pending icon 9C. It can be done when there are no pending icons when the display starts. That is, in the image blur effect A, as shown in FIG.
As the pending icon displayed in Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon no longer exists at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. It is a production performed in case.
Image blurring effect B in FIG. 136(A), image blurring effect C in FIG. 137(A), and FIG.
The same applies to the image blur effect D of A).

[Modification]
A modification of the image blur effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
As the pending icon displayed at d moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon no longer exists at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. It was an occasional production. However, as the second special figure reservation, the first
As the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icons 9B are present at the first to fourth pending display positions. It may be an effect that is performed when it is gone. Briefly explaining the first to fourth reservation display positions where the reservation icon 9B is displayed as the second special reservation, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative design are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the second special reservation. The suspension icon 9C corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . A reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation in the region of the display screen 7a on the right side of the reservation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In this pending display area, the pending icons 9B can be displayed at four pending display positions (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions are a first reserved display position, a second
They are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position, the third reserved display position, and the fourth reserved display position.

[Modification 2]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG.
Make the image blurry and out of focus (so-called "out of focus"), and make the second image placed on the front side clear and in focus. This makes it possible to express images as if they were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field. Blurry image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, in which a Gaussian function is used to vary the standard deviation to blur the image) creates an out-of-focus, unclear image. This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to make the image shallower or deeper.
In this way, the expression of performance can be expanded.

[Modification 3]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG.
The image is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed in front is clear and in focus. rice field. However, as a completely opposite relationship, the first image placed on the back side should be in focus and clear, and the second image placed on the front side should be in focus. The image may be out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus"). By using a so-called zoom lens, it is possible to provide the player with an effect of focusing on one subject from an image of a plurality of subjects existing in the depth direction, thereby increasing the variation of the effect. can. Note that the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurring image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring is performed to vary the standard deviation using a Gaussian function to blur the image). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in advance in the ROM 103, but is read out from the ROM 103 and is read from the focused clear image (image data). The image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time to create an out-of-focus unclear image.

[Modification 4]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG.
The image is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image placed in front is clear and in focus. rice field. However, among the multiple subjects that exist in the depth direction, the images of some subjects with different distance dimensions in the depth direction should be in focus and clear, and the images of other subjects should be clear. It may be blurred (so-called “out of focus”) and unclear. In this way, since the image gives a sense of incompatibility, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incompatibility effect and suggest to the player the possibility that the chance of winning is high. Note that the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurring image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring is performed to vary the standard deviation using a Gaussian function to blur the image). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite forming an image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, blurry and unclear images are stored in the ROM 103 in advance.
The image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a clear focused image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 instead of the one stored in the ROM 103 to create an out-of-focus unclear image. is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification 5]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
As the pending icon displayed at d moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon no longer exists at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. It was an occasional production. However, the game state may be the time saving state and the number of times limit may be provided. For example, the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is only one time, or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In the image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D in FIG. and blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This is done in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. But the focus (
In addition to a clear image (image data) that is in focus, an unclear image that is out of focus (
image data) may be stored in the ROM 103 in advance and read from the ROM 103 as necessary. In this case, if the ROM 103 has sufficient free space, it is possible to store a clear image (image data) that is in focus and an unclear image (image data) that is out of focus. , the image control microcomputer 101 does not need to perform blurring image processing in real time, which contributes to reducing the load on the image control microcomputer 101 .

[Modification 7]
In the image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D in FIG. and blurs the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This is done in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. This blurring image processing may be effected, for example, by displaying numbers one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to count down. In this countdown effect, for example, the number "5" → the number "4"
→ number "3" → number "2" → number "1" → number "0" on the display screen 7a. ” is displayed, followed by the number “5” as an obscure image out of focus, and the number “4” as a clear image in which the front side of the number “5” is in focus is displayed on the display screen 7a. indicate. Subsequently, the number "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "4" is blurred as an obscure image,
The number "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in which the front side of the number "4" is in focus. Subsequently, the number "4" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "3" is displayed as an obscure image out of focus, and the number "3" is displayed as a clear image with the front side of the number "3" in focus. 2” is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "3" is displayed on the screen 7a.
Then, the number "2" is displayed as an obscure image out of focus, and the number "1" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in which the front side of the number "2" is focused. Subsequently, the number "2" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "1" is displayed as an obscure image out of focus, and the number "1" is displayed as a clear image with the front side of the number "1" in focus. 0”
is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the number "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and then the number "
0" is erased from the display screen 7a, and a super ready-to-win effect is developed.

[Modification 8]
In the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 and the image blurring effect C of FIG.
was displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . However, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 . Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 9]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D of FIG.
As the pending icon displayed at d moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icon no longer exists at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. It was an occasional performance. However, as the first special figure reservation, the first
As the pending icon displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the pending icons are present at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. 135, the image blurring effect A of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. The image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 is not performed, and the left decorative pattern 9L, the middle decorative pattern 9C, and the right decorative pattern 9R may not align with the same pattern (for example, the number "7") and may be stopped and displayed as a misalignment. be. In this case, other ready-to-win effects different from the image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D in FIG. It may be lost through the lowest expectation, so-called “normal reach)), or it may be lost without going through other reach effects.

[Modification 10]
Image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. Directing may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
a first effect for clearly displaying the first image;
a second effect of obscurely displaying the first image clearly displayed by the first effect;
a third effect of clearly displaying a second image at a position different from the first image that is displayed unclearly by the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1,
The second image clearly displayed by the third effect overlaps at least part of the first image unclearly displayed by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1 or aspect E7-2,
The display means can display the pending icon,
The said pending icon is hidden when the third effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3,
The display means always displays a numerical image indicating the number of pending icons,
the numerical image is clearly displayed even when the second effect is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4,
After the third effect, the first image that has been unclearly displayed by the second effect is made clear again, and the first image and the second image are displayed so as not to overlap each other. It is possible to execute a fourth production to
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5,
the clearly displayed first image and the second image are in-focus images;
the first image that appears unclear is an out-of-focus image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6,
The first effect, the second effect and the third effect can be executed when there is no pending icon when the symbol variation display based on the pending icon is started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Win/lose notification effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. FIG. This winning/losing notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a winning/losing notification performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. is displayed. Note that the winning/losing notification effect is executed for a predetermined period over a plurality of variations.

[Win-loss notification effect A]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state") is a loss. In the failure notification effect, a message image MSG saying "loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed in the center of the Two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(B), a right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, "
A message image MSG saying "Right shot" is displayed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "hit right", the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(C), the final battle announcement effect is executed. The final battle announcement effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special figure suspension described above. In the final battle announcement effect, a message image MSG saying "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that until the defeat performance to be described later, it is a performance with a variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special reservation, and it is a look-ahead performance including three suspensions corresponding to the suspension image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character appears as an opponent of the ally character. here,
An enemy character CRD appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and if the friendly character wins the battle effect, a win (a big win or a small win) is determined. Here, an effect is produced in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRD fight.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is a effect when all of the change and the three suspensions are lost. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG reading "Expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the first hold out of the remaining three holds is fixed and stopped at "565", showing a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(H), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG reading "Expect next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the change corresponding to the last hold is "56
5”, it was confirmed and stopped, showing that it was a loss. After the defeat effect is executed, the remaining hold that is a loss is quickly digested.

[Win/loss notification production B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 140(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state") is a loss. In the failure notification effect, a message image MSG saying "loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed in the center of the Two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(B), a right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, "
A message image MSG saying "Right shot" is displayed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "hit right", the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the final battle announcement effect is executed. The final battle announcement effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special figure suspension described above. In the final battle announcement effect, a message image MSG saying "final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that until the defeat performance to be described later, it is a performance with a variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special reservation, and it is a look-ahead performance including three suspensions corresponding to the suspension image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character appears as an opponent of the ally character. here,
An enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and if the friendly character wins the battle effect, a win (a big win or a small win) is determined. Here, an effect is produced in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(F), a victory effect is executed. The win effect is a effect when there is a win among the variation and the three reserves. Here, the friendly character CRA
is displayed and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(G), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG reading "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the first hold out of the remaining three holds is fixed and stopped at "565", showing a loss. It is assumed that the next hold is the winning AT hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(H), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG reading "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the winning pending AT is fixed and stopped at "555" to show the state of winning. Note that the last hold is not digested.

[Win/lose notification effect C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state") is a loss. In the failure notification effect, a message image MSG saying "loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed in the center of the Two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), a right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, "
A message image MSG saying "Right shot" is displayed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "hit right", the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the first battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the second battle production is
It is a production with a variation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the third battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the 4th battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is a effect indicating that the player is defeated in the fourth battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production for fixing and stopping the variation. Here, a message image MSG of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the production pattern is displayed on the display screen 7
It is displayed in the lower left part of a. Here, the change corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is "56
5”, it was confirmed and stopped, showing that it was a loss.

[Win-loss notification effect D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final variation when the game state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state") is a loss. In the failure notification effect, a message image MSG saying "loss" is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed in the center of the Two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(B), a right-handed promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to so-called "right-handed". Here, "
A message image MSG saying "Right shot" is displayed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final variation when the game state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player "hit right", the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the first battle effect is executed. The first battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the first battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the second battle effect is executed. The second battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the second battle production is
It is a production with a variation corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(E), the third battle effect is executed. The third battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. In addition, the third battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(F), the fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle effect is a effect in which a friend character fights against an enemy character. Here, in the case of winning, the ally character wins. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA wins. In addition, the 4th battle production is
It is a production with variation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect indicating that the player has won in the fourth battle effect. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop effect (hit) is an effect for definite stop of variation. Here, a message image MSG reading "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it shows how the variation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixed and stopped at "555".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning/losing notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there is a predetermined number (four) of holds in the second special figure reservation, pre-reading is performed to determine in advance whether there is a hit in the second special figure reservation. 139(C)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 14
0 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the win-lose results of a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there is a predetermined number (four) of holds in the second special figure reservation, pre-reading is performed to determine in advance whether there is a hit in the second special figure reservation. As a look-ahead effect, it is notified whether or not there is a hit in the variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold (Fig. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the win-lose results of a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there are a predetermined number (four) of reservations in the second special figure reservation, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure reservation. Informing whether or not there is a hit in each variation corresponding to the hold (Fig. 141 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H), Fig. 142 (C) (D) (E) ( F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes clear in order whether or not there is a win in the predetermined number of reservations, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game state is a time saving state ("time saving state and high base state")
When in, by executing the right-handed promotion effect, the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four) (Fig. 139 (B), Fig. 140 (B), Fig. 141 (B), Fig. 142 (B)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily create a state in which a predetermined number of holds are present, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the winning is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the winning is notified,
The past undigested pending is digested rather than the winning pending (Fig. 140 (G) (H)
). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without making the player feel uncomfortable after the series of presentations.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the loss is reported in the look-ahead effect, and after the loss is reported,
Digest the undigested retention (Fig. 139 (G) (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without making the player feel uncomfortable after the series of presentations.

[Modification]
A modified example of the winning/losing notification effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy character that appears after the final battle announcement effect may be selected according to the degree of expectation of winning (FIGS. 139(D) and 140(D).
)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters that appear in the first, second, third, and fourth battles may be selected according to the degree of expectation that they will win (Fig. 1
41(C)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 142(C)(D)(E)(F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the fixed stop effect (loss), and the fixed stop effect (win) are executed for the fourth battle effect (Fig. 141 (G) (H), Fig. 142 (G) (H)
). On the other hand, for the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect, the defeat effect, the victory effect, the fixed stop effect (loss), and the fixed stop effect (win) may be executed. .

[Modification 4]
In the above example, the ally character wins in the fourth battle effect. may win. When the teammate character wins in the first battle effect, it is conceivable to execute the win effect and the confirmation stop effect (win) following the first battle effect. Similarly, when the friendly character wins in the second battle effect, it is conceivable to execute the victory effect and the fixed stop effect (win) following the second battle effect, and when the friendly character wins in the third battle effect. It is conceivable to execute a winning effect and a fixed stop effect (win) following the third battle effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the production for the second special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the first special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E8-1]
It is possible to suspend the winning lottery that is triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting hole, perform pre-reading to determine in advance whether or not the ball will win when the ball enters the starting hole, and perform a pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-reading. , a gaming machine that can be executed prior to the digestion of the hold,
When there is a predetermined number of holds, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notification effect that is executed as the look-ahead effect and notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1,
The look-ahead notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of reservations in the fluctuation of completing the first reservation when the predetermined number of reservations exist.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1 or aspect E8-2,
When there is a predetermined number of holds, it is possible to execute a variation notification effect for notifying whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds at each variation corresponding to the predetermined number of holds.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3,
The predetermined number of holds is generated by entering a ball into the starting hole in an advantageous game in which the ball entering the starting hole is easier,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4,
If there is a hit in the predetermined number of reservations, the hit is notified by the look-ahead notification effect,
Regarding the past unspent pending rather than the successful hold, digest after the winning notification,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5,
If there is no win in the predetermined number of reservations, the pre-reading notification effect notifies the loss,
For unspent pending, digest after notification of failure,
A gaming machine characterized by:

143 to 146, the decorative pattern display area effects A to D will be described below. This decorative design display area effect can be executed during the decorative design variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative pattern display area effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Decorative pattern display area production A]
143 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. Symbol "1
28") is stopped. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. First display area R
11 is positioned at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display region R11 is the first display region R1
It is included in a second display region R21 (second region) larger than 1. In this embodiment, the second display region R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Further, a specific image TG1 (specific image) is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of the character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed.
Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the right decorative pattern 8R (design image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R form a ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper central position. The specific image TG1 is located above the first display region R11, more specifically the first display region R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed inside.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative design 8C (design image of the number "1") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "2") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not. The middle decorative pattern 8C to be varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2", which is immediately before the number "3", which is the winning pattern. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display area R11 with the decorative design 8C (design image of the number "2") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the first
It is displayed while enlarging so as to protrude from the display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the enlarged left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R are displayed. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the ready-to-win state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so as to partially overlap the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a ready-to-win effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect B. FIG. In the decorative design display area production B, first, as shown in FIG. Symbol "1
28") is stopped. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. First display area R
11 is positioned at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display region R11 is the first display region R1
It is included in a second display region R21 (second region) larger than 1. In this embodiment, the second display region R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed.
Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the right decorative pattern 8R (design image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R form a ready-to-win state.

Then, when the reach state of the decorative pattern is formed, the specific image T is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a.
G (specific image) is displayed. A specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of the character wearing sunglasses. In addition, the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but abstract things such as characters, figures, and symbols,
It also includes conceptual items whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here is
It includes all aspects in which the number can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper central position. The specific image TG1 is located above the first display region R11, more specifically the first display region R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed inside.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "2") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not. The middle decorative pattern 8C to be varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2", which is immediately before the number "3", which is the winning pattern. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative design 8C (the design image of the number "2") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the first
It is displayed while enlarging so as to protrude from the display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21. Then, the display of the first display region R11 disappears (the first display region R11 becomes non-display) on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the enlarged left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R are displayed. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the ready-to-win state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a ready-to-win effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display area effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. Symbol "1
28") is stopped. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. First display area R
11 is positioned at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display region R11 is the first display region R1
It is included in a second display region R21 (second region) larger than 1. In this embodiment, the second display region R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG.

Further, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of the character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed.
Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the right decorative pattern 8R (design image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R form a ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper central position. The specific image TG1 is located above the first display region R11, more specifically the first display region R11.
It is displayed above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed inside. Also, the first display area R11 and the ready-to-win left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R displayed in the first display area R11 are enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative pattern 8C (the number "1" pattern image) displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "2") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not. The middle decorative pattern 8C to be varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2", which is immediately before the number "3", which is the winning pattern. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display area R11 with the decorative design 8C (design image of the number "2") displayed from above. The specific image TG1 cannot be moved by pushing it downward, and on the contrary, the specific image TG1 is pushed back from the bottom to the top by the middle decorative pattern 8C in the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display region R11,
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a lost mode (the lost pattern "32
3”) is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern display area production D]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area effect D. FIG. In the decorative pattern display area effect D, first, as shown in FIG. Symbol "1
28") is stopped. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area (first area) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. First display area R
11 is positioned at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A second display area (second area) R21 surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Second display area R21
is larger than the first display region R11. The second display area R21 is positioned above the display screen 7a.

A specific image (specific image) TG is displayed in the second display region R21 on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of the character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed.
Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), the first display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
11, the right decorative pattern 8R (design image of the number "3") is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R form a ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), the second display area R of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed.
At 21, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display region R11, more specifically above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display region R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "1") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is varied according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (design image of the number "2") in the first display region R11, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a state where a part of the specific image TG1 overlaps the first display region R11. Push 8C from top to bottom to try to change it.
As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in a failing mode or not. The middle decorative pattern 8C to be varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2", which is immediately before the number "3", which is the winning pattern. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display region R11 with the decorative design 8C (design image of the number "2") displayed from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being stop-displayed in a lost state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the first
It is displayed while enlarging so as to protrude from the display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the enlarged left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R are displayed. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the ready-to-win state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a ready-to-win effect is performed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative design display area effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, in the first display region R11 (first region) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, decorations that are variably displayed A first effect in which the patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (a set of decorative patterns) form a ready-to-reach state, and a decorative pattern 8L in the ready-to-reach state in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
A second effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of 8C and 8R is changed by a specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, among the middle decorative symbols 8C in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, specific symbols (this embodiment When the pattern image of the number "2" in the form) is changed by the specific image TG1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, and 8L are displayed in the second display region R21 (second region) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A third effect of displaying 8R can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed in the first display region R11 to the second display region R21. is displayed to move to . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the ready-to-reach decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display region R21 are the first
Enlarged and displayed than when displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, when displaying 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the second display region R21, the first The display area R11 is hidden. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, in the first effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form the reach state in the first display region R11, the first display region R11 and A set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8 in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11
R is enlarged and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained,
Interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display area R21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern display area production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
143 to 146, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it is made to vary according to the displayed specific image TG1, all the decorative designs may be varied according to the specific image instead of a part of a set of decorative designs.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom by the specific image TG1 to move. It may be changed as follows. That is, the decorative design may be changed in any manner according to the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the reach state decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21. The displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily hidden and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the specific pattern among the middle decorative patterns 8C is the image of the number "2" which is one before the number "3" which is the winning pattern. may be used as the specific design here. For example, it may be a pattern of another number, or a special pattern other than numbers.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the ready-to-reach decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display region R21 are enlarged and displayed as compared to when they are displayed in the first display region. , The ready-to-win decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a manner different from the manner in which they are displayed in the first display area. For example, they may be displayed in different colors, shapes, different types of patterns, and the like.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns,
a first effect in which the set of decorative symbols variably displayed in the first area of the display means forms a ready-to-win state;
A second variation of at least one decorative pattern among the set of decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach state in the first area of the display means according to a specific image displayed on the display means
It is possible to perform the rendition of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
The set of decorative patterns reaching the second region of the display means when a specific pattern among the at least one decorative pattern in the first area of the display means is changed by the specific image. It is possible to further execute a third effect that displays
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state is shifted from the first area to the second area.
displayed to move to the area of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2 or aspect F1-3,
In the third effect, the set of ready-to-reach decorative symbols displayed in the second area is displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4,
In the third effect, when displaying the set of decorative symbols in the reach state in the second area, the first area is hidden,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5,
In the first effect, when the set of decorative symbols forms a ready-to-win state in the first area, the first area and the set of ready-to-win states displayed in the first area The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6,
The first area of the display means is included in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

147 to 150, the image effects A to D corresponding to suspension will be described below. This suspension corresponding image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the image effect corresponding to the suspension is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the device 7 .

[Holding corresponding image effect A]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining image effect A for suspension.
First, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Also, the pending image 9C changes from white to blue (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is a effect for notifying that the degree of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (indicated by hatching). For example, expectations are higher for blue than for white, and expectations for red are higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect for notifying that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Also displayed are a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9CT. Note that the pending image 9C is hidden when the production design is stopped.

[Holding correspondence image effect B]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining image effect B corresponding to suspension.
First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". Also, the pending image 9C changes from white to blue (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is a effect for notifying that the degree of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (indicated by hatching). For example, expectations are higher for blue than for white, and expectations for red are higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect for notifying that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that the pending image 9C is hidden when the production design is stopped.

[Holding corresponding image effect C]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the image effect C corresponding to suspension.
First, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is a effect for notifying that the degree of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (indicated by hatching). For example, expectations are higher for blue than for white, and expectations for red are higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and only the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect for notifying that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that the reserved image 9
C. The pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C becomes non-display almost simultaneously with the production pattern and the fixed stop.

[Holding corresponding image effect D]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the image effect D corresponding to suspension.
First, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is a effect for notifying that the degree of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is blue (indicated by hatching). The display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is changed based on the degree of expectation for winning. For example, expectations are higher for blue than for white, and expectations for red are higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9C
is hidden, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is a effect for informing that the ally character has been defeated in the battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is displayed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is "8". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden almost simultaneously with the performance symbols and the finalization stop.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the suspension corresponding image effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in association with the reserved images (the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). The display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the degree of expectation for winning (FIG. 147(D),
148(D), 149(D), 150(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in association with the reserved images (the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change based on the degree of expectation for winning in the variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed when the chance-up effect is executed (FIGS. 147(C), 148(C), and 149(C)).
), FIG. 150(C)). According to this configuration, the expectation for the chance-up production increases,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pending image 9A and the pending image 9A
The pedestal image 9AT corresponding to is hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed (Fig. 147(F), Fig. 149(F). The image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT are conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image are hidden, and the pending image 9C is displayed (Fig. 148(F)). According to this configuration, the pending image 9C is conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pending image 9C are hidden, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C is displayed ( FIG. 150(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed in the winning effect or the losing effect. (Fig. 147 (G), Fig. 148 (G), Fig. 149 (G
), FIG. 150(G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be focused on the victory or defeat of the teammate character, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the suspension corresponding image effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, following the chance-up effect, the pedestal change effect in which the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed is executed. On the other hand, the pedestal change effect may be executed with another effect as a trigger. Also, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to other effects.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed as the pedestal change effect.
Instead of or in addition to such a change in display color, the shapes of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT may be changed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a pending image and capable of changing the pending image to another pending image based on the degree of expectation for winning,
Corresponding to the display position of the pending image, it is possible to display a pending corresponding image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image,
Based on the degree of expectation for the hit, it is possible to execute a hold-compatible image change effect that changes the hold-compatible image to another hold-compatible image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The suspension corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed below the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The suspension corresponding image change effect is executed based on the degree of expectation for the hit in the current variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3,
The suspension corresponding image change effect is executed upon execution of a specific effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4,
The pending images include the pending image corresponding to the current variation, and the pending storage image indicating the pending number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-5,
The on-hold corresponding image includes the on-hold corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold image and the on-hold storage corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6,
In a predetermined effect, the reserved memory image and the reserved memory corresponding image are hidden, and a first display effect is executed to display the reserved image and the reserved corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6 or aspect G1-7,
In a predetermined effect, the suspended storage image, the suspended storage corresponding image, and the suspension corresponding image are hidden, and a second display effect is executed to display the suspended image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8,
In a predetermined effect, the reserved memory image, the reserved memory corresponding image, and the reserved image are hidden, and a third display effect is executed to display the reserved corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9,
In a predetermined effect, the reserved memory image, the reserved memory corresponding image, the reserved image,
And, it is possible to execute a fourth display effect that hides the suspension corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending image effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. This pending image effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending image effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed.

[Holding image effect A]
151 is a diagram for explaining the pending image effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-run notification effect is an effect for announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-run. Here, "NEXT" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
A message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R again start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, particularly, the pending image 9A related to the first special figure pending is hidden, and only the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds. Also here, the pending image 9A related to the first special figure pending is hidden, and only the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed. In particular, both the pending image 9A relating to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Again, the first
Both the pending image 9A related to the special figure pending and the pending image 9C are hidden.

[Holding image effect B]
152 is a diagram for explaining the pending image effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-run notification effect is an effect for announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-run. Here, "NEXT" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
A message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R again start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, especially, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds. Here also, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9 corresponding to the reserved image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The reserved image 9A related to special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Holding image effect C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the pending image effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-run notification effect is an effect for announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-run. Here, "NEXT" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
A message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R again start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9C corresponding to the reserved image 9C
T is hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds. Also here, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9A corresponding to the reserved image 9A
T and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The reserved image 9A related to special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Holding image effect D]
154 is a diagram for explaining the pending image effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the pedestal image 9AT that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending, and the pedestal image 9 that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image 9C
CT is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), a pseudo continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-run notification effect is an effect for announcing the occurrence of a pseudo-run. Here, "NEXT" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
A message image MSG is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R again start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(E), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, especially, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), a ring effect is executed. The ring effect is a effect performed during a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other. Specifically, a band-shaped ring image RG is drawn around the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB.
Rotate as indicated by G. In this case, the ring image RG displays the character "rapid heat", and as the ring image RG rotates, the character "rapid heat" also moves. Here in particular:
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. On the other hand, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden behind the ring image RG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Again, the first
The reserved image 9A related to special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first period (FIG. 151 (A) (B) (C) (D)) for displaying the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C in the variable effect of the effect symbol, the pending image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed (FIGS. 151(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image can be made conspicuous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable effect of the effect symbols includes the third period (FIGS. 151(G) and (H)) in which both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player does not pay attention to the pending information during this period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152 and 15).
3, Fig. 154). According to this configuration, recognition of the display positions of the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C is facilitated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed during the first period in which the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed. (Fig. 152 (A) (B) (C) (D), Fig. 153 (A)
(B)(C)(D), FIG. 154(A)(B)(C)(D)). According to this configuration, recognition of the display positions of the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C is facilitated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed during the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed (
Figure 152 (E) (F), Figure 154 (E)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is hidden and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. Display is possible (FIGS. 153(E), (F), and FIG. 154(F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect that displays the ring image RG that is displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. (FIG. 154(F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the pending image effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the order is 1st period→2nd period→3rd period, but each period may appear in any order during the variable effect. Also, it may be included twice or more during the variable performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute the ring effect of displaying the ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. In this ring effect, the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A may be displayed. In this case, it is conceivable to display the ring image on the back side of the reserved image 9A and on the front side of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying, as pending images, the pending image corresponding to the current variation and the pending stored image indicating the number of pending,
It is possible to execute a suspended image change effect including a first period in which both the suspended image and the suspended stored image are displayed and a second period in which only the suspended image is displayed during the variation of the performance symbol. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
The pending image change effect further includes a third period in which both the pending image and the pending stored image are not displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or aspect G2-2,
Corresponding to the display position of the pending image, it is possible to display a pending corresponding image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the pending image,
The on-hold corresponding image includes the on-hold corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold image and the on-hold storage corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
The suspension corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed below the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3 or aspect G2-4,
In the first period, the on-hold corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the on-hold image, and the on-hold memory corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the on-hold memory image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5,
In the second period, the suspension corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6,
In the second period, only the reserved image can be displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7,
A special image display effect for displaying a special image that is displayed on the back side of the reserved image when overlapping with the reserved image, and displayed on the front side of the reserved corresponding image when overlapping with the reserved image. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

155 to 158, the disappearance effect A to D of the pending icon will be described below. 155 to 158, some of the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of clarity, and the front (
The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front) are also omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

This pending icon disappearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, a pre-determination command), and includes an instruction to execute a disappearance effect of the pending icon, , the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command to start a variable effect, a pre-determination command), The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R are changed.

Here, the disappearance effect A of the reserved icon will be described first, the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon, the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon, and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon will be described in order. In addition, in the disappearance effect A of the reserved icon to the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon, since the reserved icon is hidden (disappeared) as described later, the display gives a sense of discomfort to the player. This is an effect that suggests to the player the possibility of a chance with a high degree of expectation for winning.

[Disappearance effect A of the relevant hold icon]
First, the disappearance effect A of the pending icon will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 155
[FIG. 12] is a diagram for explaining disappearance effect A of the pending icon. The disappearance effect of the reserved icon is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

In the pending icon disappearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach are formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the right decorative pattern 8R and the small decorative patterns corresponding thereto) are all kept in a state of being variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all of the same patterns win big, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are won. , the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative patterns are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the suspension icon 9C of the smile sphere (
Blue here) is displayed, white spherical suspension icons are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, respectively, and at the third suspension display position 9Ad and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, Pending icon is not displayed. That is, two pending icons 9
A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is two, the blue number “2” is on the left side, and the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "0" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It is a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 155(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 155(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 155(B),
The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3").
”), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are still displayed in FIG. 155(A), the pending display position 9Ad is also continuously displayed in FIG. 155(A), and the pending display position 9Cd is also displayed in FIG.
) is still hidden. Also, the number H indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 respectively
MG (here, "2 0") is still displayed in FIG. 155(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(C), the first
Numbers HMG (here, "2 0") respectively indicating the special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIGS. and FIG. 155
Two pending icons 9A and the pending icon 9 displayed in (A) and (B)
C and the four reserved display positions 9Ad disappear, and the reserved display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. In other words, regarding suspension, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the suspension display position 9Cd are displayed, corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that are currently changing. The suspension display position 9Cd appears when the suspension icon 9C disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(D), a message MG saying "Your ally character wins big!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
G (here, "2 0") and the holding display position 9Cd are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155(E), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action presentation (battle presentation) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character CRA and enemy character CR
A battle with B unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. At the beginning of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB is dominant, and the allied character CRA is cornered to the right. is continuously displayed in FIG. 155(D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(F), in the mid-term of the action production (battle production), the allied character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. HMG ("2 0" here) and the relevant hold display position 9C
d is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(G), at the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center to indicate "Victory." is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. The display position 9Cd is in a non-display (disappearing) state. At the end of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB
When an effect is performed to inform the victory of the enemy character CRB, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is arranged and displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
C, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed together with the same pattern (here, the number "3"), and a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which the player wins a jackpot and a profit is given to the player. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 155(G),
The holding display position 9Cd disappears (is hidden) from the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the event that an effect for informing the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the number "3" is displayed for the left decorative pattern 8L and the number "2" is displayed for the middle decorative pattern 8C on the display screen 7a. , the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and the same pattern (here, the number "3
”) are not aligned and stop-displayed, the misalignment is definite-displayed. In this case, regarding suspension, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 9 Ad,
Then, the fourth reservation display position 9Ad is displayed, the white spherical reservation icon is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad and the second reservation display position 9Ad, and the third reservation display position 9Ad
and in the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon is not displayed. Further, along with the confirmed display of "missing", the suspension display position 9Cd is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a by the digestion of the suspension icon.

As described above, in the disappearing effect A of the pending icon, the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts to change (FIGS. 155(A) and (B)), but the specific effect is performed (FIGS. 155(C) to (G)), the hold icon 9C
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display/non-display of the reserved icon, which is not conventionally displayed, and to improve interest.

[Disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon]
Next, the disappearance effect B of the pending icon will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 156
[FIG. 12] is a diagram for explaining disappearance effect B of the pending icon. The disappearance effect of the reserved icon is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

In the suspension icon disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L,
Even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8
C, in a state where all the right decorative patterns 8R are stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit with all the same patterns, the small size corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. are the same as those of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the suspension icon 9C of the smile sphere (
Blue here) is displayed, white spherical suspension icons are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, respectively, and at the third suspension display position 9Ad and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, Pending icon is not displayed. That is, two pending icons 9
A and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is two, the blue number “2” is on the left side, and the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "0" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It is a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 156(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 156(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 156(B),
The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3").
”), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach. The pending icon 9A continues to be displayed in FIG. 156(A), the pending display position 9Ad continues to be displayed in FIG. 156(A), and the pending display position 9Cd continues to be hidden in FIG. 156(A). In addition, a number HMG (here, "2 0")
is also displayed in FIG. 156(A). Note that the hold icon 9C is shown in FIG.
(A) is displayed, and light is also emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C.

The suspension icon 9C in FIG. 156(B) may be the same as the suspension icon 9C (blue here) in FIG. to green)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(C), the first
Numbers HMG (here, "2 0") respectively indicating the special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIGS. 156
The two pending icons 9A and the four pending display positions 9Ad that were displayed in (A) and (B) disappear, and the lights emitted in all directions from the periphery of the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9C are also shown. 156(B) continues to be displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the lights in all directions from the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C are displayed.

Note that the suspension icon 9C in FIG. 156(C) may be the same as the suspension icon 9C (blue or green here) in FIG. (For example, it may be changed from blue to green or from green to red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(D), the first
Numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. 156(C). The suspended icon 9C displayed in (C) and the light emitted in all directions from the periphery of the suspended icon 9C are displayed in such a manner that the size increases while moving from the suspended display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a. (Or, it is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the hold display position to the display screen 7a and rotates in the front-rear direction while increasing in size). In addition, in the center of the inner region of the outline of the large-scaled pending icon 9C, the pending icon 9C
In order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the production button 63, a production button image BTN imitating the production button 63 is arranged so as to overlap with the front surface of the button 63. Is displayed. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the effect button image corresponding to the depression operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁In addition, within the inner area of the outline of the large-displayed pending icon 9C and below the effect button image BTN, the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds)
is displayed. In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit (variation production start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7 colors flashing (rainbow Flashing (jackpot rich))
In that order, the expectation of a big hit is set high.

Further, in FIG. 156(D), a state is entered in which the holding display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. 156 (C ), and furthermore, the holding display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. That is, the holding display position 9C
d, and the pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently fluctuating appear.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the left movable accessory 14L and the Each of the right movable accessories 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction toward each other), and moves toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployed position)), the left side decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R.
The left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape 1 One decorative member (unified accessory) is formed.

In addition, in FIG. 156(E), the number HMG (here, "2 0")
Then, the pending display position 9Cd, the large-displayed pending icon 9C, and the light emitted in all directions from the periphery of the pending icon 9C continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(D), The reserved display position 9Cd and the reserved icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently changing appear.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are united to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, as shown in FIG. A region having a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. This circular area 14
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to D, the suspension icon 9C of the smiling face sphere displayed in a large size in FIG. An image expressing the emotion of a smile is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for the circular area 14D of the character (that is, the pending icon 9C becomes an image expressing the emotion of the united character and disappears. ), it is possible to give emotions to the united role. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

In addition, in FIG. 156(F), the number HMG (here, "2 0")
and the pending display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG.
C disappears as an image expressing the emotion of the united character.

In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other).
Then, when the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the combined accessory is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since a part of the reserved display position 9Cd (upper part of the reserved display position 9Cd) is covered, the player cannot visually recognize the reserved display position 9Cd.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the image of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move respectively,
As shown in 56(E) and (F), the holding display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(G), a message MG saying "Your ally character wins big!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ) and the pending display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 156(F).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156(H), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action presentation (battle presentation) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character CRA and enemy character CR
A battle with B unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. At the beginning of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB is dominant, and the friendly character CRA is cornered to the right. is continuously displayed in FIG. 156(G).

Subsequently, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character C
RA gains the upper hand, and an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.
56(H) will continue to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(I), at the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center to indicate "defeat." is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB, and regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position are displayed in the middle of the action production (battle production) not shown. 9Cd is displayed. In addition, when an effect is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect) to notify the victory of the ally character CRA, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message MG saying "Victory" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. placed and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(J), the display screen 7a displays the number "3" on the left decorative pattern 8L.
When the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "4" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same patterns (here, the number "3") are stopped and displayed without being aligned, the misalignment is confirmed and displayed. At this time, with respect to suspension, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are continuously displayed in FIG. 9 Ad,
Then, the fourth reservation display position 9Ad is displayed, the white spherical reservation icon is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad and the second reservation display position 9Ad, and the third reservation display position 9Ad
And in the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, no suspension icon is displayed. Further, along with the confirmed display of "missing", the suspension display position 9Cd is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a by the digestion of the suspension icon.

In addition, when an effect is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern ( Here, the numbers "3") are stop-displayed together, and a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which a jackpot is awarded to the player. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 156(I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears (is hidden) from the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the disappearing effect B of the pending icon, the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts to change ((A) to (E) in FIG. 156), but the specific effect is performed (FIGS. 156(F) to (I)), the suspension icon 9C
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display/non-display of the reserved icon, which is not conventionally displayed, and to improve interest.

[Disappearance effect C of the relevant hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect C of the pending icon will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 157
[FIG. 12] is a diagram for explaining disappearance effect C of the pending icon. The disappearance effect of the reserved icon is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

In the pending icon disappearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L,
Even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8
C, in a state where all the right decorative patterns 8R are stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit with all the same patterns, the small size corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. are the same as those of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the holding display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as the first special figure holding. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the form and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and a white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad. No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. That is, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is two, the blue number “2” is on the left side, and the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a in a state where it is spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 157(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 157(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 157(B),
Light is emitted in all directions from the center of the white spherical hold icon 9C, and light is emitted a predetermined number of times (for example,
3 times), the flash image FH is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).
. At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "2 0"
) continues to be displayed in FIG. 157(A), and two pending icons 9A, four pending display positions 9Ad, and the relevant pending display positions 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is displayed fluctuating and reach is formed. At this time, the first
Numbers HMG (here, "2 0") respectively indicating the special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. The two pending icons 9A and the four pending display positions 9Ad displayed in (B) are newly hidden, and the pending icon 9C is hidden following FIG. 157(B). In other words, regarding suspension, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the suspension display position 9C
d is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(D), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the front (front) central advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). direction) and advance (move) to the front (front) center position (advance position (
In the unfolded position)), the left side decoration part that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The halves of the right ornamental part and the right ornamental part are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) in which the left ornamental part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right ornamental part of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with their eyes wide open is displayed, and then, although not shown, the image is switched to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united role with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united role can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

In addition, in FIG. 157(D), the number HMG (here, "2 0")
is displayed in FIG. 157(C), and when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move to form the combined accessory, it is displayed in FIG. 157(C). The reserved display position 9Cd is newly hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L moves toward the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Forward) It retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R moves on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front surface (forward) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 . At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to release the formed united accessory, the pending display that was hidden in FIG. Position 9
Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157(E), regarding suspension, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 157(D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(F), an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking in white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the effect button image corresponding to the depression operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN has a timer bar TB indicating an effective period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting an operation of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front lower portion thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(E) disappears (disappears) again. In addition, in FIG. 157(F), the number HMG (here, "2 0") is shown in FIG.
(E) continues to be displayed. In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit (variation production start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7 colors flashing (rainbow The expectation that it will be a big hit is set high in the order of flashing (rich jackpot).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Each of the right movable accessories 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction toward each other), and moves toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (extended position (deployed position)), the left ornamental part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right ornamental part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person wearing sunglasses and smiling is displayed. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united character with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united character can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

In addition, in FIG. 157(G), the number HMG (here, "2 0")
continues to be displayed in FIG. 157(F), and the pending display position 9Cd continues to be hidden in FIG. 157(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(H), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L moves toward the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Forward) It retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R moves on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the center of the front (front) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to release the formed united accessory, the pending display that was hidden in FIG. Position 9
Cd will reappear. In addition, in FIG. 157(H), the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 157(G) for the hold.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(I), an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the effect button image corresponding to the depression operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN has a timer bar TB indicating an effective period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting an operation of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front lower portion thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(H) disappears (disappears) again. Also, in FIG. 157(I),
Regarding pending, the number HMG (here "2 0") continues to be displayed in Figure 157(H). It should be noted that the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in 7 (F), or it may change to one with a high degree of expectation for a big win (for example, change from white flashing to blue flashing or gold flashing (yellow flashing). ) may be used.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7 appears as shown in FIG. 157(J).
In a, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3". Then, the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number HMG (here, "2
0") is displayed and again the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed, the first reserved display position 9Ad and the second reserved display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the pending display position 9Cd is displayed. will appear again. The suspension icon 9C is erased and the suspension icon 9C is hidden (disappears) in accordance with the confirmation display of "missing".

In FIG. 157(J), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all together on the display screen 7a (here, the number "3"), and a big win is achieved. , a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player is performed. In this case, regarding the suspension, in FIG.
”) continues to be displayed in FIG. 157(I), and the pending display position 9Cd disappears (disappears) following FIG. 157(I).

As described above, in the disappearance effect C of the pending icon, the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts to change ((A) to (B) in FIG. 157), but the specific effect is performed (FIGS. 157(C) to (I)), the pending icon 9C
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display/non-display of the reserved icon, which is not conventionally displayed, and to improve interest.

[Disappearance effect D of the relevant hold icon]
Next, the disappearance effect D of the pending icon will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 158
[FIG. 12] is a diagram for explaining the disappearance effect D of the pending icon. The disappearance effect of the reserved icon is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

In the pending icon disappearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variation area is provided in which small-sized decorative designs corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L,
Even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, all small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8
C, in a state where all the right decorative patterns 8R are stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit with all the same patterns, the small size corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. are the same as those of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the form and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and a white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad. displayed, a third reserved display position 9Ad and a fourth reserved display position 9
Ad does not display a pending icon. That is, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is two, the blue number “2” is on the left side, and the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "0" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the degree of expectation for winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 158(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 158(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 158(B),
A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the yellow (gold) star-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed, and the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG (here Then "2 0") is shown in Fig. 158 (A)
, and the two pending icons 9A, the four pending display positions 9Ad, and the pending display positions 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is displayed fluctuating and reach is formed. At this time, the first
The numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are continuously displayed in FIG. The pending icon 9A, the four pending display positions 9Ad, and the pending display positions 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(B).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(D), the area of the display screen 7a becomes a pseudo-abnormal display mode. "Pseudo-abnormal display mode" includes, for example, a sandstorm-like display mode, a display mode in which the screen is disturbed by noise, a display mode in which the image is not displayed normally due to a processing delay, and an alternative display mode because the original screen cannot be restored. A display mode in which a message indicating an effect is displayed can be exemplified.

In FIG. 158(D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo abnormal display mode, the first special figure suspension and the second start port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The numbers HMG (here, "2 0") respectively indicating the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (C), and were displayed in FIG. Two pending icons 9A and four pending display positions 9Ad are newly hidden, and further, FIG. 158 (C
) is also hidden at the reserved display position 9Cd. That is, regarding the hold, only the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed. In the pseudo-abnormality display mode, the position where the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed and the area around it may be avoided. By doing this, the visibility of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is ensured. be able to.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). direction) and advances (moves) to the front (front) center position (advance position (
In the unfolded position)), the left side decoration part that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The halves of the right ornamental part and the right ornamental part are combined to form one ornamental member (unified accessory) having an annular shape of the left ornamental part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right ornamental part of the right movable accessory 14R.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with their eyes wide open is displayed, and then, although not shown, the image is switched to an image of a smiling person with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the united character with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the united character can have emotion. As a result, it is possible to realize a production rich in variations based on the emotions of the united character.

In addition, in FIG. 158(E), the number HMG (here, "2 0")
is subsequently displayed in FIG. 158(D).

After that, although not shown, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L moves to an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
, and the right movable accessory 14R moves from the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) to retreat (move). At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start to move in order to release the formed united accessory, the reserved display position 9Cd, which was not shown, is displayed. will appear again. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(F), a message MG saying "Your ally character wins big!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. ) and the pending display position 9Cd are subsequently displayed in FIG. 158(E).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(G), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action presentation (battle presentation) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action production (battle production), the ally character CRA
and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, ally character CRA and enemy character CR
A battle with B unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins over the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Here, the initial stage of action production (battle production) is performed. At the beginning of the action production (battle production), the enemy character CRB is dominant, and the allied character CRA is cornered to the right. is continuously displayed in FIG. 158(F).

Subsequently, although not shown, in the middle of the action production (battle production), the ally character C
RA gains the upper hand, and an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.
56(F) will continue to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(H), at the end of the action production (battle production), a production button image BTN imitating the production button 63 is displayed in order to prompt the player to operate (depress) the production button 63. is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the portion of the effect button image corresponding to the depression operation surface of the effect button 63. - 特許庁This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN has a timer bar TB indicating an effective period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting an operation of the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front lower portion thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158(G) disappears (disappears) again. In addition, in FIG. 158(H), the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 158(G) for the hold. In addition, as the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit (variation effect start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven colors flashing (
The expectation of hitting the jackpot is set high in the order of rainbow flashing (rich jackpot).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A notification effect is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and "
The message MG "Victory" is placed and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA, and regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 158(H),
The pending display position 9Cd is hidden (disappears) following FIG. 158(H). Note that if the effect informing the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and the effect informing the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "defeated" is displayed on the enemy character CRB. is displayed on the left side of the

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8 are displayed on the display screen 7a.
A jackpot game (jackpot presentation) is performed in which the same pattern (here, the number "3") is stop-displayed together with the right decorative pattern 8R, and a jackpot is awarded to the player. Regarding pending, the number HMG (here "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 158(I),
The pending display position 9Cd disappears (becomes hidden) after FIG. 158(I).

In addition, when the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a with the number "3".
When the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same patterns (here, the number "3") are not aligned and displayed stopped, the misalignment is confirmed and displayed. Become. In this case, regarding the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are continuously displayed in FIG. 9Ad and a fourth suspension display position 9Ad are displayed, white spherical suspension icons are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third suspension display position 9Ad and the fourth suspension display are displayed. At the position 9Ad, no pending icon is displayed. Further, along with the confirmation display of "missing", the suspension display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a by digestion of the suspension icon 9C.

As described above, in the disappearing effect D of the pending icon, the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (FIGS. 158(A) and (B)), but the specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158(C) to (I)), the pending icon 9C
It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of display/non-display of the reserved icon, which is not conventionally displayed, and to improve interest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the disappearance effect of the pending icon will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A
) to FIG. 155(H), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a plurality of decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative pattern 8R), the reserved icon 9C is displayed, and then a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R).
When a specific effect in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) is started before the variable display is stopped, a first effect of hiding the pending icon 9C can be executed. According to this configuration, for a while from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (Fig. 155 (A), (B)
), although the pending icon 9C is displayed, FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G
), during the period during which the specific effect is performed, the player can be provided with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon 9C, which is not conventional, in which the pending icon 9C is hidden. can be improved.
156(A) to 156(J), the suspension icon 9C disappears for a while from the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (FIGS. 156(A) to 156(E)). is displayed, but during the period in which the specific effects in FIGS. A novel performance of display can be provided to the player, and interest can be improved.
157(A) to 157(J), the suspension icon 9C disappears for a while from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (FIGS. 157(A) to 157(B)). is displayed, the period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 157(C) to 157(
In I)), it is possible to provide the player with a novel performance of display/hide by the pending icon 9C, which is not conventional, in which the pending icon 9C is hidden, and to improve interest. .
158(A) to 158(J), the suspension icon 9C is displayed, but the period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158(C) to 158(C) to FIG. 15
8(I)) can provide the player with a novel performance of display/hide by the pending icon 9C, which is not conventional, in which the pending icon 9C is hidden, thereby improving interest. can be done.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A
) to a pending display position 9A indicating the display position of the pending icon 9A as shown in FIG.
d can be displayed, and the first effect is a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, right decorative pattern 8R) When the variable display is started, Figure 155 (A) ~ Figure 155 (B)
, the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed, and the reserved display position 9Ad is hidden during the period from the start to the end of a specific effect in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G). According to this configuration, by hiding the reserved display position 9Ad during the period (FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G)) during which the specific effect is performed, the visibility of the specific effect is increased to the reserved display position 9
Since there is no hindrance by Ad, it is possible to suppress the impairing of the powerful feeling of the specific presentation.
FIG. 156(F) to FIG. 156(I) Disappearance effect B of the hold icon, FIG. 157(C) to
The same goes for the disappearance effect C of the suspended icon in FIG. 157(I) and the disappearance effect D of the suspended icon in FIGS. 158(C) to 158(I).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (H
), the first effect is, when the variable display by a plurality of decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) is started and stopped, the winning or losing in a specific lottery is performed. (The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "3") and are stopped and displayed.) When FIG.
After finishing the specific effect in FIG. 155 (G), the holding display position 9Ad is continued to be hidden in FIG. 155 (H), while the specific lottery in FIGS. Notify (the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same pattern (here, the number "3") is not aligned and stops is displayed.) Sometimes, after finishing a specific effect, the pending display position 9Ad is displayed (not shown). According to this configuration, after the specific effect is completed, winning is notified by winning in a specific lottery, and when the winning game (winning effect) is started, the winning game (winning effect) is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad. Since there is no hindrance, it is possible to suppress impairing the powerful feeling of the winning game (performance of winning). In addition, even if the player is discouraged by being notified that he or she has lost the lottery in a specific lottery, the pending display position 9Ad is displayed. In addition, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9A by the aspect of the color and shape of the pending icon 9A, which contributes to increase the player's willingness to play.
The same goes for the disappearance effect B of the on-hold icon in FIG. 156(J), the disappearance effect C of the on-hold icon in FIG. 157(J), and the disappearance effect D of the on-hold icon in FIG. 158(J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (C
)-as shown in FIG. 155(H), the first effect is from the start of variable display by a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) to stop display. During the period during which the pending display position 9Ad is hidden, the pending icon 9A is also hidden. 155(C) to 155(G), the reserved icon 9A is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad. By hiding 9A, the visibility of the specific effect is not hindered by the pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9A, so that the impact of the specific effect is further suppressed. can.
FIG. 156(F) to FIG. 156(I) Disappearance effect B of the hold icon, FIG. 157(C) to
The same goes for the disappearance effect C of the suspended icon in FIG. 157(I) and the disappearance effect D of the suspended icon in FIGS. 158(C) to 158(I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (C
) to FIG. 155(G), it is possible to display the holding display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the holding icon 9C, and the first effect is a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decoration 155(C) to 155(F) during which the pending icon 9C is hidden from the start of the variable display by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R) until the stop display. The reserved display position 9Cd can be displayed. According to this configuration, the pending icon 9C is displayed while the pending icon 9C is hidden even though the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols by the pending icon 9C is started. Since the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed and the display gives a sense of discomfort, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and to suggest to the player the possibility that this is a chance with a high degree of expectation for winning. .
FIG. 156(F) to FIG. 156(I) Disappearance effect B of the hold icon, FIG. 157(C) to
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the suspended icon in FIG. 157(I) and the disappearance effect D of the suspended icon in FIGS. 158(C) to 158(I).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 155 (A
) to FIG. 155(G), the specific effect in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) is based on a plurality of decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R). It can be performed after the reach is formed by initiating the dynamic display. According to this configuration, the player can feel that the first effect is performed by the first effect, in which the suspension icon 9C is hidden, triggered by the formation of the ready-to-win due to the lengthening of the game playing time. Since the player can find out by himself/herself, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a sense of incongruity effect each time a reach occurs, and it is possible to suppress the pain even if the game is played for a long time.
Figure 156 (F) ~ Figure 156 (I) disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon, Figure 157 (C) ~
The same applies to the disappearance effect C of the suspended icon in FIG. 157(I) and the disappearance effect D of the suspended icon in FIGS. 158(C) to 158(I).

[Modification]
A modified example of the disappearance effect of the pending icon will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Loss effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156
157 and D of FIG. 158, the suspended icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device . When the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, a special sound may be played from the speaker 67 to inform the player that the hold icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. . In this way, the player can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking the non-display (disappearance) of the pending icon 9C from the display screen 7a. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the pending icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) and that the display is uncomfortable.

[Modification 2]
Loss effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG.
157 and D of FIG. 158, the suspended icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When it is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, a countdown effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. As the countdown effect, for example, the number "5", the number "4", the number "3", the number "2", the number "1", and the number "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the sound (announcement) of reading out the numbers is played through the speaker 6.
You may make it flow from 7. In this way, the player can grasp the timing when the pending icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and can prevent the player from carelessly overlooking it. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the time when the display becomes uncomfortable depending on the timing when the pending icon 9C is hidden (disappeared).

[Modification 3]
156(D) and disappearance effect D of the reserved icon shown in FIG. A simulated effect button image BTN is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. However, instead of the BTN followed by the effect button, a sword image simulating the sword member 64 is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode in order to prompt the player to operate the sword member 64 (press operation). Alternatively, the effect button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. In this way, variations can be imparted to the effect by varying the type of operation method, so that even if the time for playing the game becomes longer, the desire to operate can be suppressed.

[Modification 4]
Loss effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156, disappearing effect C of the pending icon in FIG.
158, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. However, production button 6
3 may be replaced with an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 . Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
Loss effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect C of the pending icon in FIG.
And in the disappearance effect D of the holding icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C
, When the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed and reach is formed, a reserved display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A, the reserved display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9C, and the relevant In some cases, the pending icon 9C disappeared from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. However, once a reach is formed, then the reserved display position 9C
d may always be displayed on the display screen 7a.
[Modification 6]
Loss effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156
, in the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in FIG. 157 and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in FIG.
In some cases, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. At this time, either one or both of the pending display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the pending icon 9A and the pending display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the pending icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. good.

[Modification 7]
Loss effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156
, disappearance effect C of the pending icon in FIG. 157 and disappearing effect D of the pending icon in FIG.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the variable display with a plurality of decorative symbols based on the suspended icon is started, the said suspended icon is displayed, and after that, when a specific effect is started before the variable display with the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped, the said suspended It is possible to execute a first effect that hides the icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
It is possible to display a pending display position indicating the display position of the pending icon,
The first effect displays the reserved display position when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started, and hides the reserved display position during a period from the start to the end of the specific effect. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2,
In the first effect, when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started and the stop display is performed, the holding display position is continued after the specific effect is finished when the winning in the specific lottery is announced. On the other hand, when notifying that the winning and losing in a specific lottery is lost, the holding display position is displayed after the specific effect is completed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-2 or aspect G3-3,
In the first effect, during the period from when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started to when the display is stopped, the reserved icon is also hidden during the period when the reserved display position is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4,
It is possible to display the pending display position indicating the display position of the pending icon,
In the first effect, the holding display position can be displayed during a period in which the holding icon is hidden during a period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5,
The specific effect can be executed after the reach is formed by starting the variable display with the plurality of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suspension icon image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. This suspended icon image display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon image display effect is included, the ROM 103
corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7 to display the image on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon image display effect A]
159 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect A. FIG. In the pending icon image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative designs are left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8.
It is a set of symbols including an R symbol image, and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent effect may be performed in a state in which the variable display of the L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is not turned off, but is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific effect is performed. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. A specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. note that,
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around the display screen 7a clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the specific image TG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is after being displayed during the suspension icon image display effect, or the display may be turned off at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. and Fig. 159
As shown in (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 159(H), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears from the display screen 7a as if the pending icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159(I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 159(J), the hold icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed at the upper center position of the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining pending icon image display effect B. FIG. In the hold icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative designs are left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8.
It is a set of symbols including an R symbol image, and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop display position. ”) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific effect is performed. Specifically, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area moves to the pending display position and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends, and the next variation is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around the display screen 7a clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the specific image TG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is after being displayed during the suspension icon image display effect, or the display may be turned off at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. and Fig. 160
As shown in (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 160(H), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the pending icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160(I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160(I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a while moving rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 160(J), the hold icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed at the upper center position of the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect C. FIG. In the hold icon image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 161(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative designs are left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8.
It is a set of symbols including an R symbol image, and capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent effect may be performed in a state in which the variable display of the L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is not turned off, but is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific effect is performed. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. A specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. note that,
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161(D) and (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed.
is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to protrude upward from behind (back side) of the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 161(E), the hold icon image HA
G moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around the display screen 7a clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the specific image TG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is after being displayed during the suspension icon image display effect, or the display may be turned off at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. and Fig. 161
As shown in (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 161(I), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the pending icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moving from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, an emblem image EG modeled on a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside while moving rightward.

[Holding icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon image display effect D. FIG. In the pending icon image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative designs are left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8.
It is a set of symbols that includes an R symbol image and can notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped pending icons 9A are displayed in the first pending display area on the left side of the pending display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8
The subsequent effect may be performed in a state in which the variable display of the L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is not turned off, but is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific effect is performed. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.
The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. A specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. note that,
Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162(D) and (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the suspension icon 9A displayed at the second suspension display position from the right in the first suspension display area is simulated. A holding icon image HAG is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is the hold icon 9
Similar to A, it is a diamond-shaped image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162(D), the hold icon image HAG moves diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area. to be displayed. Hold icon image HA
G is displayed so as to protrude diagonally upward to the right from the back (back side) of the hold icon 9A.
Then, as shown in FIG. 162(E), the hold icon image HAG moves to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around the display screen 7a clockwise so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the specific image TG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is after being displayed during the suspension icon image display effect, or the display may be turned off at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. and Fig. 162
As shown in (H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed so as to pop out of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 162(I), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the pending icon image HAG jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moving from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, a crest image EG modeled after a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from the outside while moving rightward.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon image display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, in the display screen 7a, the holding icon 9A (the holding icon 9C) is displayed at the holding display position (the holding display position). After the production and the first production, the display screen 7a displays a second holding icon image HAG imitating the holding icon 9A (the holding icon 9C) displayed at the holding display position (the holding display position). is executable. According to this configuration,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the second effect, the suspended icon image HAG is displayed at the suspended display position (the suspended display position).
It is displayed so as to move from the position of A (the relevant pending icon 9C). According to this configuration,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the second effect,
A third effect in which the pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the third effect,
A fourth effect in which the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from within the display screen 7a to outside the display screen 7a can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the fourth effect,
A fifth effect in which the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the pending display position is the pending display position, and the pending icon is the pending icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the second effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, display of a specific image TG2, start of next variation of decorative symbols, etc.) is performed. is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) is diamond-shaped, but the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) may have various other shapes, patterns, colors, and the like. The same applies to the pending icon image HAG imitating the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C).
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, when a specific effect (for example, display of specific image TG2, start of next variation of decoration pattern, etc.) is performed, a hold icon image HAG is displayed on display screen 7a, but a specific effect is displayed. The production may be various other productions. For example, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R
may form a reach state, when a specific image is displayed, or when a movable member or the like operates.
[Modification 3]
159 to 162, a pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Although one pending icon image HAG modeled on C) is displayed, the number of displayed pending images HAG may be plural. Also, a hold icon image HAG having the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but displayed in a size larger or smaller than that of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). may be
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a moves around the display screen 7a clockwise to draw an ellipse. The mode of movement within the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and may be moved in various modes. For example, the hold icon image HAG may move while rotating.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
a first effect in which the suspension icon is displayed at a predetermined suspension display position in the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which a pending icon image imitating the pending icon displayed at the pending display position is displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-1,
In the second effect, the hold icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the hold icon displayed at the hold display position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-1 or aspect G4-2,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the holding icon image is displayed so as to move within the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-3,
After the third effect, it is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which the holding icon image is displayed as if it were moving from within the display means to outside the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-4,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further execute a fifth effect in which the holding icon image is displayed as if it were moving from the outside of the display means into the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5,
The reserved display position is the reserved display position,
The pending icon is the pending icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6,
The second effect is executed when a specific effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

163 to 166, the operation state suggestion effects A to D will be described below. This operation state suggesting display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation state suggesting effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

[Operation state suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggesting effect A. FIG. Operation part state indication A
First, as shown in FIG. 163(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first reserved display area on the left side of the reserved display position,
Four white spherical pending icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop display position. ”) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 163(F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed in a fluctuating mode moving at high speed from top to bottom, and
2, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, slowly slows down and approaches the stop display position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 163(G), the operation state suggesting image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the stop-display positions in a failed state. That is, the operation state suggestive image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative design 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) in the lost state.

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggesting image SSG is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63 including a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit). Specifically, the operation state suggestive image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 is in a capsule. The operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 is in a capsule, so that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (see the 1 aspect). At this time, even if the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggesting image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed. The operation state suggesting image SSG is an image representing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggesting image SSG changes from a state in which the production button 63 cannot be pressed to a state in which the production button 63 can be pressed because the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is valid from a state in which the operation of the production button 63 is not valid. state is switched to (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative design 8R. The operation state suggesting image SSG is in a state where the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not inside the capsule.
In other words, it suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third mode). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is valid.

In this embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period for receiving an operation of the production button 63 . The timer bar TB is displayed below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggesting image SSG includes the effect button 6 for the player.
An operation prompting image (for example, a character image of "Press!!!") or the like that prompts the operation of 3 may be included.

[Operational State Suggestion Display Effect B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining operation unit state suggesting effect B. FIG. Operation part state indication B
First, as shown in FIG. 164(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first reserved display area on the left side of the reserved display position,
Four white spherical pending icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop display position. ”) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 164(F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving at high speed from top to bottom.
2, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, slowly slows down and approaches the stop display position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 164(G), the operation state suggesting image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the stop-display positions in a failed state. That is, the operation state suggesting image SSG is displayed as at least a part (the right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) in the lost state.

In the present embodiment, the operating state suggesting image SSG is an image that suggests the operating state of the sword member 64 including a sword image KG (operating section image) representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (operating section). The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 . Specifically, the operation state suggestive image SSG shows a state in which the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). The operating state suggestive image SSG is in a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen).
4 indicates that the operation is not valid. At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestive image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed. The operation state suggestive image SSG is an image representing that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 has melted and the sword member 64 is exposed. The operating state suggesting image SSG changes from a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed because the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted to a state in which the sword member 64 can be pushed in, that is, from a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. 64 operation switches to a valid state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative design 8R. The operation state suggestive image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice, so that the sword member 64 can be pushed, that is, that the operation of the sword member 64 is valid (see the 3 aspect). At this time, when the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is valid.

In this embodiment, a sword image KG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggesting image SSG. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period during which the sword member 64 can be operated. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the lower part of the sword image KG. note that,
In addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggesting image SSG may include an operation prompting image (for example, a character image of "Squeeze!!!") for prompting the player to operate the sword member 64. good.

[Operation state suggestion display effect C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the operation section state suggesting effect C. FIG. Operation part state indication C
First, as shown in FIG. 165(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first reserved display area on the left side of the reserved display position,
Four white spherical pending icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop display position. ”) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It moves and is displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. As a result, the variation of the decorative pattern ends,
Next change is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 165(F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving at high speed from top to bottom, as shown in FIG.
2, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, slowly slows down and approaches the stop display position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 165(G), the operation state suggestive image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the stop-display positions in a failed state. That is, the operation state suggestive image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative design 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) in the lost state.

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggesting image SSG is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63 including a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit). Specifically, the operation state suggestive image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 is in a capsule. The operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 is in a capsule, so that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (see the 1 aspect). At this time, even if the performance button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific effect is performed. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face. In addition, the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but abstract things such as characters, figures, and symbols,
It also includes conceptual items whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here is
It includes all aspects in which the number can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(I), after the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggesting image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed. In the operation state suggesting image SSG, the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, and the effect button 63
is an image showing that the is in an exposed state. The operation state suggestive image SSG is produced by the production button 6
Since the capsule covering 3 is broken, the production button 63 can be pushed from a state where it cannot be pushed,
That is, it suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 is switched from the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective to the state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is effective (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative design 8R. The operation state suggesting image SSG is in a state where the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not inside the capsule.
In other words, it suggests that the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is valid.

In this embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period for receiving an operation of the production button 63 . The timer bar TB is displayed below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggestive image SSG includes the effect button 6 for the player.
An operation prompting image (for example, a character image of "press!!!") or the like may be included to prompt the operation of step 3.

[Operation state suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggesting effect D. FIG. Operation part state indication D
First, as shown in FIG. 166(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved. A white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first reserved display area on the left side of the reserved display position,
Four white spherical pending icons 9A are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop display position. ”) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L,
The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating mode in which it moves at high speed from top to bottom, and the number "6" pattern image slows down slowly and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 166(F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R
is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving at high speed from top to bottom, as shown in FIG. 166 (F)
2, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, slowly slows down and approaches the stop display position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 166(G), the operation state suggestive image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stop-displayed at the stop-display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the stop-display positions in a failed state. That is, the operation state suggesting image SSG is displayed as at least a part (the right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) in the lost state.

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggesting image SSG is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63 including a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit). Specifically, the operation state suggestive image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 is in a capsule. The operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 is in a capsule, so that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (see the 1 aspect). At this time, even if the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost pending icon 9A in the first pending display area is moved to the pending display position. It is moved and displayed as the relevant pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted one by one to the right. This ends the variation of the decorative pattern,
Next change is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. On the other hand, in the right decorative pattern 8R,
The operation state suggestive image SSG is displayed following the previous change. Operation state suggestion image SSG
is an image showing that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operating state suggesting image SSG changes from a state in which the production button 63 cannot be pressed to a state in which the production button 63 can be pressed because the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken.
It suggests that the state in which the operation of .

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C are variably displayed, and the operation state indication image S is displayed as the right decorative design 8R.
SG is displayed. The operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 is in a state where the effect button 63 can be pressed because the effect button 63 is not in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is valid (the third aspect). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is valid.

In this embodiment, the button image BG and the timer bar T are used as the operation state suggestion image SSG.
B is displayed. A timer bar TB indicates an effective period for receiving an operation of the production button 63 . The timer bar TB is displayed below the button image BG. In addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, the operation state suggesting image SSG includes the effect button 6 for the player.
An operation prompting image (for example, a character image of "Press!!!") or the like that prompts the operation of 3 may be included.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation state suggestion display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes operation portion images (button image BG, sword image KG) representing operation portions (operation button 63, sword member 64). (operation button 63, sword member 64) are displayed in a first mode, and after the first effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in the first mode; a second effect displayed in a second mode different from the mode of (1), and after the second effect, an operation state suggesting image SSG is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode A third production to be performed,
is executable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image S
The first mode of SG suggests that the operation of the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not valid, and the second mode of the operation state suggestive image SSG indicates that the operation section (operation button 63
, sword member 64) is switched from a state in which the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not effective to a state in which the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is effective.
It suggests that the operation of the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64) is valid. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first effect is the operation state suggesting image SSG as at least part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the failed state. is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are performed from the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Executed across variations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, and the second effect and the third effect are executed. The effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed next time. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164 and 166, the second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation state suggestion display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation portion images are button images BG and sword images KG representing the operation button 63 and the sword member 64, but other operation portions (lever, handle, touch panel, etc.).
may be an image representing
[Modification 2]
163 to 166, the decorative pattern 8L in which the operation state suggestive image SSG is in a failed state;
Although it is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R of 8C and 8R, it may be displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L, or may be displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C.
[Modification 3]
163 to 166, the decorative pattern 8L in which the operation state suggestive image SSG is in a failed state;
It was displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R out of 8C and 8R, but the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R
etc., may be displayed as a plurality of decorative patterns, or may be displayed as all the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the three modes of the operation state suggesting image SSG are the effectiveness of the operation of the operation unit (the operation is not valid, the operation is switched from the invalid state to the valid state, and the operation is valid). However, it may be a mode that suggests, for example, how to operate the operation unit, the direction of operation, or the like.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect H1-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising an operation unit operable by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation state suggesting image that includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit and suggests an operation state of the operation unit;
a first effect in which the operation state suggesting image is displayed in a first mode;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the operating state suggesting image is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the operation state suggesting image is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
the first mode of the operation state suggesting image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is not valid;
the second aspect of the operation state suggesting image suggests switching from a state in which the operation of the operation unit is not valid to a state in which the operation of the operation unit is valid;
the third aspect of the operation state suggesting image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in a valid state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1 or aspect H1-2,
In the first effect, the operation state suggesting image is displayed in the first mode as at least a part of the decorative pattern in the failed state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3,
The first effect, the second effect and the third effect are executed from the variation of the decorative pattern to the next variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-4,
The first effect is executed when the decorative pattern changes,
The second effect and the third effect are executed at the next change of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-5,
The second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative pattern is started,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation image stock effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. FIG. In FIGS. 167 to 170, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing of the drawings, and drawings of decorative designs displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also shown. Some are omitted for simplicity, and the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
Some of the first movable accessories 14 and the second movable accessories 15 arranged around are also omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawing.

This operation image stock effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101 (for example, a command to start a variable effect)
is analyzed, and if an instruction to execute the operation image stock effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.
In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90,
The position and light emission mode of L and the right movable accessory 14R are changed.

Here, the operation image stock effect A will be described first, and the operation image stock effect B, the operation image stock effect C, and the operation image stock effect D will be described in order.

[Operation Image Stock Effect A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect A. FIG. The operation image stock effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the operation image stock effect A, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the
, action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(B), in FIG. 167(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and one of the button images BG is attached with a character image of "long press". Above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), two buttons from the bottom are displayed.
In the state where the button image BG with the character image "long press" is arranged as the second
Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(C), the action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(D), in FIG. 167(C), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). Obtained button image B
G and the sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image of "sword" is attached to the hilt of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the character image "long press" are not attached with the character image "button" at all. Here, the button image B with the character image "Long press" placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, is displayed.
A normal button image BG is arranged as the third from the bottom above G, and a sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG.

In this way, three button images BG (ordinary button images BG
, one button image BG with a character image of "long press"), and one sword image KG. The number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (number of stocks)), the higher the expectations for winning (big wins and small wins). It is designed to be

The button image BG to which the character image “long press” is attached has a higher degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) compared to the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63). set high. Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) than the button image BG with the character image "long press". In other words, the degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further, compared to the normal button image BG It is higher than the button image BG to which the character image of "long press" is set high. Further, three button images BG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a.
(There are two normal button images BG, and one button image BG with a character image of "long press") and one sword image KG are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). . As the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation (variation effect start command) that will be a hit (big hit or small hit), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (
Yellow lighting) → 7 colors lighting (Rainbow lighting (heavy hit)) In addition to setting high expectations for winning (big hits and small wins), white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold Blinking (yellow blinking) → 7-color blinking (rainbow blinking (strong hit)) The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (button image BG, sword image KG,
) are digested in order from the bottom, and first, the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom is displayed on the display screen 7a
When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 167(F). Button image BG with a character image "long press" stocked on the right side of
is digested and the button image BG with the character image "long press" disappears from the display screen 7a.
is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode at the center of the image. This button image B
At the upper left of G, a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves vertically in small steps.
A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "long press" is displayed to prompt a long press operation (continuation of the press operation) of the effect button 63 . 167(F), the large button image BG displayed in the central part of the display screen 7a has a predetermined light emission mode with a character image "long press" when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, or it may change to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to green lighting (
green flashing) or red lighting (change to red flashing)).

The player long-presses the production button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) (
When the pressing operation is continued, a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is continuously played from the speaker 67 as a long pressing operation sound.

The player long-presses the production button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) (
167(G), the normal button stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a continues as shown in FIG. button image BG is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is superimposed on the upper part of the front surface of the button image BG.
The downward arrow image prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves in small increments in the vertical direction, and the effect button 63 has an effective period for accepting operations (for example, 3
seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . note that,
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or it may change to something with a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing)) change) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 167(H). The sword image KG stocked (arranged in the top row) on the right side of the image is digested and disappears from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. This sword image KG has, on its front left,
A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64 (pressing operation) is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small steps. 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, the sword image KG is
"Push!
is displayed. It should be noted that the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or a hit (
Big hits and small hits) change to something with high expectations (for example, from white lighting to white flashing,
It may be changed from white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pressing operation), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is generated accordingly.
A specific sound different from the
As shown in 67(I), an image BKH having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A winning performance will be performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoints on the left side and the midpoints on the right side of the display screen 7a. are displayed side by side along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stopped at the number "7", the middle decorative design is stopped at the number "7", and the right decorative design 8R
is displayed as the number "7", the same pattern is stopped and displayed to become a hit (big hit or small hit), and then a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) production (big hit production or small win production) ) will be started.

Note that when the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64 in FIG. 167(H),
167(I), the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167(I), but the friendly character CRA is displayed. When the large image is not displayed in the central part of the screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pressing operation), the second normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67, as shown in FIG. Following (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R connect the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a (horizontal direction). center line) with the same pattern (here, the number "
7”), the display is stopped without being aligned, and the discrepancy is confirmed and displayed. The second normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound),
A different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound) may be used.

As described above, in the operation image stock effect A, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the character image "long press"). When these are consumed one by one, the player can operate the production button 63 or the player can operate the sword member 64, and a win (big win or small win) is generated. Since the result of whether or not to win (a win confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve interest. can.

[Operation Image Stock Effect B]
Next, operation image stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect B. FIG. The operation image stock effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the operation image stock effect B, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the
, action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(B), in FIG. 168(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG have been obtained.
Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) placed second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(C), the action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(D), in FIG. 168(C), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, two button images BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword member 6
4 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG serve as rewards for action effects (battle effects). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. One button image BG out of the two button images BG obtained is attached with a character image of "continuous hit". A character image of "sword" is attached to the hilt of the acquired sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" are not attached with the character image of "button" at all. Here, above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is arranged as the third from the bottom. Above the image BG, a button image BG with a character image of "Continuous Hit" is arranged, and above this button image BG with a character image of "Continuous Hit", a sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom. be done.

In this way, four button images BG (ordinary button images BG
, one button image BG with a character image "Consecutive hits" attached), and one sword image K
G and are arranged. The number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (number of stocks)), the higher the expectations for winning (big wins and small wins). It is designed to be

The button image BG to which the character image "Consecutive hits" is added is more likely to win (big win or small win) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63).
167(B), which is the same as the expectation for winning (big win or small win) set for the button image BG to which the character image "Continuous hit" is attached as shown in FIG. 167(B). Expectation level or similar level of expectation (expectation level slightly lower or higher than the expectation level for the win (big win or small win) set for the button image BG to which the character image "Consecutive hits" is attached) It has become. In addition, the sword image KG is set with a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) compared to the button image BG with a character image of "Consecutive hits". In other words, the degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and further, compared to the normal button image BG It is higher than the button image BG to which the character image of "continuous hit" is set high. Furthermore, four button images BG (three normal button images BG and one button image BG with a character image of "Continuous Hit") and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. is a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As a "predetermined light emission mode", based on the expectation (variation production start command) that will be a hit (big hit or small hit),
For example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → 7 colors lighting (rainbow lighting (strong hit)), and the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high. In addition, the expectations for winning (big hits and small hits) are set high in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (rich hit)). ing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, various images stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (button image BG, sword image KG,
) are digested in order from the bottom, and first the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom is displayed on the display screen 7a
When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)) It's okay.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Normal button image B stocked on the right (located second from the bottom) in D)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode at the center of . This button image B
G displays a downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 so as to overlap with the upper front portion, and moves vertically in small steps. A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it may change to something with a high degree of expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, white lighting white blinking, and white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Normal button image B stocked on the right side (placed third from the bottom) in D)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode at the center of the image. This button image B
G displays a downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 so as to overlap with the upper front portion, and moves vertically in small steps. A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it may change to something with a high degree of expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, white lighting white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. When the button image BG with the character image of "Continuous Hit" stocked on the right side of the button is digested, and the button image BG with the character image of "Continuous Hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, "Continuous Hit" follows. A button image BG to which a character image is added is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is
A downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the production button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front surface, and the image of the production button 63 is displayed so as to move vertically in small steps. A timer bar TB indicating the effective period of operation acceptance (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG of "successive hits" is displayed for prompting the effect button 63 to be repeatedly hit (continuously pressed down). 168(H), the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a has a predetermined light emission mode in which a character image of "Continuous Hit" is attached when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, or it may change to one with a high degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or changed to green lighting (green flashing)).

When the player repeatedly hits the production button 63 (continuously presses down) during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed) as a repeated hitting operation sound. A first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation), or when the operation reception effective period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. , the sword image KG stocked (arranged at the top) on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested and disappears from the display screen 7a.
A large sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode in the center of the image. This sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves up and down in small steps, and is superimposed on the lower part of the front. , sword member 6
4, a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the effective period of operation acceptance (for example, 3 seconds). again,
The sword image KG is superimposed on the front upper portion thereof with a message MG saying "Push!!" prompting an operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or it may change to something with a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing)) change)
It may be something that was made

When the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64, the second normal operation sound (
A pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 . The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound),
A different sound (sound different from the specific sound announcing the determination of winning) may be used.

When the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as shown in FIG. 168(J).
, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a line (horizontal center line) connecting the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a within their respective variable display areas, and are stopped and displayed. be done. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number "8".
”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number “7”, so that the same pattern (
In this case, the number "7") is not aligned, and the display is stopped, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, when the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64 in FIG. 168(I),
Alternatively, when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, a sound different from the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is used to announce the confirmation of the hit. A sound is played from the speaker 67, an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the teammate character CRA is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A final performance may be performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed. When the rainbow image and the teammate character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, subsequently, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed in their respective variable display areas at the center point of the left side of the display screen 7a. and the middle point of the right side (center line in the left-right direction) with the same pattern (here, the number "7
”) are stopped and displayed together, and the hit (big hit or small hit) is confirmed and displayed, and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started. The Rukoto.

As described above, in the operation image stock effect B, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit"). When these are consumed one by one, the player can operate the performance button 63 or operate the sword member 64, and furthermore, a win (big win or small win) is generated. Since the result of whether or not (a win confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve interest. .

[Operation Image Stock Effect C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect C. FIG. The operation image stock effect C is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the operation image stock effect C, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the
, action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(B), in FIG. 169(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, three button images BG have been obtained.
The normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom, and the normal button image is the third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is the second from the bottom. Three button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(C), action production (battle production) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. Note that an effect may be developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(D), in FIG. 169(C), the ally character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are action effects. It will be a reward for (battle production). Obtained button image B
G and the sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image of "sword" is attached to the hilt of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG has no character image of "button" at all. Here, above the normal button image BG arranged third from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom. A sword image KG is arranged above the image BG as the fifth image from the bottom. Note that FIG. 169(C)
When the button loss effect described later is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 that has already been obtained (acquired) and a sword member are displayed. 64 is lost, and various images (button image BG and sword image KG) piled up and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a are displayed one or more from the bottom to the top. It disappears from the screen 7a.

In this way, four button images BG (ordinary button images BG
, and one sword image KG are arranged. The number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (number of stocks)), the higher the expectations for winning (big wins and small wins). It is designed to be

The sword image KG is set with a higher degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) compared to the normal button image BG. Further, four button images BG (four normal button images BG) and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As a "predetermined light emission mode", hit (big hit or small hit)
Based on the degree of expectation (variable production start command), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit))
In addition to the high expectations of winning (jackpots and small hits) in that order,
Blinking white → Blinking blue → Blinking green → Blinking red → Blinking gold (blinking yellow) → Blinking seven colors (Rainbow flashing (rich hit)) The expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(E), the action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(F), in FIG. 169(E), the button-lost effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB. In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 obtained (acquired) by the button get effect and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost, and the display screen 7 is displayed.
Various images (button image BG and sword image KG) piled up and displayed on the right side of a are forcibly removed from the display screen 7a by one or more from the bottom to the top.
Here, the button image BG arranged at the bottom in FIG.
The second button image BG disappears.

In addition, in FIG. 169(E), there is a case where the action effect (battle effect) is not developed again. In this case, the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the display screen 7
The two button images BG stocked on the right side of a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply simulates the button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message "Press" is displayed to prompt an operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 . The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, even if it is changed to something with a high degree of expectation to be a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing)) good. When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 , a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 accordingly. The player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation)
Then, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) passes,
Again, when the above-described press promotion effect is developed (started) and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Go to (G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(G), action production (battle production) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB. In some cases, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(H), in FIG. 169(G), the button-lost effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB. Here, the button image BG arranged third from the bottom in FIG.
, and the fourth button image BG from the bottom disappears and is forcibly digested. After that, the sword image KG arranged at the top in FIG. 169(D) changes from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven colors lighting or seven colors blinking). In addition, FIG. 169 (G
), when an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, the button get effect is developed (started) accordingly.

In addition, in FIG. 169(H), there are cases where the sword image KG does not change from a predetermined lighting mode to another lighting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the press promotion effect is developed (started). be. In this case, the sword image KG stocked (arranged at the top) on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested and disappears from the display screen 7a. is displayed as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emission mode. This sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves up and down in small steps, and is superimposed on the lower part of the front. , a timer bar indicating the period during which operation acceptance of the sword member 64 is valid (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message "Push!!" to prompt the operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to be superimposed on the front upper portion thereof. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, It may be changed (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking) so that the degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) is high. When the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64, or
When the sword member 64 operation acceptance effective period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the process proceeds to FIG. 169(I).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. A hit confirmation effect that is displayed in a large size is performed. At this time, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67 to announce that the win is confirmed. In this hit confirmed performance,
After that, it is an effect that notifies the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.
The rainbow image BKH is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within their respective variable display regions, the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. are displayed side by side along a line (horizontal center line) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small winning production) by the winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) will be started.

It should be noted that when the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. The sword image KG does not change from a predetermined lighting mode to another lighting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking), and the sword image KG stocked (arranged at the top) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the sword image KG disappears from the screen 7a, the specific sound announcing the confirmation of the hit is not played at all from the speaker 67, and the sword image KG is displayed on the screen 7a.
A large sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode in the center of the image. This sword image KG is displayed on the left side of the front in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation) moves up and down in small steps, and is superimposed on the lower part of the front. , sword member 6
4, a timer bar is displayed indicating the effective period of operation acceptance (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message "Push!!" to prompt the operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to be superimposed on the front upper portion thereof. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, Change to something with a high degree of expectation that will be a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to green lighting (
green flashing) or red lighting (change to red flashing)). If the player is a sword member 6
4 is operated (pressing operation), or the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3
seconds) has passed, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are played. , and right decorative patterns 8R are arranged in their own variable display areas along a line connecting the middle point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a (horizontal center line), and the same pattern (here, the number " 7
”) may be stopped without being aligned, and the misalignment may be confirmed and displayed. Even if the second normal operation sound (push operation sound) is the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) in the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 and the operation image stock effect B of FIG. Alternatively, it may be a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound, of course).

In this way, in the operation image stock effect C, in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, the sword image KG (the lighting mode of the sword image KG changes from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking). ) are stocked, and when these are digested one by one, the player can operate the production button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and furthermore, the win (big win or small win) Since the result of whether or not a win occurs (a win confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, the interest is improved. can be achieved.

In addition, in the operation image stock effect C, various images (button image B
G and sword image KG) can be obtained to increase the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), and button image BG can be obtained by button loss effect or the sword image KG can be lost. That is, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (stock number)) can be increased or decreased. ing. As a result, the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (that is, the total number of stocked images (stock number)) can The degree of expectation can be varied to eliminate monotony.

[Operation Image Stock Effect D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect D. FIG. The operation image stock effect D is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the operation image stock effect D, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the
, action production (battle production) is developed (started). Action production (
In the battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(B), in FIG. 170(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG have been obtained.
Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) placed second from the bottom.

Thus, two button images BG (ordinary button images BG
) are arranged. The stocked two button images BG suggest the degree of expectation for a win (a big win or a small win). In other words, the more the number of stocked button images BG (that is, the total number of stocked button images BG (stock number)), the higher the expectation for winning (big win or small win).

Two button images BG (normal button images BG) arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). For example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)) In addition to setting high expectations for winning (big hits and small hits), white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven colors flashing (rainbow flashing (rich hit)) Expectations are set high for winning in order (jackpot or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the two button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom. button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 170(C)
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Normal button image B stocked on the right side (located second from the bottom) in B)
When G is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode at the center of the image. This button image B
G displays a downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (depress) the production button 63 so as to overlap with the upper part of the front surface and moves vertically in small steps, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface. A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG.
It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of a, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, white lighting white blinking, white lighting to green lighting (green blinking) or red lighting (red blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. , an action effect (battle effect) is developed, and a button-get effect is developed (started) as the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. It will be a reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 170(F). A character image of "sword" is attached to the hilt of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG has no character image of "button" at all. Here, since the two button images BG that have already been stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been digested, the sword image KG is displayed as the second from the bottom above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom. placed.

In addition, in FIG. 170(E), when the player operates (presses down) the production button 63,
Alternatively, when the effect button 63 operation reception effective period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the action effect (battle effect) is not developed, and the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword member 6 are displayed.
A sword image KG imitating 4 is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a.
As shown in F), they may be stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked.

In this manner, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) suggest expectations for winning (big win or small win). In other words, the more stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (number of stocks)), the higher the expectations for winning (big wins and small wins). It is designed to be

The sword image KG is set with a higher degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) compared to the normal button image BG. Further, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG, which are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a, are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", based on the degree of expectation (variation effect start command) that will be a hit (big hit or small hit), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to setting high expectations for winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)), white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing →
Expectations for winning (big hits and small hits) are set high in the order of red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (rich hit)).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(G), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and first, the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the large button image B displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170(G)
The predetermined light-emitting mode of G may be the same as the predetermined light-emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be a win (big win or small win).
(For example, change from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to red lighting (red blinking) or yellow lighting (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (
pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 .

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 170(H). The sword image KG stocked (arranged in the top row) on the right side of the image is digested and disappears from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode. This sword image KG has, on its front left,
A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64 (pressing operation) is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small steps. 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, the sword image KG is
"Push!
is displayed. It should be noted that the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or a hit (
Big hits and small hits) change to something with high expectations (for example, from white lighting to white flashing,
It may be changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing) or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing).

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pressing operation), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is generated accordingly.
A specific sound different from the
As shown in 70 (I), a win confirmation effect is performed. Here, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, as the win confirmation effect.
advances (moves) toward the front (forward) center advanced position of the display screen 7a (in a direction to approach each other), and at the front (front) central position (advanced position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L The left decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R and the right decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined. , the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white light emission mode),
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R become white light emitting mode, and the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively, and the ally character CRA wins. A suggestive performance is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are illuminated in a predetermined light mode (for example, As a result, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit red light, but the letter "V" does not appear. , an effect suggesting victory of the ally character CRA is not performed.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown). When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multicolor light) that are arranged to surround emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate becomes the alphabetic character "
The letter "V" appears as a result of irregular reflection at "V". In other words, the left movable accessory 1
4L and the front side of the right movable accessory 14R are display screens on which the alphabet "V" appears due to the light guide plate. In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single color or multicolor) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the image of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 170(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "7". It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small winning production) by the winning game (big winning game or small hitting game) will be started.

Note that when the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64 in FIG. 170(H),
170(I), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are circular. is not formed and the player character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the player operates the sword member 64 ( 170(H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are played. The same pattern (here, the number "
7”) may not be aligned and stop-displayed, and the discrepancy may be definite-displayed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). .

As described above, in the operation image stock effect D, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 can be operated, the player can operate the sword member 64, and further, the result of whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur (hit confirmed only when a hit occurs) As an effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D formed by combining the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R. displayed.) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, so that it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the operation image stock effect D, even if various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained by the button get effect are consumed by the pressing promotion effect, various images ( Since the number of button images BG and sword images KG) can be increased, the various stocked images give joy to the player and make them expect to win (big win or small win). can contribute to

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. A button image BG (first operation means image) imitating a production button 63 (first operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7. Display screen 7a
and a second effect stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a sword image KG (second operation means image) imitating the sword member 64 (second operation means). The effect and the button image BG (first operation means image) stocked by the first effect are displayed on the effect button 63 .
The third effect executed by the operation of the (first operation means) and the sword image KG (second operation means image) stocked by the second effect are displayed on the sword member 64 (second operation means). An image display device displays a fourth effect executed by an operation, and a winning/losing result (whether or not a win (big win or small win) occurs) in a specific lottery in the middle of the third effect or the fourth effect. A fifth effect that can be displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player operates the effect button 63 or the player presses the sword member 64 when consuming these. In addition, the result of winning or losing in a specific lottery (result of whether or not a win (big win or small win) will occur) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is designed to be like this, it is possible to improve interest.
Operation image stock effect B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), FIGS. 169(A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9(J) and the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(J) of the operation image stock effect A, the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously. .
According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operation means image), the sword image K
Since G (second operation means image) is stocked on the display screen, it is possible to increase the objects that the player can operate (in other words, increase the objects that reflect the player's intention). (because it is possible), it is possible to contribute to the improvement of motivation for operation. Note that the sword image K
The degree of expectation for transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation for winning (big win or small win)) set in G (second operating means image) is determined by the button image BG (first operating means image). preferably higher than that set in the image). According to this configuration, in the state in which the button images BG are stocked, the player is disappointed because he or she cannot expect the transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation for winning (big win or small win)). However, when the sword image KG is stocked, the degree of expectation for transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation for winning (big win or small win)) set in the sword image KG can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the player's desire to play.
Operation image stock effect B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), FIGS. 169(A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9(J) and the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a win confirmation effect that announces a win confirmation, and a rainbow image as a background image. BKH (first hit confirmed image) and rainbow image BK which is a background image
H (first winning confirmation image) and a different teammate character CRA (second winning confirmation image) are displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . According to this configuration, the rainbow image BK
By abruptly switching to a win confirmation effect by H (first win confirmation image) and teammate character CRA (second win confirmation image), it is possible to give impact to the player and announce the win confirmation. As a result, the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) and the teammate character CRA (second winning confirmation image) can impress the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player sees the hit confirmation effect with impact, so the effect button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (second
operating means) will be actively operated. By the hit confirmation effect by the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image),
It is possible to contribute to improving the player's willingness to play.
Operation image stock effect B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), FIGS. 169(A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J), the left movable accessory 14L
The front side of the right movable accessory 14R is the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmed image) appearing from the light guide plate, and the teammate character CRA (second hit confirmed image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By suddenly switching to the win confirmation performance, the player can be given an impact and the win confirmation can be notified. As a result, the front sides of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appear due to the light guide plate, and the letter "V" (first hit confirmed image)
and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) can impress the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player sees the hit confirmation effect with impact, so the effect button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (
second operating means) is positively operated. A game is played by a win confirmation effect by an alphabetic character "V" (first win confirmation image) in which the front sides of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R appear by means of a light guide plate and an ally character CRA (second win confirmation image). It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's desire to play.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image), which is one of the above, is the background image, it is arranged in the rear, and the other ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) is arranged in the front. It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .
According to this configuration, the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character C
By suddenly switching to the winning confirmation performance with RA (second winning confirmation image), the player can be given an impact and the winning confirmation can be announced.
Operation image stock effect B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), FIGS. 169(A) to 16
The same applies to the operation image stock effect C of 9 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J), the left movable accessory 14L
and the right movable accessory 14R appear in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are united. First hit confirmed image) and ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image)
One of them, the teammate character CRA (second hit confirmation image), is arranged behind and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the other is the alphabetic character "V" (first hit confirmation image). ) are placed forward, and the front sides of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are exposed by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14
The front side of R is suddenly switched to the hit confirmation performance by the English letter "V" (first hit confirmation image) appearing on the light guide plate and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmation image), thereby giving an impact to the player and winning. Confirmation can be announced.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS.
3 (first operating means) includes a character image (operation instruction image) of "long press" that instructs a "long press operation (specific operation)". According to this configuration, the effect button 63 (the first
Since it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the operation means), for the player,
By making the operation of the effect button 63 (first operating means) less monotonous, it is possible to contribute to increasing the willingness to operate the effect button 63 (first operating means).
In the operation image stock effect B of FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), the button image BG (first operation means image) includes a "repeated hit operation (specific Some of them include a character image (operation instruction image) of "Continue hitting" that instructs "operation)". According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operating means), so that the player does not feel monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (first operating means). By making it hard to feel, it is possible to contribute to improving the desire to operate the effect button 63 (first operating means).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. When the result (whether or not a small win) occurs is winning (a win (big win or small win)), a specific sound is output to announce the determination of the win. According to this configuration, the speaker 67 emits a specific sound announcing that the win is confirmed, so that the surroundings of the player can also win (win (
Since it is possible to tell the fact that it is a big win or a small win)), the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation image stock effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167(D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168(D)
169(D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. was displayed. However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked, or a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked. may be made. Since the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for winning (big win or small win) compared to the button image BG, the player will feel that the sword image KG alone is displayed on the display screen 7a. Expectation can be expected for transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation for winning (big win or small win)).

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. The confirmation notification sound may continue to flow from the speaker 67 . In this way, the success notification sound continues to flow from the speaker 67, so that the players around the player can also be informed that the success confirmation effect is being performed, so that the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority. can. The win confirmation sound may be the same as the specific sound that announces the win confirmation, or a different sound (of course, the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (push operation sound). different sounds).

[Modification 3]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. It was intended to inform the hit (expectation for the jackpot or small hit). However, for example, when notifying the winning/losing result in the lottery for the number of rounds in the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds, which is the winning/losing result, or the jackpot effect. When notifying the winning/losing result in the transition lottery to the high-probability state after (big win game), it is possible to notify the presence/absence of the transition to the high-probability state, which is the winning/losing result, by incorporating the operation image stock effect.

[Modification 4]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167(D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168(D)
169(D) and operation image stock effect D of FIG. 7 was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, one button image B
A plurality of sword images KG may be displayed together with G (simultaneously with one button image BG) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or together with a plurality of button images BG (a plurality of button images BG
At the same time, one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In this way, a plurality of button images BG and sword images KG are displayed at once on the display screen 7a, and by increasing the number of stocks, the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win) as a result of a specific lottery can be increased. can be raised.

[Modification 5]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167(D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168(D)
169(D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. The button image BG and the sword image KG were digested one by one. However, the display screen 7
The button images BG and sword images KG may be digested one by one from the top to the bottom stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Button images BG and sword images KG arranged at any position up to the lower stage may be digested arbitrarily, or button images BG and sword images KG may be digested by combining them. .

[Modification 6]
167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG.
A button image BG and a sword image KG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked on the upper side, the left side, or the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. good.
In this case, on the upper and lower sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in a band-shaped region extending in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, and the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in a band-shaped area extending in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked in a band-like area extending vertically in the central portion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In this way, the belt-shaped area in which the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For example, each time the operation image stock effect is started, the display position is changed by lottery. By being determined, the player himself/herself discovers ( Since it is possible to contribute to the headline, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the operation image stock effect.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170(B) to 170(G), the normal button image B
A plurality of G are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. However, among a plurality of normal button images BG, one or more button images BG to which a character image of "long press" is added may be acquired and stocked by the button get effect, or one or more "continuous press" may be obtained. You may obtain and stock the button image BG to which the character image is attached.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167(B), two button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get effect, and one of the button images BG is attached with a character image of "long press". rice field. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or a plurality of normal button images BG may be obtained and stocked, or only the button image BG with the character image "long press" attached, One or more may be obtained and stocked. Also, in the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168(B),
In the button get effect, two normal button images BG were obtained and stocked. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or a plurality of button images BG to which a character image of "continuous hit" is attached may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 9]
167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG.
The button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, and the sword image KG is digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the sword member 64, so that the button image BG And the sword image KG disappeared from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one by one. However, the remaining number of stocked button images BG and sword images KG, that is, the message "X remaining (X is the number of stocks)" as the number of stocks is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. You may make it At this time, an announcement “X remaining (X is the number of stock)” may be played from the speaker 67 . In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. In addition, as the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are displayed in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)). , and the expectations for the appearance of the special sound and the special image are set high.

[Modification 10]
Operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167(D), operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168(D)
169(D) and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. However, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 . Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 11]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine comprising first operating means and second operating means that can be operated by a player,
a first effect in which a first operating means image simulating the first operating means is stocked on a display screen;
a second effect in which a second operation means image simulating the second operation means is stocked on the display screen;
a third effect in which the first operation means image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the first operation means;
a fourth effect in which the second operation means image stocked by the second effect is consumed by the operation of the second operation means;
A fifth effect capable of displaying on a display screen a win-loss result in a specific lottery in the middle of the third effect or the fourth effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1,
The first production and the second production can be executed at the same time,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect H2-1 or aspect H2-2,
The fifth effect is a win confirmation effect for notifying win confirmation, and displaying a first win confirmation image and a second win confirmation image different from the first win confirmation image on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3,
One of the first winning confirmation image and the second winning confirmation image is arranged backward and the other is arranged forward and displayed on a display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4,
The first operation means image may include an operation instruction image for instructing a specific operation to the first operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5,
The fifth effect outputs a specific sound when the winning result in the specific lottery is winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

171 to 174, the win/lose notification possible effects A to D will be described below. Figure 17
1 to 174, the various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings, and the drawings with decorative designs displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also easy to see. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing. there is something

This win-lose notification possible effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 10
1 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if the command includes an instruction to execute a winning/losing notification possible effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. For example, the position of 14R and the emission mode are changed.

Here, the win-lose notification possible effect A will be explained first, and the win-lose notifying possible effect B, the win-loss notifying possible effect C, and the win-loss notifying possible effect D will be explained in order.

[Result A that can be announced]
First, the winning/losing notification possible effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible effect A. FIG. Win-lose notification possible performance A is carried out during the variable performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the winning/losing notification possible effect A, after the variable display of decorative symbols is started, an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 171(A). In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(B), in FIG. 171(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, four button images BG have been obtained.
The normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged as the second from the bottom, and the normal button image is the third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is the second from the bottom. BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63) is arranged, and above the third normal button image BG from the bottom, the fourth from the bottom is a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63). Four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the button images BG) are arranged.

In this way, four button images BG (ordinary button images BG
) is placed. The stock button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (a big win or a small win).

Note that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting →
Green lights → red lights → gold lights (yellow lights) → 7 colors lights (rainbow lights (rich hits)) In addition to the high expectations of winning (big wins and small wins), white flashing → blue Blinking → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (strong hit)) is set with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the press-promoting effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom. button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 171(C)
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in
It may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for announcing the determination of winning is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171(D), the background image has seven colors. An image BKH (a so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a hit confirmation effect is performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 171(D), the stock on the right side of FIG. 171(B) (arranged second from the bottom)
When the displayed normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed in the luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. like,
A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and notifying the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171(E),
Subsequently, a premium image PMG1 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premium image PMG1 is a special image, which can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a. )one of. Here, as the background image of the premium image PMG1, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the teammate character CRA is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premium image PMG1. It is
Note that the teammate character CRA displayed in a large size in the center of the rectangular premium image PMG1 may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the premium image PMG1 to appear, the first condition is that the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. ) is established, and then the second condition is shown in FIG. 171(D)
is displayed on the display screen 7a, the condition must be established that the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63.

After that, the premium image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(F), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminescence mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. Like, production button 6
3, a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the effective period of operation reception of No. 3 (for example, 3 seconds). again,
Above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to red lighting (red flashing) or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) ) may be changed).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and notifying the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171(G),
Subsequently, a premium image PMG2 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premium image PMG2 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a. )one of. Here, as the background image of the premium image PMG2, the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a and the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the premium image PMG1 in FIG. An image is displayed, and character images of "Victory" are displayed one after another from the right side to the left side of the premium image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The character image "Victory" is displayed in a plurality of stages (here, two stages each) on the upper side and the lower side of the premium image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. It should be noted that the outline size of the premium image PMG2 having a rectangular shape is the same as the outline of the premium image PMG1 in FIG. 171(E).

As a condition for the premium image PMG2 to appear, the first condition is that the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. ) is established, and then the second condition is shown in FIG. 171(D)
The condition that the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. As a condition, the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
, the player again presses the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63.
is operated (pressing operation).

Note that the premium image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171(E) and the premium image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171(G) may be interchanged. In this case, the conditions for the appearance of the premium image PMG2 in FIG. 171 (D
) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the condition that the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 must be satisfied. 171(G), the condition for the appearance of the premium image PMG1 is that, as the first condition, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG. 171(D) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
, the player again presses the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63.
171(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the third condition, and the player again presses the effect button 6
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (depressed operation) within the operation reception valid period of 3.

After that, the premium image PMG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(H), it is stocked on the right side of FIG. When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emission. displayed in the form. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB indicating the effective period of operation reception of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds)
is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to a win (big hit or small hit) with a high degree of expectation (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing), or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67,
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(I), the rainbow image BKH disappears from the display screen 7a, but the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a hit confirmation effect. The left movable accessory 14L advances (moves) toward the advanced position in the center of the front surface (forward) (in a direction to approach each other), and at the central position of the front surface (forward) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)). The left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side and the right decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined, Left decorative part of left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R
One decorative member (combined accessory) having a ring shape with the right decorative portion of is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white light emission mode),
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode, and the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown). When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multicolor light) that are arranged to surround emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate becomes the alphabetic character "
The letter "V" appears as a result of irregular reflection at "V". In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a plurality of second decoration LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single color or multicolor) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the left movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the front (front) central advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 171(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small winning production) by the winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) will be started.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. ), when the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so that there is something profitable for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that may be further notified, and to improve interest.

In addition, in the win/lose notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. operation), the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, can appear. be able to.

Furthermore, in the win/lose notification possible effect A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. operation), along with this, premium images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without duplication. ing. For this reason, conventionally, in a state in which it is determined that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the player presses the production button 63
There was no need to operate (pressing operation) to simply see the progress of the production, but in the winning/losing notification possible production A, when the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation), premium images are displayed one after another. and are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that it is difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the variation in the state where the occurrence of a win (big win or small win) is confirmed. can be done.

[Production that can be notified of winning B]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification possible effect B. FIG. Win-lose notification possible performance B is carried out during the variable performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the winning/losing notification possible effect B, after the variable display of decorative symbols is started, an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 172(A). In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(B), in FIG. 172(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG have been obtained.
Four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) placed second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(C), action production (battle production) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(D), in FIG. 172(C), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two more button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom. button image BG is arranged, and this normal button image B
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, four button images BG (ordinary button images BG
) is placed. The stock button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (a big win or a small win).

Note that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting →
Green lights → red lights → gold lights (yellow lights) → 7 colors lights (rainbow lights (rich hits)) In addition to the high expectations of winning (big wins and small wins), white flashing → blue Blinking → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (strong hit)) is set with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the press-promoting effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom. button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 172(E)
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking).

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, a specific sound for announcing the determination of winning is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 172(F), the background image has seven colors. An image BKH (a so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a hit confirmation effect is performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for announcing that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 172(F), the stock on the right side of FIG. 172(D) (arranged second from the bottom)
When the displayed normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed in the luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. like,
A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing) ) may be changed).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound and notifying the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 172(G),
Subsequently, a premium image PMG having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premium image PMG is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a. )one of.
Here, as the background image of the premium image PMG, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed.
A is displayed large in the central portion of the premium image PMG having a rectangular shape. Note that the teammate character CRA, which is displayed in a large size in the center of the rectangular premium image PMG,
It may be a still image or a moving image.

As a condition for the appearance of the premium image PMG, as the first condition, the pressing promotion effect shown in FIG.
172(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition, the player operates the effect button 63 again. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the production button 63 is operated (depressed) within the acceptance valid period.

After that, the premium image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side of FIG. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , the production button 63
A timer bar TB indicating the effective period of operation acceptance (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to red lighting (red flashing) or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) ) may be changed).

In FIG. 172(H), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(I). As shown in FIG. 172(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fourth from the bottom, i.e., placed at the top) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. As shown in the above, the operation acceptance valid period of the production button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to a win (big hit or small hit) with a high degree of expectation (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing), or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing) ) may be changed).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172(H), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, appears on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in Here, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed in FIG. 172(G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172(I) described above.

In FIG. 172(I), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(J). , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively within their own variable display areas, the line connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a (the center line in the horizontal direction) ) are lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 in FIG. 172(I), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare production) with an extremely low appearance rate, is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in Here, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed in FIG. 172(G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 172(J) described above.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. ), when the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so that there is something profitable for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that may be further notified, and to improve interest.

In addition, in the win/lose notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG.
In (I), the player operates the production button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (
172(G), no premium images other than the premium image PMG appearing in FIG. 172(G) appear at all. In other words, in the win-lose notification possible effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. image)
Since the opportunity for the premium image to appear can be given by the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, it is possible to contribute to improving the desire to operate the effect button 63. .

In addition, in FIG. 172(F), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the win confirmation effect is performed, the winning/losing notification possible effect B is performed.
In (I), if the player presses the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63
171 (G), the premium image PMG2 in the winning/losing notification possible effect A shown in FIG.
172(G), which is different from the premium image PMG2 in the winning/losing notification possible effect A and the premium image in the winning/losing notifying possible effect B of FIG. to be displayed.

In this way, in the win-lose notification possible effect B, the rainbow image BKH is displayed in FIG. 172(F).
is displayed on the display screen 7a and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. When an operation (pressing operation) is performed, premium images, which are rare images (images appearing in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, are successively displayed on the image display device 7 without duplication.
is displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, conventionally, in a state in which it is confirmed that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the player does not need to operate (depress) the performance button 63 at all, and simply observes the progress of the performance. However, in the win/lose notification effect B, when the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the variation in the state where it is confirmed that a (big win or small win) will occur.

[Production that can be notified of success C]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible effect C. FIG. Win-lose notification possible performance C is carried out during the variable performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the winning/losing notification possible effect C, after the variable display of decorative symbols is started, an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 173(A). In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(B), in FIG. 173(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG have been obtained.
Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) placed second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(C), the action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(D), in FIG. 173(C), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, three more button images BG have been obtained, and above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, is displayed as the third normal button image from the bottom. button image BG is arranged, and this normal button image B
A normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above G, and a normal button image BG is arranged as the fifth from the bottom above this normal button image BG.

In this way, five button images BG (ordinary button images BG
) is placed. The stock button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (a big win or a small win).

The five button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting →
Green lights → red lights → gold lights (yellow lights) → 7 colors lights (rainbow lights (heavy hits)) In addition to the high expectations of winning (big wins and small wins), white flashing → blue Blinking → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (strong hit)) is set with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the five button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom. button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 173(E)
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in
It may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, It may be changed from white lighting to white blinking, and from white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a specific sound notifying that the win is confirmed is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 173(F), the background image has seven colors. An image BKH (a so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a hit confirmation effect is performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for announcing that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 173(F), stock on the right side of FIG. 173(D) (arranged second from the bottom)
When the displayed normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed in the luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. like,
A timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . It should be noted that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to green lighting).

In FIG. 173(F), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(G). As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (located third from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed.
is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 173 (
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in G) is the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to red lighting (red blinking)).

Note that when the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in FIG. 173(F), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare production) with an extremely low appearance rate, appears on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173(G) described above.

In FIG. 173(G), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception effective period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(H). As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fourth from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed.
is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 173 (
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in H) is the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, changing from white lighting to white blinking, from white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173(G), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, appears on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in Here, in FIG. 173(F), when the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 and a premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the already displayed premium image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173(H) described above.

In FIG. 173(H), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(I). As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fifth from the bottom, that is, placed on the top row) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. As shown in the above, the operation acceptance valid period of the production button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it is changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, from white lighting to rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing)). It's okay.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173(H), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, appears on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in Here, FIG. 173(F) and FIG. 173(
In G), the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, and the premium image is displayed on the display screen 7.
If it has been displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the already displayed premium image will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 173(I) described above.

In FIG. 173(I), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(J). , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively within their own variable display areas, the line connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a (horizontal center line ) are lined up and stopped. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7", thereby forming the same pattern. , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

When the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 in FIG. 173(I), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare production) having an extremely low appearance rate, appears on the display screen 7a. will be displayed in Here, FIG. 173(F) and FIG. 173(
In G) and FIG. 173(H), when the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63 and a premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the already displayed premium image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. After that, FIG. 173(J) described above
will proceed to

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. ), when the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so that there is something profitable for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that may be notified further, and to improve interest.

173(F) to 173 after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG.
In (I), the player operates the production button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (
Pressing operation), the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, does not appear at all. In other words, in the win-lose notification possible effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. image), the player operates the production button 63 (
Since it can be given by pressing down the effect button 63, it is possible to contribute to improving the motivation to operate the effect button 63. FIG.

173(G) to 172 after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG.
In (I), if the player presses the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63
171 (E), (
G), the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the winning/losing notification possible effect A shown in FIG.
, a premium image different from PMG2) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one after another.

In this way, in the win/lose notification possible effect C, the rainbow image BKH is displayed in FIG. 173(F).
is displayed on the display screen 7a and the hit confirmation effect is performed, in FIGS. When an operation (pressing operation) is performed, premium images, which are rare images (images appearing in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, are successively displayed on the image display device 7 without duplication.
is displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, conventionally, in a state in which it is confirmed that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the player does not need to operate (depress) the performance button 63 at all, and simply observes the progress of the performance. However, in the win/lose notification possible effect C, when the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the variation in the state where it is confirmed that a (big win or small win) will occur.

[Result D that can be announced]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible effect D. FIG. The win-lose notification possible performance D is performed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In the winning/losing notification possible effect D, after the variable display of decorative symbols is started, an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 174(A). In the action production (battle production), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and when the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (a big win or a small win) is achieved.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(B), in FIG. 174(A), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two button images BG have been obtained.
Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) placed second from the bottom.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(C), the action presentation (battle presentation) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(D), in FIG. 174(C), the teammate character CRA
hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG serves as a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. Here, two more button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom. button image BG is arranged, and this normal button image B
Above G, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, four button images BG (ordinary button images BG
) is placed. The stock button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (a big win or a small win).

It should be noted that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the "predetermined light emission mode", for example, white lighting → blue lighting →
Green lights → red lights → gold lights (yellow lights) → 7 colors lights (rainbow lights (heavy hits)) In addition to the high expectations of winning (big wins and small wins), white flashing → blue Blinking → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → 7-color flashing (rainbow flashing (strong hit)) is set with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the press-promoting effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom. button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . In addition, FIG. 174 (E)
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in
It is the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (here, white lighting).

In FIG. 174(E), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(F). As shown in FIG. 174(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed.
is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 174 (
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in F) changes from the predetermined light emission mode (white lighting) of the button image BG to blue lighting in FIG. This suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation for a big win or a small win.

As for the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG changes from white lighting to blue lighting, the player does not operate (depress) the production button 63 in FIG. 174(E).
An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform the hit confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 174(F), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(G). 174(D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (located third from the bottom) is digested, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a,
Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed.
is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined luminescence mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress operation) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps the lower front portion of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB is displayed to indicate the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds). Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that FIG. 174 (
The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in G) changes from blue lighting, which is the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, to green lighting in FIG. This suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation for a big win or a small win.

As for the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG changes from blue lighting to green lighting, the player does not operate (depress) the production button 63 in FIG. 174(F).
An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform the hit confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 174(G), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(H). As shown in FIG. 174(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fourth from the bottom, i.e., placed at the top) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63 moves vertically in small steps so as to overlap with the upper front portion of the button image BG, and overlaps with the lower front portion of the button image BG. As shown in the above, the operation acceptance valid period of the production button 63 (
For example, a timer bar TB indicating 3 seconds) is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (depress) the effect button 63 . Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a in FIG. This suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the game will change to a win (a big win or a small win).

As for the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG changes from green lighting to red lighting, the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174(G).
An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image when the effective period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because it was not possible to perform the hit confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies that the win is confirmed.

In FIG. 174(H), when the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 63 and the effect button 63 operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(I). , the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) toward the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other), At the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory. The right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of 14R, is united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. One decorative member (unified accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( the following,
It is called a "circular area". ) 14D. A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white light emission mode),
The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a white light emitting mode, and the letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown). When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multicolor light) that are arranged to surround emit light (for example, white), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate becomes the alphabetic character "
The letter "V" appears as a result of irregular reflection at "V". In addition, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are provided with a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single color or multicolor) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move away from each other, and the image of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. While retreating (moving) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 174(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". It becomes a big hit or a small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small winning production) by the winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) will be started.

As described above, in the win-lose notification possible effect D, when the player does not operate (pressing) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing, the center of the display screen 7a is displayed in FIGS. Hit (
By suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win or small win is high and prompting the player to operate (pressing operation) the performance button 63, a rainbow image, which is a background image for confirming a win (big win or small win), is displayed. The player can get the opportunity to make it appear, and the interest can be improved.

In FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H), if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing that the win is confirmed is played from the speaker 67, and the background image is displayed. An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a
A hit confirmation effect displayed on is performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is
It is a specific image, and is a background image for announcing the determination of winning. Also, for example, FIG.
If the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing the confirmation of winning is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to confirm the winning. 174(F), if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and announces the display of the premium image is produced. A premium image having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is played from the speaker 67 and is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap the front surface of the rainbow image, thereby performing a rainbow effect with the premium image. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the hit confirmation effect is performed. This premium image is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a. is one. Here, as the background image of the premium image, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the friendly character is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premium image. there is It should be noted that the teammate character displayed large in the central portion of the rectangular premium image may be a still image or a moving image. Also, after the hit confirmation effect is performed, if
When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a rare image ( In addition to the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 that are images that appear in the rare production), other premium images (other premium images that are different from the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the win/lose notification possible production A in FIGS. 171 (E) and (G) ) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one after another.

Thus, in FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H), if the player presses the effect button 6
3 is operated (depressed), the speaker 67 emits a specific sound notifying that the win is confirmed.
, and an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image.
By operating (pressing) 3 at a predetermined timing, a premium image, which is a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect), can appear. It can contribute to the improvement of motivation.

In addition, in the win/lose notification possible effect D, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIGS. Suppose that the player pushes the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing after the win confirmation effect is performed in which an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a. , the premium images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without duplication. It has become so. Therefore, conventionally, in a state in which it is confirmed that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the player does not need to operate (depress) the performance button 63 at all, and simply observes the progress of the performance. However, in the win/lose notification possible effect D, when the effect button 63 is operated (depressed), the premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the variation in the state where it is confirmed that a (big win or small win) will occur.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image blur effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the winning/losing notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 171(A) to FIG.
As shown in 1(J), a production button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the winning result (win (big win or small win)) of a specific lottery is determined by operating the production button 63 (operation means). In the hit confirmation effect notified by, the effect button 63 in 171 (C) (
Fig. 171 for notifying the winning result (win (big win or small win)) by operating the operating means)
A first effect of displaying the rainbow image BKH (specific image) of (D) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and following the first effect, the number of operations of the effect button 63 (operation means) is the upper limit number of operations. 171(D) and 171(F), a second effect prompting the user to operate the effect button 63 (operating means) can be executed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to inform the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the effect button 63 (operation means) does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the performance button 63 (operation means), so that something beneficial to the player is further notified. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that it may be played, and to improve the interest.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notifying possible effect D of FIG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 171(A) to FIG.
As shown in 1(J), before the first effect is executed, a button image BG (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) in FIG. A third effect of stocking the display screen 7a is executed, and as shown in FIG. The upper limit number of operations is 4, which is the stock number of the button images BG (operation means images).
Since it is the number of times that (operation means) can be operated, the winning result (winning (
A rainbow image BKH (specific image) for notifying a big win or a small win) is displayed on the image display device 7.
can be suggested to the player that there is a possibility that it will be displayed on the display screen 7a.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notifying possible effect D of FIG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 171 (D) to FIG.
As shown in 1 (G), when the second effect is being executed, the effect button 63 (operating means)
is operated, the premium image PMG1 (special image) in FIG. 171(E) or the
A fourth effect of displaying the premium image PMG2 (special image) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to inform the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the effect button is pressed. When the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated when the number of operations of 63 (operation means) has not reached the upper limit number of operations and remains, the premium image PMG1 (special image) or the premium image PMG2 (special image) is displayed. is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. As a result, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (operation means) upon seeing the special images such as the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In other words, conventionally, in a state in which it is confirmed that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, the player does not need to operate the performance button 63 (operating means) at all, and simply observes the progress of the performance. However, the win/lose notification possible performance A incorporates a performance that makes the player want to further operate the performance button 63 (operating means) even in a state where the occurrence of a win (big win or small win) is confirmed.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notifying possible effect D of FIG.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 171(A) to FIG.
As shown in 1(J), the special images are the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 are one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, and the player can actively press the effect button when seeing the premium image. 63 (operation means) is to be operated, it is possible to contribute to increasing the willingness of the player to operate the effect button 63 (operation means).
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notifying possible effect D of FIG.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. A special sound for announcing the display of the premium image corresponding to the special images such as the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2, which are one of the images that appear), is output. When the special sound is not played, even if the special images such as the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 are suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player can automatically (in sequence) simply follow the progress of the effect. ) Although there is a risk that it may be recognized as a normal image that is just displayed, a special sound will play to turn the special image into a rare image (an image that appears in a rare production)
By recognizing it as being, it is possible to suppress inadvertently overlooking it without noticing it.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C shown in FIG. 173, and the win/loss notifying possible effect D shown in FIG.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171(D) of the winning/losing notification possible effect A, the first effect is a specific sound for announcing the determination of a win, corresponding to a specific image called a rainbow image BKH. to output When the specific sound does not play, the player can play the rainbow image BKH
Even if such a specific image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be recognized as an image that normally appears and is merely automatically (sequentially) displayed as the production progresses. By playing the specific sound, it is possible to recognize the specific image as an image for announcing the determination of winning, and to prevent the player from unknowingly overlooking the specific image.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notifying possible effect C shown in FIG. 173, and the win/loss notifying possible effect D shown in FIG.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the winning/losing notification possible effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
171, the win-lose notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the win-lose notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the win-lose notification possible effect D of FIG. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing the determination of winning is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 7 as a specific image. or a special sound for announcing the display of the premium image as the specific image is played from the speaker 67 and the premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the special image. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be used as appropriate. In this case, the degree of expectation for a winning result by a specific lottery set in the sword image (that is, the degree of expectation for the win (big win or small win) set in the sword image) is set in the button image BG. Higher than what you have is preferred. Since the button image BG is set to have a low degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win), the player can expect a win (big win or small win) by displaying the button image BG on the display screen 7a. Even if they are disappointed, the sword image is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) than the button image BG. You can expect a hit (jackpot or small hit).

[Modification 2]
171, the win-lose notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the win-lose notification possible effect C of FIG. is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing the confirmation of winning is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image notifying the confirmation of the winning. It was displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . However, a specific sound for announcing the determination of winning by lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is played from the speaker 67,
A rainbow image may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the specific image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 .

[Modification 3]
171, the win-lose notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the win-lose notification possible effect C of FIG. is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (depresses) the production button 63, a special sound announcing the display of the premium image as the special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premium image is displayed as the special image. It was displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . However, the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) draws a special sound for notifying the display of the premium image as the special image through the speaker 67, and the premium image is displayed on the image display device 7 as the special image. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 .

[Modification 4]
A premium image PMG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the winning/losing notification possible effect A of FIG. It was displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In other words, a different premium image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 each time. However, the same premium image may be displayed in the winning/losing notification effect A to the winning/losing notification possible effect D. For example, premium image PMG1 or premium image P
Any one of the MG2 premium images may be displayed on the display screen 7a as the common premium image. This can contribute to reducing the amount of images (image data) to be stored in the ROM 103. By reducing the capacity of the ROM 103,
can also contribute to cost reduction.

[Modification 5]
171, the win-lose notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the win-lose notification possible effect C of FIG. The button images BG are erased by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, so that the button images BG disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 one by one.
However, the remaining number of stocked button images BG, that is, the number of stocks is "remaining X pieces (X
is the stock number)” may be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. At this time, an announcement “X remaining (X is the number of stock)” may be played from the speaker 67 . In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. In addition, as the "predetermined display mode", for example, a specific sound and a specific image are displayed in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (rich hit)). , and the expectations for the appearance of the special sound and the special image are set high.

[Modification 6]
171, the win-lose notification possible effect B of FIG. 172, the win-lose notification possible effect C of FIG. 173, and the win-lose notification possible effect D of FIG. 7 was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 . Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
Win-lose notification possible effect A in FIG. 171, win-loss notifying possible effect B in FIG. 172, win-lose notifying possible effect C in FIG. 173, and win-lose notifying possible effect D in FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine comprising operation means that can be operated by a player,
In the effect of notifying the winning result of a specific lottery by operating the operation means,
a first effect of displaying on a display screen a specific image notifying the winning result;
Subsequent to the first effect, when the number of operations of the operation means has not reached the upper limit number of operations and remains, a second effect prompting the operation of the operation means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1,
executing a third effect of stocking an operation means image simulating the operation means on a display screen before the first effect is executed;
The upper limit number of operations is the stock number of the operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1 or aspect H3-2,
When the operation means is operated while the second effect is being executed, a fourth effect of displaying a special image on the display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3,
The special image is a premium image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3 or aspect H3-4,
The third effect outputs a special sound corresponding to the special image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5,
The first effect outputs a specific sound corresponding to the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific object display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. FIG. This specific target display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the specific target display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG. Also, the lamp control board 10
7 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the second movable accessory 15 or the like when the instruction to execute the variable timing change performance is included.

[Specific target display effect A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect A. FIG. In the specific target display effect A, first, as shown in FIG.
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display portion TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display part TH is "OARO"
is configured to emit light. In this embodiment, "O
ARO" is emitting blue light. The specific target display portion TH may emit light of any color.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning pattern "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. And the second movable accessory 1
5 performs a predetermined effect (action). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display portion image HG is the specific target display portion T
It is a character image imitating the character of "OARO" of H. Although the character image of "OARO" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display section TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG is changed to the second movable accessory 1
5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state is diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15. appears to pop out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(E), while the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move obliquely downward to the left, specifically, toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display section image HG is displayed in the same tilted state as the second movable accessory 15 . The display section image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 . That is, the characters "OARO" of the specific target display portion TH and the character image of "OARO" of the display portion image HG of the second movable accessory 15 are arranged in parallel while being inclined at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(G), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move diagonally upward to the right, specifically toward the position of the second movable accessory 15 in a tilted state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. FIG. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to jump behind (rear side) the tilted second movable accessory 15 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. , the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second
The movable accessory 15 rotates to the left to return to its original position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(J), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the left and returns to the original position, ie, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect B]
176 is a diagram for explaining specific target display effect B. FIG. In the specific target display effect B, first, as shown in FIG.
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display portion TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display part TH is "OARO"
is configured to emit light. In this embodiment, "O
ARO" is emitting blue light. The specific target display portion TH may emit light of any color.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning pattern "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(C), "OA
Of the characters "RO", the last two characters "RO" that have been emitting light disappear, and only the two preceding characters "OA" are in a state of emitting light. Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8
The display of L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (action). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display portion image HG is the specific target display portion T
It is a character image imitating the character "OA" which is a part of H. Although the character image of "OA" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG is changed to the second movable accessory 1
5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state is diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15. appears to pop out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(E), while the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move obliquely downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display section image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display section image HG is displayed in the same tilted state as the second movable accessory 15 . The display section image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 .
That is, the luminous "OA" characters of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "OA" of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel with the same angle of inclination. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "OA" of the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left to return to its original position, and returns to its original position, ie, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(G), "OA
Of the characters "RO", the two preceding characters "OA" which had been illuminated disappear, and the two remaining characters "RO" which had disappeared emit illumination. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (action). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section T
H) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(H), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display portion image HG is the specific target display portion T
It is a character image imitating the character "RO" which is a part of H. Although the character image of "RO" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG is changed to the second movable accessory 1
5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state is diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15. appears to pop out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(I), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move obliquely downward to the left, specifically, toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display section image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display section image HG is displayed in the same inclined state as the second movable accessory 15 . The display section image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 .
That is, the luminous character "RO" of the specific target display portion TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "RO" of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel while being inclined at the same angle. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "RO" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left to return to its original position, and returns to its original position, ie, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to a horizontal state from a state inclined at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect C. FIG. In the specific target display effect C, first, as shown in FIG.
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display portion TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display part TH is "OARO"
is configured to emit light. In this embodiment, "O
ARO" is emitting blue light. The specific target display portion TH may emit light of any color.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning design "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. And second movable accessory 1
5 performs a predetermined effect (action). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle. of the letters
The previous two letters "OA" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display portion image HG modeled after the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image imitating the characters "OA" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. Although the character image of "OA" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG is changed to the second movable accessory 1
5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state is diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15. appears to pop out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(E), while the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move obliquely downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display section image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display section image HG is displayed in the same tilted state as the second movable accessory 15 . The display section image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 .
That is, the luminous "OA" characters of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "OA" of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel with the same angle of inclination. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "OA" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left to return to its original position, and returns to its original position, ie, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(G), the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (action).
Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retracted position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(H), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle. of the letters
The two letters "RO" that were emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display portion image HG modeled after the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed.
The display section image HG is a character image imitating the characters "RO" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. Although the character image of "RO" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG is changed to the second movable accessory 1
5 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time when the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display section image HG from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state is diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15. appears to pop out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(I), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle,
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move obliquely downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display section image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display section image HG is displayed in the same tilted state as the second movable accessory 15 . The display section image HG is displayed in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 .
That is, the luminous character "RO" of the specific target display portion TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image of "RO" of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel while being inclined at the same angle. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "RO" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left to return to its original position, and returns to its original position, ie, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display effect D. FIG. In the specific target display effect D, first, as shown in FIG.
The second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH representing a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display portion TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display part TH is "OARO"
is configured to emit light. In this embodiment, "O
ARO" emits blue light, but each character does not emit light at this stage. The specific target display portion TH may emit light of any color.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and a combination of these stop patterns can notify whether or not a win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, of the characters "OARO" on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the second character "A" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(C), "OA
Among the characters "RO", the emitted light of the character "A" disappears. And the image display device 7
In the display screen 7a, a display portion image H that imitates the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15
A G is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image imitating the letter "A" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. The character image of "A" is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, the display section image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display portion image HG (character image imitating the letter “A”) is displayed behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character “A” on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 . (
It is displayed so as to protrude downward from the back side). The display section image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the letter "A" of the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178D, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display section image HG is displayed in the same size as the character “A” of the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is
The size of the letter “A” of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed slightly larger than that of the letter “A”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, only the third letter "R" from the front of the letters "OARO" on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(G), "OA
Of the characters "RO", the emitted character "R" disappears. And the image display device 7
In the display screen 7a, a display portion image H that imitates the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15
A G is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image imitating the letter "R" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. Although the character image of "R" is blue, it may be of any color. Further, the color may be the same as or different from that of the specific target display section TH that emits light.

In this embodiment, the display section image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display portion image HG (character image imitating the letter “R”) is displayed behind the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the character “R” on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 . (
It is displayed so as to protrude downward from the back side).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display section image HG is displayed in the same size as the character "R" of the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display section image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is
It is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character "R" of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the display section image HG disappears.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific target display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, a first effect in which the specific target display portion TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined effect, and a predetermined effect in the specific target display portion TH and a second effect in which a display portion image HG imitating at least part of the specific target display portion TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the specific target display section TH
, the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) configured to be movable performs a predetermined operation, and the second
, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the predetermined action of the second movable accessory 15.
to be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable role 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first effect, the second movable role 15 In the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed based on the motion of the second movable accessory 15.
is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect,
With the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, a third effect is executed in which the display section image HG is displayed in the same inclined state as the second movable accessory 15.例文帳に追加According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect,
The display unit image HG is displayed as if it moves from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15, and the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. perform the production of According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the first effect, the specific target display portion TH emits light, and in the second effect, based on the light emission of the specific target display portion TH , the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a from the specific target display unit TH based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if moving to . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the specific target display effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
175 to 178, a predetermined effect (
Here, the display unit image H
G is displayed on the display screen 7a, but the predetermined effect of the specific target display portion TH is not limited to motion and light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the specific target display section TH
may be transformed, moved in a predetermined direction, or extinguished.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display section TH is provided on the movable member (second movable accessory 15), but it may be provided on a fixed member, for example, or displayed on the display screen 7a. may have been In other words, any mode may be used as long as it displays a specific target.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 blinks. The display unit image HG may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on. Further, the display section image HG may also be displayed so as to repeat display and non-display so as to blink.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 178, a blue display image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display TH of the second movable accessory 15. For example, the display image displayed on the display screen 7a You may make it suggest the expectation degree of a big hit by the aspect of HG. For example, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the color, size, number of times of display, number of times of blinking, etc. of the display section image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I1-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a specific target display unit representing a specific target,
a first effect in which the specific target display unit performs a predetermined effect;
a second effect in which a display unit image simulating at least part of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
further comprising a movable member including the specific target display unit and configured to be movable;
In the first production, the movable member performs a predetermined action,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined movement of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2,
The movable member is arranged adjacent to the display means,
In the first effect, the movable member tilts at a predetermined angle,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moving from the movable member to the display means based on the movement of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-3,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the movable member is tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image is displayed in the same tilted state as the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-3 or aspect I1-4,
After the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if it were moving from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. A fourth production can be further executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
In the first effect, the specific target display unit emits light,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-6,
In the second effect, the display section image is displayed on the display means as if the display section image moves from the specific target display section to the display section based on light emission of the specific target display section. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:

179 to 182, description will be given of the multi-part combination effects A to D. FIG. This multi-accessory uniting effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a multi-character uniting effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Also, the lamp control board 10
7 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, etc., when the instruction to execute the variable timing change production is included. .

[Multi-role combination production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the multi-accessory combination effect A. FIG. 179(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 179(A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located at the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the game board 2 at the retracted position, making it difficult to see.

In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is positioned at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower part 15
1 (first portion) is visible, and an upper portion 152 (second portion), which will be described later, is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 and is difficult to be seen. That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so that a part thereof can be visually recognized (a part thereof is difficult to be visually recognized) at the retracted position.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning design "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears (is hidden). note that,
The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may not be hidden, but may be displayed in a subsequent effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right portion of the game board 2 (retreat position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 are united. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. again,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.
That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the uniting here includes direct uniting, indirect uniting, arrangement at positions close to each other even though they are not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is opened. , the face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179G, the face image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves rightward from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the rear position (retreat position) on the right side of the game board 2.例文帳に追加Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to their retracted positions. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position, making it difficult to see. In the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower portion 151 is visible, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 and is difficult to be visually recognized.

[Multi-role combination production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a multi-accessory combination effect B. FIG. 180(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 180(A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is located at the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the game board 2 at the retracted position (home position), making it difficult to see.

In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is positioned at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is not hidden in the upper part of the game board 2 at the retracted position (home position), and is arranged so that the entirety thereof can be visually recognized.

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning pattern "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears (is hidden). note that,
The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may not be hidden, but may be displayed in a subsequent effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right portion of the game board 2 (retreat position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 are united. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. again,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the uniting here includes direct uniting, indirect uniting, arrangement at positions close to each other even though they are not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is opened. , the face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes non-display) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves rightward from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the rear position (retreat position) on the right side of the game board 2.例文帳に追加Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to their retracted positions. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position, making it difficult to see. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 is stationary in a state where the whole can be visually recognized without being hidden by the upper part of the game board 2 at the retracted position.

[Multi-role combination production C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining the multi-accessory combining effect C. FIG. 181(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Also, although not shown in FIG. 181(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted. It is located at the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the game board 2 at the retracted position (home position), making it difficult to see.

In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is positioned at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower part 15
1 (first portion) is difficult to see, and an upper portion 152 (second portion), which will be described later, is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so that a part thereof is visible (a part thereof is invisible) at the retracted position (home position).

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning pattern "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears (is hidden). note that,
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent effects may be performed while they are displayed. Then, the left side fixed accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 1
A suggestive image SG is displayed to suggest that an effect in which the 4R and the second movable accessory 15 are united will be performed. Specifically, a suggestive image SG, which is an image like a lightning bolt connecting the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves leftward from the position behind the right side portion of the game board 2 (retracted position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 are united. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. again,
The second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.
That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, the uniting here includes direct uniting, indirect uniting, arrangement at positions close to each other even though they are not in contact with each other, and combining with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is opened. , the face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second
The movable accessory 15 and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(G), the face image 14G disappears (becomes non-display) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14
R moves rightward from the advance position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the rear position (retreat position) on the right side of the game board 2.例文帳に追加Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to their retracted positions. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position, making it difficult to see. In the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower portion 151 is visible, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 and is difficult to be visually recognized.

[Multi-role combination production D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the multi-accessory combining effect D. FIG. 182(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
Of the first movable accessory 14, the left fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Also, although not shown in FIG. 182(A), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted. It is located at the position (home position). The right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the game board 2 at the retracted position (home position), making it difficult to see.

In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is positioned at the retracted position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is the lower part 15
1 (first portion) is difficult to see, and an upper portion 152 (second portion), which will be described later, is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so that a part thereof is visible (a part thereof is invisible) at the retracted position (home position).

Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols are a set of symbols including pattern images of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is possible to notify whether or not a win is achieved by a combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed at the stop display position (the winning design "777"). ) is displayed. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C and right decorative design 8R
are displayed horizontally side by side. Here, "along the horizontal direction" means that
In addition to those lined up strictly horizontally, those lined up roughly horizontally are also included. In other words, all items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappears (is hidden). note that,
The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may not be hidden, but may be displayed in a subsequent effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right portion of the game board 2 (retreat position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(E), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 are united. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R and the left fixed accessory 14L are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween. Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower portion 151 and the upper portion 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, coalescence here means direct coalescence, indirect coalescence,
Including being placed in close proximity but not in contact with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(F), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
A pair of movable members 1 hidden behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L
4LP projects and moves to the right toward the right movable accessory 14R. Here, illustration of the movable member 14LP hidden behind the upper end portion of the left fixed accessory 14L is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(G), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
A pair of movable members 14LP protrude, and an annular decorative member is formed by the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the pair of movable members 14LP. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, the movable member 14LP, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G disappears (is hidden). Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move leftward so as to return to positions behind the upper end and lower end of the left fixed accessory 14L. After that, as shown in FIG. 182(I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to positions behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(J), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7,
The right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward from an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position behind the right side portion of the game board 2 (retracted position). Also, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R and the second
The movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 at the retracted position, making it difficult to see. In the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state in which the lower portion 151 is visible, and the upper portion 152 is hidden behind the upper portion of the game board 2, making it difficult to be visually recognized.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the multi-part combination effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the left side fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) arranged so that the whole can be visually recognized and the second movable It comprises a role object 15 (first movable member) and a right side movable role object 14R (second movable member) arranged so that the whole is difficult to see. Then, the left fixed accessory 14L and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7
The second movable accessory 15 moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of (display means), and the right movable accessory 14R moved to a predetermined position (advance) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. and can be combined to execute a combination effect representing a specific target. According to this configuration,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, the second movable accessory 15 includes a lower portion 151 (first portion) which is arranged to be visible, and a lower portion 151 (first portion) which is arranged to be difficult to see. and an upper portion 152 (second portion). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, in the combination effect, the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable accessory 15 are arranged so as to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, it is suggested that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined before the combination effect is performed. It is possible to further execute a combination suggestion effect (in this embodiment, a effect in which a suggestion SG is displayed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, the movable member 14LP (third movable member) is arranged so as to be difficult to see by the left fixed accessory 14L.
Movable member 14L moved to a visible position in front of display screen 7a of image display device 7
P combines with the left fixed role 14L, the second movable role 15 and the right side movable role 14R to represent a part of the specific target. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, in the combination effect, a face image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to the configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the multi-accessory uniting effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to represent a human face as a specific target. It is not limited to living things and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, symbols, etc., and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.
[Modification 2]
179 to 182, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are united with the left fixed accessory 14L at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. You may make it unite in positions other than an advancing position.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 181, the suggestion image SG is displayed as a combination suggestive effect suggesting that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined. may be other than the display of images.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I2-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a fixing member arranged so that the whole can be visually recognized;
a first movable member, at least a portion of which is arranged to be visible;
A gaming machine comprising a second movable member that is arranged so as to be difficult to see as a whole,
At least the fixed member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are united. , capable of executing a combined effect representing a specific target,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1,
The first movable member includes a first portion that is arranged to be visible and a second portion that is arranged to be difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2,
In the combination effect, the first portion and the second portion of the first movable member are arranged so as to be visible by moving the first movable member to a predetermined position in front of the display means. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3,
Before the combination effect, it is possible to further execute a combination suggestion effect that suggests that the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are combined.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4,
further comprising a third movable member that is arranged to be difficult to see by the fixed member;
In the uniting effect, the third movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display unit unites with the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member, and the specific object is displayed. represents a part of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5,
In the combination effect, an image representing a part of the specific target is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

183 to 186, the winning/losing notification swing effects A to D will be described below. Figure 1
83 to 186, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing of the drawings, and drawings with decorative designs displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also easy to see. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing. there is something

This win-lose notification effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 1
01 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determining command), and includes an instruction to execute a win-lose notification tilt effect,
The corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command to start a variable effect, a pre-determination command), The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R are changed.

First, the win-lose notification effect A will be described, followed by the win-lose notification effect B, the win-lose notification effect C, and the win-lose notification effect D in this order.

[Wind-or-loss announcement Aori production A]
First, the winning/losing notification swing effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification swing effect A. FIG. The win-lose notification tilt effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

183(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated such that the decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

At the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small-sized decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach are formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the right decorative pattern 8R and the small decorative patterns corresponding thereto) are all kept in a state of being variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all of the same patterns win big, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are won. , and small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. , a white spherical pending icon 9A is displayed. That is, the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is four, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second is based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "0" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 183(A).

At the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection section SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed. The selection unit SEL selects A mode, B mode, C mode,
A production mode composed of D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and the production button 6 is displayed.
Each time 3 is operated (pressing operation), the effect mode that reaches the specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the winning/losing notification effect A is performed is the B mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this B mode (here, an image imitating "clouds") is an image (not shown). The display screen 7a of the display device 7 is displayed in a large size.

In addition, during the period during which the selection mode can be selected, the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) to convey that the effect mode can be changed with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the win/lose notification effect A is performed, the effect mode selected before the win/lose notification effect A is performed is continued in the win/lose notification effect A as well.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In the state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the A mode positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the B mode. The A mode arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the C mode. The B mode placed below is displayed with reels rotating from bottom to top, and the D mode placed above C mode is displayed with reels rotating from above toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the D mode. The C mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode positioned in the specific area again.

In addition, the win-lose notification tilt effect A has three effect modes (a plurality of effects mode). On the other hand, in the hit-or-lose notification effect B, which will be described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only the A mode.

The decorative pattern in FIG. 183(A) starts to fluctuate, and four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9
If there is a win (big win or small win) in A and 9A, a win suggestive image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. displayed large in the Note that the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A,
As to whether or not there is a hit (jackpot or small hit) in 9A, the jackpot pre-determination result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result), and the fluctuation pattern pre- It is determined based on the determination result.

The hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed on the display screen 7 so that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1 .
a, and then the left side and right side of the winning suggestion image ASG,
A manner of repeatedly rocking and swaying back and forth about a straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the winning suggestive image ASG (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG"). ). When such swinging motion of the win suggestive image ASG is suddenly stopped, the display mode in which the win suggestive image ASG emits flashing light and moves forward from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. Hit confirmation production will be performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the variation. Therefore, when the swing motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur. It is designed to be able to fan the

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3", thereby losing. It should be noted that even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
By the swinging motion of , a hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all of the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) effect may be developed. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(C), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and moves to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A disappears from the fourth pending display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first starting port 2
The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into 0 becomes 3 and changes to the blue number "3", and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero. It continues to be a red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, the suspended icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur. , the expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur can be aroused in the player.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "4", thereby losing. It should be noted that even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
By the swinging motion of , a hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all of the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) effect may be developed. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(E), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad. The pending icon 9A disappears from the pending display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second starting port 21
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero and continues to be the red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, the suspended icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued, and the winning determination effect can suddenly occur. , the expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur can be aroused in the player.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "4", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "5", thereby losing. It should be noted that even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
By the swinging motion of , a hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all of the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) effect may be developed. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(G), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A disappears from the second pending display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21. Zero continues to be the red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
183 (
As shown in H), during the change, the win confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the win suggestive image ASG flashes while moving forward from the center of the display screen 7a and popping out. Repeat. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, the fourth reservation display position 9Ad,
All of the reserved display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9
The pending icon 9A displayed in Ad and the pending icon 9C displayed in the pending display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection part SEL for selecting the production mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variation area where the small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is variably displayed, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the upper left of the display screen 7a The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here Then, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is one, the blue number "1", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 is zero and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are aligned along a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side (horizontal center line). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7", thereby forming the same pattern. , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 183 (I), the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 are indicated by numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is one, the blue number "1", the second
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21 is zero and the red number "0") is shown in FIG.
3(H). Also, in FIG. 183(I), the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, the fourth reservation display position 9Ad,
FIG. 183(H) continues to maintain the state in which all of the pending display positions 9Cd have disappeared, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Cd The state in which the pending icon 9C also disappears is maintained in FIG. 183(H). In addition, in FIG. 183(I), the state in which the selection part SEL for selecting the effect mode disappears continues to FIG. 183(H).

In this way, the hit suggestion image A that suggests the existence of the hit in the hit-loss information of the pending icon 9A
SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the swing motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is repeated. As a result, the start of the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG can arouse the player's expectation that a winning (a big win or a small win) will occur, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, at the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, a white spherical reservation icon with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) are displayed, the winning suggestive image ASG
When the swing motion of starts, a winning confirmation effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation can suddenly occur. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a big win or a small win will occur.

In addition, the win-lose notification tilt effect A has three effect modes (a plurality of effects mode), the display mode of swing movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is a common display mode in the three performance modes (plurality of performance modes). On the other hand, the win-lose notification tilt effect B, which will be described later, is a effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only the A mode.
In one effect mode (single effect mode), the display mode of expansion movement of the hit suggestive image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Wind-or-loss announcement tilt direction B]
Next, the winning/losing notification swing effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification swing effect B. FIG. Win-lose notification swing performance B is performed during the variation performance of decorative symbols.

184(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated so that the decorative symbols 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

At the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small-sized decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach are formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the right decorative pattern 8R and the small decorative patterns corresponding thereto) are all kept in a state of being variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all of the same patterns win big, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are won. , the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative patterns are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is not displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the holding display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as the first special figure holding. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the form and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. , a white spherical pending icon 9A is displayed. That is, the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 are respectively displayed as numbers HMG. It is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is four, the blue number "4" is on the left side, and the second is based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "0" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It is a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 after the start of variation of the decorative symbols in FIG. 184(A).

At the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection section SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed. The selection unit SEL selects A mode, B mode, C mode,
A production mode composed of D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and the production button 6 is pressed.
Each time 3 is operated (pressing operation), the effect mode that reaches the specific area by rotating the reel is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the winning/losing notification effect A is performed is the A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode (here, an image imitating the "sun") is an image (not shown). The image is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

In addition, during the period during which the selection mode can be selected, the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) to convey that the effect mode can be changed with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (eg, lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (eg, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the hit/lose notification effect B is performed, the effect mode selected before the win/lose notification effect B is performed is continued in the win/lose notification effect B as well.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In the state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the A mode positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the B mode. The A mode arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the C mode. The B mode placed below is displayed with reels rotating from bottom to top, and the D mode placed above C mode is displayed with reels rotating from above toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the D mode. The C mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode positioned in the specific area again.

In addition, the win-lose notification tilt effect B is a effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only the A mode among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode. . On the other hand, the hit/lose notification effect A described above is an effect commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) of B mode, C mode and D mode except for A mode.

The decorative pattern in FIG. 184(A) starts to fluctuate, and four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9
If there is a win (big win or small win) in A and 9A, a win suggestive image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. displayed large in the Note that the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A,
As to whether or not there is a hit (jackpot or small hit) in 9A, the jackpot pre-determination result, (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result), and the fluctuation pattern pre- It is determined based on the determination result.

The hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed on the display screen 7 so that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1 .
a, after which the winning suggestive image ASG expands and returns to its original size repeatedly (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG"). ). When such expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is suddenly stopped, the winning suggestive image ASG flashes and moves forward from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out. A confirmed performance will be performed. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the variation. Therefore, when the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player is given a sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur. It is designed to be fanned.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3", thereby losing. Since the winning suggestive image ASG is displayed even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG occurs even when the decorative pattern is stopped and the loss is confirmed. is started, and after that, the hit confirmation effect is performed, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) may be developed. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184(C), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and moves to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A disappears from the fourth pending display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first starting port 2
The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into 0 becomes 3 and changes to the blue number "3", and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero. It continues to be a red number "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, the display of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued even in the state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is started with the pending icon 9C.

During this change, as shown in FIG. 184(D), the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is started. As a result, during the change, the hit confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur. there is

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "4", thereby losing. By the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is completed and the winning suggestive image ASG returns to its original size. As a result, even when the decorative pattern is stopped and the loss is confirmed, since the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed. To arouse the player's expectation that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and win (big win or small win) may be developed. can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184(F), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad. The pending icon 9A disappears from the pending display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second starting port 21
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to is zero and continues to be the red number "0".

When the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad in FIG. ) to FIG. 184(H), the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is performed. As a result, during the change, the hit confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur. there is

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(I), during the change, the win confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the win suggestive image ASG flashes and moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out. The following display modes are repeated. When this hit confirmation effect occurs, the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, the fourth
The suspension display position 9Ad and the suspension display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the suspension icon 9A and the first suspension display position 9Ad displayed at the second suspension display position 9Ad.
The pending icon 9A displayed at 1 and the pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection part SEL for selecting the production mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variation area where the small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is variably displayed, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the upper left of the display screen 7a First starting port 2 provided on the side
The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into 0 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here, to the first starting port 20 The first special figure reservation based on the entering ball of the game ball is two, the blue number "2", the second based on the entering ball of the game ball to the second start port 21
The special figure reservation is zero and the red number "0") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are aligned along a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side (horizontal center line). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 184 (J), the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 are indicated by numbers. HMG (Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "2", the second
The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the starting port 21 is zero and the red number "0") is shown in FIG.
4(I). Also, in FIG. 184(J), the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, the fourth reservation display position 9Ad,
The state in which all of the pending display positions 9Cd have disappeared continues to be maintained in FIG. The state in which the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position 9Cd disappear is maintained as shown in FIG. 184(I). again,
In FIG. 184(J), the state in which the selection part SEL for selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained following FIG. 184(I).

In the A mode, even if the decorative symbols start to fluctuate in FIG. There is a case where the win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a. In this case, the effect button image simulating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all while the decorative pattern is changing, and the announcement "please operate the effect button" is not heard from the speaker 6 either.
When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 and reaches a predetermined number of times without any flow from 7, that is, no production prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 is performed. Then, an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the “hit confirmation effect by the effect button” is a state in which no effect for prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is performed, and when the number of times of operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number, A so-called "hidden command" is generated and can be executed. This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image that announces the determination of winning.

As the "predetermined number of times", 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 1
There are 7 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times.
01) is set by lottery. That is, even if the number of times the player has operated (depressed) the production button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation production by the production button" is not performed, the game is lost. For example, when the pending icon 9A is displayed at each of the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad (hitting/losing information is lost). ing.)
becomes the pending icon 9C, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation)
Even if it does, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" will not be performed and it will be lost.
It is a big hit or a small hit). ) becomes the pending icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is set to 17 by lottery, and the number of times the player has operated (depressed) the effect button 63 is 17. When the number is reached, the "hit confirmation effect by the production button" is performed, and it becomes a hit (jackpot or small hit).

The "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is a dedicated effect that is performed only when the A mode is selected.
Win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) even when there is a win (big win or small win) in A, 9A, 9A, 9A. is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, four pending icons 9
A, 9A, 9A, 9A are digested as the pending icon 9C, and the first starting port 20 and the second
It may be performed when a game ball enters the starting port 21. - 特許庁

In other words, in the A mode, even if the decorative symbols start to fluctuate in FIG. When the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, , "Hit confirmed production by production button"
is performed, the decorative pattern in FIG. When a winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, the player operates the effect button 63 at any time. Even if (pressing operation) is performed, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is blocked, and the win-lose notification swing effect B proceeds.

In addition, in the C mode, when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate in FIG. Even if the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the presence of a small win is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, the decorative pattern is fluctuating (not shown). , an effect for prompting an operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is performed such that a effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a.
This point is different from the A mode. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63,
When an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. There is This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image that announces the determination of winning.

In this way, the winning suggestion image A that suggests the existence of the winning in the winning information of the pending icon 9A
SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the expanding motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is repeated. As a result, the expansion movement of the win suggestive image ASG is started, and the player can expect a win (a big win or a small win), and the interest can be improved.

In addition, at the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, a white spherical reservation icon with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) are displayed, the winning suggestive image ASG
When the expansion movement is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation can suddenly occur. It is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation that a small win will occur.

In addition, as described above, the win-lose notification fan effect A shown in FIG. Since it is a production that is performed in common in three production modes (plural production modes) called mode, the hit suggestion image AS in the three production modes (plural production modes)
The display mode of the rocking motion of G is a common display mode. On the other hand, the win-lose notification tilt effect B is a effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), that is, only in the A mode. The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Result C]
Next, the winning/losing notification swing effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining win-lose notification swing effect C. FIG.

In the winning/losing notification tilt effect C, first, as shown in FIG. At the end of the game performance period and the start of the notification period, a message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue hitting to the right. Also, the first
The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each represented by a number HM
G is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is zero, and the blue number "0" is on the left side.
Four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "4" separated from each other on the right side.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, after starting the display in FIG. 185(A),
It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In FIG. 185(A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed ends and the specific period begins, here, as described above, the number of game balls entering the first start port 20 Since the first special figure reservation based on the entry is zero and the number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 is four, the second start opening If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special hold based on the entry of the game ball to 21, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), display A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. A winning suggestive image ASG having a typical W shape is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Hit suggestion image ASG
is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a so that its front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. In addition, as to whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the pre-determination command It is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result, (jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot), and the variation pattern pre-determination result.

In addition, in the specific period, if there is no hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 , the flash image FH shown in FIG. 185(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and
The winning suggestive image ASG shown in 85(C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in the specific period, there is no hit (jackpot or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 case), the win-lose notification effect C is not performed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 185(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated so that the decorative symbols 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In FIG. 185(D), when the variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started, in FIG. A hit suggesting image ASG that has been hit is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.
The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical suspension icon 9C displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative It is smaller than the size of each of the patterns 8R. At this time, in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left side and right side of the winning suggestive image ASG extend forward and backward about a straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the winning suggestive image ASG. A form of repeated rocking and swaying movement (hereinafter referred to as “rocking motion of winning suggestive image ASG”)
There is a case. ). When such swinging motion of the win suggestive image ASG is suddenly stopped, the win suggestive image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning determination effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG flashes and moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out repeatedly. This hit confirmation effect will hit after the change ends (
This is an effect that notifies the player that a big hit or a small hit will occur. Therefore, when the swing motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur. It is designed to be able to fan the

At the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small-sized decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach are formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the right decorative pattern 8R and the small decorative patterns corresponding thereto) are all kept in a state of being variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all of the same patterns win big, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are won. , the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative patterns are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the second special figure reservation, is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A pending display area is provided as a second special figure pending in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the pending display position 9Cd. In this suspension display area, suspension icons 9B can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are the reserved display positions 9C
From the position near d to the right side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is in the order of the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, and the fourth reserved display position 9Bd. are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the

When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Bd moves to the third pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd is moved to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Bd, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9A
The size of each suspended icon 9B is the same as the size of the suspended icon 9B immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and the white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd, the second suspension display position 9Bd, and the third suspension display position 9Bd. 9B are respectively displayed, and the suspension icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth suspension display position 9Bd. That is, the three pending icons 9B, 9B, 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, as described above, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Each of them is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number HMG. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to and the second based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21
The number HMG for each special figure reservation is zero, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 continues to be zero and becomes the blue number "0", and the game to the second start port 21 The second special figure reservation based on the ball entry becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the pending icon 9B and the relevant pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 185(D), when the variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started, the effect mode can be selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A selection section SEL is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C
A production mode consisting of a mode and a D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the production button 63 is operated (depressed operation), the reel rotates to reach a specific area. It is displayed larger than the production mode of . The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. Here, before the win-lose notification tilt effect C is performed, that is, before the big hit effect (jackpot game), the effect mode selected during the variation of the decorative pattern is the B mode, which will be described later, so the theme image of this B mode. (Here, a model of "cloud") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

In addition, during the period during which the selection mode can be selected, the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) to convey that the effect mode can be changed with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the win-lose notification swing performance C is performed, the performance mode selected during the variation of the decorative pattern before the win-loss notice swing performance C is performed, that is, before the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is performed, is the win-loss notification swing performance C. It will continue even in

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In the state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the B mode. The A mode arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward to enter the C mode. The B mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the D mode placed above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the D mode. The C mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode positioned in the specific area again.

In addition, the win-lose notification tilt effect C is three effect modes (a plurality of effect mode). On the other hand, the win-lose notification effect D described later is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of A mode only.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3", thereby losing. It should be noted that even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
By the swinging motion of , a hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all of the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) effect may be developed. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185(F), when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd moves to the second pending display position 9Bd, and is displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd. The pending icon 9B disappears from the pending display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is 2. It will change to red number "2".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, the suspended icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued, and the winning determination effect can suddenly occur. , the expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur can be aroused in the player.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "4", thereby losing. It should be noted that even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
By the swinging motion of , a hit confirmation effect is performed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern, and a hit (big hit or small hit) effect may be developed. It is possible to stir the player's sense of expectation that there is no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185(H), when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, and the pending icon 9B disappears from the second pending display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is 1. It becomes a piece and changes to a red number "1".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, the suspended icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued, and the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur. , the expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur can be aroused in the player.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
185 (
As shown in I), during the change, the win confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the win suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the winning suggestive image ASG emits flashing light and moves forward from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. When this hitting confirmation effect occurs, the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd.
, the fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon displayed at the pending display position 9Cd 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection part SEL for selecting the production mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the contrary,
In the sub-variation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is variably displayed, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are indicated by the numbers HMG (here, the first start The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the opening 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 is one and red. The number "1") also does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are aligned along a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side (horizontal center line). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 185 (J), the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 are indicated by numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is zero and the blue number is “0”, the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 There is one special figure reservation and the red number "1") is shown in Figure 18
5(I). Also, in FIG. 185(J), the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd, the fourth reservation display position 9Bd,
FIG. 185(I) continues to maintain the state in which all of the pending display positions 9Cd have disappeared, and the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Cd FIG. 18 shows a state in which the hold icon 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a.
5(I). In addition, in FIG. 185(J), the state in which the selection part SEL for selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained following FIG. 185(I).

In this way, the hit suggestion image A that suggests the existence of a win in the win-lose information of the pending icon 9B
After SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the swing motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is repeated. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur by starting the swinging movement of the win suggestive image ASG in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. It is possible to improve interest.

Also, at the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd, and the fourth reservation display position 9Bd, a white spherical reservation icon with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) are displayed, the winning suggestive image ASG
When the swing motion of starts, a winning confirmation effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation can suddenly occur. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a big win or a small win will occur.

In addition, the win-lose notification tilt effect C has three effect modes (a plurality of effects mode), the display mode of swing movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is a common display mode in the three performance modes (a plurality of performance modes). On the other hand, the win-lose notification tilt effect D, which will be described later, is a effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only the A mode.
In one effect mode (single effect mode), the display mode of expansion movement of the hit suggestive image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Wind-or-loss notification tilt direction D]
Next, the winning/losing notification swing effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification swing effect D. FIG.

In the winning/losing notification swing effect D, first, as shown in FIG. At the end of the game effect period and the beginning of the notification period, the message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue hitting to the right. In addition, the first
The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each represented by a number HM
G is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is zero, and the blue number "0" is on the left side.
Four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "4" separated from each other on the right side.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, after starting the display in FIG. 186(A),
It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In FIG. 186(A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed ends and the specific period begins, here, as described above, the number of game balls entering the first start port 20 Since the first special figure reservation based on the entry is zero and the number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 is four, the second start opening If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special hold based on the entry of the game ball to 21, as shown in FIG. 186 (B), display A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. A winning suggestive image ASG having a typical W shape is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Hit suggestion image ASG
is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a so that its front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. In addition, as to whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the pre-determination command It is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result, (jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot), and the variation pattern pre-determination result.

In addition, in the specific period, if there is no hit (jackpot or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the figure The flash image FH shown in 186(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG.
The winning suggestion image ASG shown in (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in a specific period, if there is no hit (jackpot or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 ), the winning/losing notification effect D is not performed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 186(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated such that the decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In FIG. 186(D), when the variable display of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started, in FIG. A hit suggesting image ASG that has been hit is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.
The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical suspension icon 9C displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative It is smaller than the size of each of the patterns 8R. At this time, the win suggestive image ASG is first displayed in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a so that its front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and then the win suggestive image ASG expands during the variation. and return to the original size (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG"). When such expansion motion of the win suggestive image ASG is suddenly stopped, the win suggestive image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning determination effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG flashes and moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out repeatedly. This win confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the variation. For this reason,
When the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player is expected to expect a win (big win or small win). It is possible.

At the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area is provided in which small-sized decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be variably displayed, in the sub-fluctuation area, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond to the respective small size patterns. are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stop-displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stop-displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach are formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the right decorative pattern 8R and the small decorative patterns corresponding thereto) are all kept in a state of being variably displayed. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. Small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. good. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all of the same patterns win big, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are won. , the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative patterns are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the completion of the second special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A pending display area is provided as a second special figure pending in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the pending display position 9Cd. This reserved display area has four reserved display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image)
, and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are the reserved display positions 9
From the position near Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is arranged in the order of the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, and the fourth reserved display position 9Bd. are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the

When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and the form and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Bd moves to the third pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd is moved to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Bd, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9A
The size of each suspended icon 9B is the same as the size of the suspended icon 9B immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and a white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Bd, the second suspension display position 9Bd, and the third suspension display position 9Bd. 9B are respectively displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three pending icons 9B, 9B, 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

In addition, the suspension icon 9 corresponding to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative symbols.
A, reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21
In addition, as described above, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 Each of them is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number HMG. Here, the first starting port 20
The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to and the second based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21
The number HMG for each special figure reservation is zero, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 continues to be zero and becomes the blue number "0", and the game to the second start port 21 The second special figure reservation based on the ball entry becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, the pending icon 9B and the relevant pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the degree of expectation for winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It is a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 186(D), when the variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started, the effect mode can be selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A selection section SEL is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, A mode, B mode, C
A production mode consisting of a mode and a D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the production button 63 is operated (depressed operation), the reel rotates to reach a specific area. It is displayed larger than the production mode of . The production mode located in this specific area becomes the production mode to be selected. Here, before the win-lose notification tilt effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the effect mode selected during the variation of the decorative pattern is the A mode, which will be described later, so the theme image of this A mode. (here, a model of the "sun") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

In addition, during the period during which the selection mode can be selected, the effect button 63 is operated (depressed operation) along with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to convey that the effect mode can be changed. message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the win-lose notification swing effect D is performed, the effect mode selected during the variation of the decorative pattern before the win-loss notice swing effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (jackpot game) is performed, is the hit-loss notification swing effect D. It will continue even in

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In the state where the A mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation).
Then, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL is directed downward, so that the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode is displayed. The B mode arranged above is displayed in a manner in which reels rotate from above toward a specific area.

In the B mode, an effect based on the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the B mode. The A mode arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the C mode, an effect based on the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward to enter the C mode. The B mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the D mode placed above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area Is displayed.

In the D mode, an effect based on the theme of "snow" is performed, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. In a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby entering the D mode. The C mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode placed above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area is displayed, and the A mode becomes a display mode located in the specific area again.

In addition, in the hit-or-lose notification tilt effect D, of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, it is an effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only the A mode. . On the other hand, the hit/lose notification effect C described above is an effect commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) of B mode, C mode and D mode except for A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3", thereby losing. It should be noted that the expanding motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is continued even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. This will
Even if the decorative pattern is stopped and the misalignment is confirmed, the winning suggestive image ASG
is displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all of the same pattern and win ( It is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation that the performance of a big win or a small win may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186(F), when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd moves to the second pending display position 9Bd, and is displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd. The pending icon 9B disappears from the pending display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is 2. It will change to red number "2".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, and the icon 9C becomes the suspension icon 9C, and when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is performed. As a result, since the win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed within their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. are lined up in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the Here, the left decorative pattern 8L
is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "4", thereby losing. By the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is completed and the winning suggestive image ASG returns to its original size. As a result, even when the decorative pattern is stopped and the loss is confirmed, since the winning suggestive image ASG is displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed. To arouse the player's expectation that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and win (big win or small win) may be developed. can be done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186(H), when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, and the pending icon 9B disappears from the second pending display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG is the first The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start port 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21 is 1. It becomes a piece and changes to a red number "1".

The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
, and becomes the pending icon 9C, and when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is performed. As a result, since the win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd.
186 (
As shown in I), during the change, the win confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the win suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the winning suggestive image ASG emits flashing light and moves forward from the central portion of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. When this hitting confirmation effect occurs, the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd.
, the fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon displayed at the pending display position 9Cd 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection part SEL for selecting the production mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the contrary,
In the sub-variation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is variably displayed, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are indicated by the numbers HMG (here, the first start The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the opening 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 is one and red. The number "1") also does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are aligned along a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side (horizontal center line). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". , and it becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and then the production (big hit production or small hit production) by the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

In FIG. 186 (J), the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 20 and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball to the second start opening 21 are indicated by numbers. HMG (Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is zero and the blue number is “0”, the second number based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 There is one special figure reservation and the red number "1") is shown in Figure 18
6(I). Also, in FIG. 186(J), the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd, the fourth reservation display position 9Bd,
The state in which all of the pending display positions 9Cd have disappeared is still maintained in FIG. 186(I), and the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd and FIG. 18 shows a state in which the hold icon 9C also disappears from the display screen 7a.
6(I). In addition, in FIG. 186(J), the state in which the selection part SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears is maintained following FIG. 186(I).

In addition, in the A mode, at the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed in FIG. Suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions based on the sphere (four suspension icons 9B
, 9B, 9B, 9B), even if there is a win (big win or small win), a win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, the effect button image simulating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all while the decorative pattern is changing.
In addition, even though the announcement "Please operate the production button" is not played from the speaker 67 at all, that is, the effect for prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 is not performed at all, the player presses the production button. 63 is operated (pressed) to reach a predetermined number of times, an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and a character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A large-scaled “hit confirmation effect by the effect button” is performed. In other words, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is
When the number of times of operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number in a state where no effect for prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is performed, a so-called "hidden command" is generated and can be performed. It's like This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image that announces the determination of winning.

As the "predetermined number of times", 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 1
There are 7 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times.
01) is set by lottery. In other words, even if the number of times the player has operated (depressed) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed, the game is lost. For example, when the hold icon 9B is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd ing.)
becomes the pending icon 9C, the player operates the production button 63 (pressing operation)
Even if it does, the "hit confirmation effect by the effect button" will not be performed, and it will be lost.
It is a big hit or a small hit). ) becomes the pending icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is set to 17 by lottery, and the number of times the player has operated (depressed) the effect button 63 is 17. When the number is reached, the "hit confirmation effect by the production button" is performed, and it becomes a hit (jackpot or small hit).

"Hit confirmation effect by effect button" is a dedicated effect performed only when A mode is selected, and in FIG. When it comes to the beginning of the specific period, the holding information (four holding icons 9B, 9B, 9B,
9B) even if there is a hit (jackpot or small hit), the hit (
Win suggesting image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a big win or a small win
is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special hold are digested as the hold icon 9C, and the first start It may be performed when a game ball enters the opening 20 and the second starting opening 21. - 特許庁

In other words, in the A mode, at the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed in FIG. Even if there is a hit (jackpot or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special hold based on the entry, the hit ( If the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a big win or a small win is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the "production 186(A), the notification period in which the message MG of "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed. Reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball to 21
When there is a win (big win or small win), a win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. When the display is large, even if the player operates (depresses) the production button 63 at any time, the "hit confirmation production by the production button" is blocked and the win-lose notification swing production D proceeds. there is

In addition, in the C mode, at the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed in FIG. Suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions based on the sphere (four suspension icons 9B
, 9B, 9B, 9B), a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed on the display screen. Operation of the production button 63 that, although not shown, a production button image imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a even when it is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, while the decorative pattern is fluctuating. (pressing operation) is performed. This point is different from the A mode. When the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. There may be a case where the “hit confirmation effect by the effect button” is performed. This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect for notifying the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image that announces the determination of winning.

In this way, the hit suggestion image A that suggests the existence of a win in the win-lose information of the pending icon 9B
After the SG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the expansion motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, the expansion movement of the winning-suggestive image ASG is started in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, thereby arousing the player's expectation that a winning (a big win or a small win) will occur. can be improved.

Also, at the first reservation display position 9Bd, the second reservation display position 9Bd, the third reservation display position 9Bd, and the fourth reservation display position 9Bd, a white spherical reservation icon with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) are displayed, the winning suggestive image ASG
When the expansion movement is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation can suddenly occur. It is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation that a small win will occur.

In addition, as described above, the win-lose notification fan effect C shown in FIG. Since it is a production that is performed in common in three production modes (multiple production modes) called mode, the hit suggestion image AS in the three production modes (multiple production modes)
The display mode of the rocking motion of G is a common display mode. On the other hand, the win-lose notification tilt effect D is a effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), that is, only in the A mode. The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the win-lose notification tilt effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 183 (A) to FIG.
As shown in 83(I), the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and the hit/loss information (preliminary determination command) of the pending icon 9A includes the presence of hit (hit is included). ) in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (predetermined position of the display means); After the effect of (1), a second effect of repeatedly varying the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) (starting the swing motion of the win suggestive image ASG) can be executed. According to this configuration, a win suggestive image ASG (win-lose image) suggesting the existence of a win is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the win-lose information of the pending icon 9A. is repeatedly changed. As a result, the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is started in the central portion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and thus the player can have a sense of anticipation that a winning (a big winning or a small winning) will occur. , It is possible to improve interest.
In the win/lose notification effect B of FIG. 184, a win suggestive image ASG (win/lose image) suggesting the existence of a win in the win/lose information of the pending icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the win suggestive image ASG is displayed. The display mode of (hit-lose image) is repeatedly varied. As a result, the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is started, and thus the player can expect a win (a big win or a small win), and the interest can be improved.
In the win-lose notification tilt effect C in FIG. 185, the image display device 7 (
display means), and the existence of a hit (
Win suggesting image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting that a win is included
(hit-lose image) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device 7
A first effect that is displayed in a small size (at a predetermined position of the display means) in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (win-lose image) is repeatedly variable. (starting swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG). According to this configuration, the display screen of the image display device 7 after the win suggestion image ASG (hit-lose image) suggesting the existence of a win in the win-lose information of the pending icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of 7a, and the display mode of the win suggestion image ASG (win-lose image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player is given a sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur when the swing motion of the win suggestion image ASG is started in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It can be aroused and the interest can be improved.
In the win/lose notification effect D of FIG. 7 is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of 7,
The display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (win-lose image) is repeatedly varied. As a result, the expansion movement of the winning suggestive image ASG is started in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, thereby arousing the player's expectation that a winning (big win or small win) will occur. It is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example,
4. In the win-lose notification tilt effect B of 4, a effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and a plurality of types of effect modes (A
mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected,
A display mode of a hit suggestion image ASG (hit-lose image) that is changed by a second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode) among a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) ( Expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG in the win-lose notification tilt effect B in FIG. 184) and other effect modes (B mode, C mode,
D mode) is different from the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) that is varied by the second effect (swinging motion of the win suggestive image ASG in the win-lose notification swing effect A of FIG. 183). According to this configuration, among a plurality of types of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode), it is varied by the second production in other production modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) The display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) is a common display mode that is commonly used, whereas the win suggestive image that is changed by the second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (win-win image) is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode. As a result, the display mode of the winning suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) can be set to a dedicated display mode only in a specific mode among a plurality of types of performance modes, so that it is provided to the player as a rare performance that rarely appears. be able to.
The same applies to the win/lose notification swing effect C in FIG. 185 and the win/lose notice swing effect D in FIG. 186 .

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example,
4. In the win/lose notification effect B, the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (win/lose image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is expanded in a predetermined direction as a specific operation, and then displayed. (expansion movement of hit suggestion image ASG in win/lose notification swing effect B in FIG. 184) is repeated, and is varied by the second effect in other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) The display mode of the win-suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) is an action that reciprocally rotates in a predetermined direction (swings in small steps in a predetermined direction) as an action different from a specific action (the win-suggestive image ASG in the win-lose notification swing effect A in FIG. 183). oscillating motion) is repeated. According to this configuration, the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a display mode in which the expansion motion (specific action) of the win suggestive image ASG is repeated. Hit suggestion image A for the player
It is possible to repeatedly give the opportunity to visually recognize the expansion motion (specific action) of the SG, and the display mode of the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) in the other production mode can be changed to the win suggestive image AS.
Due to the display mode that repeats the rocking motion of G (a specific motion and a different motion),
It is possible to repeatedly give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the swinging motion of the win suggestive image ASG (a motion different from the specific motion). As a result, the player can easily confirm the display mode of the win suggestion image ASG (win-lose image) in each selection mode.
The same applies to the win/lose notification swing effect C in FIG. 185 and the win/lose notice swing effect D in FIG. 186 .

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in a specific production mode (A mode) in the winning/losing notification swing production B in FIG. A rainbow image (specific image) that notifies the image display device 7 (
A "win confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed. After the effect, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" (third effect) is blocked, and the expansion movement of the win suggestion image ASG (second effect) is executed. According to this configuration, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 (operation means) while the win suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) is displayed on the image display device 7 in a specific effect mode (A mode). operation), the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed at all. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification fan effect D in FIG. 186 .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the win-lose notification swing effect A of FIG. Selection of one of a plurality of types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by operating 63 (operation means) is blocked. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change of the effect mode in the second effect in which the display mode of the win-lose image is repeatedly changed, which is performed after the first effect.
The same applies to the win-lose notification effect B in FIG. 184, the win-lose notification effect C in FIG. 185, and the win-lose notification effect D in FIG.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example,
4, in the win-lose notification swing effect B, the win-lose image changed by the second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode) in the win-lose notification swing effect B of FIG. 184, or FIG.
The win-lose image changed by the second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) in the win-lose notification swing effect A is moved from a predetermined position to another position on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, a fourth effect of changing to the winning notification display mode to announce the winning can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183(H) of the winning/losing notification tilt effect A, a hit suggestion image that is varied by the second effect in another effect mode (B mode (similar to C mode and D mode)) The ASG (hitting/losing image) is displayed as a winning notification display mode by moving from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) while emitting flashing light. Aspects are repeated. Fig. 18 of win-lose notification tilt effect B
As shown in 4(I), the win suggestive image ASG (win-lose image) that is variable by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 while emitting a flash as a win notification display mode. The display mode of moving from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a toward the front (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a win (a big win or a small win) suddenly occurs, so that the sudden display mode announcing a win (a big win or a small win) can make a player feel a shock. can.
In the win-lose notification swing effect C of FIG. 185 and the win-lose notification swing effect D of FIG. 186, as shown in FIGS.
The win suggestive image ASG (win/lose image) that is variable by the second effect in the B mode (the same applies to the C mode and D mode) is displayed on the display screen 7 of the image display device 7 as a win notification display mode.
jumps out from the rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of a, moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a, and flashes from the central portion (second predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode of moving toward the near side (another position) and popping out is repeated. As shown in FIG. 186 (H) and FIG. 186 (I) of the win-lose notification tilt effect D, a specific effect mode (
A mode) hit suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) that is varied by the second effect,
As a winning notification display mode, the image display device 7 jumps out from the lower left rectangular area (first predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moves to the central portion of the display screen 7a, and displays on the image display device 7 while emitting a flash. The display mode in which the screen 7a moves from the central portion (second predetermined position) toward the front (another position) and pops out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which a win (a big win or a small win) suddenly occurs, so that the sudden display mode announcing a win (a big win or a small win) can make a player feel a shock. can.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the win-lose notification tilt effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the win/lose notification effect A in FIG. 183, the win/lose notification effect B in FIG. 184, the win/lose notification effect C in FIG. 185, and the win/loss notification effect D in FIG. ) was repeatedly changed. At this time, a period may be provided in which the display mode is repeatedly changed while the hit suggestive image ASG (hit-lose image) flashes. Always making the player aware of the win suggestive image ASG (win-lose image) may tire the player. On the other hand, a hit suggestion image ASG (hit-lose image)
When the timing (timing) for directing the line of sight comes, the winning suggestion image ASG (win-lose image) flashes and repeatedly changes its display mode to suggest that effect to the player. This eliminates the need for the player to always be aware of the image ASG (hit-lose image), thereby suppressing the player's fatigue.

[Modification 2]
183, win-lose notification tilt effect B in FIG. 184, win-lose notification tilt effect C in FIG. 185, and win-lose notification tilt effect D in FIG. As a hit notification display mode, a display mode in which the player moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and pops out while flashing light is repeatedly performed. However, even when a win (big win or small win) is not announced, the display mode in which flashing light is emitted from the central portion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and pops out is displayed once or more. times (for example, 3 to 5 times)
It is also possible to return to the original display mode when only one is performed. For example, in the winning/losing notification effect A shown in FIG.
Returning to 3(B), the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is resumed, and in the winning/losing notification tilt effect B of FIG.
Returning to 84(B), the expanding motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is resumed, and in the winning/losing notification swing effect C of FIG. 186D), the swinging motion of the winning suggestive image ASG is resumed, and in the winning/losing notification swing motion D of FIG. ) to resume the expansion motion of the hit suggestive image ASG. In this way, the player can be instantly reminded of a winning (big win or small win) announcement.

[Modification 3]
185, and in the win-lose notification tilt effect C of FIG. 186 and the win-lose notification tilt effect D of FIG. On the upper right side of 7a, a selection part SEL for selecting the effect mode is arranged and displayed. However, in FIG. 185(A) and FIG. 186(A), at the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed and at the start of the specific period, the number of game balls to the second start port 21 If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special hold based on the entry, select the selection part SEL You may make it impossible to select the production mode as non-display. 185 and D in FIG. 186, the performance mode cannot be selected at all, so there is no problem even if the selection part SEL is hidden. In this case, only the presentation mode currently selected may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
183, win-lose notification tilt effect B in FIG. 184, win-lose notification tilt effect C in FIG. 185, and win-lose notification tilt effect D in FIG.
One of the production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by pressing operation). However, the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used instead of the performance button 63 . Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 can be obtained by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
Win-lose notification effect A in FIG. 183, win-lose notification tilt effect B in FIG. 184, win-lose notification tilt effect C in FIG. 185, and win-lose notification tilt effect D in FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
a first effect of displaying a win-lose image suggesting the existence of a win in the win-lose information of the pending icon;
After the first effect, a second effect of repeatedly varying the display mode of the win-lose image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-1,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One production mode can be selected from a plurality of types of production modes by operating the operation means,
Among the plurality of types of production modes, the display mode of the win-lose image is changed by the second production in a specific production mode, and the display mode is variable by the second production in other production modes other than the specific production mode. The display mode of the hit-drop image that is displayed is different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2,
The display mode of the win-lose image that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode repeats a specific action,
The display mode of the win-lose image that is changed by the second effect in the other effect mode repeats an action different from the specific action.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect J1-2 or aspect J1-3,
In the specific production mode, when the number of operations of the operating means reaches a predetermined number of times,
It is possible to execute a third effect of displaying a specific image that notifies the win is confirmed,
After the first effect, the third effect is blocked and the second effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect J1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-4,
After the first effect, selection of one of the plurality of types of effect modes by operating the operation means is blocked,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5,
The win-lose image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode or the win-lose image changed by the second effect in the other effect mode is moved from a predetermined position to another position to make a win. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to the notification display mode when notifying,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. This character selection effect can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character selection effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character selection effect A]
187 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 187(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character that can become an opponent appears in a battle effect, which will be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. An enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is a effect of selecting an enemy character as an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC and CRD is displayed as an image in an area different from the display areas of the enemy characters CRB, CRC and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC,
ID is displayed.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by its display color. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is
It is white. Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by rough hatching). For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed in the physical strength information image IH. The longer this bar is, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In order to change the order, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the topmost information image may be enlarged and displayed more than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle production. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. At this time, the opponent is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC unfolds. An information image IC is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and an effect is performed in which the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. Physical information image I
When the bar of H becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when the number is zero. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect B]
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 188(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character that can become an opponent appears in a battle effect, which will be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is a effect of selecting an enemy character as an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, enemy characters CRB, CR
C, information about the CRD is displayed graphically. Here, enemy characters CRB, CRC,
Information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each CRD.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRB is "
B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C
”. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Here, an example of one alphabetic character is given, but if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed in the physical strength information image IH. The longer this bar is, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In order to change the order, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the topmost information image may be enlarged and displayed more than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle production. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. At this time, the opponent is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC unfolds. An information image IC is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and an effect is performed in which the bar of the physical strength information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. Physical information image I
When the bar of H becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is a effect for announcing that the ally character has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "Victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped when doubled. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect C]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 189(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. Also, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character that can become an opponent appears in a battle effect, which will be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is a effect of selecting an enemy character as an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, enemy characters CRB, CR
C, information about the CRD is displayed graphically. Here, enemy characters CRB, CRC,
Information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each CRD.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRB is "
B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C
”. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Here, an example of one alphabetic character is given, but if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the larger the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. In order to change the order, the top information image wraps around to the back and the second and third information images move to the front by so-called animation. At this time, the topmost information image may be enlarged and displayed more than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle production. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. At this time, the opponent is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC unfolds. An information image IC is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is "8".

[Character selection effect D]
FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 190(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R start to change. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach forming effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop with the same number. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is a effect in which an enemy character that can become an opponent appears in a battle effect, which will be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is a effect of selecting an enemy character as an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, enemy characters CRB, CR
C, Information about the CRD is displayed graphically. Here, an information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. The information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and the information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates an enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK related to the enemy character CRB is "
B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C
”. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Here, an example of one alphabetic character is given, but if the enemy character has a name, it is conceivable to display the name.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the greater the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed. In the figure, the information image IC is displayed, but as time passes, the information image IB is displayed, and as time passes, the information image ID is displayed, and this is repeated. After a certain period of time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle production. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that the information image IC is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character, and the friendly character wins in the case of winning. At this time, the opponent is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC unfolds. An information image IC is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is a effect notifying that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the characters "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (losing) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in a losing mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C is "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, which are the opponents of the battle production, are displayed by the enemy character appearance production (Fig. 187(D), Fig. 188(D),
Figure 189(D), Figure 190(D)). Information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are displayed by the enemy character selection effect.
By selecting B, IC, and ID, an opponent character is selected (Fig. 187(E), Fig. 188(E), Fig. 189(E), Fig. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the enemy character becomes highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are the type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. (Fig. 187 (F), Fig. 188 (F), Fig. 1
89(F), FIG. 190(F)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed,
After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle presentation (Fig. 187(E), Fig. 188(E), Fig. 189(E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle effect (FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, enemy characters CRB and C are displayed in the information images IB, IC and ID.
A physical fitness information image IH indicating the physical fitness of RC and CRD is included (Fig. 187 (E), Fig. 188
(E), FIG. 189(E), FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, enemy characters CRB and C are displayed in the information images IB, IC and ID.
It contains a type information image IK that can specify RC and CRD (Fig. 187 (E), Fig. 188
(E), FIG. 189(E), FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the information images IB, IC, and ID contain two types of information, the type information image IK and the physical strength information image IH. On the other hand, it may include three or more pieces of information.

[Modification 2]
Although an example of selecting an opponent's enemy character from enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the selection target can be selected by selecting the information of the selection target, and for example, one of a plurality of types of mini-games may be selected.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the information images IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect J2-1]
is a game machine,
An effect for selecting one of a plurality of selection targets, wherein the selection target is displayed, and target information, which is information about the selection target, is displayed in an area separate from the selection target display area; It is possible to execute a selection effect in which the selection target is selected by selecting the target information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-1,
the target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-2,
After sequentially displaying the information images as the target information, the selection target is selected by selecting one information image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J2-1 to J2-3,
The selection target is an opponent's character,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4,
The information image includes a graph image suggesting the character's attack difficulty level,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect J2-4 or aspect J2-5,
The information image includes an image that can identify the character,
A gaming machine characterized by:

191 to 194, the starting door lighting effects A to D will be described below. Figure 191
194, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, and are arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing.

This starting port light emitting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determining command), and when an instruction to execute the starting entrance light emission effect is included, the ROM 10
3 to display the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a command to start a variable effect, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the light emission mode of the first start port 20. In addition, the audio control board 106 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command, a pre-determination command), and executes a sound effect outputting various sounds from the speaker 67 .

The first starting port 20 has a first starting port decorative substrate mounted with a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light, and is controlled by a lamp control substrate 107 . The first starting port 20 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative substrate emits light. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port are controlled to light up in white, so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. Also in the jackpot effect and the demo effect for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to light up in white, so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white. Become.

In addition, the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port emits light, so that the front surface of the first starting port 20 is illuminated. There are specifications that are transparent. A type having this specification will be described as a special plating specification, and a normal type that does not have this special plating specification will be described as a normal specification.
The first starting port 20 in both the special plating specification and the normal specification is molded with colored or colorless transparent resin, and is shaped (not shown). The first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification are both molded with colored or colorless transparent resin, but the surface may be shaped as a smooth surface (flat surface or curved surface).

On the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification, a decorative member shaped with a smile printed on its surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “decorative member modeling (smile modeling)”) is the first starting. A full-color LED placed in front of the decorative board for the mouth and mounted on the decorative board for the first starting mouth
is illuminated, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 can be seen through the front surface of the first starting port 20, while it is mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port. When the full-color LED is turned off, the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20
The molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside is made difficult to see, and the special plating color (for example, silver) is made visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20 .

In the special plating specification, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starter is turned off. , the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port are turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. It is said that In the jackpot effect, the decorative member (smile) is placed inside the first starting opening 20 through the front surface of the first starting opening 20 in a state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting opening emits light. modeling) may be made visible.

Here, first, as the lighting effect of the first starting port 20 in the normal specification, the starting port lighting effect A,
The starting opening lighting effect B and the starting opening lighting effect C will be described in order, and then the starting opening lighting effect D will be described as the lighting effect of the first starting hole 20 in the special plating specification.

[Starting entrance lighting effect A]
First, the starting door light emitting effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the starting door lighting effect A. FIG. The starting entrance light emitting effect A is performed during the variation from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation.

191(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated such that the decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which they fluctuate at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the first special design reservation is completed, is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the reserved display positions 9C
From the position near d to the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is in the order of the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the form and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, the white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and the white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, and the third suspension display position 9Ad. 9A are respectively displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. That is, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the degree of expectation for winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 191(A) starts to fluctuate, and the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 at the time of starting the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to white lighting, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a white lighting state. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first start port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .

When the game ball enters the first start port 20 after the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation),
As shown in FIG. 191(C), a white spherical pending icon 9A is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are stocked without being digested. It will be in a state of holding full tank. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port has already been controlled to white lighting and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a white lighting state, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the ball being thrown, as shown in FIG. It is controlled to turn off, and is controlled to turn on in white again. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port flashes white only once, and the light emitting state of the first starting port 20 flashes white only once. At this time, in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first start port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned ON). ).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, as shown in FIG. 191(C), white spherical suspension icons 9A are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad shown in FIG. It does not change from the state it was set to. In addition, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, since the state is full of reserve, there is no reserve display position for displaying the reserve icon, and the reserve balls do not increase. As shown in (F), the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port are controlled to be maintained in white lighting, so that the light emitting state of the first starting port 20 is maintained in white lighting. Become. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, there is no reserved display position for displaying the reserved icon and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased. , the on-hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the on-hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 191(G), the left decorative design 8L is the number "5" and the middle decorative design 8C.
becomes the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3".
, the white spherical suspension icon 9A remains displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. . At the end of such fluctuations, the full tank is already in the reserve state, so as shown in FIG. By doing so, the state in which the light emitting state of the first starting port 20 is lit in white is maintained, and the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20,
The number of holding balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 191(I), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and moves to the fourth pending display position 9Ad. The holding icon 9A displayed at the holding display position 9Ad moves to the third holding display position 9Ad, the holding icon disappears at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, and the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. When the game ball does not enter the opening 20, as shown in FIG. 191(J), the first starting opening 20 is lit by controlling the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board for the first starting opening to be lit in white. The light emission mode of is in a white lighting state. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first start port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).
becomes).

As described above, in the starting port light emission effect A, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in white, so that the first starting port 20 is lit in white. When the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of game balls into the starting port 20,
The full-color LED mounted on the first decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be extinguished for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then controlled to white lighting again, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is turned off. The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 flashes white only once by changing the light emission mode to white flashing only once. On the other hand, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to white lighting, so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is white lighting, which is the state of the reserve full tank. Sometimes, even if a game ball enters the first start port 20, there is no reserve display position for displaying the reserve icon and the number of reserve balls does not increase. The LED is not controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) but is maintained in white lighting, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 does not flash white only once, and the white lighting state is maintained. be done.

As a result, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to extinguishing for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Then, it is controlled to white lighting again and can be changed to the light emission mode that blinks white only once, and when the number of held balls does not increase, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in white lighting. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to visually appeal to the presence or absence of an increase in the number of held balls,
It is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the starting port lighting effect A, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is displayed in a white blinking state, which appeals to the sense of sight, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of “spoof”, is played from the speaker 67, which appeals to the sense of hearing. By using together with the performance, it is possible to provide the player with a novel performance that the increase in the number of held balls can be conveyed to the player.

[Starting entrance lighting effect B]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a description will be given of the starting opening lighting effect B. FIG. FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the starting door lighting effect B. FIG. The starting entrance light emitting effect B is performed during the variation from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the end of variation.

192(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which it fluctuates at a high speed. The background image arranged behind the decorative pattern is changed to a display mode in which the statically displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed and fluctuates at a high speed. It can be seen through a translucent decorative pattern during high speed fluctuations.

Then, just before it stops, it decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8
R becomes the number "3", the same symbols are not aligned, and the display is stopped, and the error is confirmed and displayed.
Along with this, the change ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The suspension icons corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are being changed as the digestion of the first special figure suspension, are displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). Relevant display position 9
In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of Cd, a pending display area is provided as the first special figure pending. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the reserved display positions 9Cd
From a position near to the left side of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a is displayed at the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. are aligned and displayed in a straight line.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the end of the variation in FIG. 192(A), at the suspension display position 9Cd, the variation is completed and the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and at the first suspension display position 9Ad, A yellow (gold) star-shaped suspension icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the second suspension display position 9Ad and the third suspension display position 9Ad, and a fourth suspension display position 9Ad is displayed. , the pending icon is not displayed. in short,
Three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variation in FIG. 192(A) ends and the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball does not enter the first start port 20 at the end of such variation, FIG. As shown in (B), a full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port
is controlled to white lighting, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a white lighting state. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first start port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).
. It should be noted that the suspension icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7 after the change in FIG.
When it disappears from a, at the end of such fluctuation, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the first starting hole 20 emits light in the starting hole light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) The state flashes white only once, and in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first start port 20, the speaker 67 emits a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "shup".
(holding tone is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192(C), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the second The pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad, and moves to the third pending display position 9Ad. The pending icon disappears at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate and the fluctuation starts, the first start port 2
As shown in FIG. 192(D), regardless of whether the game ball enters or does not enter 0, the color is the same as the color attached to the yellow (gold) star-shaped reservation icon 9C. In other words, in conjunction with the color attached to the holding icon 9C, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The light emission mode of the mouth 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). When the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of fluctuation, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), when the game balls enter the first start port 20 one by one continuously (that is, two game balls are consecutively entered one by one, when entering the ball)
, as shown in FIG. 192(E), a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the third suspension display position 9Ad.
is displayed, and a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the fourth suspension display position 9Ad,
The four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are stocked without being digested, and the reserve is full. Full-color LED already mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port
is controlled to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), but it is suspended due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 As shown in FIG.
The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to light up in yellow (lighting in gold color), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a state of lighting in yellow (lighting in gold color). At the same time, the speaker 6 emits a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot".
No sound from 7 (on-hold tone is turned off).

In addition, as the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, as described in the starting hole light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the first starting hole decoration board 191 (C) and (D), the full-color LED mounted in the flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once ( 191(C) and (D), it is in a white flashing state, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67 (hold sound is turned ON). In B, unlike the starting entrance lighting effect A, as shown in FIG. The yellow lighting (gold lighting) state of the first starting port 20 is maintained by being controlled to maintain the yellow lighting (gold lighting), and further,
The on-hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the on-hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, as shown in FIG. Instead, white spherical suspension icons 9A are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad shown in FIG. It does not change from the state it was set to. In addition, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, since the reserve tank is full, there is no reserve display position for displaying the reserve icon, and the reserve balls do not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to light up in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold color). lighted) state is maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, there is no reserved display position for displaying the reserved icon and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased. , the on-hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the on-hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 192(I), the left decorative design 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative design 8C.
becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3".
, the white spherical suspension icon 9A remains displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. . At the end of such a fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 192 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The lighting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the variation, the state is already filled with the reserved tank, so even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and "
A hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect B, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow ( Gold color lighting), even if the number of reserved balls increases due to the game balls entering the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls increases due to the game balls entering the first starting port 20. is not performed at all, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow lighting (gold (color lighting) is maintained, and further, the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).
.

As a result, when the light emission mode of the first start port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a light emission state of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first start port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first start port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so this maintained light emission of the first start port 20 Yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is a mode, can contribute as an additional light-emitting effect to the effect, and can improve interest.

Further, in the starting hole light emitting effect B, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20. (In other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 is blocked. Thus, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). Therefore, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect unfolding on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the holding sound, which is the effect sound "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the holding sound from interfering with the effect sound and music flowing in relation to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a.

[Starting entrance lighting effect C]
Next, the starting opening lighting effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the starting door lighting effect C. FIG. The starting entrance light emitting effect C is performed during the variation from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the end of variation.

193(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. The variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated such that the decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the stopped and displayed decorative patterns change from the opaque state to the semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the first special design reservation is completed, is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reservation display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the reserved display positions 9C
From the position near d to the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a is in the order of the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, a white spherical suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd, and a white spherical suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, and the third suspension display position 9Ad. 9A are respectively displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. That is, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the degree of expectation for winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It is a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 193(A) starts to fluctuate, and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. By controlling the mounted full-color LED to white lighting, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a white lighting state. At this time, since the game ball has not entered the first start port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). . In addition, when the decorative pattern in FIG. 193(A) starts to fluctuate, and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the time of starting the fluctuation, the first in the starting hole light emitting effect A shown in FIG. The lighting mode of the starting port 20 is in a state of flashing white only once, and in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, a holding sound that is a sound effect of "Shoot" is played from the speaker 67 (holding tone is turned on).

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. When it changes to the hold icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193(D), it becomes the same color as the color attached to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C, that is, attached to the hold icon 9C. In conjunction with the selected color, the first starting port 2 is controlled by controlling the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting).
0 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). When the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after the start of the fluctuation, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). . In addition, Fig. 1
When the game ball enters the first start port 20 before the white spherical pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position 9Cd in 93(C) changes to the star-shaped pending icon 9C. 191(D), the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. In order to notify that the number of users has increased, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on).

After the suspension icon 9C changes to suspension (that is, after the suspension change), the first start port 20
193(E), a white spherical pending icon 9A is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are not digested. It becomes a state of being stocked in , and becomes a state of holding full tank. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port has already been controlled to light up in yellow (lighting in gold color), and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state of lighting in yellow (lighting in gold color), As shown in FIG. 193 (F), without any control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20, it is mounted on the decoration substrate for the first start port. full color LED
is maintained and controlled in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a yellow lighting (gold color lighting) state, and furthermore, a sound effect of “Shup” is held. Sound does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding tone is turned off).

In addition, as the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, as described in the starting hole light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the first starting hole decoration board 191 (C) and (D), the full-color LED mounted in the flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once ( 191(C) and (D), it is in a white flashing state, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67 (hold sound is turned ON). In C, unlike the starting door lighting effect A, as shown in FIG. The yellow lighting (gold lighting) state of the first starting port 20 is maintained by being controlled to maintain the yellow lighting (gold lighting), and further,
The on-hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the on-hold sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, as shown in FIG. 193(E), white spherical suspension icons 9A are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad shown in FIG. It does not change from the state it was set to. In addition, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, since the reserve tank is full, there is no reserve display position for displaying the reserve icon, and the number of reserve balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to light up in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in yellow (gold color). lighted) state is maintained. At this time, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, there is no reserved display position for displaying the reserved icon and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased. , the on-hold sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the on-hold sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 193(I), the left decorative design 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative design 8C.
becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3".
, the white spherical suspension icon 9A remains displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. . At the end of such a fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, thereby first The lighting mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the variation, the state is already filled with the reserved tank, so even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and "
A hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect C, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative substrate is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow ( Gold color lighting), even if the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20.例文帳に追加is not performed at all, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow lighting (gold (color lighting) is maintained, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).
.

As a result, when the light emission mode of the first start port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to a light emission state of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first start port 20 Even if the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so the maintained light emission of the first starting port 20 Yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is a mode, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and can improve interest.

In addition, when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning in the starting hole light emitting effect C, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20. (In other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 is blocked) , the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). For this reason, the first
The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolding on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the holding sound, which is the effect sound "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the holding sound from interfering with the effect sound and music flowing in relation to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a.

[Starting entrance lighting effect D]
Next, the starting opening lighting effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining the starting door light emission effect D. FIG. The start light emission effect D is performed during the variation from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the end of variation.

194(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative pattern 8R of the display screen 7a is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode in which it fluctuates at a high speed. A background image arranged behind the decorative pattern is displayed in a display mode in which the statically displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed and fluctuates at a high speed. It can be seen through a translucent decorative pattern during high speed fluctuations.

Then, just before it stops, it decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8
R becomes the number "3", the same symbols are not aligned, and the display is stopped, and the error is confirmed and displayed.
Along with this, the change ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The suspension icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are being changed as the digestion of the first special design reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). A reserve display area is provided as a first special figure reserve in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reserve icon 9C displayed at the reserve display position 9Cd. In this pending display area, the pending icons 9A can be displayed at four pending display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, and a maximum of four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a,
The first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in this order.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C, the size of the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the pending icon immediately before the movement. The size is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad moves to the third pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, the pending icon 9A
The size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement, except for the case where the shape of is changed to another shape.

Here, at the end of the variation in FIG. 194(A), at the suspension display position 9Cd, the variation is completed and the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and at the first suspension display position 9Ad, A smiling sphere suspension icon 9A having green is displayed, and a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the second suspension display position 9Ad.
As a result of only one game ball entering , a white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the third reservation display position 9Ad, and no reservation icon is displayed at the fourth reservation display position 9Ad. That is, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter simply referred to as "suspended icon"
There is a case. ), the difference in shape and color represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. For example, among the four hold icons of a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black sphere-shaped hold icon, a smiling sphere-shaped hold icon, and a white sphere-shaped hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical pending icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest probability of winning. It has become a thing. Further, the smile sphere holding icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variation in FIG. 194(A) ends and the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the end of such variation, FIG. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to be extinguished, which is the normal light emission mode, and the special plating applied to the front inner side of the first starting port 20 Light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting state of the first starting port 20 becomes a special plating color (for example, silver), which is the normal light emitting state. This allows the first
Due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the starting port 20, light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is shaped ( Smile model) becomes invisible, and the smile model is hidden. In other words, as long as the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port are maintained in the normal light emission mode, the smiling model is maintained in a non-display state.

At this time (that is, when the change in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the end of such change, As shown in FIG. 194(B), a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is generated in order to notify that the number of holding balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20. It flows from the speaker 67 (on-hold tone is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 194(C), the pending icon 9A in the shape of a green smiling face displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C. The suspension icon 9C may be the same color as the green of the smiling spherical suspension icon 9A displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, or may be another color with a high degree of expectation (for example, red or seven colors ( may change to rainbow)). When the smiling sphere holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the holding displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad The icon 9A moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad and the fourth reserved display position At 9Ad, the hold icon disappears, and as shown in FIG.
Light is controlled to be the same color as the color C, so that the front surface of the first starting port 20 is transparent due to the special plating applied to the front inner side of the first starting port 20, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is the second 1, the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the opening 20 emits light in the same color as the reserved icon 9C. As a result, the light is transmitted through the front surface of the first starting port 20 by the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the first starting port 20 is arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emission mode of the first starting port 20. The modeling of the decorative member (smiling model) becomes easy to see, and the smiling model is displayed. In other words, as long as the full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board for the first starting port are controlled to be lit in the same color as the smile sphere suspension icon 9C, the smiling model is maintained in the displayed state.

At this time (that is, as shown in FIG. 194(C), the smiley sphere holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 194 ( As shown in D), if no game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the start of fluctuation, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67. (Holding tone is turned off).

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), when the game balls enter the first start port 20 one by one continuously (that is, two game balls are consecutively entered one by one, when entering the ball)
, as shown in FIG. 194(E), a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the third suspension display position 9Ad.
is displayed, and a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the fourth suspension display position 9Ad,
The four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are stocked without being digested, and the reserve is full. Full-color LED already mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port
is controlled to be lit in the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C, and the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first start port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first start port 20, and the light emission mode of the first start port 20 The decoration member (smile shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 is the pending icon 9
Although it is in a state where it appears to emit light in the same color as the color of C (that is, the modeling of the decorative member (smiling model) arranged inside the first starting port 20 is easy to see, and the smiling model is suspended. Although it is displayed in the same color as the icon 9C), no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20. 194 (
As shown in F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to have the same color as the color of the reservation icon 9C, thereby the first starting mode as the light emission mode of the first starting port 20. The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the mouth 20 is maintained in a state in which it appears to emit light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) becomes easy to see, and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C). does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding tone is turned off).

In addition, as the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, as described in the starting hole light emitting effect A of FIG. 191, the first starting hole decoration board 191 (C) and (D), the full-color LED mounted in the flashes in a predetermined color only once (white flashes in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once ( 191(C) and (D), it is in a white flashing state, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67 (hold sound is turned ON). In D, unlike the starting opening lighting effect A, as shown in FIG.
is maintained and controlled to be the same color as the color of , so that the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first start port 20 as the light emission mode of the first start port 20 is the same as the color of the reservation icon 9C. (i.e., the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the first start port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile shape is the same color as the reserved icon 9C. is displayed in the color of ), and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "shup", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

After that, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, as shown in FIG. Instead, white spherical suspension icons 9A are displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194(E). It does not change from the state it was set to. In addition, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, since the state is full of reserve, there is no reserve display position for displaying the reserve icon, and the reserve balls do not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board for the first starting port is maintained and controlled to have the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C, and the first starting port 20
Light passes through the front surface of the first starting port 20 due to the special plating applied to the front inner side of the first starting port 2
0, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the first opening 20 is maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C. The modeling (smiling model) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is easy to see, and the smiling model is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C).

At this time (that is, in FIG. 194 (G), because it is already in the state of being full of reserve), even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, there is a reserve display position where the reserve icon is displayed. Since the number of balls on hold does not increase without
A hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

It should be noted that, after the start of the fluctuation, when the color of the pending icon 9C changes to another color with a high degree of expectation, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board for the first starting port also changes to the pending icon 9C. , and becomes the same color as the changed color of the reserved icon 9C, and is shaped as a decorative member arranged inside the first start port 20 as the lighting mode of the first start port 20 (smile shape). changes to the same color as that of the pending icon 9C and appears as light. In other words, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting opening 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling modeling is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194(I), the left decorative design 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative design 8C.
becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3".
, the white spherical suspension icon 9A remains displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, the second suspension display position 9Ad, the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. . At the end of such a fluctuation, as shown in FIG. Due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface, light does not pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is the normal light emission mode.
For example, silver), and the smiling model is in a non-display state. At the end of the fluctuation, the state of the holding tank is already full, so even if the game ball enters the first start port 20, the number of holding balls does not increase, and the holding sound that is the effect sound "Shoot". does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding tone is turned off).

In this way, in the starting opening light-emitting effect D, the first starting opening 20 is controlled by controlling the full-color LED mounted on the first starting opening decoration board to have the same color as the reserved icon 9C.
When the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the is easy to see and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C, in the first start port 20 Even if the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of game balls, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first start opening 20, and the number of reserved balls increases. The full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is maintained and controlled to have the same color as that of the reserved icon 9C, thereby making it easy to visually recognize the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) arranged inside the first start opening 20. Then, the smiling model is maintained in the display state in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and further, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). .

As a result, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from the non-display state of the smiling face model of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 to the same color as the pending icon 9C. state, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission state of the first start port 20 remains the same as the first start port. 20 is maintained in the light emission mode in which the smiling face model placed inside the icon 9C emits light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C. 1 start port 20
The state in which the smiling face model placed inside emits light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and the interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the lighting effect D for the start opening, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first start hole 20 is easy to see, and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the reservation icon 9C. When the state is set, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 (in other words, the game ball enters the first start port 20). (By blocking the control for notifying that the number of held balls has increased due to the ball), the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) arranged inside the first start opening 20 is easily visible, and the smile molding is realized. It is possible to maintain the display state in the same color as that of the pending icon 9C. Therefore, the lighting mode of the first start opening 20, in which the smile modeling is maintained in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C, contributes as an additional lighting effect to the effect unfolding on the display screen 7a. can do. Furthermore, since the holding sound, which is the effect sound "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the holding sound from interfering with the effect sound and music flowing in relation to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the starting door light emission effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), it has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) capable of accepting a game ball, and the game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (receiving port). Based on, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is varied (in FIGS. 191(A) to 191(D), it is controlled to turn off from white lighting for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Controlled to white lighting again and flashing white only once) first effect, and execution of the first effect is blocked in FIGS. A second light source capable of maintaining the light emission mode (white lighting)
and can be executed. According to this configuration, when a game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting for a predetermined period (for example, 0 0.5 seconds), and is controlled to white lighting again, so that it can be changed to a white flashing light emission mode only once. can be maintained in white lighting, the presence or absence of an increase in the number of held balls can be visually appealed, and the amusement can be improved.
Figure 192 (A) to Figure 192 (J) in the starting port light emitting effect B, has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) capable of receiving a game ball, game ball in the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is entered (accepted), the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is varied (Fig. 1
Controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in 92(A) to 192(D), yellow lighting (gold lighting)) first effect, and FIGS. 192(E) to 192(H) and a second effect that can prevent the execution of the first effect and maintain the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold color lighting)) of the first start port 20 (receiving port). According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to a yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepted) the starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so this is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the lighting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute to the lighting effect as an additional light emitting effect, and the interest can be improved.
Figure 193 (A) ~ FIG. 193 (J) in the starting port light emitting effect C, has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) capable of receiving a game ball, game ball in the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is entered (accepted), the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is varied (Fig. 1
Controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in 93(A) to 193(D), yellow lighting (gold lighting) is performed), and FIGS. 193(E) to 193(H). and a second effect that can prevent the execution of the first effect and maintain the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold color lighting)) of the first start port 20 (receiving port). According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and changed to a yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first Even if the game ball enters (accepted) the starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so this is maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the lighting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute to the lighting effect as an additional light emitting effect, and the interest can be improved.
Figure 194 (A) to Figure 194 (J) in the starting port light emitting effect D, has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) capable of receiving a game ball, the game ball in the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is entered (accepted), the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is varied (Fig. 1
194(A) to 194(D), the molding of the decorative member (smiling face) placed inside the first starting opening 20 becomes difficult to see, and the decorative member is shaped (smiling face) from the state in which the smiling face is not displayed. (modeling) is in a state of appearing to emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C);
In FIGS. 194(E) to 194(H), execution of the first effect is blocked and the first starting port 20 (
reception port) (light emission state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member placed inside the first start port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the reservation icon 9C) can be maintained. A second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the pending icon 9C when the smiling model of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is not displayed. When it is in a state of changing to a light emission mode in which it appears as a state, even if the game ball enters the first start port 20 (accepted) and the number of reserved balls increases, the first start port 20 Since the lighting mode is maintained in a lighting mode in which the smiling face model placed inside the first starting port 20 appears to emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C,
A state in which the smiling model placed inside the first starting port 20, which is the maintained light emission mode of the first starting port 20, appears to emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C is added to the effect. It is possible to contribute as a typical light emitting performance, and to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the second effect allows execution of the first effect until the number of pending icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four). Quantity (4 pieces)
After reaching , the execution of the first performance is blocked. Specifically, FIGS. 191(A) to 191 (
D), until the number of pending icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four), the first start port 20
It is possible to allow a change in the light emission mode of the (receiving port) (a change in the light emission mode in which the white lighting is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then is controlled to be lit in white again, and then blinks in white only once). On the other hand, in FIGS. 191(E) to 191(H), after the number of reserved icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four), the first starting port 20 (receiving port) maintains the lighting mode (white lighting). can do. According to this configuration, in addition to the state that the number of reserved icons 9A has reached the predetermined number (four), in addition to the reserved icons 9A that have reached the predetermined number,
The player can be notified by using the light emitting mode of the first start port 20. - 特許庁

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 192 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the second effect is a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) set with a higher expectation of winning than the white spherical hold icon 9A. becomes the pending icon 9C, allowing the execution of the first effect, and after the first effect changes the light emission mode of the first start port 20 (reception port) to a specific light emission mode (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the execution of the first effect is blocked, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is maintained in yellow lighting ((gold color lighting) (specific light emission mode)). . Specifically, in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, which is set to have a higher expectation than the white spherical hold icon 9A, is the hold icon 9A. After changing the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first effect is executed in FIGS. 192(E) to 192(H). is blocked to maintain the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port). According to this configuration, the first start port 20 (
It can be suggested to the player by the lighting mode of the reception port).
In the start-up lighting effect D of FIG. 194, the second effect is that the holding icon 9A (specific holding icon) in the form of a smile sphere, which is set to have a higher degree of expectation to win than the holding icon 9A in the shape of a white ball, is the holding icon 9A. After becoming the icon 9C and allowing the execution of the first effect, the first effect changes the light emission mode of the first start port 20 (acceptance port) to a specific light emission mode (arranged inside the first start port 20) The state in which the molding of the decorative member (smiling model) becomes invisible and the smiling model is not displayed is changed to the state in which the model of the decorative member (smiling model) emits light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C. After that, the execution of the first effect is blocked, and the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed, and the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) arranged inside the first starting port 20 is suspended. The luminous state (specific luminous mode) of appearing to emit light in the same color as the color of the icon 9C is maintained. Specifically, in FIGS. 194(A) to 194(D), the holding icon 9A in the form of a smile sphere, which is set to have a higher degree of expectation than the white spherical holding icon 9A, is the holding icon 9C.
Then, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed from a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first start port 20 becomes difficult to see and the smile shape is not displayed. 194(E) to 194(H), the execution of the first effect is blocked in FIGS. 194(E) to 194(H). 1st starting port 2
0 (acceptance port) light emission mode (light emission state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member placed inside the first start port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C) is maintained. do. According to this configuration, the state in which the degree of expectation for winning is high is suggested to the player by the lighting mode in which the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) emits light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 193 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the second effect is the first effect when the white spherical pending icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9C (specific relevant pending icon). After allowing the execution of the first effect to change the light emission mode of the first start port 20 (reception port) to a specific light emission mode (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)), the first The execution of the effect of 1 is blocked, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is lit in yellow ((gold color lighting)
(Specific light emission mode)). Specifically, in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(D), pattern variations (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C,
The right decorative pattern 8R) is started, and when the white spherical pending icon 9C changes to the star-shaped pending icon 9C, which is set to have a higher expectation than the white spherical pending icon 9A, the first start is performed. After changing the lighting mode of the mouth 20 (receiving port) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), execution of the first effect is blocked in FIGS. The light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the port 20 (receiving port) is maintained. According to this configuration, the first starting port 20 (receiving port)
can be suggested to the player by the light emission mode of

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 191 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (J), the first effect further includes the output of a holding sound (acceptable sound) based on the game ball entering (accepting) the first starting port 20 (receiving port). you can run
The second effect further permits the output of the holding sound (allowable sound) when permitting the first effect, and blocks the output of the holding sound (allowable sound) when blocking the first effect. . Specifically, in FIGS. 191(C) to 191(D), in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20, a sound effect of "Shup" is produced. A certain holding tone is played from the speaker 67 (holding tone is turned ON). On the other hand, in FIGS. 191(E) to 191(H), even if a game ball enters the first start port 20, there is no reserved display position for displaying the reserved icon, and the number of reserved balls does not increase. It is no longer necessary to notify that the number of held balls has increased,
A hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, based on the fact that the game ball entered (accepted) in the first starting port 20 (receiving port), the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state of blinking white. By using both the appealing effect and the auditory effect that the holding sound, which is the effect sound of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67, the player can be informed of the increase in the number of held balls.
Figure 192 (A) ~ Figure 192 (J) in the starting entrance lighting effect B, Figure 192 (A) ~ Figure 192
In (B), for example, when the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the end of such change, " A hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 192(C) to 192(H), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon with the highest probability of winning is displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, the first starting port 20 No control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the game ball, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). According to this configuration, yellow (gold) with the highest probability of winning
When the star-shaped hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, no control is performed to notify that the number of hold balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20, and the second 1 By keeping the light emission mode of the starting port 20 in a state of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), it is possible to contribute as an additional light emission performance to the performance, and a holding sound that is a sound effect of "Shoot". is not played from the speaker 67, it is possible not to interfere with sound effects and music played in connection with the production.
Figure 193 (A) ~ Figure 193 (J) in the starting entrance lighting effect C, Figure 193 (A) ~ Figure 193
In (D), for example, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the game ball enters the first start port 20 at the time of the fluctuation start, the white spherical suspension icon 9C displayed at the suspension display position 9Cd is yellow. When the game ball enters the first start port 20 before changing to the (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C, the hold sound speaker 6, which is a sound effect of "spoof"
7 (on-hold tone is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 193(C) to 193(H), when the white spherical hold icon 9C is changed into a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest probability of winning, the first start port 20 No control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the game ball, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the white spherical hold icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of winning, the game ball enters the first start port 20. As an additional light emission performance to the performance by maintaining the light emission mode of the first start port 20 in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) without performing any control for notifying that the number of held balls has increased. In addition, by not playing the hold sound, which is the effect sound of "shup", from the speaker 67, it is possible not to interfere with the effect sound and music that flow in relation to the presentation.
Figure 194 (A) ~ Figure 194 (J) in the starting entrance lighting effect D, Figure 194 (A) ~ Figure 194
In (B), when the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 at the end of such change, the hold ball In order to notify the increase, the speaker 67 emits a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot".
(holding tone is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 194(C) to 194(H),
When the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first start opening 20 is easily visible and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C, the first No control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Shoot", does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding sound is turned off).
becomes FF). According to this configuration, the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is shaped (
When the smiling model) becomes easily visible and the smiling model is displayed in the same color as the reservation icon 9C, the game balls enter the first start hole 20, and the number of reserved balls increases. Without performing any control to notify that it has been done (the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) placed inside the first start opening 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile molding is the same color as the reservation icon 9C By maintaining the state of display in color, it is possible to contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect, and by not playing the holding sound, which is the effect sound of "spoof", from the speaker 67, it is related to the effect. It can be set so that it does not interfere with the flowing sound effects or music.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the starting door light emission effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
Figure 192 (C) ~ Figure 192 (H) starting entrance lighting effect B, Figure 193 (C) ~ Figure 193 (H)
) and the starting light emitting effect D of FIGS. 194(C) to 194(H),
Even when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the holding sound, which is the sound effect "Shoot", is not played from the speaker 67. - 特許庁However, the holding tone, which is a sound effect of "shup", is
You may make it flow from 7. In this case, the volume of the hold sound is adjusted to a level that does not interfere with the sound effects and music that flow in relation to the performance, for example, to a volume that is 50% to 90% of the volume of the sound effects and music that flow in relation to the performance. preferably.

[Modification 2]
192(A) ~ FIG. 192(H) In the starting port lighting effect B, the color of the pending icon 9A that can be displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad through the fourth pending display position 9Ad in FIG. 192(A) is
When the pending icon 9A shifts each time the pending icon 9A is consumed, the pending icon 9A does not change in color, but changes to a color that increases the probability of winning (for example, changes from white to blue, changes from white to green). You may make it In this case, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the pending display position 9Cd and becomes the pending icon 9C,
Along with this, the color of the first starting port 20 becomes the same color as the color attached to the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 3]
193(A) to 193(H) in the starting entrance lighting effect C, FIGS.
In (D), when the white spherical hold icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest probability of winning, the light emission mode of the first start port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold). color lighting), but furthermore, from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to seven colors (
You may make it change to Rainbow (rich jackpot)). In this case, the first starting port 20
, changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)), and the color of the first starting port 20 becomes the same as the color attached to the reservation icon 9C.

[Modification 4]
191, the starting entrance light-emitting effect B of FIG. 192, the starting entrance light-emitting effect C of FIG. 193, and the starting entrance light-emitting effect D of FIG. Although the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is variable, it can also be applied to the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 . In this case, a decoration board on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted is arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, respectively. Light emission is controlled by The first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 emit light when the full-color LEDs mounted on these decorative substrates emit light. In the case where the first start port 20 is of the normal specification, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is controlled to light up in white, thereby turning the first gate (through chucker). 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are lit in white, and the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are controlled to be lit in white even in the big win performance and the demo performance for waiting for customers. Thus, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29
The light emission mode of is in a white lighting state.

On the other hand, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are of special plating specifications, the first gate (through chucker) 28
The decoration member is arranged in front of the decoration substrate inside the front surface of the second gate (through chucker) 29, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decoration substrate emits light, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate Through the front surface of (through chucker) 29, the molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be visually recognized. When the mounted full-color LED is turned off, the inside of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be seen through the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. The molding (smile molding) of the decorative members placed in the 1 is made difficult to see, and the special plating color (for example, silver) is visible through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. It is said that Further, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are of special plating specification, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is extinguished. Furthermore, in the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers, the full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board are controlled to be turned off, and the first gate (through chucker) 28
and molding of decorative members arranged inside the second gate (through chucker) 29 (smile molding)
is difficult to see. In addition, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are of a special plating specification, in the jackpot effect, the first gate is in a state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. (through chucker) 2
8 and the front surface of the second gate (through chucker) 29, the molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 can be visually recognized. You may do so.

[Modification 5]
192(E) to 192(D), in the starting entrance lighting effect B, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd. When the holding icon 9C is displayed, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 has changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9A was set with a higher expectation of winning than the white spherical pending icon 9A. When the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), it is controlled to turn off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from yellow lighting (gold color lighting), and yellow lighting again ( The control to return to gold color lighting) may be repeated five times to cause yellow blinking (gold color blinking). The reason for this (the reason for changing the light emission mode to repeatedly flash yellow (flash gold) only five times) is that when a game ball enters the first start port 20 (acceptance port), the first start port 20 ( This is to make the light emission mode of the reception port) different from the change in the light emission mode, for example, from white lighting, controlled to be off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), controlled to white lighting again, and white blinking only once. In other words, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is high due to the change in the light emission mode that the yellow flashing (gold flashing) is repeated only five times, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped flashing Informing the player that the hold icon 9A has moved to the hold display position 9Cd by the light emission mode of the first start port 20 (that is, by changing the light emission mode by repeatedly blinking yellow (gold color blinking) five times). can be done.

[Modification 6]
191, the starting entrance light-emitting effect B of FIG. 192, the starting entrance light-emitting effect C of FIG. 193, and the starting entrance light-emitting effect D of FIG. Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is variable, it can also be applied to the second starting port 21 . In this case, a full-color LED (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light is provided inside the second starting port 21 .
A decorative board on which a single or a plurality of are mounted is arranged and light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107 . The second starting port 21 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. In the case where the first starting port 20 is of the normal specification, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is controlled to light up in white, thereby causing the second starting port 21 to emit light. In addition, the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is controlled to light up in white during the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers, so that the light emission mode of the second starting port 21 is white. Lights up.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 21 is a special plating specification, a decorative member is further arranged in front of the decorative substrate on the inner front surface of the second starting port 21, and the full-color LED is mounted on the decorative substrate. When is illuminated, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member placed inside the second starting port 21 is visible through the front surface of the second starting port 21, while the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate When the light is turned off, it is difficult to see through the front surface of the second starting port 21 the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the second starting port 21. (for example, silver) is visible. Further, when the second starting port 21 is of a special plating specification, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is controlled to be turned off, and furthermore, the jackpot effect and the customer Even in the waiting demonstration performance, the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are controlled to be turned off, and the molding of the decorative member (smile molding) arranged inside the second starting port 21 is made difficult to see. In addition, when the second start port 21 is a special plating specification, in the big win effect, the second
The molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the starting port 21 may be made visible.

[Modification 7]
194, the front inner side of the first starting port 20 is plated with a special plating, the decorative member is arranged in front of the first starting port decorative substrate, and the first starting port decorative substrate In the state where the full-color LED mounted in the illuminates, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized through the front surface of the first starting port 20, while the first starting When the full-color LEDs mounted on the mouth decoration substrate are turned off, it is difficult to visually recognize the molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the first opening 20 through the front surface of the first opening 20. A special plating color (for example, silver) was visible through the front surface of the 1 starting port 20 . However, a decorative portion may be provided around the first starting port 20 (for example, the upper side, the right side, the lower side, the left side, etc. of the first starting port 20). The first starting port 20 and the decorative portion may be unitized, or if they are independent parts, the decorative portion is preferably arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting port 20 . Inside the decorative part, there are a decorative board on which full-color LEDs are mounted, and a decorative member (
Hereinafter, this may be referred to as "decorative member modeling (character modeling)". ) and are housed. The back of the decoration, that is, the surface facing the decoration, is plated with a special plating, and the full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board emit light, allowing light to pass through the front of the decoration. . The decorative portion may be molded from a colorless and transparent resin and shaped, or may be shaped as a smooth surface (a flat surface or a curved surface). When the full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board emit light, the modeling (character modeling) of the decorative members arranged inside the decorative portion can be visually recognized through the front surface of the decorative portion arranged around the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decoration board is turned off, the first start port 2
Forming of decorative members arranged inside the decorative part through the front of the decorative part arranged around 0 (
Character modeling) is made difficult to see, and the special plating color (for example, silver) is made visible through the front surface of the decorative portion.

[Modification 8]
191, the starting opening lighting effect B of FIG. 192, the starting opening lighting effect C of FIG. 193, and the starting opening lighting effect D of FIG. 194 may not include some of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect K1-1]
A gaming machine having a receiving port capable of receiving game balls,
A first effect that changes the light emission mode of the reception port based on the reception of the game ball in the reception port;
and a second effect of allowing the light emission mode of the reception port to be varied by the execution of the first effect, and then preventing the execution of the first effect to maintain the light emission state of the reception port. is
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second effect allows execution of the first effect until the number of suspended icons reaches a predetermined number, and the first effect is performed after the number of suspended icons reaches the predetermined number. prevent the execution of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the second effect, a specific reserved icon set to have a higher degree of expectation to win than the reserved icon becomes the reserved icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed, and the first effect is received. After changing the lighting mode of the entrance to the specific lighting mode, the execution of the first effect is blocked to maintain the lighting mode of the reception port in the specific lighting mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second effect permits the execution of the first effect when the pattern variation by the reserved icon is started and the reserved icon changes to the specific reserved icon, and the first effect is set to the reception port. After changing the light emission mode to a specific light emission mode, the execution of the first effect is blocked to maintain the light emission mode of the reception port in the specific light emission mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first effect is further capable of outputting a permissible sound based on the receipt of the game ball in the receiving opening,
The second effect permits the output of the allowable sound when permitting the first effect, and blocks the output of the allowable sound when blocking the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the game machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Moreover, although the above embodiment has been described by taking the pachinko machine as an example,
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls.
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a part of the display effects performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (relevant pending icon)
14... First movable accessory 15... Second movable accessory 20... First starting port (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
66... Frame lamp 81... Microcomputer for game control 91... Microcomputer for effect control 101... Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
a first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations;
a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific variation after the plurality of variations starts, and
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of pending prizes won before the predetermined image is displayed,
The specific variation is a variation corresponding to a hold that has won a prize during the plurality of variations, and may or may not win after the variation,
The multiple fluctuations are executed after the winning game,
The predetermined image is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the winning game regardless of whether the lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation is a win or a loss, and the lottery for the specific fluctuation is displayed. does not indicate whether the result is a hit or a miss,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images